l

ya
ar
m
ra

The Author
Jagadguru Sankaracarya
Sri Bharat! Krsna Tlrtha Maharaj
(1884— 1960)
 VEDIC MATHEMATICS
OR

Sixteen simple Mathematical

Formulae from the Vedas
(For One-line Answers to all Mathematical Problems)

By
JAGADGURU

l
s w Am I Sr i b h a r a t i k r s i ^a t Ir t h a j i m a h a r a j a ,
6a n k a r a c a r y a
ya
OFQOVARDHANA MATHA, PURI
ar
General Editor
D r . V. S. AGRAWALA
m
ra

M O T IL A L BAN AR SID ASS

Delhi :: Varanasi :: Patna
 l
ya
ar
m
ra

The Author
Jagadguru Sarikaracarya
Sri Bharati Krsna Tlrtha Maharaja
(1884— 1960)
 VEDIC MATHEMATICS
OR

Sixteen simple Mathematical

Formulae from the Vedas
(For One-line Answers to all Mathematical Problems)

By
JAGADGURU

l
SWAMI SRI BHARATl k r s n a t Ir t h a j i m a h A r Aj a ,
Sa n k a r a c a r y a
ya OFOOVARDHANA MATHA, PURI
ar
General Editor
D r . V. S. AGRAWALA
m
ra

MO T I L AL B ANAR SID ASS

Delhi :: Varanasi :: Patna
 l
ya
ar
m
ra

©MOTILAL BANARSIDASS
Indological Publishers & Booksellers
Head Office : 41-U.A., Bungalow Road, Delhi-110 007
Branches : 1. Chowk, Varanasi-1 (u .p .)
2. Ashok Rajpath, Patna-4 (b i h a r )

First Edition : Varanasi, 1965

Reprint : Delhi, 1970, 1971 1975, 1978,1981
Price • 55 (cloth>
* Rs. 40 (Paper)

Printed in India
By Shantilal Jain, at Shri Jainendra Press,
A-45, Phase I, Industrial Area, Naraina, New Delhi-110 028
Published by Narendra Prakash Jain, for Motilal Banarsidass,
Bungalow Road, Jawahar Nagar, Delhi-110 007.
 PUBLICATION ANNOUNCEMENT
I have great pleasure in associating myself with the publi­
cation of the book Vedic Mathematics or ‘Sixteen Simple Mathe­
matical Formulae/ by Jagadguru Swami Bharati Krishna
Tirtha, Shankaracharya of Govardhana Pitha. It was long
awaited by his disciples. Shrimati Manjula Devi, sole inheriter
of Swamiji’s right, entered into an agreement with the Banaras
Hindu University to publish it and the same is now being
done in the Nepal Endowment Hindu Vishvavidyalaya Sanskrit
Granthamala.
I feel grateful to all those who have worked for it. Shri
l
ya
Arvind N. Mafatlal business magnate of Bombay and a devotee
of Swamiji has taken interest in the publication of the work.
He lias taken the trouble of being personally present in this
ar

ceremony of publication (Prakashana Utsava). He has given

expression to his deep devotion to Shri Shankaracharyaji by
consenting to found a chair at the Banaras Hindu University
m

by the name of Shri Jagadguru Bharati Krishna Tirtha Shan­

karacharya Chair of Vedic Studies for which he is making a
ra

magnificent endowment. As Vice-Chancellor of this University

I accept the donation and offer my heart-felt thanks to him
for his generosity.
N. H. BHAGWATI
Date 27-3-65 Vice-Chancellor
Banaras Hindu University
ra
m
ar
ya
l
 GENERAL EDITOR’ S FOREWORD
The work entitled VEDIC MATHEMATICS or ‘ Sixteen
Simple Mathematical Formulae from the Vedas’ was written by
His Holiness Jagadguru Sankaracarya Sri Bharatl Krsna
TirthajI Maharaja of Govardhana Matha, Puri (1884-1960).
It forms a class by itself not pragmatically conceived and worked
out as in the case of other scientific works, but the result of the
intuitional visualisation of fundamental mathematical truths
and principles during the course of eight years of highly concen­
trated mental endeavour on the part of the author and therefore

l
appropriately given the title of “ mental” mathematics appearing
ya
more as miracle than the usual approach of hard-baked science,
as the author has himself stated in the Preface.
Swam! Sankaracarya was a gifted scholar on many fronts
ar

of learning including science and humanities but his whole

milieu was something of a much higher texture viz, that he was
a Rsi fulfilling the ideals and attainments of those Seers of
m

ancient India who discovered the cosmic laws embodied in

the Vedas. SwamI Bharatl Krsna Tirtha had the same reveren­
ra

tial approach towards the Vedas. The question naturally

arises as to whether the Sutras which form the basis of this
treatise exist anywhere in the Vedic literature as known to us.
But this criticism loses all its force if we inform ourselves of the
definition of Veda given by Sri Sankaracarya himself as quoted
below :
“ The very word ‘ Veda’ has this derivational meaning i.e. the fountain-
head and illimitable store-house of all knowledge. This derivation, in effect,
means, connotes and implies that the Vedas should contain (italics mine) within
themselves all the knowledge needed by mankind relating »o t only to the so-
called ‘ spiritual* (or other-worldly) matters but also to those usually described
as purely ‘ secular’, ‘ temporal’, or ‘ worldly’ and also to the means required by
humanity as such for the achievement of all-round, complete and perfect success
in all conceivable directions and that there can be no adjectival or restrictive
epithet calculated (or tending) to limit that knowledge down in any sphere,
any direction or any respect whatsoever.
 6

“ In other words, it connotes and implies that our ancient Indian Vedic
lore should be (italics mine) all-round, complete and perfect and able to throw
the fullest necessary light on all matters which any aspiring seeker after know­
ledge can possibly seek to be enlightened on” .

It is the whole essence of his assessment of Yedic tradition

that it is not to be approached from a factual standpoint but
from the ideal standpoint viz, as the Vedas as traditionally
accepted in India as the repository of all knowledge should be
and not what they are in human possession. That approach
entirely turns the tables on all critics, for the authorship of
Vedic mathematics then need not be laboriously searched in the
texts as preserved from antiquity. The Vedas are well known
as four in number Rk, Yaju, Sama and Atharva but they have

l
also the four Upavedas and the six Vedangas all pf which form
ya
an indivisible corpus of divine knowledge as it once was and as
it may be revealed. The four Upavedas are as follows :—
ar
Veda Upaveda
Egveda Ayurveda
Samaveda Gandharvaveda
m

Yaj urveda Dhahurveda

Atharva veda Sthapathyaveda
ra

In this list the Upaveda of Sthapatya or engineering com­

prises all kinds of architectural and structural human qndeavour
and all visual arts. Swamiji naturally regarded mathematics
or the science of calculations and computations to fall under
this category.
In the light of the above definition and approach must be
understood the author’s statement that the sixteen Sutras on
which the present volume is based form part of a Parisista of
the Atharva veda. We are aware that each Veda has its subsi­
diary apocryphal texts some of which remain in manuscripts and
others have been printed but that formulation has not closed.
For example, some Parisistas of the Atharva veda were edited
by G. M. Bolling and J. Von Negelein, Liepzing, 1909-10. But
this work of Sri Sankaracaryaji deserves to be regarded as a
new Parisista by itself and it is not surprising that the Sutras
mentioned herein do not appear in the hitherto known PariS-
istas.
A list of these main 16 Sutras and of their sub-sutras or
corollaries is prefixed in the beginning of the text and
the style of language also points to their discovery by Sri
Swamiji himself. At any rate, it is needless to dwell longer on
this point of origin since the vast merit of these rules should be
a matter of discovery for each intelligent reader. Whatever is
written here by the author stands on its own merits and is
presented as such to the mathematical world.
Swamiji was a marvellous person with surpassing qualities
and was a prolific writer and eloquent speaker. I had the

l
good fortune of listening to his discourses for weeks together on
ya
several occasions when he used to visit Lucknow and attracted
large audiences. He could at a stretch speak for several hours
in Sanskrit and English with the same facility and the intonation
ar
of his musical voice left a lasting impression on the minds of
his hearers. He was an ardent admirer o f Bhartrhari the great
scientific thinker of the Golden Age of Indian history in a
m

different field viz, that of philosophy of grammar.

Swamiji had planned to write 16 volumes on all aspects
ra

and branches o f mathematical processes and problems and there

is no doubt that his mental powers were certainly of that calibre,
but what has been left to us is this introductory volume which
in itself is of the highest merit for reason of presenting a new
technique which the author styles as “ mental” mathematics
different from the orthodox methods of mathematicians all over
the world. Arithmetical problems usually solved by 18, 28 or
42 steps in case of such vulgar fractions as 1/19, 1/29, 1/49 are
here solved in one simple line and that is possible to be done
even by young boys. The truth of these methods was demons­
trated by this saintly teacher before many University audiences
in India and in the U.S.A. including learned Professors and every
one present was struck with their originality and simplicity.
We are told in his Preface by SwamI Sankaracarya that
he contemplated to cover all the different branches of mathe­
 8

matics such as arithmetic, algebra, geometry (plane and solid)

trigonometry (plane and spherical) conics—geometrical and
analytical, astronomy, calculus—differential and integral etc.,
with these basic Sutras. That comprehensive application of
the Sutras could not be left by him in writing but if some one has
the patience and the genius to pursue the method and impli­
cations of these formulae he may probably be able to bring
these various branches within the orbit of this original style.
A full fledged course of his lecture-demonstrations was
organised by the Nagpur University in 1952 and some lectures
were delivered by Swamiji at the B.H.U. in 1949. It is, there­
fore, in the fitness of things and a happy event for the B.H.U.

l
to be given the opportunity of publishing this book by the
ya
courtesy of Srimati Manjula Devi Trivedi, disciple of Sri Swamiji
who agreed to make over this manuscript to us through the
efforts of Dr. Pt. Omkarhath Thakur. The work has been
ar
seen through the Press mainly by Dr. Prem Lata Sharma, Dean,
Faculty of Music & Fine Arts in the University. To all of
these our grateful thanks are due. Dr. Brij Mohan, Head of the
m

Department of Mathematics, B.H.U., took the trouble, at my

request, of going through the manuscript and verifying the
calculations for which I offer him my best thanks. I also
ra

express gratitude to Sri Lakshmidas, Manager, B.H.U. Press,

for taking great pains in printing this difficult text.
We wish to express our deepest gratitude to Sri Swam!
Pratyagatmananda Saraswatl for the valuable foreword that
he has written for this work. Today he stands pre-eminent in
the world of Tantric scholars and is a profound mathematician
and scientific thinker himself. His inspiring words are like
fragrant flowers offered at the feet of the ancient Vedic R6is
whose spiritual lineage was revealed in the late Sankaracarya
Sri Bharatl Krsna Tlrtha. SwamI PratyagatmanandajI has
not only paid a tribute to Sri SankaracaryajI but his ambrocial
words have showered blessings on all those who are lovers
of intuitional experiences in the domain of metaphysics and
physics. Swamiji, by a fortunate chance, travelled from Calcutta
 9

to Varanasi to preside over the Tantric Sammelan of the Varana-

seya Sanskrit University (8th to 11th March 1965) and although
he is now 85 years of age, his innate generosity made him accept
our request to give iiis foreword.
I am particularly happy that I am able to publish this
work under the Nepal Endowment Hindu Vishvavidyalaya
Publication Series, for I entertained an ardent desire to do so
since our late President Dr. Rajendra Prasadji spoke to me about
its existence when I once met him in New Delhi in the lifetime
of Sri Swamiji.
V. S. AGRAWALA,
M.A., Ph.D., D.Litt.

l
ya
Banaras Hindu University General Editor,
Varanasi-5 Hindu Vishwavidyalaya
March 17, 1965. Nepal Rajya Sanskrit
ar
Granthamala Series.
m
ra
ra
m
ar
ya
l
 FOREWORD
Vedic Mathematics by the late Sankaracarya (Bharati
Krsna Tirtha) of Govardhana Pltha is a monumental work.
In his deep-layer explorations of cryptic Vedic mysteries relat­
ing specially to their calculus of shorthand formulae and their
neat and ready application to practical problems, the late
Sankaracarya shews the rare combination of the probing insight
and revealing intuition of a Yogi with the analytic acumen and
synthetic talent of a mathematician. With the late Sankara-
carya we belong to a race, now fast becoming extinct, of die­
hard believers who think that the Vedas represent an inexhaus­
tible mine of profoundest, wisdom in matters both spiritual
and temporal; and that this store of wisdom was not, as regards
al
its assets of fundamenial validity and value at W st, gathered
by the laborious inductive and deductive methods of ordinary
y
systematic enquiry, but was a direct gift of revelation to seers
ar

and sages who in their higher Teaches of Yogic realization were

competent to receive it from a Source, perfect and immaculate.
But we admit, and the late Sankaracarya has also practically
m

admitted, that one cannot expect to convert or revert criticism,

much less carry conviction, by merely asserting one’s staunchest
ra

beliefs. To meet these ends, one must be prepared to go the

whole length of testing and verification by accepted, accredited
methods. The late Sankaracarya has, by his comparative
and critical study of Vedic mathematics, made this essential
requirement in Vedic studies abundantly clear. So let us agree
to gauge Vedic mysteries not as we gauge the far-off nabulae
with the poet’s eye or with that of the seer, but with the alert,
expert, scrutinizing eye of the physical astronomer, if we may
put it as that.
That there is a consolidated metaphysical background in the
Vedas of the objective sciences including mathematics as regards
their basic conceptions is a point that may be granted by a
thinker who has looked broadly and deeply into both the realms.
In our paper recently published—‘The Metaphysics of
Physics’—we attempted to look into the mysteries of creative
emergence as contained in the well-known cosmogenic Hymn
 12

(Rg. X.190) with a view to unveiling the metaphysical background

where both ancient wisdom and modern physics may meet on
a common basis of logical understanding, and compare notes,
discovering, where possible, points of significant or suggestive
parallelism between the two sets of concepts, ancient and modern.
That metaphysical background includes mathematics also;
because physics as ever pursued is the application of mathema­
tics to given or specified space-time-event situations. There we
examined Tapas as a fundamental creative formula whereby
the Absolute emerges into the realms of measures, variations,
limits, frame-works and relations. And this descent follows
a logical order which seems to lend itself, within a framework

l
of conditions and specifications, to mathematical analysis.
ya
Rdtri in the Hymn represents the Principle of Limits, for exa­
mple, Btanca Satyanca stand for Becoming (Calana-kalana) and
Being (vartana-halana) at a stage where limits or conditions
ar
or conventions do not yet arise or apply. The former gives the
unconditioned, unrestricted how or thus of cosmic process.;
the latter, what or that of existence. Tapas, which corresponds to
m

Ardhamatra in Tantrie symbolism, negotiates, in its role specially

of critical variation, between what is, ab-initio, unconditioned
ra

and unrestricted, and what appears otherwise, as for instance,

in our own universe of logico-mathematical appreciation.
This is, necessarily, abstruse metaphysics, but it is,
nevertheless, the starting background of both physics and
mathematics. But for all practical purposes we must come down
from mystic nabulae to the terra firma of our actual apprehension
and appreciation. That is to say, we must descend to our own
pragmatic levels of time-space-event situations. Here we
face actual problems, and one must meet and deal with these
squarely without evasion or mystification. The late Sankara-
carya has done this masterly feat with an adroitness that
compels admiration.
It follows from the fundamental premises that the universe
we live in must have a basic mathematical structure, and
consequently, to know a fact or obtain a result herein, to any
required degree of precision, one must obey the rule of mathe­
 13

matical measures and relations. This, however, one may do

consciously or semi-consciously, systematically or haphazardly.
Even some species of lower animals are by instinct gifted mathe­
maticians ; for example, the migratory bird which flies thousands
of miles off from its nest-home, and after a period, unerringly
returns. This implies a subconscious mathematical talent that
works wonder. We may cite the case of a horse who was a
mathematical prodigy and could ‘tell5 the result of a cube root
(requiring 32 operations, according to M. Materlink in his
‘Unknown Quest5) in a twinkle of the eye. This sounds like magic,
but it is undeniable that the feat of mathematics does sometimes
assume a magical look. Man, undoubtedly, has been given his
share of this magical gift. And he can improve upon it by

l
practice and discipline, by Yoga and allied methods. This is
ya
undeniable also. Lately, he has devised the ‘automatic brain’
for complicated calculations by science, that looks like magic.
But apart from this ‘magic’ , there is and has been, the
ar

‘ logic’ of mathematics also. Man works from instinct, talent,

or even genius. But ordinarily he works as a logical entity
requiring specified data or premises to start from, and more
m

or less elaborate steps of reasoning to arrive at a conclusion.

This is his normal process of induction and deduction. Here
ra

formulae (Sutras) and relations (e.g. equations) must obtain as

in mathematics. The magic and logic of mathematics in some
cases get mixed up ; but it is sane to keep them apart. You can
get a result by magic, but when you are called upon to prove,
you must have recourse to logic.
Even in this latter case, your logic (your formulae and
applications) may be either simple and elegant or complicated
and cumbrous. The former is the ideal to aim at. We have
classical instances of master mathematicians whose methods of
analysis and solution have been regarded as marvels of cogency,
compactness and elegance. Some have been ‘beautiful’ as a
poem (e.g. Lagrange’s ‘Analytical Mechanics.’)
The late Sankaracarya has claimed, and rightly we may
think, that the Vedic Sutras and their applications possess these
 14

virtues to a degree of eminence that cannot be challenged.

The outstanding merit of his work lies in his actual proving of
this contention.
Whether or not the Vedas be believed as repositories of
perfect wisdom, it is unquestionable that the Vedic race lived
not as merely pastoral folk possessing a half-or-quarter-developed
culture and civilization. The Vedic seers were, again, not mere
‘navel-gazers’ or ‘nose-tip-gazers\ They proved themselves
adepts in all levels and branches of knowledge* theoretical and
practical. For example, they had their varied objective science,
both pure and applied.
Let us take a concrete illustration. Suppose in a time of
drought we require rains by artificial means. The modern

l
ya
scientist has his own theory and art (technique) for producing
the result. The old seer scientist had his both also, but
different from these now availing. He had his science and
ar
technique, called Yajria, in which Mantra, Yantra and other
factors must co-operate with mathematical determinateness and
precision. For this purpose, he had developed the six auxiliaries
of the Vedas in each of which mathematical skill, and adroitness,
m

occult or otherwise, play the decisive role. The Sutras lay

down the shortest and surest lines. The correct intonation of
ra

the Mantra, the correct configuration of the Yantra (in the

making of the Vedi etc., e.g. the quadrature of a circle), the
correct time or astral conjugation factor, the correct rhythms
etc., all had to be perfected so as to produce the desired result
effectively and adequately. Each of these required the calculus
of mathematics. The modern technician has his logarithmic
tables and mechanics’ manuals; the old Yajnika had his Sutras.
How were the Sutras obtained ?—by magic or logic or both ?—is
a vital matter we do not discuss here. The late Sankaracarya
has claimed for them cogency, compactness and simplicity.
This is an even more vital point, and we think, he has reasonably
made it good.
Varanasi, SWAMl PRATYAGATMANANDA
22-3-1965 SARASWATl
 A HUMBLE HOMAGE
The late Sankaracarya’s epoch-making work on Vedie-
Mathematics brings to the notice of the intelligentsia most
strikingly a new theory and method, now almost unknown,
of arriving at the truth of things which in this particular case
concerns the truth of numbers and magnitude, but might as well
cover, as it undoubtedly did in a past age in India, all sciences
and arts, with results which do not fail to evoke a sense of awe
and amazement today. The method obviously is radically
differnt from the one adopted by the modern mind.
Music and not Mathematics is my field (although the

l
ya
philosophy of nujnbers, cosmic and metaphysical corres­
pondences with musical numbers, the relation of numbers
with consonant, dissonant and assonant tonal intervals etc.,
ar
closely inter-relate music and mathematics), but study of the
traditional literature on music and fine arts with which I have
been concerned for the last few years has convinced me of one
m

fundamental fact regarding the ancient Indian theory and

method of knowledge and experience vis a vis the modern.
While all great and true knowledge is born of intuition and
ra

not of any rational process or imagination., there is a radical

difference between the ancient Indian method and the modern
Western method concerning intuition.
The divergence embraces everything other than the fact
of intuition itself—the object and field of intuitive vision, the
method of working out experience and rendering it to the
intellect. The modern method is to get the intuition by sugges­
tion from an appearance in life or nature or from a mental idea
and even if the source of the intuition is the soul, the method
at once relates it to a support external to the soul. The ancient
Indian method of knowledge had for its business to disclose
something of the Self, the Infinite or the Divine to the regard
of the soul—the Self through its expressions, the infinite through
its finite symbols and the Divine through his powers. The
 16

process was one of Integral knowledge and in its subordinate

ranges was instrumental in revealing the truths of cosmic
phenomena and these truths were utilised for worldly ends.
These two methods are based on different theories of
knowledge and experience, fundamentally divergent in outlook
and approach. The world as yet knows very little of the
ancient Jndian method, much less of its secret techniques.
Sri Sankaracarya’s remarkably unique work , of Vedic mathe­
matics has brought to popular notice demonstrably for the
first time that the said method was usefully employed in ancient
India in solving problems of secular knowledge just as for solving
those of the spiritual domain.
I am happy that in the printing and publication of this
al
monumental work and the preceding spade-work I had the
privilege to render some little service.
y
PREM LATA SHARMA
ar
Varanasi-5. Dean, Faculty of Music & Fine Arts,
23-3-65. Banaras Hindu University.
m
ra
CONVENTIONAL TO UNCONVENTIONALLY ORIGINAL

This book Vedic Mathematics deals mainly with various

vedic mathematical formulae and their applications for carrying
out tedious and cumbersome arithmetical operations, and to a
very large extent, executing them mentally. In this field of mental
arithmetical operations the works of the famous mathemati­
cians Trachtenberg and Lester Meyers (High Speed Maths) are
elementary compared to that of Jagadguruji.
Some people may find it difficult, at first reading, to understand
the arithmetical operations although they have been explained
very lucidly by Jagadguruji. It is not because the explanations
are lacking in any manner but because the methods are totally

l
unconventional. Some people are so deeply rooted in the con­
ya
ventional methods that they, probably, subconsciously reject to
see the logic in unconventional methods.
An attempt has been made in this note to explain the un­
ar

conventional aspects of the methods. Once the reader gets

used to the unconventional in the beginning itself, he would
find no difficulty in the later chapters. Therefore the explanatory
m

notes are given for the first few chapters only.

Chapter I
ra

Chapter I deals with a topic that has been dealt with compre­
hensively in the chapter 26 viz. ‘Recurring1Decimal’. Gurudeva has
discussed the recurring decimals of 1/19, 1/29, etc. in chapter
I to arouse curiosity and create interest. In conversion of
vulgar fractions into their decimal equivalents Gurudeva has
used very unconventional methods of multiplication and division.
In calculation of decimal equivalent of 1/19, first method of the
‘Ekadhika Sutra’ requires multiplication of 1 by 2 by a special and
unconventional process. In conventional method product of 1, the
multiplicand, by 2 the multiplier, is 2 and that is the end of multi­
plication process. It is not so in the unconventional ‘Ekadhika’
method. In this method, in the above example, 1 is the first multi­
plicand and its product with multiplier ‘2’ is 2 which in this special
process becomes the second multiplicand. This when multiplied
by the multiplier (which remains the same) 2 gives the product
as 4 which becomes the third multiplicand. And the process of
 16 b

multiplication thus goes on till the digits start recurring.

Similarly in the second method of the ‘Ekadhika Sutra’ for
calculating the decimal equivalent of 1/19,'"it is required to
divide 1 by 2 by an unconventional and special process. In the
conventional method when 1, the dividend, is to be divided by
the divisor ‘2\ the quotient is 0.5 and the process of division
ends. In the special method of ‘Ekadhika Sutra’ for calculating
decimal equivalents, the process starts by putting zero as the
first digit of the quotient, 1 as the first remainder. A decimal
point is put after the first quotient digit which is zero. Now,
the first remainder digit ‘ 1’ is prefixed to the first quotient digit
‘0’ to form ‘ 10’ as the second dividend. Division of 10 by the
divisor 2 (which does not change) gives 5 as the second quotient
digit which is put after the decimal point. The second remainder

l
digit ‘O’ is prefixed to the second quotient digit 5 to form 5 as
ya
the third dividend digit. Division of 5 by 2 gives 2 as the third
quotient digit and 1 as the third remainder digit which when
prefixed to the third quotient digit ‘2’ gives 12 as the fourth
ar
dividend and so the process goes on till the digits start recurring.
Chapter III
Vinculum is an ingenious device to reduce single digits larger
than 5, thereby facilitating multiplication specially for the mental-
m

one-line method. Vinculum method is based on the fact that

18 is same as (20-2) and 76 as (100-24) or 576 as (600-24). Guru-
deva has made this arithmetical fact a powerful device by writing
ra

18 as 22, 76 as 1 2 4 arid 576 as 6 *2 4. This device is specially

useful in vedic division method.
A small note on ‘aliquot’ may facilitate the study for some.
Aliquot part is the part contained by the whole an integral
number of times, e.g. 12 is contained by the whole number 110,
9 times, or in simple words it is the quotient of that fraction.
Chapter IV
In the division by the Nikhilam'method the dividend is divided
into two portions by a vertical line. This vertical line should
have as many digits to its right as there can be in the highest possi­
ble remainder. In general the number of such digits are the same
as in the figure which is one less than the divisor. Needless to
state that the vertical and horizontal lines must be drawn neatly
when using this method.
W in g . C o m . V ishva M ohan T iw a r i
 CONTENTS
Page
I INTRODUCTORY No.
My Beloved Gurudeva— ( Srimati Manjula Trivedi) ... i
. Author’s Preface xiii
A .—A Descriptive Prefatory Note xiii
B.—Explanatory Exposition ... XX
C.—Illustrative Specimen Samples ... xxii
II TEXT
Sixteen Sutras and their Corollaries 1
Prolegomena ...

l ... ... 16
ya
Ch a p t e r
I. Actual Applications of the Yedic Sutras 1/
ar
II. Arithmetical Computations ... 13
III. Multiplication ... 40
Practical Application (compound multiplication) 49
Practice & Proportion ( „ ) ... 51
m

IY. Division by the Nikhilam method 55

V. Division by the Paravartya method .., 64
ra

VI. Argumental Division 79

Linking note (Recapitulation & Conclusion)... 84
VII. Factorisation (of simple quadratics) 86
VIII. Factorisation (of harder quadratics) 90
IX . Factorisation of Cubics etc. ... 93
X. Highest Common Factor 98
XI. Simple Equations (First Principles) 103
X II. Simple Equations (by Sunyam etc.) 107
X III. Merger Type of Easy Simple Equations 126
Extension method ... ... 131
XIV. Complex Mergers 134
XV. Simultaneous Simple Equations 140
XVI. Miscellaneous (Simple) Equations 145
XVII. Quadratic Equations 157
X V III. Cubic Equations 168
 Paqe
Ch a p t e r s No.
X IX . Bi-quadratic Equations ... 171
XX. Multiple Simultaneous Equations ... 174
X X I. Simultaneous Quadratic Equations ... 178
X X II. Factorisation & Differential Calculus ... 182
X X III. Partial Fractions ... 186
X X IV . Integration by Partial Fractions ... 191
XXV. The Vedic Numerical Code ... 194
X X V I. Recurring Decimals ... 196
X X V II. Straight Division ... 240
X X V III. Auxiliary Fractions ... 255
X X IX . Divisibility & Simple Osculators ... 273

l
XXX. Divisibility & Complex Multiplex Osculators 285
X X X I.
X X X II.
ya
Sum & Difference of Squares ...
Elementary Squaring, Cubing etc.
... 296
... 300
X X X III. Straight Squaring ... 305
ar
X X X IV . Vargamula (square root) ... ... 308
XXXV. Cube Roots of Exact Cubes ... ... 316
X X X V I. Cube Roots (General) ... 327
Pythagoras’ Theorem etc., ... 349
m

X X X V II.
X X X V III. Apollonius’ Theorem ... 352
X X X IX . Analytical Conics ... 354
ra

XL. Miscellaneous Matters ... 361

Press Opinions ... 365
 MY BELOVED GURUDEVA

SMTI. MANJULA TRIVEDI

[In the lines that follow the writer gives a short biographical
sketch of the illustrious author of Vedic Mathematics and a short
account of the genesis of his work now published, based on inti-
mate personal knowledge—E d itor.]
Very few persons can there be amongst the cultured people
of India wTho have not heard about HIS HOLINESS JAGAD-
GURCJ SHANKARACHAJRYA SRI BHARATI KRISHNA
TIRTHAJI MAHARAJ, the magnificent and divine personality
that gracefully adorned the famous Govardhan Math, Puri,

l
his vast and versatile learning, his spiritual and educational
ya
attainments, his wonderful research achievements in the field
of Vedic Mathematics and his consecration of all these quali­
fications to the service of humanity as such.
ar

His Holiness, better known among his disciples by the

beloved name ‘Jagadguruji’ or ‘Gurudeva’ was born of highly
learned and pious parents in March, 1884. His father, late
m

13ri P. Narasimha Shastri, was then in service as a Tahsildar at

Tinnivelly (Madras Presidency) who later retired as a Deputy
ra

Collector. His uncle, late Shri Chandrashekhar Shastri, was

the Principal of the Maharaja’s College, Vizianagaram and his
great-grandfather was late Justice C. Ranganath Shastri of the
Madras High Court.
Jagadguruji, named as Venkatraman in his early days,
was an exceptionally brilliant student and invariably won
the first place in all the subjects in all the classes throughout his
educational career. During his school days, he wTas a student
of National College, Trichanapalli; Church Missionary Society
College^ Tinnevelli and Hindu College, Tinnevelli. He passed
his matriculation examination from the Madras University
in January, 1899, topping the list as usual.
He was extra-ordinarily proficient in Sanskrit and oratory
and on account of this he was awarded the title of ‘SARASWATF
 ( ii )
by the Madras Sanskrit Association in July, 1899 when he was
still in his 16th year. One cannot fail to mention at this stage
the profound impression left on him by his Sanskrit Guru
Shri Vedam Venkatrai Shastri whom Jagadguruji always
remembered with deepest love, reverence and gratitude, with
* tears in his eyes.
After winning the highest place in the B.A. Examination,
Shri Venkatraman Saraswati appeared at the M.A. Examination
of the American College of Sciences, Rochester, New York, from
Bombay Centre in 1903 ; and in 1904 at the age of just twenty
he passed M.A. Examination in further seven subjects simul­
taneously securing the highest honours in all, which is perhaps
the all-time world-record of academic brilliance. His subjects

and Science.
y al
included Sanskrit, Philosophy, English, Mathematics, History

As a student Venkatraman was marked for his splendid

ar
brilliance, superb retentive memory and ever-insatiable curiosity.
He would deluge his teachers with myriads of piercing questions
which made them uneasy and forced them frequently to make
a frank confession of ignorance on their part. In this respect,
m

he was considered to be a terribly mischievous student.

Even from his University days Shri Venkatraman Saras-
ra

wati had started contributing learned articles on religion,

philosophy, sociology, history, politics, literature etc., to
late W. T. Stead’s “ REVIEW OF REVIEWS” and he was
specially interested in all the branches of modern science. In
fact, study of the latest researches and discoveries in modern
science continued to be Shri Jagadguruji’s hobby till his vMty
last days.
Sri Venkatraman started his public life unde the guidance
of late Hon’ble Shri Gopal Krishna Gokhale, C.I.E. in 1905 in
connection with the National Education Movement and the
South African Indian issue. Although, however, on the one
hand, Prof. Venkatraman Saraswati had acquired an endless
fund of learning and his desire to learn ever more was still
unquenchable and on the other hand the urge for selfless service
of humanity swayed his heart mightily, yet the undoubtedly
deepest attraction that Venkatraman Saraswati felt was that
towards the study and practice of the science of sciences—the
holy ancient Indian spiritual science or Adhyatma-Vidya. In
1908, therefore, he proceeded to the Sringeri Math in Mysore
to lay himself at the feet of the renowned late Jagadguru
Shankaracharya Maharaj Shri Satchidananda Sivabhinava
Nrisimha Bharati Swami:
But he had not stayed there long, before he had to assume
the post of the first Principal of the newly started National
College at Rajmahendri under a pressing and clamant call of
duty from the nationalist leaders. Prof. Venkatraman Saras­
wati continued there for three years but in 1911 he could not
resist his burning desire for spiritual knowledge, practice and

l
ya
attainment any more and, therefore, tearing himself off suddenly
from the said college he went back to Shri Satchidananda
Sivabhinava Nrisimha Bharati Swami at Sringeri.
ar
The next eight years he spent in the profoundest study of
the most advanced Vedanta Philosophy and practice of the
Brahma-sadhana. During these days Prof. Venkatraman
m

used to study Vedanta at the feet of Shri Nrisimha Bharati

Swami, teach Sanskrit and Philosophy in schools there, and
practise the highest and most vigorous Yoga-sadhana in the
ra

nearby forests. Frequently, he was also invited by several

institutions to deliver lectures on philosophy; for example he
delivered a series of sixteen lectures on Shankaracharya’s
Philosophy at Shankar Institute of Philosophy, Amahier (Khan-
desh) and similar lectures at several other places like Poona,
Bombay etc.
After several years of the most advanced studies, the deepest
meditation, and the highest spiritual attainment Prof. Venkatra­
man Saraswati was initiated into the holy order of SAMNYASA
at Banaras (Varanasi) by his Holiness Jagadguru Shankara­
charya Sri Trivikram Tirthaji Maharaj of Sharadapeeth on the
4th July 1919 and on this occasion he was given the new
name, Swami Bharati Krishna Tirtha.
 ( iv )
This was the starting point of an effulgent manifestation
of Swamiji’s real greatness. Within two years of his .stay in the
holy order, he proved his unique suitability for being installed
on the pontifical throne of Sharada Peetha Shankaracharya and
accordingly in 1921, he was so installed with all the formal
ceremonies despite all his reluctance and active resistance.
Immediately, on assuming the pontificate Shri Jagadguruji
started touring India from corner to corner and delivering
lectures on Sanatana Dharma and by his scintillating intellectual
brilliance, powerful oratory, magnetic personality, sincerity of
purpose, indomitable will, purity of thought, and loftiness of
character he took the entire intellectual and religious class of
the nation by storm.

al
Jagadguru Shankaracharya Shri Madhusudan Tirtha of
Govardhan Math Puri was at this stage greatly impressed by
Jagadguruji and when the former was in failing health he
y
requested* Jagadguruji to succeed him on Govardhan Math
ar
Gadi. Shri Jagadguruji continued to resist his importunate
requests for a long time but at last when Jagadguru Shri Madhu­
sudan Tirtha’s health took a serious turn in 1925 he virtually
m

forced Jagadguru Shri Bharati Krishana Tirthaji to accept the

Govardhan Math’s Gadi and accordingly Jagadguruji installed
Shri Swarupanandji on the Sharadapeeth Gadi and himself
ra

assumed the duties of the ecclesiastical and pontifical head of

Sri Govardhan Math, Puri.
In this capacity of Jagadguru Shankaracharya of Govar­
dhan Math, Puri, he continued to disseminate the holy spiritual
teachings o f Sanatana Dharma in their pristine purity all over
the world the rest of his life for 35 years. Months after months
and years after years he spent in teaching and preaching, talking
and lecturing, discussing and convincing millions of people all
oVe* the country. He took upon himself the colossal task
o f the renaissance of Indian culture, spreading of Sanatana
Dharma, revival of the highest human and moral values and
enkindling of the loftiest spiritual enlightenment throughput
the world and he dedicated his whole life to this lofty and
noble mission.
 ( ▼ )
From his very early days Jagadguruji was aware of the
need for the right interpretation of “ Dharma” which he defined
as “ the sum total of all the means necessary for speedily making
and permanently keeping all the people, individually as well
as collectively superlatively comfortable, prosperous, happy,
and joyous in all respects (including the physical, mental,
intellectual, educational, economic, social, political, psychic,
spritual etc. ad infinitum)” . He was painfully aware o f the
“ escapism” of some from their duties under the garb of spiritua­
lity and of the superficial modern educational varnish, of the
others, divorced from spiritual and moral standards. He,
therefore, always laid great emphasis on the necessity of har­
monising the ‘spiritual’ and the ‘material’ spheres of daily
life. He also wanted to remove the false ideas, on the one

l
hand, of those persons who think that Dharma can be practised
ya
by exclusively individual spiritual Sadhana coupled with more
honest bread-earning, ignoring one’s responsibility for rendering
ar
selfless service to the society and on the other hand of those
who think that the Sadhana can be complete by mere service
of society even without learning or practising any spirituality
oneself. He wanted a happy blending of both. He stood for
m

the omnilateral and all-round progress simultenaously of both

the individual *and society towards the speedy realisation
ra

of India’s spiritual and cultural ideal, the lofty Vedantic ideal

of ‘Purnatva5 (perfection and harmony all-round).

With these ideas agitating his mind for several decades

he went on carrying on a laborious, elaborate, patient and day-
and-night research to evolve finally a splendid and perfect scheme
for all-round reconstruction first of India and through it of the
world. Consequently Sri Jagadguruji founded in 1953 at Nagpur
an institution named Sri Vishwa Punarnirmana Sangha (World
Reconstruction Association). The Administrative Board of the
Sangha consisted of Jagadguruji’s disciples, devotees and admi­
rers of his idealistic and spiritual ideals for humanitarian service
and included a number of high court judges, ministers, educa­
tionists, statesmen and other personage of the highest calibre
 ( viii )

pleasure. To see him was a privilege. To speak to him was

a real blessing and to be granted a special interview— Ah ! that
was the acme of happiness which people coveted most in all
earnestness. The magnetic force of his wonderful personality
was such that one word, one smile, or even one look was quite
enough to convert even the most sceptic into his most ardent
and obedient disciple. He belonged to all irrespective of caste
or creed and he was a real Guru to the whole world.
People of all nationalities, religions and climes, Brahmins
and non-Brahmins, Hindus and Mahomedans, Parsis and Chris­
tians, Europeans and Americans received equal treatment at
the hands of Mis Holiness. That was the secret of the immense
popularity of this great Mahatma.

l
He was grand in his simplicity. People would give any­
ya
thing and everything to get his blessings and he would talk
wdrds of wisdom as freely without fear or favour. He was
most easily accessible to all. Thousands of people visited
ar
him and prayed for the relief of their miseries. He had a kind
word to say to each, after attentively listening to his or her tale
of woe and then give them some ‘prasad* which would cure their
m

malady whether physical or mental. He would actually

shed tears when he found people suffering and would pray to
God to relieve their suffering.
ra

He was mighty in his learning and voracious in his reading.

A sharp intellect, a retentive memory and a keen zest went to
mark him as the most distinguished scholar of his day. His
leisure moments he would never spend in vain. He was always
reading something or repeating something. There was no branch
of knowledge which he did not know and that also ‘shastrically’.
He was equally learned in Chandahsastra, Ayurveda and
Jyotish Sastra. He was a poet of uncommon merit and wrote
a number of poems in Sanskrit in the praise of his guru, gods
and godesses with a charming flow of Bhakti so conspicuous in
all his writings.
I have got a collection of over three thousand slokas for­
ming part of the various eulogistic poems composed by Gurudeva
in adoration of various Devas and Devis. These Slokas have
been edited and are being translated into Hindi. They are
proposed to be published in three volumes along with Hindi
translation.
The book on “Sanatana Dharma” by H. H. Swami Bharatl
Krisna Tirtha Maharaja has been published by Bharatiya
Vidya Bhavan, Bombay.

Above all, his Bhakti towards his Vidyaguru was some­

thing beyond description. He would talk for days together
about the greatness of his Vidyaguru. He would be never
tired of worshipping the Guru. His Guru also was equally
attached to him and called our Swamiji as the own son of the

l
Goddess of Learning, Shri Sarada. Everyday he would first
ya
worship his guru’s sandals. His “ Gurupaduka Stotra ’ clearly
indicates the qualities he attributed to the sandals of his guru.
Shri Bharatl Krisna Tirtha was a great Yogin and a
ar

“Siddha” of a very high order. Nothing was impossible for him.

Above all he was a true Samnyasin. He held the world but as
a stage where every one had to play a part. In short, he was
m

undoubtedly a very great Mahatma but without any display of

mysteries or occultisms.
ra

I have not been able to express here even one millionth

part of what I feel. His spotless holiness, his deep piety,
his endless wisdom, his childlike peacefulness, sportiveness
and innocence and his universal affection beggar all description.
His Holiness has left us a noble example of simplest living and
highest thinking. May all the world benefit by the example
of a life so nobly and so simply, so spiritually and so lovingly
lived.

Introductory Remarks on the Present Volume

I now proceed to give a short account of the genesis
of the work published herewith. Revered Guruji used to
say that he had reconstructed the sixteen mathematical
formulae (given in this text) from the Atharvaveda after
assiduous research and ‘Tapas’ for about eight years in the
 ( * )
forests surrounding Sringeri. Obviously these formulae are
not to be found in the present recensions of Atharvaveda ; they
were actually reconstructed, on the basis of intuitive revelation,
from materials scattered here and there in the Atharvaveda.
Revered Gurudeva used to say that he had written sixteen
volumes (one for each Sutra) on these Sutras and that the
manuscripts of the said volumes were deposited at the house
of one of his disciples. Unfortunately, the said manuscripts
were lost irretrievably from the place of their deposit and this
colossal loss was finally confirmed in 1956. Revered Gurudeva
was not much perturbed over this irretrievable loss and used to
say that everything was there in his memory and that he could
re-write the 16 volums!

l
My late husband Sri C. M. Trivedi, Hon. Gen. Secertary
ya
V. P. Sangh noticed that while Sri Jagadguru Maharaj was
busy demonstrating before learned people and societies
Vedic Mathematics as discovered and propounded by him,
ar
some persons who had grasped a smattering of the new
Sutras had already started to dazzle audiences as prodigies
claiming occult powers without aknowledging indebtedness
m

to the Sutras of Jagadguruji. My husband, therefore, pleaded

earnestly with Gurudeva and persuaded him to arrange for
ra

the publication of the Sutras in his own name.

In 1957, when he had decided finally to undertake a
tour of the U.S.A. he re-wrote from memory the present
volume, giving an introductory account of the sixteen for­
mulae reconstructed by him. This volume was written in
his old age within one month and a half with his failing health
and weak eyesight. He had planned to write subsequent volu­
mes, but his failing health (and cataract developed in both
eyes) did not allow the fulfilment of his plans. Now the present
volume is the only work on Mathematics that has been left over
by Revered Guruji; all his other writings on Vedic Mathematics
have, alas, been lost for ever.
The typescript of the present volume was left over by
Revered Gurudeva in U.S.A. in 1958 for publication. He
 ( xi )

had been given to understand that he would have to go to the

U.S.A. for correction of proofs and personal supervision of
printing. But his health deteriorated after his return to India
and finally the typescript was brought back from the U.S.A.
after his attainment of Mahasamadhi, in 1960.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I owe a deep debt of gratitude to Justice N. H. Bhagwati,
the enlightened Vice-Chancellor of the Banaras Hindu Univer­
sity and other authorities of the B.H.U. who have readily under­
taken the publication of this work which was introduced to them
by Dr. Pt. Omkarnath Thakur. I am indebted to Dr. Thakur
for this introduction. My hearty and reverent thanks are due

l
to Dr. V. S. Agrawala (Professor, Art & Architecture, B.H.U.)
ya
the vateran scholar, who took the initiative and throughout
kept up a very keen interest in this publication. It is my
pleasant duty to offer my heartfelt gratitude to Dr. Prem Lata
ar

Sharma, Dean, Faculty of Music and Fine Arts, B.H.U. who

voluntarily took over the work of press-dressing of the
typescript and proof-reading of this volume after a deadlock
m

had come to prevail in the process of printing just at the outset.

But for her hard labour which she has undertaken out of a
ra

sheer sense of reverence for the noble and glorious work of

Revered Gurudeva this volume would not have seen the light
of the day for a long time. I trust that Revered Gurudeva’s
Holy Spirit will shower His choicesjb blessings on her. My
sincere thanks are also due to Sri S. Nijabodha of the Research
Section under the charge of Dr. Sharma, who has ably assisted
her in this onerous task.
The Humblest of His t)isciples
Smti. MANJULA TRIVEDI
Nagpur, Hony. General Secretary
16th March, 1965. S r i Vishwa Punarnirmana
Sangha, Nagpur.
ra
m
ar
ya
l
 AUTHOR’ S PREFACE
A —A DESCRIPTIVE PREFATORY NOTE
ON
THE ASTOUNDING WONDERS
OF
ANCIENT INDIAN VEDIC MATHEMATICS
1. In the course of our discourses on manifold and
multifarious subjects (spiritual, metaphysical, philosophical,
psychic, psychological, ethical, educational, scientific, mathe­
matical, historical, political, economic, social etc., etc., from
time to time and from place to place during the last five decades
and more, we have been repeatedly pointing out that the Vedas
al
(the most ancient Indian scriptures, nay, the oldest “ Religious5’
scriptures of the whole world) claim to deal with all branches
y
of learning (spiritual and temporal) and to give the -earnest
ar

seeker after knowledge all the requisite instructions, and guidance

in full detail and on scientifically—nay, mathematically—
accurate lines in them all and so on.
m

2. The very word “ Veda” has this derivational meaning

i.e. the fountain-head and illimitable store-house of all know­
ra

ledge. This derivation, in effect, means, connotes and implies that

the Vedas should contain within themselves all the knowledge
needed by mankind relating not only to the so-called ‘spiritual’
(or other-worldly) matters but also to those Usually described
as purely “ secular” , “ temporal” , or “ wotdly” ; and also to
the means required by humanity as such for the achievement
of all-round, complete and perfect success in all conceivable
directions and that there can be no adjectival or restrictive
epithet calculated (or tending) to limit that knowledge down in
any sphere, any direction or any respect whatsoever.
3. In other words, it connotes and implies that our
ancient Indian Vedic lore should be all-round complete and
perfect and able to throw the fullest necessary light on all
matters which any aspiring seeker after knowledge can possibly
seek to be enlightened on.
 ( xiv )

4. It is thus in the fitness of things that the Vedas include

(i) Ayurveda (anatomy, physiology, hygiene, sanitary science,
medical science, surgery etc., etc.,) not for the purpose of achie­
ving perfect health and strength in the after-death future but
in order to attain them here and now in our present physical
bodies; (ii) Dhanurveda (archery and other military sciences)
not for fighting with one another after our transportation to
heaven but in order to quell and subdue all invaders from
abroad and all insurgents from within; (iii) Gandharva Veda
(the science and art of music) and (iv) Sthapatya Veda (engineer­
ing, architecture etc.,and all branches of mathematics in general).
All these subjects, be it noted, are inherent parts of the Vedas
i.e. are reckoned as “ spiritual” studies and catered for as

l
such therein.
ya
5. Similar is the case with regard to the Vedangas (i.e.
grammar, prosody, astronomy, lexicography etc., etc.,) which,
ar
according to the Indian cultural conceptions, are also inherent
parts and subjects of Vedic (i.e. Religious) study.
(k As a direct and unshirkable consequence of this
m

analytical and grammatical study of the real connotation

and full implications of the word “ Veda” and owing to various
other historical causes of a personal character (into details of
ra

which we need not now enter), we have been from our very
early childhood, most earnestly and actively striving to study
the Vedas critically from this stand-point and to realise and
prove to ourselves (and to others) the correctness (or otherwise)
of the derivative meaning in question.
7. There were, too, certain personal historical reasons
why in our quest for the discovering of all learning in all its
departments, branches, sub-branches etc., in the Vedas, our
gaze was riveted mainly on ethics, psychology and metaphysics
on the one hand and on the “ positive” sciences and especially
mathematics on the other.
8. And the contemptuous or, at best patronising attitude
adopted by some so-called Orientalists, Indologists, anti­
quarians, research-scholars etc., who condemned, or light-
 ( tv )

heartedly, n a y ; irresponsibly, frivolously and flippantly dis­

missed, several abstruse-looking and recgndite parts of the
Vedas as “ sheer-nonsense” —or as “ infant-humanity’s prattle5',
and so on, merely added fuel to the fire (so to speak) and further
confirmed and strengthened our resolute determination to
unravel the too-long hidden mysteries of philosophy and science
contained in ancient India’s Vedic lore, with the consequence
that, after eight years of concentrated contemplation in forest-
solitude, we were at long last able to recover the long lost keys
which alone could unlock the portals thereof.
9. And we were agreeably astonished and intensely gra­
tified to find that exceedingly tough mathematical problems
(which the mathematically most advanced present day Wes­

l
tern scientific world had spent huge lots of time, energy and
ya
money on and which even now it solves with the utmost difficulty
and after vast labour involving large numbers of difficult, tedious
and cumbersome “ steps” of working) can be easily and readily
ar

solved with the help of these ultra-easy Vedic Sutras (or mathe­
matical aphorisms) contained in the Parisista (the Appendix-
portion) of the A t h a r v a v e d a in a few simple steps and by
m

methods which can be conscientiously described as mere “ mental

arithmetic” .
ra

10. Eversince (i.e. since several decades ago), we have

been carrying on an incessant and strenuous campaign for
the India-wide diffusion of all this scientific knowledge, by
means of lectures, blackboard- demonstrations, regular classes
and so on in schools, colleges, universities etc., all over the
country and have been astounding our audiences everywhere
with the wonders and marvels not to say, miracles of Indian
Vedic mathematics.
11. We were thus at last enabled to succeed in attracting
the more than passing attention of the authorities of several
Indian universities to this subject. And, in 1952, the Nagpur
University not merely had a few lectures and blackboard-
demonstrations given but also arranged for our holding regular
classes in Vedio mathematics (in the University’s Convocation
 ( xvi >

Hall) for the benefit of all in general and especially of the Uni­
versity and college professors of mathematics, physics etc.
12. And, consequently, the educationists and the cream
of the English educated section of the people including the
highest officials (e.g. the high-court judges, the ministers
etc.,) and the general public as such were all highly impressed ;
nay, thrilled, wonder-struck and flabbergasted ! And not
only the newspapers but even the University’s official reports
described the tremendous sensation caused thereby in superlati­
vely eulogistic terms ; and the papers began to refer to us as
“ the Octogenarian Jagadguru Shankaracharya who had taken
Nagpur by storm with his Vedic mathematics” , and so on !

l
13. It is manifestly impossible, in the course of a short
ya
note (in the nature of a “ trailer” ), to give a full, detailed, tho­
rough-going, comprehensive and exhaustive description of
the unique features and startling characteristics of all the
ar

mathematical lore in question. This can and will be done

in the subsequent volumes of this series (dealing seriatim and
in extenso with all the various portions of all the various branches
m

of mathematics).

14. We may, however, at this point, draw the earnest

ra

attention of every one concerned to the following salient items

thereof:—
(i) The Sutras (aphorisms) apply to and cover each
and every part of each and every chapter of each
and every branch of mathematics (including ari­
thmetic, algebra, geometry—plane and solid, trigo­
nometry—plane and spherical, conics—geometrical
and analytical, astronomy, calculus—differential
and integral etc., etc. In fact, there is no part of
mathematics, pure or applied, which is beyond their
jurisdiction ;
(ii) The Sutras are easy to understand, easy to apply
and easy to remember ; and the whole work can be
truthfully summarised in one word “ mental” !
 ( xvii )

(iii) Even as regards complex problems involving a good

number of mathematical operations (consecutively
or even simultaneously to be performed), the time
taken by the Vedic method will be a third, a fourth,
a tenth or even a much smaller fraction of the time
required according to modern (i.e. current) Western
methods;
(iv) And, in some very important and striking cases,
sums requiring 30, 50, 100 or even more numerous
and cumbrous “ steps” of working (according to the
current Western methods) can be answered in a
single and simple step of work by the Vedic method !

l
And little children (of only 10 or 12 years of age)
ya
merely look at the sums written on the blackboard
(on the platform) and immediately shout out and
dictate the answers from the body of the convocation
ar
hall (or other venue of the demonstration). And
this is because, as a matter of fact, each digit automa­
tically yields its predecessor and its successor ! and
the children have merely to go on tossing off (or
m

reeling off) the digits one after another (forwards or

backwards) by mere mental arithmetic (without
ra

needing pen or pencil, paper or slate etc) !

(v) On seeing this kind of work actually being performed
by the little children, the doctors, professors and
other “ big-guns” of mathematics are wonder struck
and exclaim :— “ Is this mathematics or magic” ? And
we invariably answer and say : 4‘It is both. It is
magic until you understand i t ; and it is mathematics
thereafter” ; and then we proceed to substantiate
and prove the correctness of this reply of ours ! And
(vi) As regards the time required by the students for
mastering the whole course of Vedic mathematics
as applied to all its branches, we need merely state
from our actual experience that 8 months (or 12
months) at an average rate of 2 or 3 hours per day
 ( xviii )

should suffice for completing the whole course of

mathematical studies on these Vedic lines instead of
15 or 20 years required according to the existing
systems of the Indian and also of foreign uni­
versities.
15. In this connection, it is a gratifying fact that unlike
some so-called Indologists (of the type hereinabove referred to)
there have been some great modem mathematicians and his­
torians of mathematics (like Prof. G. P. Halstead, Professor
Ginsburg, Prof. De Moregan, Prof. Hutton etc.,) who have,
as truth-seekers and truth-lovers, evinced a truly scientific
attitude and frankly expressed their intense and whole-hearted
appreciation of ancient India’s grand and glorious contributions

l
ya
to the progress of mathematical knowledge (in the Western
hemisphere and elsewhere).

16. The following few excerpts from the published writings

ar
of some universally acknowledged authorities in the domain
of the history of mathematics, will speak eloquently for
themselves:—
m

(i) On page 20 of his book “ On the Foundation and

Technique of Arithmetic” , we find Prof. G.P. Halstead
ra

saying “ The importance of the creation of the

z e r o mark can never be exaggerated. This giving
of airy nothing not merely a local habitation and a
name, a picture but helpful power is the characteristic
of the Hindu race whence it sprang. It is like
coining the Nirvana into dynamos. No single
mathematical creation has been more potent for the
general on-go of intelligence and power” .
(ii) In this connection, in his splendid treatise on “ The
present mode of expressing numbers” (the Indian
Historical Quarterly Vol. 3, pages 530-540) B. B.
Dutta says: “ The Hindus adopted the decimal
scale vary early. The numerical language of no
other nation is so scientific and has attained as high
a state of perfection as that of the ancient Hindus.
 ( )
In symbolism they succeeded with ten signs to express
any number most elegantly and simply. It is this
beauty of the Hindu numerical notation which attrac­
ted the attention of all the civilised peoples of the
world and charmed them to adopt it”
(iii) In this very context, Prof. Ginsburg says:—
“ The Hindu notation was carried to Arabia about
770 A.D. by a Hindu scholar named Kanka who
was invited from Ujjain to the famous Court of Bagh­
dad by the Abbaside Khalif Al-MANStfR. Ka6ka
taught Hindu astronomy and mathematics to the
Arabian scholars ; and, with his help, they translated
into Arabic the Brahma-Sphuta-Siddhanta of Brahma

l
Gupta. The recent discovery by the French savant
ya
M.F. Nau proves that the Hindu numerals were well
known and much appreciated in Syria about the middle
of the 7th Century A -D ” . (G i n s b u r g ’ s “ n e w L ig h t
ar
on our numerals” , Bulletin of the American Mathe­
matical Society, Second series, Vol. 25, pages 366-369).
(iv) On this point, we find B. B. Dutta further saying :
m

“ From Arabia, the numerals slowly marched

towards the West through Egypt and Northern
ra

Arabia; and they finally entered Europe in the

11th Century. The Europeans called them the Arabic
notations, because they received them from the
Arabs. But the Arabs themselves, the Eastern as
well as the Western, have unanimously called them
the Hindu figures. (Al-Arqan-Al-Hindu” .)
17. The above-cited passages are, however, in connection
with and in appreciation of India’s invention of the “ Z e r o ”
mark and her contributions of the 7th century A.D. and later
to world mathematical knowledge.

In the light, however, of the hereinabove given detailed

description of the unique merits and characteristic excellences
of the still earlier Vedic Sutras dealt with in the 16 volumes of
 ( XX )

this series1, the conscientious (truth-loving and truth-telling)

historians of Mathematics (of the lofty eminence of Prof. De
Morgan etc.) have not been guilty of even the least exaggeration
in their candid admission that “ even the highest and farthest
reaches of modern Western mathematics have not yet brought
the Western world even to the threshold of Ancient Indian Vedic
Mathematics” .
18. It is our earnest aim and aspiration, in these 16
volumes1, to explain and expound the contents of the Vedic
mathematical Sutras and bring them within the easy intellectual
reach of every seeker after mathematical knowledge.

l
ya
B.—EXPLANATORY EXPOSITION
OF
SOME SALIENT, INSTRUCTIVE AND
ar
INTERESTING ILLUSTRATIVE SAMPLE SPECIMENS
BY WAY OF
COMPARISON and CONTRAST
m

Preliminary N ote:—
With regard to every subject dealt with in the Vedic
ra

Mathematical Sutras, the rule generally holds good that the

Sutras have always provided for what may be termed the
*General Case1(by means of simple processes which can be easily
and readily—nay, instantaneously applied to any and every
question which can possibly arise under any particular heading.
2. But, at the same time, we often come across special
cases which, although classifiable under the general heading
in question, yet present certain additional and typical charac-
terestics which render them still easier to solve. And, therefore,
special provision is found to have been made for such special
cases by means of special Sutras, sub-Sutras, corollaries etc.,
relating and applicable to those particular types alone.
1 Only one volume has been bequeathed by His Holiness to posterity
cf p. x above—General Editor.
 3. And all that the student of these Sutras has to do
is to look for the special characteristics in question, recognise
the particular type before him and determine and apply the
special formula prescribed therefor.
4. And, generally speaking it is only in case no special
case is involved, that the general formula has to be resorted to.
And this process is naturally a little longer. But it need
hardly be pointed out that, even then, the longest of the methods
according to the Vedic system comes nowhere (in respect of
length, cumbrousness and tediousness etc.,) near the correspond­
ing process according to the system now current everywhere.
5. For instance, the conversion of a vulgar fraction
(say or or ^ etc.,) to its equivalent recurring decimal

l
shape involves 18 or 28 or 42 or more steps of cumbrous work­
ya
ing (according to the current system) but requires only one
single and simple step of mental working (according to
ar
the Vedic Sutras) !
6. This is not all. There are still other methods and
processes (in the latter system) whereby even that very small
m

(mental) working can be rendered shorter still! This and

herein is the beatific beauty of the whole scheme.
ra

7. To start with, we should naturally have liked to begin

this explanatory and illustrative exposition with a few pro­
cesses in arithmetical computations relating to multiplications
and divisions of huge numbers by big multipliers and big divisors
respectively and then go on to other branches of mathematical
calculation.
8. But, as we have just hereinabove referred to a parti­
cular but wonderful type of mathematical work wherein 18.
28, 42 or even more steps of working can be condensed into a
single-step answer which can be written down immediately
(by means of what we have been describing as straight, single-
line, mental arithmetic) ; ami, as this statement must naturally
have aroused intense eagerness and curiosity in the minds of the
students (and the teachers too) and especially as the process is
 ( xxii )

based on elementary and basic fundamental principles and

requires no previous knowledge of anything in the nature
of an indispensable and inescapable pre-requisite chapter,
subject and so on, we are beginning this exposition here with
an easy explanation and a simple elucidation of that particular
illustrative specimen.

9. And then we shall take up the other various parts,

one by one, of the various branches of mathematical computation
and hope to throw sufficient light thereon to enable the students
to make their own comparison and contrast and arrive at
correct conclusions on all the various points dealt with.
y al
C. ILLUSTRATIVE SPECIMEN SAMPLES
ar

(Comparison and Contrast)

SAMPLE SPECIMENS
m

OP
ra

ARITHMETICAL COMPUTATIONS

I. Multiplication : The “ Sanskrit Sutra99 (Formula) is—

(i) Multiply 87265 by 32117 w n
By current method : By Vedic mental one-line method :
87265 87265
32117 32117
610855 2802690005
87265
87265 N ote: Only the answer is writ­
174530 ten automatically down
261795 by Vrdhwa Tiryak
2802690005 Sutra (forwards or back­
wards).
 ( xxiii )

IT. Division:
(2) Express TV in its full recurring decimal shape (18 digits) :
By the current method : The “ Sanskrit Sutra” (Formula) is ;
19) 1 *00( *052631578947368421 ^ II
95 By the Vedic mental one-line method :
50 (by the Ekadhika-Puxva Sutra)
(forwards or backwards), we merely
120 write down the 1'8-digit-answer:—
114 *052631578)
00 9473684211 J
57
30

l
19
ya
110
95
ar
150
133
170
152
m

180
171
ra

'~90
76
~140
133
70
57
130
114
160
152 38
80 20
76 19
40 1

*
 ( XXIV )

Division continued:
Note : gives 42 recurring decimal places in the answer but
these too are written down mechanically in the same
way (backwards or forwards). And the same is the
case with all such divisions (whatever the number of
digits may b e ):
(3) Divide 7031985 by 823 :
By the current method : By the mental Vedic one-line method :
823)7031985(8544 8123)70319(85
6584 675
4479 8544(273
4115
3648
3292

l
ya
3565
3292
” 273
ar

Q=8544
273
(4) Divide .0003147 by 814256321 (to 6 decimal places) :
m

The current method is notoriously too long, tedious, cum­

brous and clumsy and entails the expenditure of enormous time
ra

and toil. Only the Vedic mental one-line method is given here,
The truth-loving student can work it out by the other method
and compare the two for himself.
8/1425632)-00034147
) 3295
•0000419...
(5) Find the Reciprocal of 7246041 to eleven Decimal places :
By the Vedic mental one-line-method.
(by the Drdhwa-Tiryak Sutra)
7/246041) •000001000000
374610
•00000013800...
N .B. :—The same method can be used for 200 or more places •
 ( XXV )

III. Divisibility:
(6) Find out whether 5293240096 is divisible by 139:
By the current method, nothing less than complete
division will give a clue to the answer (Yes or No).
But by the Vedic mental one-line method (by the
Ekadhika-Purva Sutra), we can at once say :—
for) 5 2 9 3 2 4 0 0 9 61 . yF S
139) 139 89 36 131 29 131 19 51 93 j **
IV. Square Root:
(7) Extract the square root of 738915489:
By the current method : By the Vedic mental one-line method:
738915489(27183
4

l 4)738915489
ya 35513674
47)338
329 27183.000 Ans.
ar
541 (By the Vrdhwa-Tiryak Sutra)

5428) 45054
43424
m

54363) 163089
163089
ra

The square root is 27183.

(8) Extract the square root of 19 706412814 to 6 decimal places :

The current method is too cumbrous and may be tried by
the student himself.

The Vedic mental one-line method (by Vrdhwa-Tiryak

Sutra) is as follows:—
8)19*706412814
•351010151713
4-439190 .
 ( xxvi )

V. Cubing and Cube-Root: The “ Sanskrit Sutra”

(Formula) i s :—
(9) Find the cube of 9989. n spf ^ u
The current method is too cumbrous.
The Vedic mental one-line method (by the Yavadunam-
Tavxdunzm Sutra) is as follows :—
99893=9967 /0363/1331=9967 /0362/8669
(10) Extract the Cube-Root of 355045312441:
The current method is too cumbrous.
The Vedic mental one-line method is as follows :—
S/355045312441 = 7 . . 1=7081

SAMPLE SPECIMENS PROM ALGEBRA

l
I. Simple Equations :
ya The “ Sanskrit Sutra”
(Formula) is :—
(11) Solve : 3x+4 x+1 II ^ II
ar
6 x + 7 ==2 x + 3
By the current method : By the Vedic method (by the
Sunyam-Samuccaya Sutra
m

6x2+ 1 7 x + 1 2 = .*. 4 x + 5 = 0 x = -l£

6x2+ 1 3 x + 7
ra

4 x = —5
.- .x = - l \
(12) 4x+ 2 1 5x—69 3x—5 6x—41
x + 5 ' X — 1 4 ~ x - 2 + x —7
The current method is too cumbrous.
The Vedic method simply says: 2x—-9 = 0 .*
(13) /x —5\8 x —3
\x—7/ “ x —9

The current method is horribly cumbrous.

The Vedic method simply says: 4x—-24=0 . . x~r6.
II. Quadratic-Equations (and Calculus):
The same is the case here.
 ( xrvii )

(14) 16x—3 2x—15

x = l or 10/9
7 x + 7 ‘ ' l l x —25
(15) 3 4 2 5
x = 0 or —7/2.
x + 3 " ^ x + 4L—x
V+- .1-2Q"""f" x-f-5

(16) 7x2—l l x —7 = 0
By Vedic method (by “ Calana-kalana” Sutra; Formula)
i.e., by Calculus-Formula we sa y : 14x—11= ± V317.
N . B . :—Every quadratic can thus be broken down into two
binomial-factors. And the same principle can be
utilised for cubic, biquadratic, pentic etc., expressions.

III. Summation of Series:

The current methods are horribly cumbrous. The Vedic

l
ya
mental one-line methods are very simple and easy.
(17) b + t t o —4/77
ar
(18) T8U+T?;0 + ^ r i + f f f ? 0 = ^oV5
SPECIMEN SAMPLES FROM GEOMETRY
(19) Pythogoras Theorem is constantly required in all mathe­
m

matical work, but the proof of it is ultra-notorious for its

cumbrousness, clumsiness, etc. There are several Vedic proofs
ra

thereof (every one of them much simpler than Euclid's). I

give two of them below:—
E, F, G and H are points
on AB, BC, CD and DA such
that A E =B F =C G =D H . Thus
ABCD is split up into the
square EFGH and 4 congruent
triangles.
Their total area = H *+ 4 x | X mn
->(H2+ 4xJ mn)
= H 2-f-2mn
But the area of ABCD is (m -fn)2
=sjn2+2mn-f-na
H2+2m n=m 2+2m n +n 2
.-. H2=m*-|-w2 Q.E.D.
 ( xxviii )

(20) Second P roof:

Draw B D j_to AC.
Then ABC, ADB and
BDC are similar.

. ADB___AB2 „ j BDC__BC2
ABC AC* ABC AC*
AD B+BDC AB2+ B 0 2 tj x apvd i
*----- A S C ~ ==“ AU2~ r ; ADB+ BDC=ABC
.•.AB2+ B C 2= A C 2, Q.E.D.

N ote:—Apollonius Theorem, Ptolemy’s Theorem, etc., etc.,

are all similarly proved by very simple and easy
methods.
al
SIMPLE SPECIMENS FROM CONICS AND CALCULUS
y
(21) Equation of the straight line joining two points:
ar
For finding the equation of the straight line passing through
two points (whose co-ordinates are given).
Say (9, 17) and (7, —2).
m

By the Current Method:

Let the equation be y = m x + c .
ra

.\ 9 m + c= 1 7 ; and 7m +c = - 2
Solving this simultaneous-equation in m and c.
We have 2m =19 ; m ~9| C = —68f
Substituting ; these, values, we have y = 9 £ x —68$
2 y = 1 9 x —137 .-. 19x—2y=137. But this method is
cumbrous.

Second method using the formula y —y1— ( x—-x1)

x x
is still more cumbrous (and confusing).
But the Vedic mental one-line method by the Sanskrit
Sutra (Formula), II tffapfcr n (“ Paravartya-Sutra” ) enables
us to write down the answer by a mere look at the given
co-ordinates.
 ( xxix )

(22) When does a general-equation represent two straight lines f

Say, 12x2 + 7 x y —10y2+ 1 3 x + 4 5 y —35=0

By the Current Method.

Prof. S. L. Loney devotes about 15 lines (section 119,
Ex. 1 on page 97 of his “ Elements of Co-ordinate Geometry” )
to his “ model” solution of this problem as follows:—
Here a=12, h = 7 /2 , b = - 1 0 , g=13/2, f= 4 5 /2 and
c = —35.
abc+2fgh —afa—bg2—ch2 turns out to be zero.
, 2X45 13 7 12(45)2 , „ (13)2
= 12(x—10) ( x - 3 5 ) + —g - X y X g -----\ L - ( - 1 0 ) ^
(7)2 4095 1690 1715 _ , 7500 „

l
—(-35)^- = 4 2 0 0 + ^ - 6 0 7 5 + — + - j “ = - 1 8 7 5 + ~ j - = 0
ya
The equation represents two straight lines.
Solving it for x, we have
ar
Ta i 7y+13 . /7y+13\2 10y2-4 5 y + 3 5 , /7y+13\2
x 12 + \ 24 / ~ 12 + \ 24 /
_ | 2 3 y -4 3 j»
m

, 7y+13 23y—43
ra

* + -2 « -= -S —

.. . x
T_- f c3 l or
or _ ? Z4± 5

The two straight lines are 3 x = 2 y —7 and 4 x = —5 y + 5 .

By the Vedic method, however, we at once apply the “ Adyam-
adyena” Sutra and (by merely looking at the quadratic) write
down the answer :
Yes; and the straight lines are 3x—2 y = -—7 and
4 x + 5 y —5.
(23) Dealing with the same principle and adopting the same
procedure with regard to hyperbolas, conjugate hyperbolas and
asymptotes, in articles 324 and 325 on pages 293 and 294 of his
“ Elements of Co-ordinate Geometry” Prof. S. L. Loney devotes
27+14(=41 lines) to the problem and says;—
 ( XXX )

As 3x2—5xy—2y2-f-5x-—1l y —-8=0 is the equation to

the given hyperbola.
... 3 ( _ 2) c + 2 . ■<-») - 3 ( V )2 - ( - 2 ) (|)a
—c(—§)2= 0 .
c — -1 2 .
The equation to the asymptotes is 3x2 —5xy—2ya+
5 x - l l y —12=0
and the equation to the conjugate-hyperbola is 3xa—5xy—-2y2+
5 x+ 1 5y —16=0
By the Vedic method, however, we use the same (‘Adyam-adyend)
Sutra and automatically write down the equation to the asymp­
totes and the equation to the conjugate-hyperbola.
The Vedic methods are so simple that their very simplicity
l
is astounding, and, as Desmond Doig has aptly, remarked,
ya
it is difficult for any one to believe it until one actually sees it.
It will be our aim in this and the succeeding volumes1
ar

to bring this long-hidden treasure-trove of mathemetical

knowledge within easy reach of everyone who wishes to obtain it
and benefit by it.
m
ra

1 This k the only*volume left by the author—Editor.

ra
m

TEXT
ar
ya
l
I
ra
m
ar
ya
l
 II & II

VEDIC MATHEMATICS
OR
SIXTEEN SIMPLE MATHEMATICAL FORMULAE
FROM THE VEDAS
SIXTEEN SOTRAS AND THEIR COROLLARIES

Sutras Sub-Sutras or Corollaries

1. 1.
Ekadhikena Purvena (also Anurupyena
a corollary)
l
ya
2. fafwz c^RT: 2. STOW:
Nikhilarji NavataScara- Sisyate Sesasaifijnah
ar

matji Dasatah
3. 3. dnw w N w iw fr
TJrdhva-tiryagbhyarp, Adyamadyendntya-mantye-
m

na
4. 4. ^wng;
ra

Paravartya Yojayet Kevalaih Saptakarp, Gun-

ydt
5. 5. %*£«T*T
Sunyam Samyasamuccaye Fesfcmam
6. (aTT^cq') 6.
(Anurupye) Sunyamanyat Yavadunam Tavadunarp,
7. ^ zfhr^cT
Sankalana-vyavakalana- Y avadunam Tavadunl-
bhyam (also a corollary4) krtya Varganca Yojayet
8. ^nT^nrTTqpT
Purandpuranabhydm AntyayordaSake'pi
9. 9.
Calana-Kalanabhyam Antyayoreva
 ( la )
Sutras Sub-Sutras or Corollaries
10. 10.
Yavadunam Samuccayagunitah
11. ©zrfesnrfe 11.
Vyastisamastih Lopanasthdpandbhyam
12. 12.
SesanyanJcena Caramena Vibkanam
13. 13.
Sopantyadvayamantyam Gunitauiitccayah
14. Samiumyagunitah
Ekanyunena Purvena
15.

l
Gunitasamuccayah
ya
16.
Gunakasamuccayah
ar
m

[Note—This list has been compiled from stray references

in the text— e d i t o r .]
ra
 V

II & II

PROLEGOMENA

In onr “ Descriptive, Prefatory Note on the Astounding

Wonders of Ancient Indian Vedic Mathematics” , we have
again and again, so often and at such great length and with such
wealth of detail, dwelt on the almost incredible simplicity
of the Vedic Mathematical Sutras (aphorisms or formulae)
and the indescribable ease with which they can be understood,
remembered and applied (even by little children) for the solution
of the wrongly-believed-to-be-“ difficult” problems in the various
branchest)f Mathematics, that we need not, at this point, traverse

l
ya
the same ground and cover the same field once again here.
Suffice it, for our present immediate purpose, to draw
the earnest attention of every scientifically-inclined mind
ar

and researchward-attuned intellect, to the remarkably extra­

ordinary and characteristic—nay, unique fact that the Vedic
system does not academically countenance (or actually follow)
m

any automatical or mechanical rule even in respect of the

correct sequence or order to be observed with regard to the
ra

various subjects dealt with in the various branches of Mathe­

matics (pure and applied) but leaves it entirely to the con­
venience and the inclination, the option, the temperamental
predilection and even the individual idiosyncracy of the teachers
and even the students themselves (as to what particular order
or sequence they should actually adopt and follow )!
This manifestly out-of-the-common procedure must
doubtless have been due to some special kind of historical
back-ground, background which made such a consequence not
only natural but also inevitable under the circumstances in
question.
Immemorial tradition has it and historical research
confirms the orthodox belief that the Sages, Seers and Saints of
ancient India (who are accredited with having observed, studied
 ( lo )

and meditated in the Aranya (i.e. in forest-solicitude)—on physi­

cal Nature around them and deduced their grand Vedantic
Philosophy therefrom as the result not only of their theoretical
reasonings but also of what may be more fittingly described as .
True Realisation by means of Actual VISUALISATION) seem
to have similarly observed, studied and meditated on the
mysterious workings of numbers, figures etc. of the mathematical
world (to wit, Nature) around them and deduced their Mathe­
matical Philosophy therefrom by a similar process of what one
may, equally correctly, describe as processes of True-Realisation
by means of Actual VISUALISATION.
And, consequently, it naturally follows that, in-as-much
as, unlike human beings who have their own personal prejudices,

l
ya
partialities, hatreds and other such subjective factors distorting
their visions, warping their judgements and thereby contri­
buting to their inconsistent or self-contradictory decisions and
ar
discriminatory attitudes, conducts etc.), numbers (in Mathe­
matics) labour under no such handicaps and disadvantages
based on personal prejudices, partialities, hatreds etc. They
are, on the contrary, strictly and purely impersonal and objective
m

in their behaviour etc., follow the same rules uniformly, consis-

tenly and invariatly (with no question of outlook, approach,
ra

personal psychology etc. involved therein) and are therefore

absolutely reliable and dependable.
This seems to have been the real historical reason why,
barring a few unavoidable exceptions in the shape of elementary,
basic and fundamental first principles (of a preliminary or pre­
requisite character), almost all the subjects dealt with in the
various branches of Vedic Mathematics are explicable and
expoundable on the basis of those very ‘basic principles’ or
‘first principles’ , with the natural consequence that no particular
subject or subjects (or chapter or chapters) need necessarily
precede or follow some other particular subject or subjects
(or chapter or chapters).
Nevertheless, it is also undeniable that, although any
particular sequence is quite possible, permissible and feasible
 ( M )

yet, some particular sequence will actually have to be adopted

by a teacher (and, much mo\e therefore, by an author). And
so, we find that subjects like analytical conics and even calculus
(differential and integral) (which is usually the bugbear and
terror of even the advanced students of mathematics under the
present system all the world over) are found to figure and fit
in at a very early stage in our Vedic Mathematics (because of
their being expounded and worked out on basic first principles.
And they help thereby to facilitate mathematical study
especially for the small children).
And, with our more-than-half-a-century’s actual personal
experience of the very young mathematics-students and their
difficulties, we have found the Vedic sequence of subjects and

l
chapters the most suitable for our purpose (namely, the elimina­
ya
ting from the children’s minds of all fear and hatred of mathe­
matics and the implanting therein of a positive feeling of
exuberant love and enjoyment thereof) ! And we fervently
ar

hope and trust that other teachers too will have a similar
experience and will find us justified in our ambitious description
of this volume as “Mathematics without tears” .
m

From the herein-above described historical back-ground

to our Vedic Mathematics, it is also obvious that, being based
ra

on basic and fundamental principles, this system of mathe­

matical study cannot possibly come into conflict with any
other branch, department or instrument of science and
scientific education. In fact, this is the exact reason why all
the other sciences have different Theories to propound but
Mathematics has only THOEREMS to expound !
And, above all, we have our Scriptures categroically
laying down the wholesome dictum :—
srsft uttst stotsPt spsrcfir i
srsrcfa *p?rcf'r n
(i.e. whatever is consistent with right reasoning should b6
accepted, even though it comes from a boy or even from a
parrot; and whatever is inconsistent therewith ought to be
 ( 1* )
rejected, although emanating from an old man or even from the
great sage Shree Shuka himself.
In other words, we are called upon to enter on such a
scientific quest as this, by divesting our minds of all
pre-conceived notions, keeping our minds ever open and, in all
humility (as humility alone behoves and befits the real seeker
after truth), welcoming the light of knowledge from whatever
direction it may be forthcoming. Nay, our scriptures go so far
as to inculcate that even thir expositions should be looked upon
by us not as “ teachings” or even as advice, guidance etc. but
as acts of “ thinking aloud” by a fellow student.
It is in this spirit and from this viewpoint that we now
address ourselves to the task before us, in this series of volumes1

l
{i.e. a sincere exposition of the mathematical Sutras under
ya
discussion, with what we may call our “ running comments”
(just as in a blackboard demonstration or a magic lantern
lecture or a cricket match etc. etc.).
ar

In conclusion, we appeal to our readers (as we always,

appeal to our hearers) to respond hereto from the same stand­
point and in the same spirit as we have just hereinabove
m

described.
We may also add that, inasmuch as we have since long
ra

promised to make these volumes2 “ self-contained” , we shall

make our explanations and expositions as full and clear as
possible. Brevity may be the soul of w it; but certainly not at
the expense of CLARITY (and especially in mathematical
treatises like these).
it ll

1 Unfortunately, only one volume has been left overby His Holiness.
—Editor.
 Ill# sifell

ACTUAL APPLICATIONS
OF

THE VEDIC SOTRAS

TO
CONCRETE MATHEMATICAL PROBLEMS
Ch a p t e r I

A SPECTACULAR ILLUSTRATION
For the reasons just explained immediately hereinbefore
let us take the question of the CONVERSION of Vulgar fractions

l
into their equivalent decimal form.
First Example:
ya
Case 1. ? And there, let us first deal with the case of a fraction
1/19 ) (say 1/19) whose denominator ends in 9.
ar
By the Current Method. By the Vedic one-line mental
19)1.00(.0 5 2 6 3 1 5 7 8 1 method.
m

95 (9 4 7 3 6 8 4 2 1 A. First method.

50 170

!!
xV = . 0 5 2 6 3 1 5 7 8
152
ra

38 1 1 1111
9 4 7 36842
120 180 1 11
114 171
B. Second method.
60 90 160
57 76 152 TV = . 0 5 2 6 3 1 5 7 8/947368421
1 1 1111/111
30 140 80 This is the whole working.
19 133 76
And the modus operandi is
110 70 40 explained in the next few pages.
95 57 38

150 130 20
133 114 19

170 160 1
 ( 2 )

It is thus apparent that the 18-digit recurring-decimal

answer requires 18 steps of working according to the current
system but only one by the Vedic Method.

Explanation:
The relevant Sutra reads: (Ekadhikena
Purvena) which, rendered into English, simply says: “ By
one more than the previous one” . Its application and modus
operandi are as follows:—
(i) The last digit of the denominator in this case being
1 and the previous one being 1, “ one more than the
previous one” evidently means 2.
(ii) And the preposition “ by” (in the Sutra) indicates

l
that the arithmetical operation prescribed is either
ya
multiplication or division. For, in the case of
addition and subtraction, to and from (respectively)
ar
would have been the appropriate preposition to use.
But “ by” is the preposition actually found used in the
Sutra. The inference is therefore obvious that
either multiplication or division must be enjoined.
m

And, as both the meanings are perfectly correct and

equally tenable (according to grammar and literary
ra

usage) and as there is no reason—in or from the text—

for one of the meanings being accepted and the other
one rejected, it further follows that both the processes
are actually meant. And, as a matter of fact, each
of them actually serves the purpose of the Sutra and
fits right into it (as we shall presently show, in the
immediately following explanation of the modus
operandi which enables us to arrive at the right
answer by either operation).

A. The First method :

The first method is by means of multiplication by 2
(which is the “ Ekadhika Purva” i.e. the number which is just
one more than the penultimate digit in this case).
 ( 3 )

Here, for reasons which will become clear presently,

we can know beforehand that the last digit* of the answer is
bound to be 1 ! For, the relevant rule hereon (which we shall
explain and Expound at a later stage) stipulates that the product
of the last digit of the denominator and the last digit of the
decimal equivalent of the fraction in question must invariably
end in 9. Therefore, as the last digit of the denominator in this
case is 9, it automatically follows that the last digit of the decimal
equivalent is bound to be 1 (so that the product of the multi­
plicand and the multiplier concerned may end in 9).
We, therefore, start with 1 as the last (i.e. the right-hand-
most) digit of the answer and proceed leftward continuously
multiplying by 2 (which is the Ekadhika Purva i.e. one more

l
than the penultimate digit of the denominator in this case)
ya
until a repetition of the whole operation stares us in the face
and intimates to us that we are dealing with a Recurring Decimal
and may therefore put up the usual recurring marks (dots) and
ar
stop further multiplication-work.

Our modus-operandi-chart is thus as follows:—

(i) We put down 1 as the right-hand most
m

digit 1
(ii) We multiply that last digit (1) by 2 and
ra

put the 2 down as the immediately

preceding digit 21
(iii) We multiply that 2 by 2 and put 4 down
as the next previous digit 421
(iv) We multiply that 4 by 2 and put it
down, thus 8421
(v) We multiply that 8 by 2 and get 16 as
the product. But this has two digits.
We therefore put the 6 down imme­
diately to the left of the 8 and keep the
1 on hand to be carried over to the left 6842 1
at the next step (as we always do in 1
all multiplication e.g. of 6 9 x 2 = 1 3 8
and so on).
 ( 4 )

(vi) We now multiply the 6 by 2, get 12 as

the product, add thereto the 1 (kept
to be carried over from the right at the
last step), get 13 as the consolidated
product, put the 3 down and keep the 1
on hand for carrying over to the left
at the next step. 368421
1 1
(vii) We then multiply the 3 by 2, add the
one carried over from the right one, get
7 as the consolidated product. But,
as this is a single-digit number (with
nothing to carry over to the left), we put
it down as our next multiplicand. 736842 1

l
1 1
ya
(viii- We follow this procedure continually
xviii) until we reach the 18th digit (counting
leftwards from the right), when we find
ar
that the whole decimal has begun to
repeat itself. We therefore put up the
usual recurring marks (dots) on the first
m

and the last digits of the answer (for

betokening that the whole of it is a
ra

Recurring Decimal) and stop the mul­

tiplication there.
Our chart now reads as follows
11* = . 0 5 2 6 3 1 5 7 8/9 4 7 3 6 8 4 2 i
i i m i / i n
We thus find that this answer obtained by us with the
aid of our Vedic one-line mental arithmetic is just exactly
the same as we obtained by the current method (with its 18
steps of Division-work).
In passing, we may also just mention that the current
process not only takes 18 steps of working for getting the
18 digits of the answer not to talk of the time, the energy,
the paper, the ink etc. consumed but also suffers under the
 ( 5 .)

additional and still more serious handicap that, at each step,

a probable “ trial” digit of the Quotient has to be taken on trial
for multiplying the divisor which, is sometimes found to have
played on us the scurvy trick of yielding a product larger than
the dividehcTon hand and has thus—after trial—to be discarded
in favour of another “ trial” digit and so on. In the Vedic
method just above propounded, however, there are no subtrac­
tions at all and no need for such trials, experiments etc., and no
scope for any tricks, pranks and so on but only a straightforward
multiplication of single-digit numbers; and the multiplier
is not merely a simple one but also the same throughout each
particular operation. All this lightens, facilitates and expedites
the work and turns the study of mathematics from a burden and

l
a bore into a thing of beauty and a joy for ever (so far, at any
ya
rate, as the children are concerned).
In this context, it must also be transparently clear that
ar
the long, tedious, cumbrous and clumsy methods of the current
system tend to afford greater and greater scope for the children’ s
making of mistakes (in the course of all the long multiplications,
subtractions etc. involved thei'ein); and once one figure goes
m

wrong, the rest of the work must inevitably turn out to be an

utter waste of time, energy and so on and engender feelings of
ra

fear, hatred and disgust in the children's minds.

B. The Second method :
As already indicated, the second method is of division
(instead of multiplication) by .the self-same “ Ekadhika Purva” ,
namely 2. And, as division is the exact opposite of
multiplication, it stands to reason that the operation of division
should proceed, not from right to left (as in the case of multi­
plication as expounded hereinbefore) but in the exactly opposite
direction (i.e. from left to right). And such is actually found to
be the case. Its application and modus operandi are as follows
(i) Dividing 1 (the first digit of the dividend) by 2, we
see the quotient is zero and the remainder is 1. We,
therefore, set 0 down as the first digit of the quotient
and prefix the Remainder (1) to that very digit of the
Quotient (as a sort of reverse-procedure to the
 ( 6 )

carrying-to-the-left process used in multiplication)

and thus obtain 10 as our next Dividend . 0
1
(ii) Dividing this 10 by 2, we get 5 as the second digit
of the quotient; and, as there is no remainder (to be
prefixed thereto), we take up that digit 5 itself as
our next Dividend. 05
1
(iii) So, the next quotient—digit is 2 ; and the remainder
is 1. We, therefore, put 2 down as the third digit
of the quotient and prefix the remainder (1) to that
quotient-digit (2) and thus have 12 as our next
Dividend. . 0 5 2
1 1

l
ya
(iv) This gives us 6 as quotient-digit and zero as
Remainder. So, we set 6 down as the fourth digit
of the quotient; and as there is no remainder to
ar
be prefixed thereto, we take the 6 itself as our next
digit for division. . 052631
1 1 1
m

(v) That gives us 1 and 1 as Quotient and Remainder

respectively. We therefore put 1 down as the 5th
ra

quotient-digit, prefix the 1 thereto and have 11

as our next Dividend. 05263 15
1 1 11
(vi-xvii) Carrying this process of straight, continuous division
by 2, we get 2 as the 17th quotient-digit and 0 as
remainder.
(xviii) Dividing this 2 by 2, we get l a s 052631578*)
18th quotient digit and O a s l 1 l l l l j
remainder. But this is exactly 947368421
what we began with. This 1 1 1
means that the decimal begins
to repeat itself from here.
So, we stop the mental-
division process and put down
the usual recurring symbols (dots
 ( 7 )
on ,the 1st and 18th digits) to
show that the whole of it is a
circulating decimal.
Note that, in the first method (i.e. of multiplication), each
surplus digit is carried over to the left and that, in the second
method (i.e. of division), each remainder is prefixed to the
right (i.e. just immediately to the left of the next dividend digit)*

C. A Further short-cut.:
This is not all. As a matter of fact, even this much
or rather, this little work (of mental multiplication or division)
is not really necessary. This will be self-evident from sheer
observation.

l
ya
Let us put down the first 9 digits of 052631578
the answer in one horizontal row above 947368421
and the other 9 digits in another h o r iz o n t a l --------------------------
ar
row just below and observe the fun of it. 999999999
We notice that each set of digits (in t h e --------------------------
lipper row and the lower row) totals 9. And this means that,
when just half the work has been completed (by either of the
m

Vedic one-line methods), the other half need not be obtained

by the same process but is mechanically available to us by
ra

subtracting from 9 each of the digits already obtained ! And

this means a lightening of the work still further (by 50%).
Y e s ; but how should one know that the task is exactly
half-finished so that one may stop the work (of multiplication or
division, as the case m^y be) and proceed to reel off the remain­
ing half of the answer by subtracting from 9 each of the digits
already obtained? And the answer is—as we shall demonstrate
later on—that, in either method, if and as soon as we reach the
difference between the numerator and the denominator (i.e.
19—1=18), we shall have completed exactly half the work ; and,
with this knowledge, we know exactly when and where we may
stop the multiplication or division work and when and where
we can begin reeling off the complements from 9 (as the remain­
ing digits of the answer)!
 ( 8 )
Thus both in. the multiplication method and in the division
method, we reach 18 when we have completed hg,lf the work
and can begin the mechanical-subtraction device (for the other
half).

Details o f these principles and processes and other allied

matters, we shall go into, in due course, at the proper place. In
the meantime, the student will find it both interesting and pro­
fitable to know this rule and turn it into good account from time
to time (as the occasion may demand or justify).

Second Example:
Case 2 ? Let us now take another case of a similar type (say,

l
ya
1/29 ) 1/29) where too the demominator ends in 9.
By the Current method:— By the Vedic one-line
Mental method
ar
29) 1.00(\0 3 4 4 8 2 7 5 8 6 2 0 6 8
87 9 65 5 1 7 2 4 1 3 7 8 A. First Method

130 180
jjV = - 03448275862068
m

116 174
1112 2121 222
140 60 150 9655172413793i
ra

116 58 145 111 2 1 122

240 200 50 110

B. Second Method.
232 174 29 87

80 260 210 230 Yv—

1112 2121 222
58 232 203 203
96551724 13793 1
220 280 70 270 11 2 1 12 2
203 261 58 261
This 'is the whole working
170 190 120 90 (by both the processes). The
145 174 116 87
procedures are explained on the
250 160 40 30 next page.
232 145 29 29

180 150 110 1

 ( 9 )

A. Explanation of the First Method:

Here too, the last digit of the denominator is 9 ; but
the penultimate one is 2 ; and one more than that means 3.
So, 3 is our common—i.e. uniform—multiplier this time. And,
following the same procedure as in the case of 1/19, we put
down, 1 as the last (i.e. the right-hand-most) digit of the answer
and carry on the multiplication continually (leftward) by
3 (“ carrying” the left-hand extra side-digit—if any— over to
the left) until the Recurring Decimal actually manifests itself
as such. And we find that, by our mental one-line process,
w& get the same 28 digit-answer as we obtained by 28 steps of
cumbrous and tedious working according to the current system,
as shown on the left-hand side margin on the previous page.

l
Our modus-ojperandi-chart herein reads as follows :—
ya
ar

B. Explanation of the Second Method :

m

The Division—process to be adopted here is exactly

the same as in the case of 1/19 ; but the Divisor (instead of the
ra

multiplier) is uniformly 3 all through. And the chart reads as

follows:—
.03448275862068
1112 2121 222 I
9655172413793 1\
1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 J

C. The Complements from Nine:

Here too, we find that the two halves are all complements
of each other (from 9). So, this fits in too.
*V = 0 3 4 4 8 2 7 5 8 6 2 0 6 8
9655172413793 1

99999999999999
2
 ( 10 )

Third Example:

^ l /4 9 | By the current system.

49)1.00( 020408163265306122448
98 9 7 9 5 9 1 8 3 6 7 3 4 6 9 3 8 7 7 5 51

200
196

400
392

80 120
49 98

l
310
ya
220
294 196

160 240 410

ar
147 196 392

130 440 180 190

98 392 147 147
m

320 480 330 430

294 441 294 392
ra

260 390 360 380

245 343 343 343

150 470 170 370

147 441 147 343

300 290 230 270

294 245 196 245

60 450 340 250

49 441 294 245

110 90 460 50
98 49 441 49

120 410 190 1

 < 11 )
By the Vedic one-line Mental Method :
Our multiplier or divisor (as the case may be) is now 5
(i.e. one more than the penultimate digit). So, A. (By multi­
plication leftward from the right) by 5, we have—
.020408163265306122448 1
9 7 9 5 9 18 3 6 7 3 4 6 9 3 8 7 7 5 5 1 f
3 4 2 4 4 1 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 4 3 3 22 J
OR B. (By DIVISION rightward from the left) by 5

*V = . 0 2 0 4 0 8 1 6 3 2 6 5 3 0 6 1 2 2 4 48 /
1 2 4 3 1 1 32 1 3 1 1 2 2 4 4 V
979591 836 7 3 4 6 9 3 8 7 7 5 5 ’j
N ote: —At this point, in all the 3 processep, we find that

l
ya
we have reached 48 (the difference between the
numerator and the denominator). This means that
half the work (of multiplication or division, as the
ar
case may be) has been completed and that we may
therefore stop that process and may begin the easy
and mechanical process of obtaining the remaining
m

digits of the answer (whose total number of digits is

thus found to be 21+21 =42). And yet, the remark­
able thing is that the current system takes 42 steps
ra

of elaborate and cumbrous dividing (with a series of

multiplications and subtractions and with the risk
of the failure of one or more “ trial digits” of the
Quotient and so on) while a single, straight and
continuous process—of multiplication or division— (by
a single multiplier or divisor) is quite enough in the
Vedic method.
The complements from nine are also there.
But this is not all. Our readers will doubtless be surprised
to learn—but it is an actual fact—that there are, in the Vedic
system, still simpler and easier methods by which, without
doing even the infinitely easy work explained hereinabove, we
can put down digit after digit of the answer, right from the
very start to the very end,
 ( 12 )
But, as these three examples (of jy1^, and -£?) have been
dealt with and explained at this stage, not in the contemplated
regular sequence but only by way of preliminary demonstration
for the satisfaction of a certain, natural and understandable,
nay, perfectly justifiable type of purely intellectual curiosity,
we do not propose to go—here and now—into a further detailed
and elaborate, comprehensive and exhaustive exposition of the
other astounding processes found adumbrated in the Yedic
mathematical Sutras on this particular subject. We shall
hold them over to be dealt with, at their own appropriate place,
in due course, in a later chapter.
3* ^

l
ya
ar
m
ra
 ARITHMETICAL COMPUTATIONS

Ch a p t e r II

MULTIPLICATION (by ‘ Nikhilam’ etc. Sutra)

Pass we now on to a systematic exposition of certain
salient, interesting, important and necessary formulae of the
utmost value and utility in connection with arithmetical
calculations etc., beginning with the processes and methods
described in the Vedic mathematical Sutras.
At this point, it will not be out of place for us to repeat
that there is a GENERAL formula which is simple and easy
and can be applied to all cases; but there ure also SPECIAL
al
cases—or rather, types of cases—which are simpler still and
which are, therefore, here first dealt with.
y
We may also draw the attention of all students (and
ar
teachers) of mathematics to the well-known and universal
fact that, in respect of arithmetical multiplications, the usual
present-day procedure everywhere (in schools, colleges and
m

universities) is for the children (in the primary classes) to be

told to cram up—or “ get by heart” —the multiplication-tables
(up to 16 times 16, 20x20 and so on). But, according to the
ra

Vedic system, the multiplication tables are not really required

above 5 x 5 . And a school-going pupil who knows simple
addition and subtraction (of single-digit numbers) and the
multiplication-table up to five times five, can improvise all
the necessary multiplication-tables for himself at any time and
can himself do all the requisite multiplications involving bigger
multiplicands and multipliers, with the aid of the relevant
simple Vedic formulae which enable him to get at the required
products, very easily and speedily—nay, practically, imme­
diately. The Sutras are very short; but, once one understands
them and the modus operandi inculcated therein for their
practical application, the whole thing becomes a sort of
children’s play and ceases to be a “ problem” .
 ( 14 )

1. Let us: first take up a very easy and simple illustrative

example (i.e. the multiplication of single-digit numbers above 5)
and see how this can be done without previous knowledge of the
higher multiplications of the multiplication-tables.
The Sutra: reads : frfer 3‘SRT: (Nikhilam Nava-
tascaramam Dasatah) which, literally translated, means;
“ all from 9 and the last from 10” ! We shall give a detailed
explanation, presently, of the meaning and applications of this
cryptical-sounding formula. But just now, we state and
explain the actual procedure, step by step.
Suppose we have to multiply 9 by 7. (10)
(i) We should take, as Base for our calcu- 9—1
lations, that power of 10 which is nearest to 7—3
the numbers to be multiplied. In this 6/3

l
ya
10 itself is that power ; ——
(ii) Put the two numbers 9 and 7 above and below on the
lefthand side (as shown in the working alongside
ar
here on the right-hand side margin);
(iii) Subtract each of them from the base (10) and write
down the remainders (1 and 3) on the right-hand
m

side with a connecting minus sign ( —) between them,

to show that the numbers to be multiplied are both
ra

of them less than 10.

(iv) The product will have two parts, one on the left side
and one on the right. A vertical dividing line may be
drawn for the purpose of demarcation of the two
parts.
(v) Now, the left-hand-side digit (of the answer) can be
arrived at ill one of 4 ways : —
(a) Subtract the base 10 from the sum of the given
numbers (9 and 7 i.e. 16). And put (16—10)
i.e. 6, as the left-hand part of
the answer ; 9 + 7 —10=6
OR (b) Subtract the sum of the two defici­
encies (1 + 3 = 4 ) from the b ase (10).
You get the same answer (6) again ;
1 0 -1 -3 = 6
 ( 15 )

OR (c) Cross-subtract deficiency (3) on the

second row from the original
number (9) in the first row.
And -you find that you have got
(9—3) i.e. 6 again. 9—3 = 6
OR (d) Cross-subtract in the converse
way (i.e. 1 from 7). And you
get 6 again as the left-hand side
portion of the required answer. 7—1 = 6
N ote:—This availablity of the same result in several easy
ways is a very common feature of the Vedic system
and is of great advantage and help to the student
(as it enables him to test and verify the correctness
of his answer, step by step).

l
ya
(vi) Now, vertically multiply the two deficit figures
(1 and 3). The product is 3. And this is the right-
hand-side portion of the answer. (10) 9—1
ar
(vii) Thus 9 X 7 = 6 3 . 7 -3

6/3
m

This method holds good in all cases and is, therefore,

capable of infinite application. In fact, old historical traditions
ra

describe this cross-subtraction process as having been res­

ponsible for the acceptance of the x mark as the sign of
multiplication. (10)
9 -1
X
7 -3

6 I3

As further illustrations of the same rule, note the following

examples:—
9 - 1 9 - 1 9—1 9— 1 8—2 8—2 8—2 7— 3
9—1 8—2 6—4 5—5 8—2 7—3 6—4 7—3

8/1 7/2 5/4 4/5 6/4 5/6 4/8 4/9

 ( 16 )

This proves the correctness of the formula. The algebraical

explanation for this is very simple :—
(x—a) (x—b) = x (x—a—b)-fab.
A slight difference, however, is noticeable when the
vertical multiplication of the deficit digits (for obtaining the
right-hand-side portion of the answer) yields a product con­
sisting of more than one digit. For example, if and when we
have to multiply 6 by 7, and write it down as usual:—
7 -3
6—4

3 /x2
we notice that the required vertical multiplication (of 3 and
4) gives us the product 12 (which consists of 2 digits; but, as

l
our base is 10 and the right-hand-most digit is obviously of
ya
units, we are entitled only to one digit (on the right-hand side).
This difficulty, however, is easily surmounted with the
usual multiplicational rule that the surplus portion on the
ar
left should always be “ carried” over to the left. Therefore,
in the present case, we keep the 2 of the 12 on the right hand
side and “ cairy” the 1 over to the left and change the 3 into
m

4. We thus obtain 42 as the actual product of 7 and 6.

7—3
ra

6—4

3 /x2 = 4/2

A similar procedure will naturally be required in respect

of other similar multiplications :—
8—2 7—3 6'—4 6—4
5—5 5—5 6—4 5—5

3^0 = 4/0 2/j5 = 3/5 2 /x6 = 3/6 l / 20 = 3/0

This rule of multiplication (by means of cross-subtraction

for the left-hand portion and of vertical multiplication for the
right-hand half), being an actual application of the absolute
algebraic identity :—(x-j-a) (x -f b ) = x (x + a -f b )+ a b , can be
 ( 17 )
extended further without any limitation. Thus, as regards
numbers of two digits each, we may notice the following specimen
examples :—
N.H. The base now required is 100.
91—9 93—7 93—7 93—7 89—11 91— 9 93—7
91— 9 92—8 9 3 -7 94—6 95- 5 96— 4 97—3

82/81 85/56 86/49 87/42 84/55 87/36 90/21

92—8 8 8 -1 2 78—22 88—12 56—44 67—33 25—75

98—2 98— 2 97— 3 96— 4 98— 2 97— 3 99— 1

90/16 86/24 75/66 84/48 54/88 64/99 24/75

Note 1 : — In all these cases, note that both the cross-sub­

l
tractions always give the same remainder (for the
ya
left-hand-side portion of the‘answer).
Note 2 : —Here too, note that the vertical multiplication (for
ar
the right-hand side portion of the product) may, in
some cases, yield a more-than-two-digit product;
but, with 100 as our base, we can have only two
digits on the right-hand side. We should therefore
m

adopt the same method as before (i.e. keep the

permissible two digits on the right-hand side and
ra

“ carry” the surplus or extra digit over to the left)

(as in the case of ordinary addition, compound
addition etc.) Thus—
88 — 12 88 — 12 25—75
88—12 91— 9 98— 2

76/144 = 77/44 79^08=80/08 23^50=24/50

Note .-—Also, how the meaning of the Sutra comes out in all
the examples just above dealt with and tells us how
to write down immediately the deficit figures on the
right-hand side. The rule is that all the other digits
(of the given original numbers) are to be subtracted
from 9 but the last (i.e. the right hand-most one)
3
 ( 18 )
should be deducted from 10. Thus, if 63 be the
given number, the deficit (from the base)' is 37; and
so on. This process helps us in the work of ready
on-sight subtraction and enables us to pu,t the deficiency
down immediately.

A new point has now to be taken into consideration i.e.

that, just as the process of vertical multiplication may yield
a larger number of digits in the product than is permissible
(and this contingency has been provided for), so, it may similarly
yield a product consisting of a smaller number of digits than we
are entitled to. What is the remedy herefore ? Well, this
contingency too has been provided for. And the remedy is—as
in the case of decimal multiplications—merely the filling up of

l
all such vacancies with Zeroes. Thus,
ya
99—1 98—2 96—4 97—3
97—3 99—1 98—2 97— 3
ar

96/03 97/02 94/08 94/09

m

With these 3 procedures (for meeting the 3 possible

contingencies in question i.e. of normal, abnormal and sub­
normal number of digits in the vertical-multiplication-products)
ra

and with the aid of the subtraction-rule (i.e. of all the digits from
9 and the last one from 10, for writing down the amount of the
deficiency from the base), we can extend this multiplication-rule
to numbers consisting of a larger number of digits, thus—
888—112 879—121 697—303 598—402
998—002 999—001 997—003 998—002

886/224 878/121 694/909 596/804

988—012 888— 112 112—888

988—012 991—009 998— 2

976/144 879^008 =880/008 110/17 7 6 = lll/7 7 6

 ( 19 )
988—012 998-002 9997-0003
998—002 997—003 9997—0003

986/024 995/006 9994/0009

99979—00021 999999997—000000003
99999—00001 999999997—000000003

99978/00021 999999994/000000009

Y e s ; but, in all these cases, the multiplicand and the

multiplier are just a little below a certain power of ten (taken
as the base). What about numbers which are above it ?

And the answer is that the same procedure will hold good
there too, except that, instead of cross-subtracting, we shall have

l
ya
to cross-add. And all the other rules (regarding digit-surplus,
digit-deficit etc.,) will be exactly the same as before. Thus,
12+2 13+3 11 + 1 16+6 18+8 108+8 111 + 11
ar
11 + 1 12+2 15+5 11 + 1 11+1 108+8 109+9

13/2 15/6 16/5 17/6 19/8 116/64 120/99

m

16+6 17+7 18+8

12+2 12+2 12+2
ra

18/i2 = 1 9/2 19/x4 = 2 0/4 20/x6 = 2 1 /6

18+8 19+9 1005+5 1016+16

18+8 19+9 1009+9 1006+6

26/64==32/4 28/el ==36/1 1014/045 1022/096

In passing, the algebraical principle involved may be

explained as follows :—
(x + a ) (x + b )= x (x + a + b )+ a b .
Y e s ; but if one of the numbers is above and the other
is below a power of 10 (the base taken), what then ?
The answer is that the plus and the minus will, on multi­
plication, behave as they always do and produce a nunus-product
and that the right-hand portion (obtained by vertical multi­
 ( 20 )

plication) will therefore have to be subtracted. A vinculum

may be used for making this clear. Thus,
1 2+ 2 108+8 107+7 10*2+2
8—2 97—3 93—7 98—2

10/4=96 105/24=104/76 100/49=99/51 100/04=99/96

1026+26 1033+33
997— 3 977— 3

1023/078 = 1022/922 1030/091T= 1029/901

10006+6
9999—1

10005/00006=9994/99994

l
ya
N ote:—Note that even the subtraction of the vinculum-
portion may be easily done with the aid of the Sutra
under discussion (i.e. all from 9 and the last from 10).
ar

Multiples and sub-multiples :

Yes ; but, in all these cases, we find both the multiplicand
and the multiplier, or at least one of them, very near the base
m

taken (in each case) ; and this gives us a small multiplier and
thus renders the multiplication very easy. What about the
ra

multiplication of two numbers, neither of which is near a con­

venient base ?
The needed solution for this purpose is furnished by a
small ‘Upasutra’ (or sub-formula) which is so-called because
of its practically axiomatic character.
This sub-sutra consists of only one word
(Anurupyena) which simply means “ Proportionately” . In
actual application, it connotes that, inwall cases where there
is a rational ratio-wise relationship, the ratio should be taken
into account and should lead to a proportionate multiplication
or division as the case may be.
In other words, when neither the multiplicand nor the
multiplier is sufficiently near a convenient power of 10 (which
can suitably serve us as a base), we can take a convenient mul-
 ( 21 )
tiple or sub-multiple of a suitable base, as our “ Working Base” ,
perform the necessary operation with its aid and then multiply
or divide the result proportionately (i.e. in the same proportion
as the original base may bear to the working base actually used
by us). A concrete illustration will make the modus operandi
clear.
Suppose we have to multiply 41 by 41. Both these numbers
are so far away from the base 100 that by our adopting that
as our actual base, we shall get 59 and 59 as the deficiency from
the base. And thus the consequent vertical multiplication
of 59 by 59 would prove too cumbrous a process to be per­
missible under the Vedic system and will be positively inad­
missible.

l
ya
We therefore, accept 100 merely as a theoretical base and
take sub-multiple 50 (which is conveniently near 41 and 41)
as our working basis, work the sum up accordingly and then
ar
do the proportionate multiplication or division, for getting
the correct answer.
Our chart will then take this shape :—
m

(i) 'We take 50 as our working base. 41—9

ra

(ii) By cross—subtraction, we get 32 on 41—9

the left-hand side. ----------
2)32/81

16/81

(iii) As 50 is a half of 100, we therefore

divide 32 by 2 and put 16 down as the
real left-hand-side portion of the
answer.
(iv) The right-hand-side portion (81)
remains un-affected.
(v) The answer therefore is 1681.
OR, secondly, instead of taking 100
as our theoretical base and its half (50)
 ( 22 )

as our working base (and dividing 10X 5=50

32 by 2), we may take 10, as o u r --------- — -
theoretical base and its multiple 50 as 41—9
our working base and ultimately 41—9
multiply 32 by 5 and get 160 for the
left-hand side. And as 10 was our ®2 / 1
theoretical base and we are therefore * '
entitled to only one digit on the right 160/81=1681
hand side, we retain 1 (of the 81) o n ----------------
the right hand side, “ carry” the 8 (of the 81) over
to the left, add it to the 160 already there and thus
obtain 168 as our left-hand-side portion of the answer.
The product of 41 and 41 is thus found to be 1681

l
ya
(the same as we got by the first method).

OR, thirdly, instead of taking 100 or 10 as our theoretical

base and 50 (a sub-multiple or multiple thereof) as
ar
our working base, we may take 10 and 40 as the bases
respectively and work at the multiplication as shown
(on the margin) here. And we find 10X 4=40
m

that the product is 1681 (the same as 41+1

we obtained by the first and the second 41+1
ra

methods). ------------
4 2 /1
X 4/

168/1

Thus, as we get the same answer (1681) by all the three

methods; we have option to decide—according to our own
convenience—what theoretical base and what working base
we shall select for ourselves.

As regards the principle underlying and the reason behind

the vertical-multiplication operation (on the right-hand-side)
remaining unaffected and not having to be multiplied or
divided “ proportionately” a very simple illustration will suffice
to make this clear.
 ( 23 )

Suppose we have to divide 65 successively by 2, 4, 8, 16,

32 and 64 (which bear a certain internal ratio or ratios among
themselves). We may write down our table of answers as
follows:—
6 5 _ 32I .
2 2’ 4 4 ’ 8 8 » 16 16*

65 „ 1 ,6 5 1 _ .
32= 2 32 ; and 64
^ = 1 64
^ R ts constant.

We notice that, as the denominator (i.e. the divisor) goes

on increasing in a certain ratio, the quotient goes on decreasing,
proportionately ; but the remainder remains constant. And this
is why it is rightly called the remainder (fiar®r% stanr: ll).

the principle and process of

y al
The following additional examples will serve to illustrate
(i.e. the selecting of a
multiple or sub-multiple as our working base and doing the
ar
multiplication work in this way).
(1) 49X49 (2) OR 49x49
Working Base 100/2=50 Working Base 1 0 x 5 = 5 0
m

49—1 49—1
49—1 49— 1
ra

2)48/01 48 1 1
X 5I
24/01
240 1 1

(3) 46X46 (4) OR 46X46

Working Base 100/2=50 Working Base 1 0 x 5 = 5 0
46—4 4 6 -4
46—4 46—4

2)42/16 4 2 / x«
X 5I
21/16
210 / 16=211/6
 ( 24 )

(5) 46X44 (6) OB 46x44

Working Base 1 0 x 5 = 5 0 Working Base 100/2=50
46—4 46—4
44—6 4 4 -6

4 0 / 24 2) 40 1 24
X5 /
20 / 24
200 / 24
= 202 / 4

(7) 59x59 (5) 0 5 59X59

Working Base 1 0 x 6 = 6 0 Working Base 1 0X 5= 50
59—1 59+9
5 9 -1 59+9

l
58 / 1
ya 68 / 1
X5 / 8
X 6

348 / 1 348 /1
ar
(0) OjR 59X59 (10) 23x23
Working Base 100/2=50 Working Base 10X 2 = 2 0
59+9 23+3
m

59+9 23+3

26 / 9
ra

2) 68 / 81
X2
3 4 /8 1
52 1 9

(11) 54X46 (12) OR 54X46

Working Base 1 0 x 5 = 5 0 Working Base 100/2=50
54+4 5 4+ 4
46—4 46—4

50 l i b 2) 50 / Te
X5
2 5 /T e
250 / 16*
= 2 4 /8 4
= 2 4 / 84
 ( 25 )
(13) 19X19 (14) OR 19 X 19
Working Base 1 0 x 2 = 2 0 Working Base 10X1
1 9 -1 19+9
19—1 19+9

18 / I 28 / 81
X2 / +8/

= 3 6 /1 =36 1 1

(15) 62X48 (16) Ofl 62X48

Working Base 1 0 x 4 = 4 0 Working Base 1 0 x 6 = 6 0
62+22 62+ 2
48+ 8 4 8 -1 2

70/176 50/-24
X 4/

l X6
ya
280/l76 300/-24
= 2 9 / 76
= 2 97 / 6
ar

(17) OR 62x48 (IS) OjR 62X48

Working Base 10 X 5 = 50 Working Base 100/2=50
m

62+12 62+12
48— 2 48— 2
ra

60/-24 2) 60/—24
X5
30/-24
300/-24 = 29/ 76
= 2 9 / 76

(19) 23X21 (20) OjR 23X21

Working Base 10 X 3=30 Working Base 1 0 x 2 = 2 0
23—7 23+3
2 1 -9 21+1

14/» 3 24 1 3
X3 X2 /

4 2 / 63 = 48 / 3
= 4 8 /3
 ( 26 )

(21) 249 X 245 (22)48X 49

WorkingBase 1000/4=250 Working Base 10X 5=50
249—1 48—2
2 4 5 -5 49—1

4) 244/005 47 / 2
------------- X5
=61 I 005 ------------
=235 I 2

(23) OR 48X49
Working Base 100/2=50
4 8 -2
4 9 -1

l
ya
2) 47 I 02
ar
23J I 02 = 23/52
Note:—Here 47 being odd, its division by 2 gives us a
fractional quotient 23j and that, just as half a rupee
m

or half a pound or half a dollar is taken over to the

right-hand-side (as 8 annas or 10 shillings or 50 cents),
ra

so the half here (in the 23J) is taken over to the right-
hand-side (as 50). So, the answer is 23/52.

(24) 249 X 246 (25) 229 x 230

Working Base 1000/4=250 Working Base 1000/4=250
2 4 9 -1 229—21
246—4 230—20

4)245/004 4)209 /420

61J / 004 52J /420

=61/254 =52/670
Note:— In the above two cases, the J on the left hand side is
carried over to the right hand (as 250).
 ( 27 )
The following additional (worked out) examples will serve
to further elucidate the principle and process of multiplication
according to the Vedic Sutra (‘Nikhilarti etc) and facilitate the
student’s practice -and application thereof :—

(1) 87965X99998 (2) 48X97

87965—12035 48— 52
99998— 2 97— 3

=-87963 / 24070 45 / j56

= 46 / 56

(3) 72X95 (4) 889X9998

7 2 -2 8 0889-9111
95-5 9998- 2

l
ya
67 / x40 887 / x8222
=68/40
=888 / 8222
ar

(5) 77X9988 (6) 299X299

0077— 9923 W. B. 100X3=300
m

9988— 0012 299— 1

299— 1
65 / u 9076
ra

298 / 01
-=76 / 9076 X3 /

=894 / 01

(7) 687X699 (S) 128X672

W. B. 100X7=700 W. B. 100X7=700
687—13 128— 572
699— 1 672— 28

686 / 13 100 / 10
X71 X7 / igo
=4802 / 13 700 /160ie

=860 I 16
 ( 28 )

(9) 231X582 (JO) 362X785

W. B. 100X6=600 W. B. 100X8=800
231— 369 362—438
582— 18 785— 15

213 [ 6642 347 / 6570

X6 / X8 /

1278 / 6642 2776 / 6670

=1344 / 42 =2841 / 70

(22) 532X528 (22) OjK 532X528

W. B. 100X5=500 W. B. 1000/2=500
532+ 32 532+ 32
528+ 28 528+ 28

l
560 / .96
ya 2) 560 / 896
X5 /
=280 1 896
2800 / 896
ar

=2808 / 96

(13) 532X472 (24) OE 532X472

m

W. B. 100X5=500 W. B. 1000/2=500
532+ 32 532+ 32
ra

472— 28 472— 28

504/—896 2)504/—896
X5 /
252/—896
2520/—896 =251 /104

=251 / 104

(25) 235X 247 (26) 3998X4998

W. B. 1000/4=250 W. B. 10000/2=5000
235— 15 3998—1002
247— 3 4998- 2

4) 232 / 045 2) 3996 / 2004

= 5 8 / 045 = 1998 / 2004

 ( 29 )

(17) 19X499 (18) OR 19X499

W. B. 100X5=500 W. B. 1000/2=500
19—481 19—481
499— 1 499-1

18 I 481 2) 18 I 481
X5 --------------
=9 I 481
=9 I 481

(19) 635X502 (20) 18x45

W. B. 1000/2=500 W. B. 100/2=50
635+135 18— 32
502+ 2 45— 5

l
2) 637 I 270
ya 2) 13 / x60

318J I 270 6^ I i60

ar
=318 I 770 = 8 I 10
m

(21) 389X516
W. B. 1000/2=500
ra

389— 111
516+ 16

2)405/—1776

202|/—1776

202 —1276
=200 I 724

N ote:—Most of these examples are quite easy, in fact much

easier-by the 3;s#fo?FKrPT (Urdhva-Tiryagbhyam) Sutra
which is to be expounded in the next chapter. They
have been included here, merely for demonstrating
that they too can be solved by the ‘Nikhilam’ Sutra
expounded in this chapter.
 ( 30 )

But before we actually take up the £Urdhva-Tiryak’

formula and explain, its modus operandi for multiplication, we
shall just now explain a few corollaries which arise out of the
‘Nikhilam' Sutra which is the subject-matter of this chapter.

The First Corollary :

The first corollary naturally arising out of the
‘Nikhilarh’ Sutra reads as follows :—srr^T 3PT
ii which m e a n s “ whatever the extent of its deficiency,
lessen it still further to that very extent ; and also set up the
square (of that deficiency)’ 5.
This evidently deals with the squaring of numbers. A
few elementary examples will suffice to make its meaning and
application clear :—

l
ya
Suppose we have to find the square of 9. The following
will be the successive stages in our (mental) working :—
ar
(i) We should take up the nearest power of 10 (i. e. 10
itself) as our base.
(ii) As 9 is 1 less than 10, we should decrease it still
m

further by 1 and set it (the 8) down as our left-side

portion of the answer. 81
(iii) And, on the right hand, we put down
ra

the square of that deficiency ( l a) 8/1

(iv) Thus 9a«=81 9—1
9—1
8/1
Now, let us take up the case of 82. As
8 is 2 less than 10, we lessen it still
further by 2 and get 8—2 (i. e. 8) for the
6/4
left-hand and putting 22 (= 4 ) on the 8—2
right-hand side, we say 82= 64 8—2
6 /4
In exactly the same manner, we say
72—(7—3) I 32= 4 /9 7 —3
7—3
02—(6—4) and 42-=2/x6 = 3 /6 4I9
52—(5—5) and 52—0 /25=25; and so on
 ( 31 )
Yes ; but what about numbers above 10 ? We work
exactly as before ; but, instead of reducing still further by the
deficit, we increase the number still further by the surplus
and say :—
112= (1 1 + 1 ) / l a= 12/1 11 +1
11 +1
12a= (1 2 + 2 ) /2 2= 1 4 /4 12 I 1
132= (1 3 + 3 ) /32= 1 6/9
142= (1 4 + 4 ) /4 2= 1 8 /16=19/0
152= (1 5 + 5 ) /5 2—20 /25 = 225____________ l » + »

192= (1 9 + 9 ) /9 2= 2 8 /gl= 3 6 1 ; and so on. 28/8l= 3 6 1

And then, extending the same rule to numbers of two or

l
more digits, we proceed further and say :—
ya
912=82/81 ; 922= 84/64 ; 932=86/49 ;
942=88/36 ; 952=90/25 ; 962=92/16 ;
972=94/09 ; 982=96/04 ; 992=98/01 ;
ar
1082=116/64 ; 1032=106/09 ;
9892=978/121 ; 9882=976/144 ; 9932=986/049 ;
892= 7 8 /121 =79/21 ; 882= 7 6 /144=77/44 ;
m

99892=9978/0121 ; 99842=9968/0256 ; 99932=

=9986/0049 ;
ra

2’Ae Algebraical Explanation for this is as follows :—

(a ± b )2= a 2± 2 a b + b 2
.\972= (100—3)2=10000—600+9=94/09 ;
922=(100—8)2=10000—1600+64=84/64 ;
1082= (1 0 0 + 8 )2= 1 0 0 0 0 + 1600+64=116/64 ; and so on

4 Second Algebraical Explanation is as follows :—

a2—b 2= (a + b ) (a—b)
.’ .a2==(a + b ) (a—b ) + b 2

So, if we have to obtain the square of any number (a),

we can add any number (b) to it, subtract the same number
(b) from it and multiply the two and finally add the square
of that number (b) (on the right hand side). Thus, if 97 has
 ( 32 )

to be squared, we should select such a number (b) as will, by

addition or by subtraction, give us a number ending in a zero
(or zeros) and thereby lighten the multi-multiplication work.
In the present case, if our (b) be 3, a-f-b will become 100 and
a—b will become 94. Their product is 9400 ; and b 2= 9
,\97a=94/09. This proves the Corollary.
Similarly, 922= (9 2 + 8 ) (92—8 )+ 64= 84/64 ;
932= (9 3 + 7 ) (93—7) +49= 86/49 ;
9882= (988+ 12) (988—12)+144=976/144 ;
108a= (1 0 8 + 8 ) (108—8)+64=116/64 ; and so on.

The Third Algebraical Explanation is based on the Nikhilam

Sutra and has been indicated already.
91— 9

l
ya
91— 9

82 I 81
ar

The following additional sample-examples will further

serve to enlighten the student (on this Corollary) :—
m

(1) 192 OR (2) 192 (3) 292

19+9 19—1 2 9+ 9
19+9 1 9 -1
ra

29+9

28/8l 18 / 1 38 / 81
X2 X2
=36 / 1
=36 / 1 =84 / 1

OR (4) 292 (.5) 492 OR (6) 492

29— 1 49- 1 49— 1
29—1 49— 1 49— 1

28 / 1 48 / 1 2) 48 / 01
X3 X 5/
=»24 / 0!
=84 I 1 =240 I 1
 ( 33 )
(7) 59a OR (8) 592 (9) 412
59+9 59+ 9 41+1
59+9 59+ 9 41 + 1

68 /,1 2) 68 I Si 4 2 /1
X5 ------------- X4
= 3 4 I 81
340/ 81=34/81 =168 /1

OB (10) 412 (ll) 9892 (12) 7752

41— 9 989— 11 W. B. 100X8=800
41— 9 989— 11 775— 25
775— 25
2) 32 I 81 =978 I 121
750 I e25
= 1 6 /8 1 y al X8

=6006 I 25
ar
iV ote—All the cases dealt with hereinabove are doubtless of
numbers just a little below or just a little above a
power of ten or of a multiple or sub-multiple thereof.
This corollary is specially suited for the squaring of
m

such numbers. Seemingly more complex and ’“ diffi­

cult” cases will be taken up in the next chapter
ra

(relating to the Vrdhva-Tiryak Siitra) ; and still

most “ difficult” will be explained in a still later
chapter (dealing with the squaring, cubing etc., of
bigger numbers).

The Second Corollary.

The second corollary is applicable only to a special case
under the first corollary (i. e. the squaring of numbers ending
in 5 and other cognate numbers). Its wording is exactly the
same as that of the Sutra which we used at the outset for the
conversion of vulgar fractions into their recurring decimal
equivalents (i. e. ^rfsr%^T ^f°l). The Sutra now takes a totally
different meaning altogether and, in fact, relates to a wholly
different set-up and context altogether.
 ( 34 )
Its literal meaning is the same as before (i. e. “ by one
more than the previous one” ) ; but it now relates to the
squaring of numbers ending in 5 (e. g. say, 15). 1 /5
Here, the last digit is 5 ; and the “ previous” o n e ---------
is 1. So, one more than that is 2. Now, the Sutra 2/25
in this context tells us to multiply the previous ---------
digit (1) by one more than itself (i. by 2), So the
left-hand side digit is 1 x 2 ; and the right-hand
side is the vertical-multiplication-product (i. e.
25) as usual.
Thus 152= 1 X 2/25=2/25.
Similarly, 252= 2 X 3/25=6/25 ;
352= 3 X 4/25=12/25 ;

l
ya
452= 4 X 5/25=20/25 ;
55a= 5 X 6/25=30/25 ;
652= 6 X 7/25=42/25 ;
ar
75a=7,< 8/25=56/25 ;
852= 8 X 9/25=72/25 ;
952= 9 X 10/25=90/25 ;
1052= 1 0 X 11/25=110/25 ;
m

1152=11 X 12/25=132/25 ;
1252=156/25 ; 1352=182/25 ; 145a=210/25 ;
ra

1552=240/25 ; 165a=272/25 ; 175a=306/25 ;

185a=342/25 ; 195a=380/25 ; and so on.

The Algebraical Explanation is quite simple and follows

straight-away from the Nikhilam Sutra and still more so from
the Vrdhva-Tiryak formula to be explained in the next
chapter (q.v.).

A sub-corollary to this Corollary (relating to the squaring

of numbers ending in 5) reads : (Antyayor-
Daiake'pi) and tells us that the above rule is applicable
not only to the squaring of a number ending in 5 but also to the
multiplication of two numbers whose last digits together total
10 and whose previous part is exactly the same.
 ( 35 )
For example, if the numbers to be multiplied are not 25
and 25, but, say 27 and 23 [whose last digits i.e. 7 & 3 together
total 10 and whose previous part is the same namely 2], even
then the same rule will apply (i. e. that the 2 should be multi-
plied by 3 the next higher number. Thus we have 6 as our
left-hand part of the answer ; and the right-hand one is, by
vertical multiplication (as usual)
7X 3 = 2 1 . And so 2 7 x2 3 = 6 /2 1 . 27
23

= 6/21

We can proceed further on the same lines and say :—

96x94=90/24 ; 97x93=90/21 ; 9 5 x9 2 = 9 0/1 6 ;

l
99x91=90/09 ; 37x33=12/21 ; 79X 7 i=56/09 ;
ya
87x83=72/21 ; 114x116=132/24; and so on
This sub-corollary too is based on the same Nikhilam Sutra ;
and harder examples thereof will more appropriately come under
ar

the Urdhva-Tiryak formula of the next chapter (or the still later
chapter on more difficult squarings and cubings).
m

At this point, however, it may just be pointed out that

the above rule is capable of further application and come in
handy, for the multiplication of numbers whose last digits (in
ra

sets of 2,3 and so on) together total 100, 1000 etc. For
example—
292x109=20/819 ^
793x707=560/651 I
884X 816=720^344=721/344. 3
N. B.—Note the added zero at the end of the left-hand-side of
the answer.
The Third Corollary :
Then comes a Third Corollary to the Nikhilam Sutra,
which relates to a very special type of multiplication and which
is not frequently in requisition elsewhere but is often required
in mathematical astronomy etc. The wording of the sub-
sutra (corollary) (Ekanyunena Purvena) sounds as
 ( 36 )
if it were the converse of the Ekadhika Sutra . It actually is ;
and it relates to and provides fot multiplications wherein the
multiplier-digits consist entirely of nines. It comes up under
three different headings as follows :—

The First case :

The annexed table of products produced by the single­
digit multiplier 9 gives us the necessary clue to an under­
standing of the Sutra :—
We observe that the left-hand-side is invariably
one less than the multiplicand and that the
9X 2 = 1 8
9 X 3=2 7 right-side-digit is merely the complement of the
9X 4 = 3 6 left-bandside digit from 9. And this tells us

l
9 X 5=4 5 what to do to get both the portions of the
ya
9X 6 = 5 4
product.
9 X 7=6 3
9X 8 = 7 2 The word ‘P u n a’ in this context has another
9 X 9=8 1
ar
technico-termim logical usage and simply means
9X10=9 0
the “ multiplicand” (while the word ‘Apara*
signifies the multiplier).
m

into its context i. e. that the multiplicand has to be

decreased by 1 ; and as for the right-hand side, that is
ra

mechanically available by the subtraction of the left-hand-

side from 9 (which is practically a direct application of the
Nikhilam Sutra).
As regards multiplicands and multipliers of 2 digits each,
we have the following table of products :—
11X 99=10 89 ==(11—1)/99—(11 —1) = 1089
12X99=11 88
13X 99=12 87
14X 99=13 86
15X 99=14 85
16X 99=15 84
17X 99=16 83
18X 99=17 82
19X99=18 81
20X 99=19 80
 ( 57 )

And this table shows that the rule holds good here too.
And by similar continued observation, we find that it is
uniformly applicable to all cases, where the multiplicand aiid
the multiplier consist of the same number of digits. In fact,
it is a simple application of the Nikhilam Sutra and is bound
to apply.
7 -3 77—23 979—021
9—1 99— 1 999— 1

6 /3 7 6 /2 3 978 / 021

We are thus enabled to apply the rule to all such cases

and say, for example :—
777 9879
l
1203579
ya
999 9999 9999999

776/223 9878/0121 1203578/8796421

ar

9765431 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9
9999999 9 9 999 9 9999
m

9765430/0234569 1234567808/8765432191

Such multiplications (involving multipliers of this special

ra

type) come up in advanced astronomy e t c ; and this sub­

formula (Ekanyunena Purvena) is of immense utility therein.

The Second Case :

The second case falling under this category is one wherein
the multiplicand consists of a smaller number of digits than the
multiplier. This, however, is easy enough to handle ; and all
that is necessary is to fill the blank (on the left) in with the
required number of zeroes and proceed exactly as before and
then leave the zeroes out. Thus—
7 79 798 79
99 999 99 999 9999999

?06/93 078/921 00797/99202 0000078/9999921

 ( 38 )
The Third Case :
(To be omitted during a first reading) •
The third case coming under this heading is one where
the multiplier contains a smaller number of digits than the
multiplicand. Careful observation and study of the relevant
table of products gives us the necessary clue and helps us to
understand the correct application of the Sutra to this kind of
examples.
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
11X9= 9 9 21x9=18 9 3 7 x 9 = 3 3 /3
1 2X 9= 10 8 22X9 = 19 8 4 6 x 9 = 4 1 /4
13X 9=11 7 2 3X 9 = 2 0 7 5 5 x 9 = 4 9 /5
14X9 = 12 6 24x9=21 6 6 4X 9= 57/6
15X 9= 13 5

l
2 5 X 9 —22 5 73X 9=65/7
16X9 = 14 4
ya
2 6X 9 = 2 3 4 8 2 x 9 = 7 3 /8
17x9=15 3 27X 9=24 3 9 1X 9= 81/9
1 8x9 = 16 2 28X 9=25 2 and so on
19X 9=17 1 29X 9=26 1
ar
2 0X 9 = 1 8 0 30X 9=27 0
We note here that, in the first column of products where
the multiplicand starts with 1 as its first digit the left-hand-
m

side part (of the product) is uniformly 2 less than the multi­
plicand ; that, in the second column (where the multiplicand
ra

begins with 2,) the left-hand side part of the product is exactly
3 less ; and that, in the third column (of miscellaneous first-
digits) the difference between the multiplicand and the left-
hand portion of the product is invariable one more than the
excess portion to the extreme left of the dividend.
The procedure applicable in this case is therefore evidently
as follows :—
(i) Divide the multiplicand off by a vertical line—into
a right-hand portion consisting of as many digits as
the multiplier ; and subtract from the multiplicand
one more than the whole excess portion (on the left).
This gives us the left-hand-side portion of the product.
OR take the Ekanyuna and subtract therefrom the
previous (i. e. the excess) portion on the left ; and
 ( 39 )
(ii) Subtract the right-hand-side part of the multiplicand
by the Nikhilarh rule. This will give you the right-
hand-side of the product.
The following examples will make the process clear :—
(1) 43 X 9 (2) 63 X 9 (3) 122 x 9
4: 3: 6: 3: 12 : 2 :
: -5 : 3 : -7 : 3 -1:3:2

3 : 8:7 5 : 6:7 10 : 9 : 8

(4) 112X99 (5) 11119x99 (6) 4599X99

1 : 12: 111 : 19 : 45 : 99 :
- : 2 : 12 -1 : 12 : 19 : -46 : 99

1 : 10 : 88

l
110 : 07 : 81 45 : 53 : 01
ya
(7) 15639X99 (5) 25999X999 (9) 777999X9999
156 : 39 : 25 : 999 : 77 : 7999 :
ar
-1 : 57 : 39 : -26 : 999 -78 :7999

154 : 82 : 61 24 : 973 : 001 77 : 7921 : 2001

m

(10) 111011X99 (11) 1000001X 99999

1110 : 11: 1 0:0 00 0 1:
ra

-11 : 11 :11 : -11 : 00001

1099 : 00 : 89 9 : 99990 : 99999

 Chapter III

MULTIPLICATION
{by Urdhva-Tiryak Sutra)
Having dealt in fairly sufficient detail with the application
of the Nikhilafin Sutra etc., to special cases of multiplication, we
now proceed to deal with the (Ordhva Tiryagbhyam)
Sutra which is the General Formula applicable to all cases of
multiplication (and will also be found very useful, later on,
in the division of a large number by another large number).

l
The formula itself is very short and terse, consisting of
ya
only one compound word and means “ vertically and cross­
wise” . The applications of this brief and terse Sutra are
manifolci (as will be seen again and again, later on). First we
ar

take it up in its most elementary application (namely, to Multi­

plication in general).
m

A simple example will suffice to clarify the modus

operandi thereof. Suppose we have to multiply 12 by 13.
ra

(i) We multiply the left-hand-most 12

digit (1) of the multiplicand verti- 13
catty by the left-hand-most digit —— --------
(1) of the multiplier, get their 1 :3 + 2 : 6 = 1 5 0
product (1) and set it down as t h e --------------
left-hand-most part of the answer.
(ii) We then multiply 1 and 3, and 1 and 2 cross-mse,
add the two, get 5 as the summand set it down as the
middle part of the answer ; and
(iii) We multiply 2 and 3 vertically, get 6 as their product
and put it down as the last (the right-hand-most)
part of the answer.

Thus 12X13=150.
 ( 41 )

A few other examples may also be tested and will be

found to be correct:—
(2) 12 (2) 16 (3) 21
11 11 14

1:1+2:2 1 : 1+6:6 2 : 8+1 : 4

=132 =176 =294

(4) 23 (5) 41
21 41

4 :2 + 6 : 3 16 : 4 + 4 : 1
=483 =1681

Note :—When one of the results contains more than 1 digit,

the right-hand-most digit thereof is to be put down

l
ya
there and the preceding (i. e. left-hand-side) digit (or
digits) should be carried over to the left and placed
under the previous digit (or digits) of the upper row
ar
until sufficient practice has been achieved for this
operation to be performed mentally. The digits carried
over may be shown in the working (as illustrated
m

below)
(i) 15 (2) 25 (3) 32 (4) 35 (5) 37 (6) 49
15 25 32 35 33 49
ra

105 40 924 905 901 1621

12 225 1 32 32 78

225 625 1024 1225 1221 2401

The Algebraical principle involved is as follows :—

Suppose we have to multiply (a x+ b ) by (cx+ d ). The
product is acx2+ x (a d + b c)+ b d . In other words, the first term
(i. e. the coefficient of x2) is got by vertical multiplication of a
and c ; the middle term (i. e. the coefficient of x) is obtained
by the cross-wise multiplication of a and d and of b and c and
the addition of the two products ; and the independent term
is arrived at by vertical multiplication of the absolute terms.
And, as all arithmetical numbers are merely algebraic expres-
6
 ( 42 )
sions in x (with x=10), the algebraic principle explained above
is readily applicable to arithmetical numbers too. Now, if our
multiplicand and multiplier be of 3 digits each, it merely
means that we are multiplying (ax2+ b x + c ) by (dx2+ e x + f )
(where x= 10)
ax2+ b x + c
dx2+ e x + f

adx4+ x 3 (a e + b d )+ x 2 (a f+ b e -f c d )+ x (b f+ c e )+ c f

We observe here the following facts :—

(i) that the coefficient of x 4 is got by the vertical multi­
plication of the first digit (from the left side) ;

l
(ii) that the coefficient of x3is got by the cross-wise
ya
multiplication of the first two digits and by the
addition of the two products ;
ar
(iii) that the coefficient of x 2 is obtained by the multi­
plication of the first digit of the multiplicand by the
last digit of the multiplier, of the middle one by the
m

middle one and of the last one by the first one and by
the addition of all the 3 products ;
(iv) that the coefficient of x is obtained by the cross­
ra

wise multiplication of the second digit by the third

one and conversely and by the addition of the two
products ; and
(v) that the independent term results from the vertical
multiplication of the last digit by the last digit.

We thus follow a process of ascent and of descent (going

forward with the digits on the upper row and coming rearward
with the digits on the lower row). If and when this principle
(of ordinary Algebraic multiplication) is properly understood
and carefully applied to the Arithmetical multiplication on
hand (where x stands for 10), the Urdhva Tiryak Sutra may be
deemed to have been successfully mastered in actual practice.
 ( 43 )

A few illustrations will serve to illustrate this Vrdhva-

Tiryah process of vertical and cross-wise multiplications :—
(1) 111 (2) 108 (3) 109
111 108 111

12321 10 60 4 11 099
1 6 1

11 66 4 12 099

(4) 116 (5) 116 (6) 582

114 116 231

12 1 0 4 12 32 6 10 1 3 42
1 1 2 1 13 3 3 1

13 2 2 4 13 45 6

l 13 4 4 42
ya
(?) 532 («) 785 (9) 321
472 362 52
ar

20 7 9 04 21 6 7 6 0 0 5 692
4 3 2 6 7 4 1 1 1

25 1 1 04 28 4 1 7 0 1 6 692
m

(10) 795 (11) 1021 (12) 621

547
ra

362 2103

21 9 3 8 0 2147163 30 4 5 87
6 8 4 1 3 5 1

28 7 7 9 0 33 9 6 87

(13) 6471 (14) 8 7 2 6 5

6212 3 2 11 7

36 6 6 6 752 2 4 7 8 7 2 7 5 7 5
3 5 3 1 1 3 2 3 9 6 2 4 3

40 1 9 7 852 2 8 0 2 6 9 0 0 0 5
N.B.—It need hardly be mentioned that we can carry out this
(tJrdhva-Tiryak) process of multiplication from left to
right or from right to left (as we prefer). All the diffe-
 ( 44 )
rence will be that, in the former case, two-line multip­
lication will be necessary (at least mentally) while, in
the latter case, one-line multiplication will suffice., (but
careful practice is necessary).

Owing to their relevancy to this context, a few Algebraic

examples (of the Vrdhva-Tiryak type) are being given.
(J) a+b
a -f9 b

a*+10 a b + 9 b 2

(2) a+3b
5a+7b

l
ya
5aa+ 2 2a b + 2 1b 2
ar
(3) 3xa+ 5 x + 7
4x2+ 7 x -f6

12x«+41x8+ 8 1 x 2+ 7 9 x -f4 2
m

(4) x5+ 3 x 4+ 5 x 8+ 3 x 2- f x + l
ra

7x8+ 5 x 4+ 3 x 8- f x a+ 3 x + 5

7x10-f26 x»+ 5 3x8+ 5 6 x 7+ 4 3 x «-H 0 x5+ 4 1 x H 3 8 x 3+ 1 9x2

+8x+5

Note :—I f and when a power of x is absent, it should be

given a zero coefficient; and the work should be
proceeded with exactly as before. For example, for
(7x8+ 5 x + 1 )(3 x 8+ x 24-3), we work as follows :—
7x8-f0 + 5 x + l
3x8+ x 2-B )+ 3

21x6-f7 x 6+ 1 5 x 4+ 2 9 x 8- f x 2+ 1 5 x + 3
 ( 45 )

The use of the Vinculum :

It may, in general, be stated that multiplications by digits
higher than 5 may some times be facilitated by the use of the
vinculum. The following example will illustrate this :—
(1) 576 (2) OR 624 : But the vinculum process is
214 214 : one which the student must
----------------: very carefully practise, before
109944 1224^6 : he resorts to it and relies
1332 4-111 : on it.
123264 123264

Miscellaneous Examples :
There being so many methods of multiplication one of them

l
(the Urdhva-Tiryak one) being perfectly general and therefore
ya
applicable to all cases and the others (the Nikhilarh one, the
Yavadunam etc.) being of use in certain special cases only, it is
for the student to think of and weigh all the possible alternative
ar
processes available, make up his mind as to the simplest method
in each particular case and apply the formula prescribed therefor.
We now conclude this chapter with a number of misce­
m

llaneous examples and with our own “ running comments”

thereon giving the students the necessary experience for making
ra

the best possible selection from amongst the various alternative

mfithod > in question :—
(i) 73X37
(i) By Urdhva-Tiryak rule, 73
37
2181
52
=2701
or (ii) by the same metixod but with 1 3 3
the use of the vinculum. 0 4 3*

0 4 5 1 9
1 2
Evidently, the former is better. = 2 7 0 1
 ( 46 )
(2) 94X81
(i) By Ordhava-Tiryak, 94 (ii) Or 114
81 121

7214=7614 13794=7614
4 ----------------
(ii) By ibid (with t h e ------
use of the Vinculum)
Evidently the former is better ; but Or
(iii) The Nikhilam Method is still better :—81—19
94— 6

7 5 /114=7614

(3) 123X89

l
ya
(i) 123 Or (ii) 123 Or (iii) 123+23
089 111 89 — 11 }
ar
08527 11053 112/253f
242 = 10947 ------------ )
110/53=109/47
= 10947
m

(4) 652X43
ra

(i) 652 (ii) The Vinculnm method is manifestly

043 cumbrous in this case and need not
--------- be worked out.
04836 _
232 (1352
--------- X0043)
28036
(iii) The Nikhilam method may be used and will be quite
easy ; but we will have to take a multiple of 43 which will bring
it very near 1000. Such a multiple is 4 3 x 2 3 = 9 8 9 ;
and we can work with it and finally 652—348
divide the whole thing out by 23. 989—011
This gives us the same answer (23/036). —— —
641/3828
23) 644/828
28/036
 ( 47 )

Therefore, the TTrdhva (general) process is obviously the

best (in this case).
(5) 123x112 (Nikhilam)
(i) 123 (ii) As all the digists (iii) 123+23
112 are within 5, the 112+12
— — Vinculum m e t h o d -------------
13276 is manifestly out 135 / a76
5 of place. =137 / 76

=13776
Both the first and the third methods seem equally good.
(6) 99x99 (ii) 101 (iii) 99—1 (iv) The
(i) 99 101 9 9 -1 ( Yavadunam)
method is
also quite
10201
l
=98/01
ya
8121 =9801 appropriate' appropriate
168 & easy
992=98/01
=9801
ar

(7) 246 (8) 222 (9) 642 (10) 321

131 143 131 213
m

20026 20646 62002 67373

122 111 221 1
ra

=32226 =31746 =84102 =68373

(In all these 4 cases (Nos. 7—10), the General formula fits
in at once).
(11) 889X898
(i) 889 Or (ii) 1111 Or (iii) 889— 111 * 111+11
898 1102 898— 102 102+ 2

646852 1202322 787 I u 322 113 1 22

13047
21
--------- =798/322 =798 / 322
=798322
Note :—Here in (iii) Nikhilam method, the vertical multiplic­
ation of 111 and 102 is also performed in the same
manner (as shown in the *marked margin).
 ( 48 )

(12) (i) 576Or (ii) Vinculum Or (iii)

X.328 method 576—424 N.B. 984 being
--------- inappro- 984— 16 ~3x328, we
151288 priate ---------------- have made
3764 3)560 / e784 use of it &
then divi­
=188928 =188 I 928 ded out by 3
(13) 817X332 Or
(i) 817 (ii) Vinculum Or (iii) .’. 332X3=996
332 method may .-. 817—183
also be used. 996—4
247034
2421 3)813/732
=271244 =271/244
(14) 989X989 Or (ii) Or (iii) Or (iv) (Ya­

l
(i) 989 Vinculum method 989— 11 vadunam).
989
ya
also useful_ 989— 11 9892=978 1
1011 121 This is
814641 1011 =978 I 121 the best.
14248
ar
21 1022121
=978/121
==978121
(15) 8989X8898 Or ( i i ) ___ Or (iii)
m

(i) 8989 1 1 ® 1 L 8989—1011

8898 1110 2 8898—1102
ra

64681652 1 2 0 02 4 1 22 7887 14122*

1308147 H I / ____
2221 =7 9 9 8 4 1 2 2
7998 I 4122
=79984122 * 1011+11
1102+102
1113/J.122
=1114/ 122_______
(16) 213X213 Or (ii) Or 213+ 13 N . B . The di-
(i) 213 Vinculum 213+ 13 gits being
213 method not —---------- small, the
suitable. 226 I/ ,69
x69 general
44369 X2 I formula is
1 always
452 I x69 best.
=45369 =453 I 69
 PRACTICAL APPLICATION
IN

“ COMPOUND MULTIPLICATION”
A. Square Measure, Cubic Measure Etc.
This is not a separate subject, all by itself. But it is often
of practical interest and importance, even to lay people and
deserves oar attention on that score. We therefore deal with it
briefly.

Areas of Rectangles.
Suppose we have to know the area of a Rectangular piece

l
ya
of land whose length and breadth are 7' 8 " and 5' 11* respec­
tively.
According to the conventional method, we put both these
ar

measurements into uniform shape (either as inches or as vulgar

fractions of feet—preferably the latter) and say :—
92 w 71 0532 1633
m

Are*—12x 12— 1 4 4 — 3 0
36) 1633 (45 sq. ft
ra

144
193
180 ; /.Area=45 sq. ft. 52 sq. in.
13
X 144
36) 1872 (52 sq. in.
36
72
72

In the Vedic method, however, we make use of the

Algebraical multiplication and the Aiyam Sutra and say :—
Area=5x-f-H
| =35x2+117x+88
X 7x-f8
7
 ( 60 )

Splitting the middle term (by dividing by 12), we get 9

and 9 as Q and It
,\E=35 x 2+ (9 X 1 2 + 9 ) x +88
= 4 4 x2+ (9 X 12) x+ 8 8
= 4 4 sq. ft.+196 sq. in.
= 4 5 sq. ft1+ 5 2 sq. in.
And the whole work can be done mentally :
(2) Similarly 3' 7" \ = 1 5 x 2+ 6 5 x + 7 0
XS'IO" J = 2 0 x 2+ (5 X 12)+70
—20 sq. ft.+130 sq. in.

and (3) 7 x +11 ? = 3 5 x 2+ l l l x + 8 8

X5 x + 8 J = 4 4 sq. ft.+124 sq. in.

Volumes o f Pandlelepipeds:

l
We can extend the same method to sums relating to 3
ya
dimensions also. Suppose we have to find the volume of a
parallelepiped whose dimensions are 3' 7", 5' 10" and 7' 2".
ar
By the customary method, we will say :—
(with all the big multiplication and
' —12 12 12 divisions involved). But, by the Vedic
process, we have
m

3 x + 7 I =20 x 2+ 1 0 x + 1 0
5x+10 J 7 x +2
ra

140x8+110x2+ 9 0 x + 2 0
=149x8+ 9 x 2+ 7 x + 8
=149 cub. ft and 1388 cub. in.
Thus, even in these small computations, the customary
method seems to have a natural or ingrained bias in favour of
needlessly big multiplications, divisions, vulgar fractions etc.,
etc., for their own sake. The Vedic Sutras, however, help us
to avoid these and make the work a pleasure and not an
infliction.
 PRACTICE AND PROPORTION
IN

COMPOUND MULTIPLICATION.

The same procedure under the (Urdhva-Tiryak

Sutra) is readily applicable to most questions which come
under the headings “ Simple Practice” and “ Compound
Practice” , wherein “ ALIQUOT” parts are taken and many steps
of working are resorted to under the current system but wherein
according to the Vedic method, all of it is mental Arithmetic,

For example, suppose the question is :—

l
ya
“ In a certain investment, each rupee invested brings
Rupees two and five annas to the investor. How much will an
outlay of Rs. 4 and annas nine therein yield ?”
ar

THE FIRST CONVENTIONAL METHOD.

By Means of Aliquot Parts.

m

Rs. As. Ps.

For One Rupee 2—5—0
ra

For 4 Rupees 9—4—0

8 A s.=J of Re. 1 1—2—6
1 a = | of 8 As. 0 - 2 —3|

Total io—8 -9 |
for Rs. 4 and
annas 9.

Second Current Method.

(By Simple Proportion)
Rs. 2 - 5 - 0 = | | ;
and Rs. 4—9—0=R s.
V On Re 1, the yield is Rs. $$
.'.On Rs. £§, the yield is Rs. §£ x $ | = R s.
 ( 52 )
256) 2701 (10—8—91
256
141
X16
256) 2045 ( 8
2304
208
X 12
256) 2496 ( 9
2304

192 = 3 /4
256
By the Vedic one-line method :
2x + 5

l
ya
4x + 9
8x2 I 38x/45
ar
Splitting the middle term (or by simple division from
right to left) :
lOx2+ 0x + 2^ |
m

=R s. 10 and 8^f annas

A few more instances may be taken :—

ra

(1) Rs. 2/5 xRs. 2/5

2—5
2—5
4/20/25=R s. 5/5xes annas
(2) Rs. 4/9 X Rs. 4/9
4—9
4—9
16/72/81 =R s. 2 0 /1 3 ^ annas
(3) Rs. 16/9 XRs. 16/9
16—9
16—9
256/288/81 =R s. 274/ annas 5 jV
 ( 53 )

(4) Rs. 4/13 X Rs. 4/13

(i) By the current ‘Practice* method
Rs.—as
For Re. 1 4—13
For Rs. 4 19— 4
8 annas=J of Re I 2— 6£
4 annas=f of 8 As. 1— 3J
1 a = | of 4 annas 0— 4||

Total 23— 2T9ff

(ii) By the current ‘Proportion’ method.

Rs. 4/13 = Rs. ^

l
lo
. 7 7 v 77_5929
ya
" 1 6 16 256
ar
256) 5929 (23—2 TB
512
- 809
768
m

41
X16
ra

256) 656 (2
512
144
256 = 9 /16
(iii) By the one-line Vedic Method.
4 —13
4—13
16/104/169=Rs. 23/2tV annas
N.B.—Questions relating to paving, carpeting, ornamenting etc.,
etc. (which are-under the current system usually dealt
with by the ‘Practice’ method or by the ‘Proportion’
process) can all be readily answered by the Vrdhva-
Tiryak method.
 ( M )

For example, suppose the question is :—

At the rate of 7 annas 9 pies per foot, what will be the
ost for 8 yards 1 foot 3 inches ?
25—3
7 -9

175/240/27
=195 annas 8$ pies
=R s. 12/3/8|

l
ya
ar
m
ra
 Chapter IV
DIVISION (by the Nikhilam Method).
Having dealt with. Multiplication at fairly considerable
length, we now go on to Division; and there we start with
the Nikhihm method (which is a special one).
Suppose we have to divide a number of dividends (of two
digits each) successively by the same Divisor 9 we make a
chart therefor as follows :—
(1) 9) 1/2 (2) 9) 2/1 (3) 9) S/3
11 /2 /3
1/3 2/3 3/6
(4) 9) 4/0 (5) 9) 5/2 (6) 9) 6/1
M /5 /«

l
4/4
ya 5/7 6/7
(7) 9) 7/0 (8) 9) 8/0
/7 /8
ar
7/7 8/8
Let us first split each dividend into a left-hand part
for the Quotient and a right-hand part for the Remainder and
m

divide them by a vertical line.

In all these particular cases, we observe that the first
ra

digit of the Dividend becomes the Quotient and the sum of

the two digits becomes the Remainder. This means that we
can mechanically take the first digit down for the Quotient-
column and that, by adding the quotient to the second digit,
we can get the Remainder.
Next, we take as Dividends, another set of bigger num­
bers of 3 digits each and make a chart of them as follows:—
(1) 9) 10/3 (2) 9) 11/3 (3) 9) 12/4
1/1 1/2 1/3
11/4 12/5 ________________ 13/7
(4) 9) 16/0 (5) 9) 21/1 (6) 9) 31/1
1/7 2/3 3/4
17/7 23/4 34/5
 ( 56 )
In these cases, we note that the Remainder and the sum
of the digits are still the same and that, by taking the first
digit of the Dividend down mechanically and adding it to the
second digit of the dividend, we get the second digit of the
quotient and that by adding it to the third digit of the dividend,
we obtain the remainder.
And then, by extending this procedure to still bigger
numbers (consisting of still more digits), we are able to get
the quotient and remainder correctly. For example,
(1) 9 ) 1203/1 (2) 9 ) 1230/1 (3) 9) 120021/2
133/6 136/6 13335/6

1336/7 1366/7 133356/8

And, thereafter, we take a few more cases as follows:—

l
(1) 9) 1/8
ya
(2) 9) 22/5 (3) 9) 13/6
/I 2/4 1/4

1/9 24/9 14/10

ar
(4) 9) 23/7
2/5
m

25/12
But in all these cases, we find that the Remainder is the
ra

same as or greater than the Divisor. As this is not permissible,

we re-divide the Remainder by 9, carry the quotient over to
the Quotient column and retain the final Remainder in the
Remainder cloumn, as follows:—
(1) 9) 1/8 (2) 9) 22/5 (3) 9) 13/6
/I 2/4 1/4

1/9 24/9 14/10

2/0 25/0 15 I 1
(4) 9) 23/7
2/5
25/12
26 I 3
a

( 57 )

We also notice that, when the Remainder is greater than the

Divisor, we can do the consequent final Division by the same
method, as follows:—
(1) 9) 13/6 (2) 9) 23/7 (3) 9) 101164/9
1/4 2/5 11239/13

14/1/0 25/1/2 1123913/2/2

_ /l_ ____A_______________ /2

1/1 1/3 2/4

15/ 1 26 / 3 112405 /4

We next take up the next lower numbers (8, 7 etc.) as our Divisors
and note the results, as follows:—
l
ya
(1) 8) 2/3 (2) 7) 1/2 (3) 6) 1/1

/4 /3 M
ar

2/7 1/5 1/5

m

Here we observe that, on taking the first digit of the Dividend

down mechanically, we do not get the Remainder by adding
that digit of the quotient to the second digit of the dividend
ra

but have to add to it twice, thrice or 4 times the quotient­

digit already taken down. In other words, we have to multiply
the quotient-digit by 2 in the case of 8, by 3 in the case of 7,
by 4 in the case of 6 and so on. And this again means that
we have to multiply the quotient-digit by the Divisor’s comple­
ment from 10.

And this suggests that the Nikhilam rule (about the sub­
traction of all from 9 and of the last from 10) is at work ; and,
to make sure of it, we try with bigger divisions, as follows:

(1) 89) 1/11 (2) 73) 1/11 (3) 888) 1/234

11 /H 27 /27 112 /112

1/22 1/38 1/346

8
 ( 58 )

(4) (5)
8888) 1/2345 7999) 1/2345 8897), 1/2345
<6 ) ,
012 /iii2 2001 /2001 1103 A 103

1/3457 1/4346 1/3448

(8) (9)
8897) 1/1203 7989) 1/0102 899997) 1/010101
1103 /1 103 2011 /2011 100003 I100003

1/2306 1/2113 1/110104

(10) (11) (12)
89) 11/11 89) 100/13 882) 12/345
ii i /i n 11/ 112 1/12
1/1 /336
/22 /22

l 13/801
ya
12/43 112/45
(13) (14) (15)
8997) 21/0012 8998) 30/0000 8888) 10/1020
ar
1003 2/006 1002 3/006 1112 1/112
/3009 /3006 /1112
23/3081 33/3066 11/3252
m

(16) (17) (18>

8987 ) 20/0165 899) 10/102 89998) 20/02002
2/0004
ra

1013 2/026 101 1/01 10002

/2026 /101 /20004
22/2451 11/213 22/22046
(19) (20) (21)
89997) 10/10101 89997) 12/34567 88987) 10/30007
10003 1/0003 10003 1/0003 01013 0/1013
/10003 /30009 /OOOOO
11/20134 13/64606 10/40137
(22) (23)
99979) 111/11111 88) 110/01
00021 00/021 12 121
0/0021 2/4
/00021 /48
111/13442 124/89
=125/1
 ( 69 )
In all the above examples, we have deliberately taken as
Divisiors, numbers containing big digits. The reason therefor
is as follows :—
(i) It is in such division (by big divisions) that the
student finds his chief difficulty, because he has to
multiply long big numbers by the “trial” digit of
the quotient at every step and subtract that result
from each dividend at each step ; but, in our method
(of the Nikhilam formula), the bigger the digits,
the smaller will be the required complement (from
9 or 10 as the case may be); and the multiplication-
task is lightened thereby.

l
(ii) There is no subtraction to be done at a ll!
ya
(iii) And, even as regards the multiplication, we have
no multiplication of numbers by numbers as such
but only of a single digit by a single digit, with the
ar
pleasant consequence that, at no stage, is a student
called upon to multiply more than 9 by more than
9. In other words, 9 x 9 = 8 1 , is the utmost multi­
m

plication he has to perform.

A single sample example will suffice to prove this:

ra

(24) 9819) 2 01 37
0181 02162

2 04 9 9

Note:—In this case, the product of 8 and 2 is written down in

its proper place, as 16 (with no “carrying” over to the
left) and so on.

Thus, in our “division” — process (by the Nikhilam

formula), we perform only small single-digit multiplications;
we do no subtraction and no division at all; and yet we readily
obtain the required quotient and the required Remainder.
In fact, we have accomplished our division-work in full, without
actually doing any division at a ll!
 ( 60 )

As for divisors consisting of small digits, another simple

formula will serve our purpose and is to be dealt with in the
next chapter. Just at present (in this chapter), we deal only
with big divisors and explain how simple and easy such difficult
multiplications can be made (with the aid of the Nikhilam
SUtra).

And herein, we take up a few more illustrative examples

relating to the cases (already referred to) wherein the Remainder
exceeds the Divisor and explain the process, by which this
difficulty can be easily surmounted (by further application of
the same Nikhilam method)
(25) 88) 1 98
12

l
12
ya
1 110
ar
The Remainder here (110) being greater than the Divisor (88)
we have to divide 110 by 88 and get the quotient and the final
remainder and carry the former over and add it to the quotient
m

already obtained. Thus, we say :—

88) 1 10
ra

12 12
1 22

so, we add the newly obtained 1 to the previously obtained 1 ;

and put down 2 as the quotient and 22 as the Remainder.

This double process can be combined into one as follows :—

88) 1 98
12 12
1 1/10
112
1 1/22

2 122
 ( 61 )
A few more illustrations will serve to help the student in
practising this method :—

89997) 12 94567 (27) 97) 1 98

10003 1 0003 03 03
30009
1 1 01
13 1 24606 03
10003
04
14 34609

l
(28) 99979) 111 99171
00021 00 021
ya
0 0021
00021
ar

111 1 01502
00021
m

112 01523
ra

Thus, even the whole lengthy operation (of division of 11199171

by 99979) involves no division and no subtraction and consists
of a few multiplications of single digits by single digits and a
little addition (of an equally easy character).

Y es; this is all good enough so far as it go£s; but it

provides only for a particular type (namely, of divisions in­
volving large-digit numbers). Can it help us in other divisions
(i.e. those which involve small-digit divisors) ?

The answer is a candidly emphatic and unequivocal No.

An actual sample specimen will prove this:—
 ( «2 )

Suppose we have to divide 1011 by 23. By the Nikhilam

method, the working will be as follows:—
(29) 23) 10 1 1
77 7 7
4 9 4 9

17 6 2 0
42 42

23 4 8 2
28 28

27 3 9 0
21 21

l
ya
30 3 2 1
21 21
ar

33 2 6 2
14 14
m

35 2 0 6
14 14
ra

37 1 6 0
7 7

38 1 3 7
7 7

39 1 1 4

4 —9 2 (4 times the divisor)

43 2 2

This is manifestly not only too long and cumbrous but much
more so than the current system (which, in this particular
case, is indisputably shorter and easier).
 ( «3 )

In such a case, we can use a multiple of the divisor and

finally multiply again (by the AnurUpya rule). Thus,
(30) 2 3X 4 = 9 2 ) 10 11
08 0 8

10 91
X4

40 -6 9

43 22

But even this is too long and cumbrous; and this is a suitable
case for the application of the <uwt (Pardvartya) method.
This we proceed to explain in the next chapter.

l
ya
ar
m
ra
 C h a p te r V

DIVISION (by the Paravartya method)

We have thus found that, although admirably suited for
application in the special or particular cases wherein the divisor-
digits are big ones, yet the Nikhilam method does not help
us in the other cases (namely, those wherein the divisor consists
of small digits). The last example (with 23 as divisor) at the end
of the last chapter has made this perfectly clear. Hence the
need for a formula which will cover the other cases. And this is
found provided for in the Paravartya SiUra, which is a special-
case formula, which reads “ Paravartya Yqjayet” and which
means “ Transpose and apply” .

al
The well-known rule relating to transposition enjoins
invariable change of sign with every change of side. Thus-f
y
becomes—and conversely ; and x becomes -r and conversely. In
the current system, this law is known but only in its application
ar
to the transposition of terms from left to right and conversely
and from numerator to denominator and conversely (in
connection with the solution of equations, the proving of
m

Identities etc., e t c ; and also with regard to the Remainder

Theorem, Horner’s process of Synthetic Division etc. etc.)
ra

According to the Vedic system, however, it has a number of

applications, one of which is discussed in the present chapter.

At this point, we may make a reference to the Remainder

Theorem and Horner’s process and then pass on to the other
most interesting applications of the Paravartya Sutra.

The Remainder Theorem:

We may begin this part of this exposition with a simple

proof o f the Remainder Theorem, as follows:
I f E, D, Q & R be the Dividend, the Divisor, the
Quotient and the Remainder in a case of division and if
the divisor is (x—p), we may put this relationship
down algebraically as follows :—
E = D Q + R i.e. E = Q ( x - p ) + R .

r
 ( 65 )
And if we put x = p , x—p becomes zero; and the
Identity takes the shape, E = R . In other words, the
given expression E itself (with p substituted for x)
will be the Remainder.
Thus, the given expression E (i.e. the Dividend itself)
(with p substituted for x) automatically becomes the remainder.
And p is automatically available by putting x —p = 0 i.e. by
merely reversing the sign of the—p (which is the absolute term
in the binomial divisor). In general terms, this means that,
if c be axn+ b x n’"1+ c x n” 2+ d x I1~3 etc. and if D be x —p, the
remainder is apn+ b p n~1+ c p n~2+ d p n“' 3 and so on (i.e. E with
p substituted for x). This is the Remainder Theorem.
Horner’s process of Synthetic Division carries this still

l
further and tells us the quotient too. It is, however, only a
ya
very small part of the Paravartya formula (which goes much
farther and is capable of numerous applications in other
directions also).
ar

Now, suppose we have to divide

(12x2—8x— 32) by (x—2). x —-2 12x2—8x—32
24+32
m

12x + 1 6 0
ra

We put x —2 (the Divsior) down on the left (as usual); just

below it, we put down the—2 with its sign changed ; and we
do the multiplication work just exactly as we did in the
previous chapter.
A few more algebraic examples may also be taken :—
(1) Divide 7x2+ 5 x + 3 by x —1 x —1 7x2+ 5 x + 3

7 + 12

7x+12 15

/.The quotient is 7x+12 ; and the Remainder is 15.

(2) x + 1 7x2+ 5 x + 3 (3) x —2 x 3+ 7 x 2+ 6x + 5
~ZT —7 +2 2~ 2 +18 +48

7x - 2 +5 x 2+ 9 x + 24 53
 ( 66 )

(4) x —3 x3—x a+ 7x +3
3 + 6 39

x 2+ 2 + 13 42

(5) x -J x3— 3x2+10x —7

5 5 +10 100

x 2+ 2 +20 +93

At this stage, the student should practise the whole

process as a MENTAL exercise (in respect of binomial divisors
at any rate). For example, with regard to the division of
(12x2—8x—32) by the binomial (x—2), one should be able
to s a y :—

l
12x2~ 8 x —32= 1 2 and R==0
ya
x —2
The procedure is as follows:—
12x2
ar
(i) ■ ^..gives 12 as the first coefficient in the quotient;

and we put it dow n;

(ii) multiply 12 by —2, reverse the sign and add to the
m

next coefficient on the top (numerator). Thus

12 x —2 = —24, Reversed, it is 24. Add—8 and
ra

obtain 16 as the next coefficient of the Quotient.

(iii) multiply 16 b y —2 ; reverse the sign and add to the
next coefficient on top. Thus 16x—2 = —32;
Reversed, it is 32; add—32 and obtain 0 as the
Remainder
7x2+ 5 x4 -3
Similarly, (1) — ^— .\ Q = 7 x+ 1 2 ; and R = 1 5

(2) T * * + j^ + > .\ Q = 7 x—2 ; and R = 5

(») ,.< J -x .+ t a + 3 4 ;
and R = 5 3
(4) X, - x, + 7 x+ I , Q- i M _iix+ 1>;

and R = 4 2
 ( 67 )

and (,) * ‘ - 3* a+ l ° * - 7 Q = lH 2 l+ a o .
R =93
This direct and straight application
of the Paravartya Sutra should be so
well practised as to become very
simple MENTAL arithmetic. And
the student should be able to say
at once :—

(«) *J+ ^ , + f + 11 ,.Q = * * + t a + 27;

R = «5 :
and (,) ? 4- y + 7 r - - j j x + 7
' ' x —4

l + l l x + 4 9 ; and R =203.
ya
Extending this process to the case of divisors containing
three terms, we should follow the same method, but should also
ar
take care to reverse the signs of the coefficient in all the other
terms (except the first):—
(1) x2—x —1 x4—x3+ x 2 -|-3x-f5
m

~T+1 1+1
0 +0
2 +2
ra

x 2+ 0 + 2 +5x+7 Q = x 2+ 2 ; and
-------------------------------- R =5x+7
(2) x a— 2x—9 6x*+13xs+ 3 9 x 2 + 3 7 x + 45
2+9 12 + 54
50 +225
286+1287
6x2+ 25 +143 +548+1332
Q = 6 x 2+25x+ 143 ; and R=548x+1332
(3) x2+ l 2x«—3x8+ 0 —3 x - 2
0 —1 0 —2 Note the zero x 2
0 +3 and the zero x
0 +2 carefully.

2 —3 —2 0+0 .-.Q =2x2-3 x-2 a n d R = 0

 ( W )
(4) xa—2 x + l x* —3xJ +3x— 1
2 -1 2 —1
—2 + 1

1 —1 0+0 .*.Q=*x — 1 ; and R = 0

(5) x * + 2 x + 4 2x8+ 9x* +18X +20

-2 -4 -4 - 8
-1 0 -2 0

2 +5 0 + 0 .\Q = 2 x + 5 ; & R = 0

(6) xa—x a+ 2 x —3 x 6+ 0 + x 8 —7x2+ 0 + 9 Note the

1—2 + 3 1 -2 +3 zero x4 and
1 -2 +3 the zero x
0 +0+0 carefully.

l
ya
1+1+0 -6 +3+9

.\ Q = x 2+ x ; and R = —6x2+ 3 x + 9
ar
(7) x 2—x + 1 x4+ 0 + x 2 +0+1 Note the zero x8 and
l —l 1— 1 zero x carefully.
1 -1
m

1-1
V---------------------------------
1+1+1 0 + 0 .\ Q = x * + x + l ; and R = 0
ra

(8) Xs —2x2+ l — 2x5—7x4+ 2 x 3 + 1 8 x 2- 3 x - 8 Note

2 + 0 —1 —4 +0 + 2 the zero
—22 + 0 +11 x in the
—40 + 0 + 20 Divisor
------------------ 1-------------------------------carefully
-2 -11 -20 -20 + 8+12
•\Q=—2x2—l l x —20 ; and R = —20x2+ 8 x + 1 2

In all the above cases, the first coefficient in the divisor

happened to be 1 ; and therefore there was no risk of fractional
coefficients coming in. But what about the cases wherein,
the first coefficient not being unity, fractions will have to be
reckoned with ?
 ( «» )
The answer is that all the work may be done as before,
with a simple addition to the effect that every coefficient in
the answer must be divided by the first coefficient of the Divisor.
Thus, 2x—4 —4x*—7x*+9x —12
~~T~ - 8 —30 - 4 2

-2 -1 5 /2 -2 1 /2 -5 4

Q = —2xa—7|x—10$ ; and R = —54

This, however, means a halving of each coefficient (at every
step); and this is not only more cumbrous but also likely to
lead to confusion, reduplication etc.
The better method therefore would be to divide the Divisor
itself at the very outset by its first coefficient, complete the

l
ya
working and divide it all off again, once for all at the
end. Thus :— 2x—4 —4x8—7x2+ 9 x —12 N.B.— Note
x —2 —8 —30 —42 that the R
always
ar
2)—4 —15 —21 - 5 4 remains
—2 —7J —21/2—54 constant.
m

Two more illustrative examples may be taken

(1) 3)3x—7 3xa—x — 5
ra

x=§j 7 +1*
3)3x+6 9 . \ Q * x + 2 ; and R«»9
x+2 9~

(2) 2 )2xa—3x + 1 2x6—9x4+ 5 x*+ 1 6x« —l « x + 3 «

X2—ljx + % 3 —1________
H —i —9 + 3

7* +2*
2) 2 —6 —5 + l l £ 17J—5f
I —3—2$+5| 15/4+30J

Q = x 8- 3 x * X $ j s + 5 f ; and R = 3 fx + 3 0 £
N.B. :—Note that R is constant in every case.
 ( 70 )

Arithmetical Applications (Miscellaneous) :

We shall now take up a number of Arithmetical applications
and get a clue as to the utility and jurisdiction of the Nikhilam
formula and why and where we have to apply the Pardvartya
Sutra.
(1) Divide 1234 by 112
112 1 234
888 888

1 1 122

2 1 122
888
3 010

3+8
y
898
—896
888 al
ar
11 2

But this is too cumbrous. The Pardvartya formula will

be more suitable. Thus—
m

112 1 2 3+4
- 1-2 — 1 —2
ra

- 1 -2
1 1 02 {= 1 1 ; and R = 2
This is ever so much simpler.
(2) Divide 1241 by 112.
(i) 112 1 241 (ii) This too is too long.
888 888 Therefore use Pardvartya
1 1 129
888 112 1 2 4 1
1—2 —1—2
2 1 017 -1 -2 ,\Q=11 ;
888
11 09 “ dE=9
3 905
8 —896
ll
 ( 71 >

(3) Divide 1234 by 100

(i) Nikhilcvrh method is manifestly unsuitable. We
should therefore use the Paravartya formula.
(ii) 160 1 2 3 4 But this is a case where
_6 + 0 —6 0 (Vilokanenaiva) i. e. by
240 simple inspection or observa­
tion, we caD put the
0 274 answer down.
1 —100
7 114

(4) 11203 2 3 8 4 7 9
—1—2—0 —3 —2 —4—0—6
—1 - 2 - 0 - 3
21 4 2 1 6

l
ya
(5) 112 1 3 0 4 5
— 1—2 —1—2 —4
—2 4+8
ar

12 4 53
=116 I 53
m

In all these cases (where the digits in the divisor are

small) the Nikhilam method is generally unsuitable; and the
ra

Paravartya one is always to be preferred.

(0) Divide 13450 by 1123
1123 13 4 5 0
_ l _ 2 —3 —1 —2—3
-2 -4 -6
12 0 — 2+0

Here, as the Remainder portion is a negative quantity, we

should follow the device used in subtractions of larger numbers
from smaller ones (in coinage etc).
Rs. as. ps. £. s. d
7 5 3 7 5 3
9 9 9 9
6 11 0 0 15 0
 ( T2 )

In other words, take 1 over from the quotient column

to the remainder column i.e. take 1123 over to the right side,
subtract 20 therefrom and say, Q = l l and R=1103
(7) Divide 13905 by 113 (similar)
1 3 9 0 5
1—3
—2

TT
1
1 2 4 — 107
1 2 3 06

N.B. :—Always remember that just as one Rupee=10 annas,

One Pound= 2 0 shillings and one Dollar=100 cents
and so on, so one taken over from the quotient to the

l
ya
Remainder—column stands, in concrete value, for the
Divisor.
( 8) 1012 11 1 1 1
ar

0 — 1—2 0 — 1—2

11 —1—1 + 2
+1012
m

10 991
ra

(9) f 1133 1 2 3 4 9
—1—3—3 -1 —3—3
- 1 - 3 —3
11 -1 -2 + 6
1133
10 1019

(10) Divide 13999 by 112

112 1 3 9 9 9
—1—2 —1—2
—2 —4
—5—10
1 2 5 +111 .\Q=124 and R = l l l
 ( 73 )

(1 1 ) 1132 11 3 2 9 Also by Vflokamm (i.e. mere

_ 1 _ 3 _ 2 — 1 —3—2 observation).
0 0 0
1 0 0 0 9

(1 2 ) 82 1 0 3 Also by Vilokanam (i.«. by

1 - 2 + 2 2 — 2 mere observation)
2 - 2
1 21

(13) (i) 819 2 3 4 1

181 2 16 2 This
1 is by the Nikhilam method
2 703

But 18 can be counted as 1 0 + 8 or as 2 0 —2 . So, put

181 down as 2 —2 + 1 . We can thus avoid multiplication by
big digits i.e. by more than five.
y al
ar
(ii) 819 2 3 4 1
181 4 —4 + 2
2 - 2+1 703
m

(14) Divide 39999 by 9819 or (ii) (by Vinculum and Paravartya)

ra

(i) 9819 3 9 9 9 9 9819 3 9 9 9 9

0181 0 324 3 1022i

1 02 21 0 6—6 3
3 1 0542 U + a- - 2z ++ 1l
0 + 2 3 l 0 5 4 2

0181 0 2 —2 + 1

0723 3 0723

(15) Divide 1111 by 839.

139=1241; and 1 111

161 161 161=241 161 241

X 272 “ ®»j®.. 11 11 11
1
1 241
_ J161 “2 4' '1 1 332
1241 1 272
2 -4 -1 1 3 3 2
= 1 272

10
 ( 74 )

818 5 0 1 2 (by simple subtraction of the

182 5 40 10 Divisor as in the case of 16
annas, 20 shillings, 100 cents
5 922 etc.)
=0 104

988 13 0 4 5 (18) 858 7 1 1 I

012 0 1 2 142 7 28 14
0 3 6
7 1 105
13 2 0 1 142
8 247

(19) (i) 828 43 9 9 9 or (ii) 828 43 9 9 9

172 4 2 8 8 172 8—12 8
7 4 9 1 4 2—3 + 2 22—33+22

l
ya
47 5 0 8 3 51 19—16+31
5 3 5 1 0
51 1 771
52 9 4 3 —2—32
ar

—828
52 943
53 115 —828
m

53 115

(20) Divide 1771 by 828

ra

(i) 828 1 771 (ii) 828 1 7 7 1

172 172 1 7 2 2—3 + 2
1 943 2—3 + 2 ! 9 4 3
—828 -8 2 8
2 115 2 1 1 5

Divide 2671 by 828

(i) 828 2 6 7 1 or (ii) 828 2 6 7 1
172 2 14 4 172 4-- 6 + 4
2 1 015 2—3 + 2 2 1 0 1 5
172 2 -3 + 2
3 187 3 1 8 7

or (iii) Subtract 828 straight off (in both cases) from 1015.
 ( 75 )

(22) Divide 39893 by 829

(i) 829 39 8 9 3 or (ii) 829 39 8 9 3
m 3 21 3 171 0—9 + 3
12 84 12 2—3 + 1 30—45+15

42 5 0 7 5 45 2 5 8 8
5 355 4-- 6 - -2
47 9 3 0 47 9 3 0
—8 2 9 -8 2 9

48 1 0 1 48 1 0 1

(23) Divide 21011 by 799 (24) Divide 13045 by 988

799 21 0 1 1 988 13 0 4 5

l
201 4 0 2 012 0 1 2
10 0 5
ya 0 3 0
25 1 036 13 2
201
ar
26 237

(25) Divide 21999 by 8819

m

(i) 8819 2 1 9 9 9 or (ii) 8819 2 1 9 9 9

1181 . 2 + 4 —4 + 2 m s 2 216 2
ra

1+2 2+1 2 4 3 6 1 2 4 3 6 1

(26) Divide 1356 by 182 Even this is too cumbrous. Anurupya

and Paravartya will be more suitable,
(i) 182 13 5 6 (ii) 182 13 5 6
• 8-2 ~8 -2 2) 2—2 + 2 1—1
40 10 1— 1+ 1 4—4
1— 1 — — -N.B.TLIS
5 4 4 6 2)14 8 2 con8tant.
—32 —8
7 8 2
—28 —2
9 +364
(27) 882 3 1 2 8
-2 118 3 + 6 -6
82
 ( 76 )

(28) (i) (ii)

8824 0 0 9 882 4 0 0 9
1—1—2 + 2 4 + 8 —8 118 4 + 8 —8
1 + 2 — 2 4 4 8 1 1 + 2 — 2 4 4 8 1

(29) Divide 4009 by 882

(i) 882 4 0 0 9 (ii) 882 4 0 0 9
f i l l —2 + 2 ____4 + 8 —8 118 4 + 8 —8
1 + 2 — 2 4 4 8 1 1 + 2 — 2 4 4 g 1

N ote:—In both these methods, the working is exactly the

same.
(31)

l
(30) 2) 224 2 6 9 9
ya
2) 223 16 9 9
112 —2 - 4 n it -1 -1 *

Ol
1

1
to
- 1 - 2
- 4 - 8 R is - 1- 1*
ar
2)24 11 constant 2)15 2 * + l*
12 11 7* 2* 6*
7 111*
m

2 138
ra

(32) 2) 222 1 2 3 4 (33) Divide 7685 by 672

111 —1 -- 1 672 7 6 8 5
—1— 1 - 1 —1 328 21+21 -1 4
2) 11 1 3 3 + 3 —2 7 2
9 8 1
6 + 6 —4
5 111
9 1 6 3 7
5 124
3 + 3 —2
10 9 6 5
—6 7 2
11 2 9 3

This work can be curtailed—or at least rendered a bit

easier—by the Anurupyena Sutra. We can take 168 (which is
one-fourth of 672) or 84 (which is one-eighth of it) or, better
 ( 77 )
still, 112 (which is one-sixth thereof); and work it out with
that Divisor and finally divide the quotient proportionately.
The division (with 112 as Divisor) works out as follows:
•.•672=6X112 7 6 8 5
. 112 —7 —14
- 1-2
1+2
7—1 - 5 + 7
6) = 6 9 —5 + 7

11$—5 + 7
= 11 3 3 6 -5 0 + 7 = 2 9 3

It will thus be seen that, in all such cases, a fairly easy

l
method is for us to take the nearest multiple (or sub-multiple)
ya
to a power of 10 as our temporary divisor, use the Nikhilarh or
the Paravartya process and then multiply (or divide) the
ar
Quotient proportionately. A few more examples are given
below, in illustration hereof:—

(1) Divide 1400 by 199 OR (ii) Since 5x199=995

m

(i) 199 14 0 0 .995 1 4 0 0

2) 20—1 0 i * * 005 0 0 5
ra

i + o —i °+ 2 1 4 0 5
°+ i 2)14 | + 2 X5 —3 9 8
7 £ + 2 = 7 /7 7 7

(2) Divide 1699 by 223. (3) Divide 1334 by 439

v 4X223=892 v 2X439=878
892 1 6 9 9 . 878 1 3 3 4
1— 1—1 + 2 1+ 1 - -2 • * 122 1 2 2
1 + 1 —2 1 8 0 7 1 4 5 6
X4 —6 6 9 X2 —4 3 9
4 1 3 8 3 17
_9

7 1 3 8
 ( 78 )
(4) Divide 1234 by 511. (5) Divide 1177 by 516
•.•2X511=1022 V 2X516=1032
1 2 3 4 . 1032 1 1 7 7
0 —2—2 0 -3 -2

CO
o
!
1
1 2 1 2 1 1 4 5
X2 X2
2 2 1 2 2 1 4 5

N ote:—The Remainder is constant in all the cases.

l
ya
ar
m
ra
 Chapter VI

ARGUMENTAL DIVISION
(By simple argument per the Urdhva Tiryak Sutra)
In addition to the Nikhilam method and the Paravartya
method (which are of use only in certain special cases) there is
a third method of division which is one of simple argumentation
(based on the ‘ Urdhva Tiryak9 Sutra and practically amounts
to a converse thereof).

The following examples will explain and illustrate i t :—

l
ya
( 1 ) Suppose we have to divide (x2 + 2 x + l ) by ( x + 1 ), we
make a chart, as in the case of an ordinary multipli- x + 1
cation (by the ‘ Urdhva Tiryak9 process) and x + 1
ar
jot down the dividend and the divisor. Then the " ^ 2 4 0 1 1
argumentation is as follows :— __________
(i) x 2 and x being the first terms of the dividend and the
m

divisor (or the product and the multiplier respectively),

the first term of the quotient (or the multiplicand)
ra

must be x.
(ii) As for the coefficient of x in the product, it must come
up as the sum of the cross-wise-multiplication-products
of these. We have already got x by the cross­
multiplication of the x in the upper row and the
1 in the lower row ; but the coefficient of x in the
product is 2 . The other x must therefore be the
product of the x in the lower row and the absolute
term in the upper row. :\ The latter is 1 . And thus
the Quotient is x + 1 .
(2 ) Divide (12x2—8x—32) by (x—-2 ).
12g-Zl8g~~32 = 1 2 X + 16
x —2
(i) 12 x2 divided by x gives us 1 2 x.
 ( 80 )

(ii) The twelve multiplied by —2 gives Q =12x—16

us —24; but the actual coefficient of
x in the product (or the dividend) is
—8 We must get the remaining 16x by multiplying
the x of the divisor by 16. The absolute term
in the Divisor must be 16 Q=12x-f-16. And
as —2 X 16= —32, .*. R = 0 .

(3) Divide (x3+ 7 x 2+ 6 x + 5 ) by (x—2)

(i) x3 divided by x gives us x2 x3+ 7 x 2+ 6 x + 5
which is therefore the first term x —2
of the quotient. .*. Q = x 2+ 9 x -f2 4
(ii) x 2x —2 = — 2x2 ; but we have 7x2 in the Dividend.
al
This means that we have to get 9x2 more. This
must result from the multiplication of x by 9x. Hence
y
the second term of the divisor must be 9x.
ar

(iii) As for the third term, we already have —2 x 9 x =

m

—18x. But we have 6x in the dividend. We must

therefore get an additional 24x. This can only come
ra

in by the multiplication of x by 24. This is the

third term of the quotient. Q = x 2+ 9 x + 2 4
(iv) Now this last term of the quotient multiplied by
—2 gives us —48.^ But the absolute term in the
dividend is 5. We have therefore to get an additional
53 from somewhere. But there is no further term left
in the Dividend. This means that the 53 will remain
as the Remainder. Q = x 2+9x-f-24 ; and R = 5 3

Note :—All the work explained in detail above can be

easily performed by means of the ‘Pardvartyd*
Sutra (as already explained in the ‘Paravartya’
chapter, in connection with Mental division by
Binomial divisors).
 ( 81 )

The procedure is very simple ; and the following examples

will throw further light thereon and give the necessary practice
to the student:—

(1) g ! + 7x! + g g + l l ... Q—x 2-f9 x + 2 7 ; and R = 6 5

x —2
x3—x 2—7 x + 3
(2 ) Q = x 2+ 2 x —1 ; and R = 0
x=3
x4—3x3+ 7 x 2+ 5 x + 7
(3) Q = x 3+ 2+ l l x + 4 9 ; & R =203
x —4
—4x3—7x2+ 9 x —12
(4) Q = —2x2-j-*x+ 5 * ; and R = 1 0
2x—4
3x2—x —5
.-. Q = x + 2 ; and R = 9
(5)

(6)
3x^7 ’
16x2-f-8x-|-l
4x+l
y al
Q =4x4-1 ; and R=*0

x4—4x2+ 1 2 x - 9
ar
(7) N.B. :—Put zero coefficients for
~~x2—2 x + 3
absent powers.
.\ Q = x 2+ 2 x —3 ; and R = 0
m

/o\ x 3 + 2 x 2+ 3 x + 5
W x 2— x — 1
Q = x + 3 ; and R = 7 x + 8
ra

/q\ x 4 + 4 x 3 + 6 x 2+ 4 x + l
(9) Q = x 2+ 2 x + l ; and R = 0
x\ - 2
2 _-j-2x-j-l

x 4+ 2 x 3+ 3 x a+ 2 x + l
(10) Q = x 2+ x + l ; and R = 0
x 2-|- x + l

x 4— x 3+ x 2+ 5 x - f 5
(11) Q—x2+ 4 ; and R = 9 x -f 9
X2— X — 1
6 x 4+ 1 3 x 3+ 3 9 x 2+ 3 7 x + 4 5
(12) Q = 6 x 2+ 2 5 x + 1 4 3 ; a n d
x 2—2x—9
R =548x+1332
1 2 x 4— 3 x 3— 3 x — 12
(13) Q = 1 2x2—3x—12 ; and R = 0
x 2+ l

1 2 x 4 + 4 1 x 3 + 8 1 x 2+ 7 9 x + 4 2
(14) Q = 4 x 2+ 7 x + 6 ; & R = 0
3 x 2+ 5 x + 7
x 4 — 4 x 2- f l 2 x — 9
(15) / . Q = x 2—2 x + 3 and R = 0
x 2+ 2 x — 3
11
 ( 82 ) ( 83 )
21x#+7x*+15x4+29x34-x2+ 1 5 x + 3 A .
<16) = x 2 + l >and R = 0 (33) l x ‘ + S l+ l -»*•+!*+.«

(17) ^ g + ^ ^ = 3 x a+ 5 x + 7 ; andR=0 / 4 21x*+7x8-}-15x4+29x8+ x 2+ 1 5 x + 3 „

(34 ) 3x8+ x 2-f-3 ' = 7x 8+ 5 x + 1
(35)
<18> X4~xt-2+x + F 9 = x 2+ 2 x —3 and R = 0
7x1°+26x>+53x8+56x7+43x8+40x6+41x4+38x8+19x 24-8x+5
(19) 2x 3+ 9 x 2+ 1 8 x + 20 = x » + 2 x + 4 ; and R = 0 x6+ 3 x 4+ 5 x 84-3xa4 -x + l
= 7 x 5+ 5 x 4+ 3 x 8-)-x24-3x+5
, 4 2x3+ 9 x 2+ 1 8 x + 2 0 ' , -d A
(20> — x2+ 2 x + 4 — = x-j-5 ; and R = 0 (36) (Same dividend as above)

l
7x6-j-5x4+ 3 x 8-f-x2+ 3 x + 5
6x4+ 1 3x3+ 39x*+37x+45 j x> «

ya
(21) ---- 3 x M - 2 x + 9 ------- “ = 2 x * + 3 x + 5 ; and R = 0 = x6+ 3 x 4- f 5 x 3+ 3 x 2+ x +1

ar
<23> = * x- - 8 x 4-9 ; and K = o

(M) 164 * t j 'e f 4j"ir ~ = 4 s ’ + 6 x + 9 ; and K = 0

m lfe lS - ^ + ? t g
m
~ * ! + 2 s + i ; *■>■» » = •

W « * + S * + 3 ; and B = - ^ + l S
ra
—2x5—7x4+ 2 x 3+ 1 8 x 2—3x—8 . a OA
(29 ) J - 2J + I -------------- = —2x*—l l x —20 ;
and R = - 2 0 x 2+ 8 x + 1 2
x x4+ 3 x 3—16x2+ 3 x + l , „ ,, , „ „
(30 ) x 2+ 6x + l — = x * - 3 x + l ; and R = 0

, , x 4+ 3 x 3 — 1 6 x 2+ 3 x + l . ,„ , , j tj a
(31) x 2- 3 x T l = x * + 6 x + 1 ; and R = 0

, 2 x 5 — 9 x 4 + 5 x 3 + 1 6 x 8— 1 6 x + 3 6 , „ o1 . .
(32 ) 2x 2" - 5 x + I ------- = x 8—3x2—2£x-f-5§ :
and R = 3 fx -)-3 0 i
 LINKING NOTE

R e c a p it u l a t io n & C o n c l u sio n
of

(Elementary) D iv is io n S e c t io n
In these three chapters (IV, V and VI) relating to Division,
we have dealt with a large number and variety of instructive
examples and we now feel justified in postulating the following
conclusions :—
(1) The three methods expounded and explained are, no
doubt, free from the big handicap which the current system

l
labours under, namely, (i) the multiplication, of large numbers
ya
(the Divisors) by “ trial digits” -of the quotient at every step
(with the chance of the product being found too big for the
Dividend and so on), (ii) the subtraction of large numbers from
ar
large numbers, (iii) the length, cumbrousness, clumsiness etc,
of the whole procedure, (iv) the consequent liability of the
student to get disgusted with and sick of it all, (v) the resultant
m

greater risk of errors being committed and so on ;

(2) And yet, although comparatively superior to the
ra

process now in vogue everywhere, yet, they too suffer, in some

cases, from these disadvantages. At any rate, they do not,
in such cases, conform to the Vedic system’s Ideal of “ Short and
Sweet” ;
(3) And, besides, all the three of them are suitable only for
some special and particular type (or types) of cases ; and none
of them is suitable for general application to all cases :—
(i) The ‘Nikhilam’ method is generally unsuitable for
Algebraic divisions ; and almost invariably, the ‘Pard­
vartya’ process suits them better ;
(ii) and, even as regards Arithmetical computations, the
4Nikhilam' method is serviceable only when the
Divisor-digits are large numbers (i.e., 6, 7, 8 or 9)
and not at all helpful when the divisor digits are
small ones (i.e. 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5) ; and it is only the
 ( 85 )
‘Pardvartya9 method that can be applied in the
latter kind of cases !
(iii) Even when a convenient multiple (or sub-multiple)
is made use of, even then there is room for a choice
having to be made— by the pupil— as to whether the
4Nikhilam9 method or the 4Pardvartya9 one should
be preferred ;
(iv) and there is no exception-less criterion by which
the student can be enabled to make the requisite final
choice between the two alternative methods;
(v) and, as, for the third method (i.e. by the reversed
‘ Urdhva—Tiryak9 Sutra), the Algebraic utility there­
of is plain enough ; but it is difficult in respect of

l
Arithmetical calculations to say when, where and
ya
why it should be resorted to (as against the other
two methods).
All these considerations (arising from our detailed-
ar

comparative-study of a large number of examples) add up, in

effect, to the simple conclusion that none of these methods can
be of general utility in all cases, that the selection of the most
m

suitable method in each particular case may (owing to want of

uniformity) be confusing to the student and that this element
ra

of uncertainty is bound to cause confusion. And the question

therefore naturally— nay, unavoidably arises as to whether
the Vedic Sutras can give us a General Formula applicable
to all cases.
And the answer is :— Yes, most certainly YES ! There
is a splendid and beautiful and very easy method which conforms
with the Vedic ideal of ideal simplicity all-round and which
in fact gives us what we have been describing as “ Vedic one line-
mental answers99!
This astounding method we shall, however, expound in
a later chapter under the caption “ Straight-Division” — which
is one of the Crowning Beauties of the Vedic mathematics
Sutras. (Chapter X X V I I . q.v.).
 C h a p ter VII
I. FACTORISATION (of Simple Quadratics)
Factorisation comes in naturally at this point, as a form
of what we have called “Reversed multiplication” and as a
particular application of division. There is a lot of strikingly
good material in the Vedic Sutras on this subject too, which is
new to the modern mathematical world but which comes in at
a very early stage in our Vedic Mathematics.
We do not, however, propose to go into a detailed and
exhaustive exposition of the subject but shall content ourselves
with a few simple sample examples which will serve to throw
light thereon, and especially on the Sutraic technique by which

l
a Sutra consisting of only one or two simple words, makes
ya
comprehensive provision for explaining and elucidating a pro­
cedure hereby a so-called “difficult” mathematical problem
(which, in the other system puzzles the students’ brains) ceases
ar
to do so any longer, nay, is actually laughed at by them as
being worth rejoicing over and not worrying over !
For instance, let us take the question of factorisation
m

of a quadratic expression intd its component binomial factors.

When the coefficient of x 2 is 1, it is easy enough, even according
ra

to the current system wherein you are asked to think out and
find two numbers whose algebraic total is the middle coeffi­
cient and whose product is the absolute term. For example,
let the quadratic expression in question be x 2+ 7 x + 1 0 , we
mentally do the multiplication of the two factors x+2
(x + 2 ) and (x + 5 ) whose product is x 2+ 7 x + 1 0 ; x+5
nd (by a mental process of reverting thereof), x 2+ 7 x + 1 0
we think of 2 and 5 whose sum is 7 and w h o s e ------------------
product is 10: and we thus factorise (x2+ 7 x + 1 0 ) into (x + 2 ) and
(x+5;. And the actual working out thereof is as follows :—
x 2+ 7 x + 1 0
= x 2+ 2 x + 5 x + 1 0
= x (x + 2 ) + 5 (x+ 2 )
= (x + 2 ) (x+ 5 )
 ( 87 )

The procedure is, no doubt, mathematically correct; but the

process is needlessly long and cumbrous. However, as the
mental process actually employed is as explained above, there
is no great harm done.
In respect, however, of Quadratic expressions whose first
coefficient is not unity (e.g. 2x2+ 5 x + 2 ), the students do not
follow the mental process in question but helplessly depend on
the 4-step method shown above and work it out as follows:—
2x2+ 5 x + 2
= 2 x 2+ 4 x + x + 2
= 2 x (x + 2 )+ l (x + 2 )
= (x + 2 ) (2 x + l)
As the pupils are never taught to apply the mental process
which can give us this result immediately, it means a real
al
injury. The Vedic system, however, prevents this kind of harm,
with the aid of two small sub-Sutras which say (i)
y
(Anurupyena) and (ii) (Adyamadyendntya-
ar
mantyena) and which mean ‘proportionately’ and £the first
by the first and the last by the last’ .
The former has been explained already (in connection
m

with the use of multiples and sub-multiples, in multiplication

and division); but, alongside of the latter sub-Sutra, it acquires
a new and beautiful double application and significance and
ra

works out as follows :—

(i) Split the middle coefficient into two such parts that
the ratio of the first coefficient to that first part is
the same as the ratio of that second part to the last
coefficient. Thus, in the quadratic 2x2+ 5 x + 2 , the
middle term (5) is split into two such parts (4 and 1)
that the ratio of the first coefficient, to the first part of
the middle coefficient (i.e. 2 : 4) and the ratio of
the second part to the last coefficient (i.e. 1 : 2)
are the same. Now, this ratio (i.e. x + 2 ) is one
factor.
And the second factor is obtained by dividing the first
coefficient of the Quadratic by the first coefficient of the factor
 ( 88 )

already found and the last coefficient of the Quadratic by the last
coefficient of that factor.In other words the second Binomial
2x2 9
factor is obtained thus: — + - = 2 x + l.
X A
Thus we say : 2x2+ 5 x + 2 = ( x + 2 ) (2 x + l).

N ote:—The middle coefficient (which we split-up above

into (4+ 1) may also be split up into (1+4), that the
ratio in that case is (2 x + l) and that the other
Binomial factor (according to the aboTre-explained
method) is (x + 2 ). Thus, the change of SEQUENCE
(in the splitting up of the middle term) makes no
difference to the factors themselves !

This sub-Sutra has actually been used already (in the

l
ya
chapters on division); and it will be coming up again and again,
later o n ‘ (i.e. in Co-ordinate Geometry etc., in connection
with straight lines, Hyperbolas, Conjugate Hyperbolas, Asymp­
ar
totes etc.)
But, just now, we make use of it in connection with the
factorisation of Quadratics into their Binomial factors. The
m

following additional examples will be found useful:—

(1) 2 x 2 4 - 5 x — 3 = ( x 4 - 3 ) ( 2 x — 1)
ra

(2) 2 x 2 + 7 x + 5 = (x+1) (2x+5)

(3) 2 x 2+ 9 x + 1 0 = (x 4 - 2 ) ( 2 x 4 - 5 )
(4) 2 x 2 — 5 x — 3 = ( x — 3) ( 2 x + l )
(5) 3 x 2 + x — 1 4 = ( x — 2) ( 3 x + 7 )
(6) 3 x 2 + 1 3 x — 3 0 = ( x . + 6 ) ( 3 x — 5)
(7) 3 x 2 — 7 x + 2 = ( x — 2) ( 3 x — 1)
(8) 4 x a + 1 2 x + 5 = ( 2 X + 1 ) (2x4-5)
(9) 6 x 2 + l l x + 3 = (2x4-3) ( 3 x + l )
(10) 6 x 2 + l l x — 1 0 = ( 2 x 4 - 5 ) ( 3 x — 2)
(11) 6 x 2 + 1 3 x + 6 = (2x4-3) (3x4-2)
(12) 6 x 2 — 1 3 x — 1 9 = (x-(-l) ( 6 x — 1 9 )
(13 ) 6 x 2 + 3 7 x + 6 = ( x 4 - 6 ) (6x-)-l)
(14) 7 x 2 — 6 x — 1 = ( x - l ) (7x4-1)
 ( 89 )
(15) 8x2—-22x+5 = (2x—5) ( 4 x - l )
(16) 9x2—15x+4 = ( 3 x - l ) (3x—4)
(17) 12x2+ 1 3 x - 4 = (3x+ 4) ( 4 x - l )
(18) 12x2-2 3 x y + 1 0 y 2 = (3x—2y) (4 x -5 y )
(19) 15x2—14xy—8y2 = (3x—4y) (5x+2y)
An additional sub-Sutra is of immense ultility in this
context, for the purpose of verifying the correctness of our
answers in multiplications, divisions and factorisations. It
reads : and means :—
“ The product of the sum of the coefficients in the
factors is equal to the sum of the coefficients in the
product
In symbols, we may put this principle down thus :—

l
S0 of the product= Product of the Sc (in the factors).
ya
For example, (x + 7 ) (x + 9 )= (x 2+ 1 6 x + 6 3 ) ;
and we observe that (1+7) (1 + 9 ) = 1+ 16+63=80
ar
Similarly, inthe case of Cubics, Bi-quadratics etc., t£e
same rule holds good. For example:
(x + 1 ) (x + 2 ) (x + 3 ) = x 3+ 6 x 2+ l l x + 6 ;
and we observe that 2 x 3 x 4 = 1 + 6 + 1 1 + 6 = 2 4 .
m

Thus, if and when some factors are known, this rule

helps us to fill in the gaps.
ra

It will be found useful in the factorisation of cubics,

biquadratics etc., and will be adverted to (in that context and
in some other such contexts) later on.

12
 C h a p te r VIII

FACTORISATION {of “ Harder” Quadratics)

There is a class of Quadratic expressions known as

Homogeneous Expressions of the second degree, wherein
several letters (x, y, z etc.) figure and which are generally fought
shy of by students (and teachers too) as being too “difficult”
but which can be very easily tackled by means of the Adyama-
dyena, Sutra (just explained) and another sub-Sutra which
consists of only one (compound) word, which reads
and means :— “by (alternate) Elimination and Retention”

l
Suppose we have to factorise the Homogeneous quadratic
ya
(2x2+ 6 y 2+ 3 z 2+ 7 x y + lly z + 7 z x ). This is obviously a case
in which the ratios of the coefficients of the various powers of
the various letters are difficult to find o u t ; and the reluctance
ar
of students (and even of teachers) to go into a troublesome
thing like this, is quite understandable.
The 4Lopana—Sthdpana9 sub-Sutra, however, removes
m

the whole difficulty and makes the factorisation of a Quadratic

of this type as easy and simple as that of the ordinary quadratic
ra

(already explained). The procedure is as follows :—

Suppose we have to factorise the following long Quadratic :
2x2+ 6 y 2+ 3 z 2+ 7 x y + lly z + 7 z x .
(i) We first eliminate z (by putting z—0) and retain only
x and y and factorise the resulting ordinary quadratic (in
x and y) (with the Adyam Sutra);
(ii) We then similarly eliminate y and retain only x and z
and factorise the simple quadratic (in x and z) ;
(iii) with these two sets of factors before us, we fill in the
gaps caused bv our own deliberate elimination of z and y
respectively. And that gives us the real factois of the given
long expression. The procedure is an argumentative one
and is as follows :—
 ( 91 )
If z = 0 , then E (the given expression)=2x24~7xy-f6y2
= (x + 2 y ) (2x+3y).
Similarly, if y = 0 , then E = 2 x 2+ 7 x y -f 3z2= (x+ 3z)(2x-f-z)

Filling in the gaps which we ourselves had created by

leaving out z and y, we say : E = (x-f-2 y+ 3 z) (2 x + 3 y + z )

The following additional examples will be found useful:—

(1) 3x2+ y 2—2z2—4 x y + y z —zx
E = ( x —y) (3x—y) and also (x —z) (3x+2z)
E = ( x —y —z) (3x—y+ 2 z)
(2) 3x2-f x y —2y2+ 1 9x z+ 2 8z2+ 9 x y —30w2—yz-f-I9wy
+46zw.
By eliminating two letters at a time, we g e t :

l
E = ( x + y ) (3x—2y), (3x-f4z) (x+7z) and also
ya
(x —2y) (3x+15w)
.*. E = ( x + y + 4 z —2w) (3x—2y+4z+15w )
ar
(3) 2x2+ 2 y 2-|-5xy+2x—5y—1 2 = (x + 3 ) (2x—4) and
also (2y+3) ( y - 4 )
E = (x + 2 y + 3 ) (2 x + y —4)
m

(4) 3x2—8 x y + 4 y 2+ 4 y ~ 3 = ( x —1) (3x+3) and also

(2y-—1) (2y+3)
E —(x + 2 y —1) (3 x + 2 y —3)
ra

(5) 6x2- 8 y 2—6z2+ 2 x y + 1 6 y z —5xz

= (2 x —2y) (3x-)-4y) and also (2x+3z) (3x—2z)
E = (2 x —2y-f3z) (3 x + 4 y —2z)
N ote:— We could have eliminated x also and retained
only y and z and factorised the resultant simple
quadratic. That would not, however, have given us
any additional material but would have only confir­
med and verified the answer we had already
obtained. Thus, when 3 letters (x, y and z) are there,
only two eliminations will generally suffice. The
following exceptions to this rule should be noted :—
(1) x 2-f x y —2y2+ 2 x z —5yz-—3z2
= ( x —y) (x+ 2 y) and (x—z) (x+3z)
 ( 92 )

But x is to be found in all the terms ; and there is

no means for deciding the proper combinations.
In this case, therefore, x too may be eliminated ;
and y and z retained. By so doing, we have :—
E = —2y2—5yz—3z2= ( —y —z)(2y+3z)
♦\ E = ( x —y —z) (x + 2 y + 3 z).
OR, avoid the x 2 (which gives the same co-efficient)
and take only y 2 or z2. And then, the* confusion
caused by the oneness of the coefficient (in all the
4 factors) is avoided; and we get,
E = ( x —y —z) (x + 2 y + 3 z) (as before).
(2) x2+ 2 y 2-4-3xy-f-2xz+3yz+z2.
(i) By eliminating z, y and x one after another,
we have E = ( x + y + z ) (x + 2 y + z )

l
ya
OR (ii) By y or z both times, we get the same answer.
(3) x2-f-3y2+ 2 z 2+4xy-(-3xz-f7yz
Both the methods yield the same result:
ar
E = ( x + y + 2 z ) (x + 3 y + z )
(4) 3x2+ 7 x y + 2 y 2+ l l x z + 7 y z + 6 z 24*14x+8y+14z+8.
Here too, we can eliminate two letters at a time
m

and thus keep only one letter and the independent

term, each time.
ra

Thus, E = 3x2+ 1 4 x + 8 = (x + 4 ) (3 x + 2 );
2y2-f-8y-f 8 = (2 y + 4 ) ( y + 2 ) ; and also
6z 2+ 1 4 z + 8 = ( 3 z + 4 ) (2 z+ 2 )
E = ( x + 2 y + 3 z -f 4) (3 x + y + 2 z + 2 )
Note :—This “ Lopana-r-Sthdpana” method (of alternate eli­
mination and retention) will be found highly useful,
later on in H.C.F., in Solid Geometry and in Co­
ordinate Geometry of the straight line, the Hyper­
bola, the Conjugate Hyperbola, the Asymptotes etc.
 Chapter IX

FACTORISATION OF CUBICS ETC.

(By Simple Argumentation e. t. c.)

We have already seen how, when a polynomial is divided
by a Binomial, a Trinomial etc., the remainder can be found
by means of the Remainder Theorem and how both the Quotient
and the Remainder can be easily found by one or other method
of division explained already.
From this it follows that, if, in this process, the remainder
is found to be zero, it means that the given dividend is divisible

l
ya
by the given divisor, i.e. the divisor is a factor of the Dividend.
And this means that, if, by some such method, we are
able to find out a certain factor of a given expression, the
ar

remaining factor (or the product of all the remaining factors)

can be obtained by simple division of the expression in question
by the factor already found out by some method of division.
m

(In this context, the student need hardly be reminded that,

in all Algebraic divisions, the ‘ Paravartya’ method is always to
ra

be preferred to the ‘Nikhilam’ method).

Applying this principle to the case of a cubic, we may
say that, if, by the Remainder Theorem or otherwise, we know
one Binomial factor of a cubic, simple division by that factor
will suffice to enable us to find out the Quadratic (which is the
product of the remaining two binomial factors). And these two
can be obtained by the ‘ Adyamadyena' method of factorisation
already explained.
A simpler and easier device for performing this operation
will be to write down the first and the last terms by the (Adyama-
dyena’ method and the middle term with the aid of the Gunita-
Samuccaya rule (i.e. the principle— already explained with
regard to the S0 of the product being the same as the Product
of the S0 of the factors).
 ( 94 )
Let us take a concrete example and see how this method
can be made use of. Suppose we have to factorise x3-f-6x2- f
l l x + 6 and that, by some method, we know (x + 1 ) to be a
factor. We first use the Ady&madyena formula and thus
mechanically put down x2 and 6 as the first and the last coeffi­
cients in the quotient (i.e. the product of the remaining two
binomial factors). But we know already that the S0 of the
given expression is 24 ; and, as the S0 of (x—1)=2 we therefore
know that the S0 of the .quotient must be 12. And as the
first and last digits thereof are already known to be 1 and 6,
their total is 7. And therefore the middle term must
be 12—7 = 5 . So, the quotient is x2-f-5x+6.
This is a very simple and easy but absolutely certain

l
and effective process.
ya
The student will remember that the ordinary rule for
divisibility of a dividend by a divisor (as has been explained
ar
already in the section dealing with the “ Remainder—Theorem” )
is as follows :—
If E=DQ-j-R, if D = x —p and if x—p, then E =R .
m

COROLLARIES
ra

(i) So, if, in the dividend, we substitute 1 for x, the

result will be that, as all the powers of 1 are unity itself, the
dividend will now consist of the sum of all the coefficients.
Thus, if D is x —1, R =a+b+c+d-f(w here a, b, c, d etc.,
are the successive coefficients); and then, if a -fb + c etc.,=0,
it will mean that as R = 0, E is divisible by D. In other words,
x —-I is a factor.
(ii) If, however, D = x + 1 and if we substitute —1 for x in
E, then, inasmuch as the odd powers of —1 will all be —1 and
the even powers thereof will all be 1, therefore it will follow that,
in this case, R = a —b-f-e—d etc.
So, if R = 0 i.e. if a—b + c —d etc., = 0 , i.e. if a—b + c —d etc.,
= 0 , i.e. a + c + ... = :b + d + ..#.
 ( 95 )

i.e. if the sum of the coefficients of the odd powers of x and

the sum of the coefficients of the even powers be equal, then
x + 1 will be a factor.
The following few illustrations will elucidate the actual
application of the principle mainly by what may be called
the Argumentation method, based on the simple multiplication-
forinula to the effect that—
(x + a ) (x + b ) ( x + c ) = x 8+ x 2 (a + b + c )+ x (a b + a c + b c )
-(-abc, as follows :—
(1) Factorise x 8+ 6 x 2+ l l x + 6 .
(i) Here, S0= 2 4 ; and t[ (the last term) is 6 whose
factors are 1, 2, 3 or 1, 1, 6. But their total should be
0 (the coefficient of x 2). So we must reject the 1, 1, 6

l
ya
group and accept the 1, 2, 3 group. And, testing
for the third coefficient, we find a b + b c + c a = l l
.-. E = (x + 1 ) (x + 2 ) (x+ 3 ).
ar
or (ii) S0 (the sum of the coefficients of the odd powers)
= 1 + 1 1 = 1 2 ; and Se (the sum of the coefficients of
the even p ow ers)= 6 + 6 = l2 . And as S0= S a
m

x + 1 is a factor.
.•. Dividing E by that factor, we first use the ‘Adya-
madyena’ Sutra and put down 1 and 6 as the first
ra

and the last coefficients. The middle coefficient

i s -12—( l + 6 ) = 5 .-. The Q = x 2+ 5 x + 6 which (by
Adyamadyena) = (x + 2 ) (x+ 3 ).
Thus E = (x + 1 ) (x + 2 ) (x+ 3 ).
(2) Factorise x 3- 6 x 2+ l l x —6
Here Sc= 0 .\ x —1 is a factor. But a s* is an inde­
finite figure, we cannot use the Gunita-Samuccaya
method here for the middle term but must divide out
(by mental ‘Paravartya1) and get the quotient as
x2—5 x + 6 which (by the Adyamddya’ rule)
= ( x —2) (x—3) .-. E = ( x —1) (x—2) (x—3).
or (ii) argue about —1, —2 and —3 having —6 as the total
and —6 as the product; and test out and verify the 11.
And therefore say, E = ( x —1) (x—2) (x—3).
 ( 96 )
(3) Factorise x 3+ 1 2 x2+ 4 4x + 48 .
(i) Here Sc= 105 whose factors are 1, 3, 5, 7, 15, 21, 35
and 105. And ti is 48 whose factors are, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6,8
12, 16, 24 and 48. .*. x + 1 and x —1 are out of court.
And the only possible factors are x + 2 , x + 4 and
x + 6 (verify).
(ii) or, argue that 2 + 4 + 6 = 1 2 and 2 x 4 x 6 = 4 8 ; and
test for and verify 44 .\ E = (x + 2 ) (x + 4 ) (x + 6 )
(4) Factorise x3—2x2—23x+60
(i) Here Sc= 36 (with factors 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12, 18 and 36 ;
tj=60 (which is 1 X 2 x 2 x 3 X 5 .)
.*. Possible factors are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20,
30 and 60. But the sum of the coefficients in each

l
factor must be a factor of the total S0. (i.e. 105).
ya
Therefore, all the italicized numbers go out, and
so do x —1, x + 4 , x + 6 and x-4-10.
ar
Now, the only possible numbers here (which when
added, total —2) are —3, —4 and 5. Now, test for
and verify x —3
.*. E = ( x —3) (x2+ x ~ 2 0 ) = ( x —3) (x—4) (x+ 5 ).
m

(ii) or take the possibilities x —10, x —5, x + 5 , x —4,

x + 3 , x —3, x + 2 and x —2.
ra

If x —2 = — x3—2x2—23x+60
A 2+ 0—46
1+0+23 14 R=14
x —2 is not a factor.
But if x —3, R = 0 .*. x —3 is a factor.
Then, argue as in the first method.
(5) Factorise x 3—2x2—5X+6=H ere So= 0
(i) .*. x —1 is a factor ; and the other part (by Division)
is x2—x —6 which = ( x + 2 ) (x—3)
E = ( x —1) (x + 2 ) (x—3)
(ii) ti= 6 (whose factors are 1, 2 and 3). And the only
combination which gives us the total —2, is —1, 2
and —3. Test and verify for —5. And put down the
answer.
 ( 97 )

(6) Factorise x 3+ 3 x 2—17x—38

Now S0= —51 (with factors ± 1 , -*-3, +17 and +51
And —38 has the factors ± 1 , + 2, +19 and ±38.
±1> ±19 and +38 are not possible.
And only + 2 is possible. And if x = —2, R = 0
.-. x + 2 is a factor .*. E = (x + 2 ) (x2+ x —19)
which has no further factors.
(7) Factorise x 3+ 8 x 2+ 1 9x + 12 .
(i) Here S0= 8 ; and Lt= 1 2 1 + 3 + 4 are the proper
numbers. Now test for and verify 19.
E — (x + 1 ) (x2+ 7 x + 1 2 ) = (x + 1 ) (x + 3 ) (x + 4 )
OR (ii) v 1 + 1 9 = 8 + 12 x + 1 is a factor. Then the
quotient is obtainable by the ‘ Adyamddyena' and
‘Samuccaycb Sutras. And that again can be factorised
with the aid of the former.
l
ya
E = (x + 1 ) (x + 3 ) (x + 4 )
(8) Factorise x3—7 x+ 6
(i) v So= 0, x —1 is a factor.
ar

By 4Pardvartya method of division (mental),

E = (x —1) (x2+ x 6) = (x 1) (x—2) (x + 3 )
OR (ii) (by a different kind ol application of Adyamddyena
m

x 3—7 x+ 6 = (x3 1) 7 x + 7 = (x l)(x 2+ x + l —7)

= ( x - l ) (x—2) (x + 3 )
ra

N ote: ~{l) This method is always applicable when x 2 is

absent; and this means that the 3 independent
terms together total zero.
(2) Note the note on this and other allied points (in
the section relating to cubic equations) in a later
chapter.
(3) Note that this method of factorisation by Argu­
mentation is equally applicable to Biquadratics also.
(4) The relationship between the Binomial factors
of a polynomial and its differentials (first, second
and so on) is an interesting and intriguing subject
which will be dealt with in & later chapter.
(5) The use of different^ is for finding out repeated
factors will ate* be dealt with later.
13
 C h a p te r X

HIGHEST COMMON FACTOR

In the current system of mathematics, we have two
methods which are used for finding the H.C.F. of two (or more)
given expressions.
The first is by means of factorisation (which is not always
easy) ; and the second is by a process of continuous division
(like the method used in the G.C.M. chapter of Arithmetic).
The latter is a mechanical process and can therefore be applied
in all cases. But it is rather too mechanical and, consequently,
long and cumbrous.

l
The Vedic method provides a third method which is
ya
applicable to all cases and is, at the same time, free from this
disadvantage.
ar

It is, mainly, an application of the £Lopana-Sthapana’

Sutra, the 4Sankalana-Vyavakalan process and the ‘Adyamadya’
rule. The procedure adopted is one of alternate destruction of
m

the highest and the lowest powers (by a suitable multiplication

of the coefficients and the addition or subtraction of the multi­
ra

ples). A concrete example will elucidate the process :—

(1) Suppose we have to find the H.C.F. of (x2+ 7 x + 6 ) &
( x 2 — 5 x — 6)
(i) x 2+ 7 x + 6 = ; and x 2 — 5 x — 6 =
(x+l) (x+6)
6)
= ( x + l ) (x— The H.C.F. is (x+1).
(ii) The 2nd method (the G.C.M. one) is well-known and
nee not be put down here.
(iii) The third process of ‘Lopana-Sthapana9 (i.e. of
Elimination and Retention, or Alternate destruction
of the highest and the lowest powers) is explained
below :
Let Ej and E2 be the two expressions.
Then, for destroying the highest power,
we should subtract E2 from Ex ; and for
 ( 99 )

destroying the lowest one, we should add the

two. The chart is as follows:
x2+ 7 x + 6 I x2—5x—6
x2 -5x—6 | Subtraction x2+ 7 x + 6 j Addition
12) 12x+12 2x) 2x2+ 2 x
X + 1 X + 1

We then remove the common factor (if any) from each ;

and we find (x + 1 ) staring us in the face.
.-. x — 1 is the H.C.F.
The Algebraical principle or Proof hereof is as follows :—
Let P and Q be the two expressions; H their H.C.F. and
A and B the quotients (after their division by the H.C.F.)

l
• 5 = A; and § = B
* * JLi
ya
H
P = HA and Q = H B

/ . P ± Q = H ( A ± B ) ; and M P ±N Q = H (M A ±N B )
.•. The H.C.F. of P and Q is also the H.C.F. of P ± Q ,
ar
2 P ± Q , P ± 2 Q and M P±N Q

All that we have therefore to do is to select our M and

N in such a way that the highest and the lowest powers are
m

removed and the H.C.F. appears and shows itself before us.
A few more illustrative examples may be seen below :—
ra

(1) (i) x 3—3x2—4x+12 = (x + 2 ) (x—2) (x—3) ;

and x 3—7x2+ 1 6 x - 1 2 = ( x —2)2 (x—3)
.*. the H.C.F. is (x —2) (x—3 )= x 2—5 x + 6
But the factorisation of the two expressions will
be required.
or (ii) The G.C.M. method.
or (iii) The ‘Lopana-Sthapana’ method :—
x 3— 3 x 2 — 4 x + 1 2 x 3— 7 x 2+ 1 6 x — 1 2
— ( x 3 — 7 x 2 + 1 6 x — 12) + ( x 3— 3 x 2— 4 x +

4 ) 4 x 2— 2 0 x + 2 4 2 x ) 2 x 3 — 1 0 x 2+ 1 2 x

x 2~ 5 x + 6 x 2— 5 x + 6

The H.C.F. is (x2—5 x+ 6 )

 ( 100 )

(2) (i) 4x3+ 1 3 x 2+ 1 9 x + 4 — (4 x + l) (x2+ 3 x + 4 ) ;

and 2x3+ 5 x 2+ 5 x —4 = (2x+1) (x2+ 3 x + 4 )

The H .C.F. is x 2+ 3 x + 4
But the factorisation of the two cubics will be
cumbrous.

or (ii) The G.C.M. method.

or (iii) The Vedic method :—

4x3+ 1 3 x 2+ 1 9 x + 4 2x 3+ 5 x 2+ 5 x - 4
—(4x3+ 1 0 x 2+ 1 0 x —8) + (4 x 3+ 1 3 x 2+ 1 9 x + 4 )

3 ) 3x2+ 9 x + 12 6x ) 6x3+ 1 8 x 2+24 x

x2+ 3 x + 4 x 2+ 3 x + 4

.-.The H.C.F. is (x2+ 3 x + 4 )

l
ya
(3) (i) x4+ x 3— 5x 2— 3 x + 2 = ( x + l ) (x — 2) (x2+ 2 x — 1) ;
and x 4— 3x3+ x 2+ 3 x — 2 = (x+1) (x—2) (x — 1)2
The H.C.F. is x 2- x - 2
ar
But this factorisation of the two biquadratics is
bound to be a (comparatively) laborious process.
(ii) The cumbrous G.O.M. method.
m

(iii) The Vedic method :—

x 4+ x 3— 5x2— 3 x + 2 x 4— 3 x 3+ x 2+ 3 x — 2
ra

— (x4— 3x3+ x 2 + 3 x — 2) x 4+ x 3— 5x2— 3 x + 2

2 ) 4x3— 6x2— 6 x + 4 2 x 2 ) 2x4— 2x 3— 4 x 2

2x3—3x2—3x f 2 x2—x—2
—(2x3—2x2—4x) (N.B. — multiply this by
—;-----:----------;-------- 2x & take it over
—1(—x + x + 2 ) ___ je^ for
-x —2 subtraction).

The H.C.F. is x2—x—2

(4) (i) The Vedic method :—

6x4— 7x3—5x2+ 1 4 x + 7 3x 3-~5 x 2+ 7
—(6x4—10x3 +14x) (N.B.—multiply this by
— ------- ------------- 2X & subtract from
^ +7 L.H.S.)
 ( 101 )
(ii) The factorisation of the big Biquadratic will be
“ harder” .
(iii) The G.C.M. method is, in this case, easy. But how
should one know this beforehand and start monkeying
or experimenting with it ?

(5) (i) The Vedic method:—

6x4—l l x 3+ 1 6 x 2—22x+8 6x4—l l x 3—8x2+ 2 2 x —8
—(6x4—l l x 3—8x2+ 2 2 x —8) + (6 x 4— l l x 3+ 1 6 x 2—22x+8)
4) 24x2—44x+16 2x2) 12x4—22x3+ 8 x 2
6x2—l l x + 4 6x2—l l x + 4
.•. The H.C.F. is 6x2—l l x + 4

l
(ii) 6x4- l l x 3+ 1 6 x 2- 2 2 x + 8 = ( 2 x - l ) ( 3 x - 4 ) (x2+ 2 ); &
ya
6x4—l l x 3—8x2+ 2 2 x —8 = (2 x —1) (3x—4) (x2—2)
The H.C.F. is ( 2 x - l ) (3 x - 4 ) = 6 x 2- l l x + 4
(iii) The cumbersome G.C.M. method.
ar

(6) (i) 2x3+ x 2—9 = (2x—3) (x2+ 2 x + 3 ) ;

and x 4+ 2 x 2+ 9 = (x 2+ 2 x + 3 ) (x2—2x+3)
m

.-. Thej H.C.F. is x2+ 2 x + 3

But the factorisation-work (especially of the
ra

former expression) will be a toughish job.

(ii) The G.C.M. method will be cumbrous (as usual).
(iii) The Vedic method—
2x3+ x 2- 9 2x4+ 4 x 2+18
x4-j-2xii-f-9 2x4-f-x3—9x
x 2 ) x 4+ 2 x 3+ 3 x 2 X s— 4x2—9x—18
--------------------------- x 8-f2 x 2+ 3 x
x 2+ 2 x + 3
-6 ) — 6x2—12x—18
N.B.—As this has no
further factors, it X 2x+3
the The H.C.F. is x 2+ 2 x + 3
E.H.S. Multiply it
by x and take it
over to the right for
subtraction.
 ( 102 )

(7) (i) 4x4+ l l x 3-f-27x2+ 1 7 x + 5 and 3x4+ 7 x 8+ 1 8 x 2+ 7 x + 5

(ii) .\12x4+ 3 3 x 3+ 8 1 x 2+ 5 1 x + 1 5 4 x 4+ 1 1 x 3+ 2 7 x 2+ 1 7 x + 5
12x 4+ 2 8 x 3+ 7 2 x 2+ 2 8 x + 20 3x4+ 7x3+ 1 8 x 2+ 7 x + 5
5 x 3+ 9x2+ 2 3 x —5 x) x 4 + 4x3+ 9 x 2+10x
5 x 3+ 2 0 x b+ 4 5 s + 5 Q x 3+ 4 x »+ t a + l 9
—11 ) l l x 2—22x—55 10x3+ 1 8 x 2+ 4 6 x -1 0
x2+2x-(“5 llx) llx 3-f22 x 2+ 55 x
x 2+ 2 x + 5

(ii) The G.C.M. method will be cumbrous (as usual).

(i) 4x4+ 1 1 x 3+ 2 7 x 2+ 1 7 x + 5 = ( x 2+ 2 x + 5 ) (4x2+ 3 x + 1 ) &
3x4+ 7 x 3+ 1 8 x 2+ 7 x + 5 = ( x 2+ 2 x + 5 ) (3x2+ x + 1 )

al
But the factorisation of the two big biquadratics
into two further factorless quadratics each, will entail
y
greater waste of time and energy.
ar
So, the position may be analysed thus :—
(i) The G.C.M. method is mechanical and reliable but too
cumbrous;
m

(ii) The Factorisation method is more intellectual but

harder to work out and therefore less dependable ;
ra

(iii) The Vedic method is free from all these defects and
is not only intellectual but also simple, easy and
reliable. And the beauty of it is that the H.C.F.
places itself before our eyes and seems to stare us in
the face !
 C h a p te r XI

SIMPLE EQUATIONS (FIRST PRINCIPLES)

As regards the solution of equations of various types,
the Vedic sub-Sutras give us some First Principles which are
theoretically not unknown to the western world but are not
(in actual practice) utilised as basic and fundamental first
principles of a practically Axiomatic character (in mathe­
matical computations).
In order to solve such equations, the students do not
generally use these basic sub-Sutras as such but (almost invari­

l
ably) go through the whole tedious work of practically proving
ya
the formula in question instead of taking it for granted and
applying it ! Just as if on every occasion when the expression
a3+ b 3+ c 3—3abc comes up ; one should not take it for granted
ar

that its factors are (a -fb + c ) and (a2+ b 2+ c 2—ab—be—ca)

but should go through the long process of multiplying these two,
showing the product and then applying it to the case on hand,
m

similarly for Pythagoras Theorem etc. !

The Vedic-method gives us these sub-formulae in a con­
ra

densed form (like Pardvartya etc.,) and enables us to perform

the necessary operation by mere application thereof. The
underlying principle behind all of them is MCRc#
(Pardvartya Yojayet) which means : “ Transpose and adjust”
The applications, however, are numerous and splendidly use­
ful. A few examples of this kind are cited hereunder, as
illustrations thereof:—
(1) 2 x + 7 = x + 9 .*. 2x-j- x = 9 —7 x —2. The student
has to perform hundreds of such transposttion-operations in
the course of his work ; but he should by practice obtain
such familiarity with and such master over it as to assimi­
late and assume the general form a that if a x + b = c x + d ,
x = ------and apply it by mjgfttal arithmetic automatically
a —c
 ( 104 )

to the particular case actually before him and say :—

2x+7=x+9 and
Z—1 1
the whole process should be a short and simple mental
process.
Second General Type
(2) The above is the commonest kind (of transpositions).
The second common type is one in which each side (the L.H.S.
and the R.H.S.) contains two Binomial factors.
In general terms, let (x + a ) ( x + b ) = ( x + c ) (x-fd). The
usual method is to work out the two multiplications and do the
transpovsitions and say :—
(x + a ) (x + b ) = (x + c ) (x + d )

l
ya
x2+ a x + b x + a b — x2+ c x + d x + c d
a x + b x —cx —dx = cd —ab
x (a + b —c —d) — cd—ab
ar
__ cd—ab
’ * X a + b —c —d
It must be possible for the student, by practice, to
m

assimilate and assume the whole of this operation and say

, cd—ab
immediately :
ra

As examples, the following may be taken

(1) (x + 1 ) ( x + 2 ) = ( * - 3 ) ( x - 4 ) , . X = 1
_ ‘ 2 = 2 _ = !» = 1

(2) ( x - 6 ) (x + 7 )= (x + 3 ) ( x - l l ) x T ;., I

(3) ( x - 2 ) ( x - 5 ) = ( x - l ) (x 4) x= ^ t “ ! _ _ = T “ =3

(4) ( * _ , ) < x - 9 ) = ( x - 3 ) (x 22) *= —

(5) (x + 7 ) (x + 9 )= (x + 3 ) (x+22) _|=L

(6) ,x + 7 ) ( x + 9) = ( x - 8 ) (x -1 1 ) = §?■ = ;

(7) (1 + 7 ) (x + 9 )= (x + 3 ) ( 1 + 2 1 ) x = . + “ ' “ 21
 ( 105 )

This gives rise to a general corollary to the effect that,

if cd—a b = 0 i.e. if cd =a b i.e. if the product of the absolute
terms be the same on both the sides, the numerator becomes
zero ; and x=0.

Third General Type

The third type is one which may be put into the general
form . __a x + b __p ; and, after doing all the cross-multiplication
cx+d q and transposition etc., we g et: bq— dp
The student should (by practice) be able to assimi- aq—cp
late and assume this also and do it all mentally as a single
operation.

Note : — The only rule to remember (for facilitating this

l
process) is that all the terms involving x should be
ya
conserved on to the left side and that all the inde­
pendent terms should be gathered together on the
ar
right side and that every transposition for this
purpose must invariably produce a change of sign
(i.e. from+ to—and conversely ; and from X into
m

-r and conversely).

Fourth General Type

ra

The fourth type is of the form :—

After all the L.C.M’s, the cross— multiplications and

the transpositions etc., are over, we get —m b—na ' rjiyg
is simple enough and easy enough for m +n
the student to assimilate ; and it should be assimilated and
readily applied mentally to any case before us.

In fact, the application of this process may, in due course,

by means of practice, be extended so as to cover cases involving
a larger number of terms. For instance,

-x 4+ a- + x4+ bk + x4+ -c = °
• ( * 'l-c) + p ( x + c ) (x -f a )+ p (x + a ) (x + b ) = ()
(x + a ) (x + b ) (x + c )
34
 ( 106 )

m[x24 -x (b + c)4 -b c]-fn [x2+ x (c + a )-fc a ]-f

+ p [x 2+ x (a + b )+ a b ] = 0
x 2(m + n + p )+ x [m (b + c )+ n (c + a )+ p (a + b )] +
(m bc+nca + pab)=0
If m-)-n-f-p = 0; then
, —mbc—nca—pab
X m (b + c )+ n (c + a )+ p (a + b )
But if m + n + p ± 0 , then it will be a Quadratic equation
and will have to be solved as such (as explained in a later chapter).
And this method can be extended to any number of terms
(on the same lines as explained above).

LINKING NOTE

l
ya
Special Types of Equations
The above types may be described as General types. But
there are, as in the case of multiplications, divisions etc,,
ar
particular types which possess certain specific characteristics
of a SPECIAL character which can be more easily tackled (than
the ordinary ones) with the aid of certain very short SPECIAL
m

processes (practically what one may describe as mental one-line

methods).
ra

As already explained in a previous context, all that the

student has to do is to look for certain characteristics, spot
them out, identify the particular type and apply the formula
which is applicable thereto.
These SPECIAL types of equations, we now go on to, in
the next few chapters.
 C h a p te r X II

SIMPLE EQUATIONS (by Sutra Siinyam etc.,)

We begin this section with an exposition of several special
types of equations which can be solved practically at sight-
with the aid of a beautiful special Sutra which reads : spr
(‘Sunyam Sdmyasamuccaye’ ) and which, in cryptic
language (which renders it applicable to a large number of
different cases) merely says : 4when the Samuccaya is the same,
that Samuccaya is zero” i.e. it should be equated to zero.
4Samuccaya9 is a technical term which has several mean­
ings (under different contexts) ; and we shall explain them,
one by one :
l
ya
F ik s t M e a n in g a n d A p p l ic a t io n
*Samuccaya’ first means a term which occurs as a common
ar
factor in all the terms concerned.
Thus ]2 x + 3 x = 4x-f5x .-. 12x+3x—4x—5x = 0
6x = 0 x= 0
m

All these detailed steps are unnecessary ; and, in fact,

no one works it out in this way. The mere fact that x occurs as
ra

a common factor in all the-terms on both sides [or on the

L.H.S. (with zero on the R.H.S.)] is sufficient for the inference
that x is zero ; and no intermediate step is necessary for arriving
at this conclusion. This is practically axiomatic.
And this is applicable not only to x or other such “ unknown
quantity” but to every such case. Thus, if 9 (x + l)= 7 (x -}-l),
we need not say: 9 ( x + l ) = 7 ( x + l )
9 x -f9 = 7 x + 7 / . 9x—7 x = 7 —9 2 x = —2 x = — l.
On the contrary, we can straightaway say : 9 (x + l)= 7 (x - f J)
x + l= 0 x = —1

S e c o n d M e a n in g a n d A p p l ic a t io n

The word 'Samuccaya' has, as its second meaning, the

product of the independent terms. Thus, (x + 7 )(x -f 9 )~ (x + 3 )
(x+21) .-.Here 7 x 9 = 3 x 2 1 . Therefore x = 0 .
 ( 108 )
This is also practically axiomatic, has been dealt with in a
previous section (of this very subject of equations) and need not
be gone into again.
T h ir d M e a n in g a n d A p p l ic a t io n
4Samuccaya thirdly means the sum of the Denominators
of two fiactions having the same (numerical) numerator. Thus

l i __ - f J - = 0 5x—2 = 0
2x—1 3x—1
This is axiomatic too and needs no elaboration.

F o u r t h M e a n in g a n d A p p l ic a t io n

Fourthly, ‘ Samuccaya’ means combination (or total).

In this sense, it is used in several different contexts ; and they

l
are explained below :—
ya
(i) If the sum of the numerators and the sum of the
denominators be the same, then that sum—zero.
ar
Thus :
2x+9__2x+7
2x + 7 2x+9
m

(2x+9) (2x+9) = (2x+7) (2x+7)

4x2+ 36 x + 8 .l = 4 x 2+ 2 8 x + 4 9
8x = —32
ra

x = —4

This is the current method. But the “ Sunyam Sarnya-

Samuccaye” formula tells us that, inasmuch as N1+ N 2= 4 x + I 6
and Dx+ D 2 is also 4x+16 .*. 4 x + 1 6 = 0 x = —4. In fact,
as soon as this characteristic is noted and the type recognised,
the student can at once mentally say : x = —4.

N ote:-—It in the algebraical total, there be a numerical

factor that should be removed. Thus:
3x-|-4__ x + 1
6 x+ 7 2 x+ 3
Here N1+ N 2= 4 x+ 5 ; and D i + D ^ S x + 1 0 . Removing
the numerical factor, we have 4 x+ 5 on both sides here too.
4 x+ 5 = 0 x = —5/4
 ( 109 )

No laborious cross-multiplications of Nj by D 2 and

N2 by D x and transpositions etc., are necessary (in the Vedic
method).
At sight, we can at once say 4 x + 5 —0 and be done with it.
F if t h M e a n in g a n d A p p l ic a t io n (for Quadratics)

With the same meaning (i.e. total) of the word

4Samuccaya,’ , there is a fifth kind of application possible of
this Sutra. And this has to do with Quadratic equations.
None need, however, go into a panic over this. It is as simple
and as easy as the fourth application ; and even little children
can understand and readily apply this Sutra in this context,
as explained below.
In the two instances given above, it will be observed

l
that the cross-multiplications of the coefficients of x gives us the
ya
same coefficient for x2. In the first case, we had 4x2 on both
sides ; and in the second example, it was 6x2 on both sides.
The two cancelling out, we had simple equations to deal with.
ar

But there are other cases where the coefficients of x2 are

not the same on the two sides ; and this means that wTe have a
quadratic equation befoje us.
m

But it does not matter. For, the same Sutra applies

(although in a different direction) here too and gives us also
ra

the second root of the quadratic equation. The only differenc e

is that inasmuch as Algebraic ‘Samuccaya9 includes sub­
traction too, we therefore now take into account, not only
the sum of Nt and N2 and the sum of Dx and I)2 but also the
differences between the numerator and the denominator on each
side ; and, if they be equal, we at once equate that difference
to Zero.
Let us take a concrete example and suppose we have to
solve the equation ? X- 1~
^ 6x+7 2 x+ 3
(i) We note that Nx+ N 2= 8 x + 1 0 and D1+ D 2 is also
8 x -fl0 ; we therefore use the method described in
the fourth application given above and equate
8x+10 to zero and say: x = —5/4.
 ( 110 )

(ii) But mental cross-multiplication reveals that the

x 2 coefficients (on the L.H.S. and the R.H.S.) are
6 and 30 respectively and not the same. So, we
decide that it is a quadratic equation ; and we observe
that N1~ D 1= 3 x + 3 and that N2~ D 2 is also 3 x -f3.
And so, according to the present application of the
same Sutra, we at once say : 3x4 -3 = 0 x = — 1.
Thus the two roots are—5/4 and —1 ; and we have solved
a quadratic equation at mere sight (without the usual parapher­
nalia of cross-multiplication, transposition etc.). We shall revert
to this at a l&ter stage (when dealing with quadratic equations
themselves, as such).

S ix t h M e a n in g a n d A p p l ic a t io n

l
ya
With the same sense ‘total5 of the word ‘Samuccaya
but in a different application, we have the same Sutra coming
straight to our rescue, in the solution of what the various
ar
texfc-books everywhere describe as “ Harder Equations” , and
deal with in a very late chapter thereof under that caption.
In fact, the label “ Harder” has stuck to this type of equations
m

to such an extent that they devote a separate section thereto

and the Matriculation examiners everywhere would almost
seem to have made it an invariable rule of practice to include one
ra

question of this type in their examination-papers !

Now, suppose the equation before us is :—

-i-+ -L - =
x —7 x —9 x —6 r x —10
In all the texfc-books, we are told to transpose two of the
terms (so that each side may have a plus term and a minus term),
take the L.C.M. of the denominators, cross-multiply, equate
the denominators, expand them, transpose and so on and so
forth. And, after 10 or more steps of working, they tell you
that 8 is the answer.
The Vedic Sutra, however, tells us that, if (other elements
being equal), the sum-total of the denominators on the L.H.S.
and the total on the R.H.S. be the same, then that total is zero !
 ( 111 )

In this instance, as D j + D 2 and D3+ D 4 both total 2x—16,

2x—16=0 x = 8 ! And that is all there is to it !
A few more instances may be noted :—
<>) _ J _ _ + _ i _ _ = _ L _ + x = —8
x+7 x+9 1+6 x+10
W _ ! ____ I___ L__ = _ 1 __ + —1----- i= _ l
x —7 x+9 x+11 x —9

(») x = 8!
x~8 X—9 x —5 x —12 *

D is g u is e d S pe c im e n s

The above were plain, simple cases which could be readily

recognised as belonging to the type under consideration. There,
however, are several cases which really belong to this type but
al
come under various kinds of disguises (thin, thick or ultra-thick)!
But, however thick the disguise may be, there are simple devices
y
by which we oan penetrate and see through the disguises and
ar
apply the ‘Sunya Samuccaye' formula

Thin D isguises
1 1
m

(1) 1 l
x—8 X—5 x — 12 x—9
ra

Here, we should transpose the minuses,

4 terms are plus ones:;—
1 , 1 ~ 1 + 1 = 8*
x—8 + x—9 x—12 ^ x—5
The transposition-process here is very isy and ca
be done mentally (in less than the proverbial ce).
(2) 1 1 1 1 x = —2|
x+1 x+3 x+2 x+4
(3) 1 1 1 1
x = 3i
x+1 x^-~3 x— 4 x— 8
(4) 1 1 1 1 x = 4 (b + c )
(x -b ) x —b - -d
x —c + d x —c
(3) 1
J ___ _ I1 _ 1_____ 1____
1 1 . __ l/l , x
x+b x+b+d x + c —d x+c X
 ( 112 )

N ote:—If the last two examples (with so many literal

coefficients involved) were to be done according to
the current system, the labour entailed (over the
L.C.M.’s, the multiplications etc.,) would have been
terrific ; and the time taken would have been pro­
portionate too ! But, by this (Vedic) method, the
equation is solved at sight !

M ed iu m D isguises

The above were cases of thin disguises, where mere

transposition was sufficient for enabling us to penetrate them.
We now turn to cases of disguises of medium thickness
(1) x —2 , x —3 __ x —1 , x —4^
x —3 x —4 x —2 x —5

l
ya
By dividing the Numerators out by the Denominators,
we h a v e:
ar
l-l— L _ -j-i-i-— L_ = 1 + _ L _ -) - i + _JL
^ x —3 x —4 x —2 ^ ^ x —5

Cancelling out the two ones from both sides, we have the
m

Equation before us in its undisguised shape and can at once

say, x = 3j.
ra

Now, this process of division can be mentally performed

very easily, thus :—

W v (l + l = l + l )
X X X x

(ii) Applying the Paravartya method (mentally) and

transferring the independent term of the denominator
(with its sign changed) to the Numerator, we get 1 as the
result in each of the 4 cases.

With the help of these two TESTS, we know that “ the

other elements are the same” ; and, as D1+ D 2= D 3+ D 4, we
therefore identify the case before us as coming completely
within the jurisdiction of the “ Sunyam Samuccaye” formula
v 2x—7—0 x = 3f
 ( 113 )
(2) _x___ . x —9 __ x + 1 , x —8
x —2 x —7 x —1 x —6
Here, 1 . 1 1 , 1
l i ' l “ l :t' l ’
Secondly, by Paravartya,
2 _ 2 _ _2_ _ 2
x —2 x —7 x —1 x —6

We transpose the minus terms and find that all the TESTS
have been satisfactorily passed. (All this argumentation cun
of course, be done mentally).
So, we say: 2x—8 = 0 v . x = 4
(3) 2 x—3 , 3x—20 _ x —3 , 4x—19
x —2 x —7 al
x —4 x —5
Here f+~ t = t + $ ; the Numerators all become 1 ; and
y
D1+ D 2= D 3+ D 4= 2 x —9 = 0 x=4*
ar
(4) 3x—8 , 4x—35 _ 2x—9 . 5x—34
x —3 x —9 x —5 x —7
Here, f + T = T + f > an(i other 2 tests are all
m

right too. .'. x = 6

(5) 3x—13 , 4 x — 41 = 2x—13 , 5x—41
ra

x —4 x —10 x —6 x —8
All the TESTS are found satisfactorily passed.
.•. 2x—14=0 x=7
(6) 4x+21 j_ 5 x—69 _ 3 x —5 , 6x—41
x+5 ' x —14 x —2 x —7
All the TESTS are all right .\ 2x—9 = 0

x2+ 3x+ 3 x 2—15 _ x2+ 7 x + l l , x 2—4x—20

x+2 x —4 x+5 x —7

Either by simple division or by simple factorisation

(both of them, mental), we note :—
(i) ( x + l ) + ( x + 4 ) = ( x + 2 ) + ( x + 3 )
(ii) the numerators are all unity; and
(iii) D1+ B 2= D 3+ D 4= 2 x —2 = 0 .\ x = l
 T h ic k e r D is g u is e s
(!) 2 , 3 1 i 6
2x+3 3 x+ 2 x + 1 + 0 x+ 7
(i) At first sight, this does not seem to be of the type
which we have been dealing with in this section.
But we note that the coefficient of x in the four de­
nominators is not the same. So, by suitable multi­
plication of the numerator and the denominator in
each term, we get 6 (the L.C.M. of the four coefficients)
uniformly as the coefficient of x in all of them. Thus,
we h ave:—
6 , 6 _ 6 , 6
6x+ 9 6 x+ 4 6 x+ 6 6x+7

l
Now, we can readily recognise the type and say
ya
_1Q
12x+13 = 0 x= —
12
ar
But we cannot gamble on the possible chance
of its being of this type and go through all the laborious
work of L.C.M., the necessary multiplications etc ,
(and perhaps find at the end of it all, we have drawn
m

a blank) ! There must therefore be some valid and

convincing test whereby we can satisfy ourselves
ra

beforehand on this point (and, if convinced, then and

then only should we go through all the toil involved).
And that test is quite simple and easy :—
f + i = T — I* But even then, only the possi­
bility or the probability (and not the certainty) of it
follows therefrom.
(ii) A second kind of TEST—with guarantee of certainty—
is available too. And this is by CROSS-multipli-
cation of Nx by D2 and of N2 by Dx on the one hand
and of N3 by D4 and of N4 by D3 on the other. (And
this too can be done mentally).
Thus, in the case dealt with, we get from each
side-^-the same 12x+13 as the total /. 12x+ 13= 0
 ( 115 )

(2) 3 6 _ 3 _ 2
3x+l 6x+l 3x+2 2x+l
(i) We transpose (mentally) and note :
f + f = f + § So, we may try the L.C.M. method.
_JL_ + 6 x+
6x+2
1—3 = 6 x6+ l- n+_i_=0
6x+4

12x+5 = 0 x= 5 ^
12
(ii) Even here, after the preliminary testing of f + f
being equal to § + £ , we may straight away CROSS-
multiply and say : 12x-(-5=0 x = —5/12

(3) ' _A _ - 3 | 2
3 x + l ”r 2x—1 3x—2 2 x + l

l
ya
By either of the two methods, we get I2x—-1 = 0
ar
W L -I- 3 - 1 + 3
x+3 3x—1 x + 5 3x—7

By either method, 6 x + 8 = 0 .\ x = ~
m

3
(5) 2 x + l l 9 x + 9 _ 4 x + 1 3_15x—47
x+5 3x—4 x+3 3x—10
ra

Here $ - $ = $ —2A YES.

By simple division, we put this into proper shape,
as follows :—
1 , 3 _ 1 .___ 3_
x+5 3x—10 x+3 3x—4
Here * + $ = * + § YES.
By either method, 6 x + 5 = 0 x= —

(6) 5—6x i_2 x+ 7 _ 3 1— 12x . 4 x + 2 1

3x — 1 x + 3 3x—7 x+5
1 . 3 1 . 3
■' x + 3 3x—1 x+5 3x—7
.•. By either method, 6 x + 8 = 0 x—
 ( 116 )
F u r t h e r A p p l ic a t io n s of th e F o r m u l a

(1) In the case of a special type of seeming “ cubics'* :—

There is a certain type of equations which look like cubic
equations but, which (after wasting a huge lot of our time, and
energy) turn out to be simple equations of the first degree and
which come within the range of the “ Sunyam Samuccaye”
formula. Thus, for instance—
(x —3)3+ ( x —9)3= 2 (x —6)3

The current system works this out at enormous length

(by expanding all the three cubes, multiplying, transposing
etc.,) and finalty gives us the answer x = 6

The Vedic Sutra now under discussion is, however, appli­

l
ya
cable to this kind of case too and says :—
(x —3 )+ (x —9) — 2x—12. Taking away the numerical
factor, we have x~—6. And x —6 is the factor under the cube
ar
on R.H.S. x —6—0 .*. x = 6
The Algebraical proof of it is as follows :
(x —2a)3-f-(x—2b)3—2(x—a—b)3
m

x 3—6x2b + 12xa2—8a3+ x 3—6x2b + 12 xb 2—8b®=

= 2 (x 3—3x2a —3x2b + 3 xa 2+ 3 xb 2+6xab —a3—3a2b —3ab2—b3)
ra

= 2 x 3—6x2a—6x2b4-6xa2- f 6*2b4-I2xab—2a3—6a2b —6ab2—2b3

Cancelling out the common terms from both sides, we have :
12xa2+12xb2—8a3—8b3—6xa2-)-6xb2~|- 12xab—2a3—6a 2b
—6ab2—2b3
6xa2+ 6 x b 2--12xab ~ 6 a 3—6a2b —6ab2 K>b3
6x(a—b)2--6(a } fe) (a - b ) 2
.*. x = a + b
Obviously this particular combination was not thought
of and worked out by the mathematicians working under the
current system. At any rate, it is not found listed in their
books (under any known formula or as a conditional identity”
and so on). The Vedic mathematicians, however, seem to have
worked it all out and given us the benefit thereof (by the appli­
cation of this formula to examples of this type).
 ( 117 )
We need hardly point out that the expansions, multi­
plications, additions, transpositions, factorisations in each
particular case of this type must necessarily involve the ex­
penditure of tremendous time and energy, while the Vedic
formula gives us the answer at sight!

Three more illustrations may be taken

(i) (x— 149)3+ ( x —51)3= 2 (x —100)3
The very prospect of the squaring, cubing etc., of these
numbers must appal the student. But, by the present Sutra.
we can at once say : 2x—200=0 x~100
(ii) (x—249)3+ (x + 2 4 7 )3= 2 (x —l)3

l
This'iex till more terrific. But, with the aid of this Sutra,
ya
we can at once say : x — 1 ; and
(iii) (x + a + b - c)3+ ( x + b + c —a)3 —2 (x + b )a
ar
The literal coefficients make this still worse. But th&
Vedic one-line mental answer is: x = —b.

(2) In the case of a special type of seeming “ Biquadratics" :

m

There is also similarly, a special type of seemingly “ Biqua­

dratic” equations, which are re-ally of the first degree and which
ra

the same Sutra solves for us, at sight. Thus, for example :
- (x + 3 )3 _ x + 1
(x + 5 ) x+7
According to the current method, we cross-multiply and
say : (x + 7 ) ( x + 3 ) - = ( x + l ) (x + 5 )3

.Expanding the two sides (with the aid of the usual formula
L (x+ a)(x+ b)(x+ c)(x+ d)= = x4+ x 3(a + b + c + d )
+ x 2(a b + a c + a d + b c -+ b d + cd )+ x
X (abc+abd+acd+bed)+abed)] (twice oyer),
we will next say
x4+ 1 6xs+ 9 0xa+ 2 1 6 x + 1 8 9 = x 4+ i c x 3+ 9 x 2+200x+126
Cancelling out the common terms and transposing, we then say :
.*. lGx — —64 x — -4
 ( 118 )
According to the Vedic formula, howevr, we do not cross-
multiply the binomial factors and so on but simply observe
that N j+ D j,* and N2+ D 2 are both 2x-f-8 and 2x+8==0
x = —4

The Algebraic proof hereof is as follows :—

( x + a + d ) 3__ x + a
(x + a + 2 d ) x-f-a-f-3d
By the usual process of cross-multiplications,
(x 4 -a + 3 d )3(x + a + d ) = (x + a )(x + a + 2 d )3
(By expansion of both sides)

x4- f x 3(4a+ 6d) - f x 2( 16a2+ 1 8ad+ 1 2d 2) +x(4a3+ 1 8a2d+24ad2

+ lQd3)+ (a 4+ 6 a 3d + 12a2d 2+12ad3+ d 4) = x 4+ x 3(4x+6d)

l
+ x 2(16a2+ 18ad+ 12d2)+ x(4a 3+18a2d+ 4 a d2+ 8 d 3)+ete,,etc.
ya
.*. (Cancelling common terms out), we have :—
x(10d3)+10ad3+ 3 d 4= x (8 d 3)+ 8 a d 3.
2d3x'-f,2ad3+ 3 d 4= 0
ar
(Cutting d3 out), we have 2 x + 2 a + 3 d = 0 x = —^(2aH-3d)
At this point, the student will note that Nx+ D x (under the cubes)
and N2+ D 2 are both (2x+2a-f-3d). And this gives us the
m

required clue to the particular characteristic which characterises

this type of equations, i. e. that N1+ D 1 (under the cube)
ra

and N2+ D 2 must be the same ; and, obviously, therefore, the

6Sunyarn Samuccaye Sutra applies to this type. And, while
the current system has evidently not tried, experienced and
listed it, the Vedic seers had doubtless experimented on,
observed and listed this particular combination also and listed
it under the present Sutra.
N ote:—(1) The condition noted above (about the 4 Binomials)
is interesting. The sum of the first + the second
.must be the same as the sum of the 3rd and 4th.
(2) The most obvious and readily understandable
condition fulfilling this requirement is that the
absolute terms in N2, N1? Dx and D2 Binomials
should be in Arithmetical Progression.
*(within the cubes)
 ( 119 )

(3) This may also be postulated in this way, i.e. that

the difference between the two Binomials on the
R.H.S. must be equal to thrice the difference
between those on the L.H.S. This, however, is
only a corollary—result arising from the A.P.
relationship amidst the four Binomials (namely,
that if N2, Nl? J)x and D 2 are in A.P. it is obvious
that D 2—N2= 3 (D 1—N1).
(4) In any case, the formula (in this special type) may
be enunciated—in general terms—thus if N-f-D
on both sides be the same, N + D should be equated
to zero :
Two more examples of this type may be taken
(1) (x— 5)8_ ( x — 3) . .

l
ya
•• 2x- 12- 0 •• x - «
(x ~~a)3-—x—2a—b
(x + b ) # x + a + 2 b
ar

Working all this out (which all the literal coefficients and
with cross-multiplicatons, expansions, cancellations, trans­
positions etc., galore) would be a horrid task (for even the most
m

laborious labourer). The Vedic formula, however, tells us

that (x—a )+ (x —b) and (x—2a—b )+ (x + a + 2 b ) both total
ra

iip to 2 x —a + b x = | (a —b)
N ote:—In all the above examples, it will be observed that the
4 binomials are not merely in Arithmetical Progression
but are also so related that their cross totals are also
the same.
Thus, in the first example worked out above, by Cross­
multiplication, we have (x + 7 )(x + 3 )3= ( x + l ) ( x + 5 ) 3 ; and
the Cross-ADDITION of these factors gives us 4x+16 as
the total on both sides ; and this tallies with the value x = —4
(obtained above).
in the second example :—
(x + a + 3 d ) (x + a + d )3= (x + a )(x + a + 2 d )3.
And here too, Cross-ADDITION gives us 4 x+ 4 a + 6 d as the total
on both sides. And this too gives us the same answer as before.
 ( 120 )

In the third example, we have :—

(x-— 9 ) ( x — 5 ) 8 = ( x — 3 ) ( x — 7 ) 3.

And here too the Cross-ADDITION Process gives us 4x—24 as

the total on both sides. And we get the same answer as before.
In the fourth case, we have :—
(x + a + 2 b )(x —a)3= ( x —2a—b )(x + b )3.
And cross-ADDITION again gives us the total 4x—2a+2b on
both sides and, therefore, the same value of x as before.
The student should not, however, fall into the error of
imagining that this is an additional TEST (or sufficient condition)
for the application of the formula. This really comes in as a
corollary-consequence of the A.P. relationship between the
Binomial factors. But it is not a sufficient condition (by itself)

l
for the applicability of the present formula. The Rule about
ya
N i+ D j and N2+ D 2 being the same, is the only condition
sufficient for this purpose.
ar

An instance in point is given below :—

(x + 3 )3 _ x + 2
(x + 5 ) x+8
m

Here, Cross-ADDITION gives 4 x + l / as the total on both

sides, and the condition D 2—N2= 3 (D 1—Nx) is also satisfied
ra

(as 6 = 2 x 3 ). But 3 -j-5+ 2+8 ; and, as this essential condition

is lacking, this particular equation does not come within the
purview of this Sutra.
On actual cross-multiplication and expansion etc., we
find :—
x 4+ 1 7 x 3 + 105x2+ 2 7 o x + 2 5 0 = x 4+ 1 7 x 3+ 9 9 x 2+ 2 4 3 x + 2 i 6

6 x 2+ 3 2 x + 3 4 = 0 , which is a Quadratic equation (with the

two Irrational Roots — 16=^— — ! and not a simple equation at

6
all. of the type we are here dealing with.

And this is in confiormity with the lack of the basic

condition in question i.e. that N^l+ D jl and N2+ D 2 should be
the same.
 ( 121 )
(3) In the case of another special type of seeming “ Biquadratics”

There is also another special type of seeming “ Biqua­

dratics” which are really simple equations of the first degree,
which the “ Sunyam Samuccaye” Sutra is applicable to and
which we now go on to. (This section may, however, be held
over for a later reading).
(x + 1 ) (x + 9 ) (x + 6 ) (x+10)
(x + 2 j (x + 4 ) - (x + 5 ) (x + 7 )
or (x + 1 ) (x + 9 ) (x + 5 ) (x + 7 ) = (x + 2 ) (x + 4 ) (x + 6 ) (x+10)
We first note that cross-ADDITION gives us the same
total (4x+22) on both sides. This gives us the assurance
that, on cross-multiplication, expansion etc., the x4 and the x8

l
coefficients will cancel out. But what about the x2 coefficients ?
ya
For them too to vanish, it is necessary that the sum of
the products of the independent terms taken two at a time
ar
should be the same on both the sides. And this is the case when
if (x + a ) (x + b ) (x + c ) (x + d ) = (x + e ) (x + f) (x + g ) (x+ h ), we
have not merely a + b + c + d = e + f + g + h but also two other
conditions fulfilled 3*—
m

(i) that the sum of any 2 binomials on the one side is

ual to the sum of some two binomials on the other :
ra

and (ii) a b + cd on the left= ef+ g h on the right.

In the example actually now before us, we find all these
conditions fulfilled •
(1) ( x + l ) + ( x + 9 ) — ( x + 4 ) + ( x + 6 ) ; ( x + l ) + (x+ 5 ) = (x + 2 ) +
(x + 4 ) ; ( x + l ) + ( x + 7 ) = (x + 2 )+ (x + 6 ) ; (x + 9 )+ (x + 5 ) =
(x + 4 ) + (x+10) ; (x + 9 ) + (x + 7 ) — (x + 6 ) + (x+10) ; and
(x + 5 )+ (x + 7 ) = (x + 2 )+ (x + 1 0 ) : and (ii) (5+63) and
(8+60) are both equal to 68.
So, by this test, at sight, we know the equation comes
under the range of this Siitra 4x+22 = 0 x — —5 j
Similar is the case with regard to the equation :—
(2) (x + 2 ) (x + 4 ) (x—1) (x + 7 )
( x + l ) (x + 3 ) “ (x —2) (x + 6 )
16
 ( 122 )

(x —2) (x + 2 ) (x + 4 ) (x + 6 ) = (x—1) (x + 1 ) (x + 3 )
(x + 7 ) ; and
(i) By cross-addition, the total on both sides is 4x+10
(ii) The sum of each pair of Binomials on the one side is
equal to the sum of some pair thereof on the other;
and
(iii) a b + c d = ef+gh i.e. —4+24 = —1+21 (= 2 0 )
The Sutra applies; and 4x+10 = 0 x = —2\

Such however is not the case with the equation :

(3) (x —1) ( x - 6 ) (x + 6 ) (x+ 5 ) = (x—4) ( x - 2 ) (x+ 3 ) (x+ 7 )
Here, we observe :—

l
(i) The total on both sides is 4 x + 4 ;
ya
but (ii) the totals of pairs of Binomials (on the two sides)
do not tally ;
ar
and (iii) a b + c d ^ e f+ g h

This equation is therefore a quadratic (and not within

the scope of the present Sutra).
m

The Algebraical Explanation (for this type of equations)

is :—
ra

(x + a ) (x + b ) (x + c ) (x + d )= (x + e ) (x + f) (x + g ) (x+ h )
The data are :—
(i) a + b + c + d = e + f + g + h ;
(ii) The sum of any pair of binomials on the one side
must be the same as the sum of some pair of binomials
on the other. Suppose that a + b = e + f ; and c + d
—g + h ; and
(iii) a b + c d = e f+ g h

x4+ x 3 ( a + b + c + d ) + x 2 (a b + a c + a d + b c + b d + c d )
+ x (a b c + a b d + a c d + b c d )+ a b c d
= x4+ x 3 ( e + f + g + h ) + x 2 ( e f+ e g + e h + fg + f h + g h )
+ x (efg+ efh + egh + fgh )+ efgh
 ( 123 )
The x 4 and x3cancel o u t; and, owing to the data in
the case, the x 2 coefficients are the same on both sides; and
therefore they too cancel out. And there is no quadratic
equation (left for us to solve herein)
P roof: The x 2 coefficients are :—
L.H.S. a b + a c + a d + b c + b d + c d
R.H.S. e f+ e g + e h + fg + fh + g h
i.e. (a b + cd )+ a (c+ d ) b (c + d )= a b + c d + (a + b )(c + d )
and (e f+ g h )+ e (g + h )+ f(g + h )= e f+ g h + (e + f)(g + h )
But (a b + cd )= (e f+ g h ) ; and a + b = e + f ; and c-f-d
=g+h
the L.H.S.=the R.H.S. ; and x 2 vanishes !

FURTHER EXTENSION OF THE SUTRA al

In*the beginning of this very chapter, it was noted that
y
if a function (containing the unknown x, y etc.,) occurs as a
common factor in all the terms on both sides (or on the L.H.S.
ar

(with zero on the R.H.S.) that function can be removed therefrom

and equated to Zero. We now proceed to deal with certain
types of cases which do not seem to be of this kind but aie
m

really so. All that we have to do is to re-arrange the terms in

such a manner as to unmask the masked terms, so to say and make
ra

the position transparently clear on the surface. For example—

(1) x-f-a ■ x + b , x + c _ _ _ 3

b+c c + a a+b
Taking —3 over from the R.H.S. to the L.H.S. distributing
it amongst the 3 terms there, we have :
x + a -|-1 + + 1+ x + c + i = o
b+c c+ a a+b
i.e. x + a + b + c ■ x + b + c + a , x + c + a + b = n
b+c c+ a a+b
By virtue of the Samuccaya rule,
x+a+b+c = 0 # = — (a + 6 + c)
This whole working can be done, at sight i.e. mentally.
(2) x + a , x + b , x + c _ x + 2 a x+2b x+2c
b+c c+ a a+b b + c — a c + a —b a + b —c
 ( 124 )
Add unity to each of the 6 terms ; and observe
x + a + b + c , x + a + b + c I x + a + b + _c
*'•----- l)x D2 !>3
x+a+b+c , x + a + b + c , x+a+b+c
i '4 • i »r + u.
X+ a + b + c - 0 , \ x = — {a+ & + c)
(3) x — a . x — b , x c _ x + a , x+b_ ■ _ £ ± ° _
b+c c+ a a + b 2a+b+c ‘2 b + c + a 2c+a+b

Subtract unity from each of the (> terms ; and we have :

x —a —b — c = 0 x= (a+ b+ c)
(4) x+a2 i x+b2 , ___ x c2____
( a + b ) (a + c ) (b + c ) (b + a ) (c + a ) (c + b )
x — be _ x —ca , x —ab

l
a (b+ c) b(c+a) c(a+b)
ya
Subtracting 1 from each of the 6 terms, we have :
x —ab—ac — be — 0 x — (a6+6c+ca)
(5) x —be _j_ x —ca _|_x—ab
ar
b+c c+ a a+b
= x2+ 2 a 2—be x 2+ 2 b 2—ca , x2+ 2 c 2—ab
2a+b+c 2b+ c+ a 2 c+ a + b
m

Subtracting a from the first terms, b from the second

terms and c from the third terms (on both sides), we have :
ra

x —ab—be—ca = 0 x — ab-\-bc-]-ca
^ x + a 2+ 2c2 ■ x + b 2+ 2 a 2 , x + c 2+ 2 b 2__ 0
b+c c+ a a+b
As (b—c ) + (c —a )+ (a —b) = 0, we add b —c, c —a and
a—b to the first, second and third terms respctively ; and we
have :
x + a 2+ b 2+ c 2 - 0 /. x = —(a2+ 6 2+ c 2)
(7) ax+a(a2+2bc) b x + b (b2+2ca) cx + c (c 2+2ab) _ Q
b —c c —a a—b
As a(b—c )+ b (c —a )+ c(a —b) = 0
#\ We add a(b—c) to the first term, b(c—a) to the second
and c(a—b) to the last; and we have :
, ax+ a(a2+2bc) , /U x
tx = ---- Lj ^ x ----- ~+a(b—c)
 ( 125 )
_ ax+a(a2+*2bc)+a(b—c)2
b—-c
■= “ ^ ai ? ! ± ^ ! ± ^ ! ) = J L . {x + (a 2+ b 2-f e4)}
b—c b—c
Similarly, t2 = — {x- f (a2+ b 2+ c 2)}
c —a

and t3 = — ^ (x + (a 2+ b 2+ c 2)} = 0
a o
x + a 2+ b 2+ c 2 = 0 x ~ —(a2-\-b2-\-c2)
(8) x + a 3+ 2 b 3_|_x+b32c3_|_x+c3+ 2 a 3
b—c c—a a—b
= 2a2+2b 2+ 2 c 2+ab+ac-fbc
Splitting the R.II.S. into (b2+ b c + c 2)+(c2+ c a + a 2)-f-(a2-fab

l
+ b 2), transposing the three parts to the left and combining
ya
the first with the first, the second with the second and the third
with the third (by way of application of the ‘Adymddyena
formula), we have :
ar

tl = ^ ! ± ^ 3- ( b 2+ b c + c 2)
b—c
__x +a 3+2b3—b3-|-c3 _ x + a 3+ b 3-4-c3
m

b^-c b—c
Similarly, t2 = N
c—a
ra

i , the same N
and to = ------- -------
3 a—b
/ . x~- —(a3-f-63+ c 3)
 Chapter X III

M ERGER TYPE

of
E A SY SIMPLE EQUATIONS (by the Pardvartya' method)

Having dealt with various sub-divisions under a few

special types of simple equations which the Sunyam Samya-
samuccaye formula helps us to solve easily, we now go on
to and take up another special type of simple equations which
the Pardvartya Sutra (dealt with already in connection with
Division etc) can tackle for us.

l
ya
This is of what may be described as the MERGER Type ;
and this too includes several sub-headings under that heading.

The first type :

ar

The first variety is one in which a number of terms on

the left hand side is equated to a single term on the right hand
side, in such manner that N 1+ N 2- f N 3 etc., (the sum of the
m

numerators on the left) and (the single numerator on ihe right)

are the same. For instance,
ra

iT T + i= 2 = £F s Here N*+ N * U - (3 + 4 )^ N (i.e . 7)

So the Sutra applies.
The procedure is one of merging of the R.H.S. fraction
into the left, so that only two terms remain. The process is
as follows:
As we mean to merge the R.H.S. into the L.H.S., we
subtract the independent term of the to-be-merged binomial
from the absolute terms in the binomials on the left and multi­
ply those remainders by the numerators of the terms on the
left. And the process is complete.
(i) We first put down the two to-be-retained denomi­
nators down thus :—
x-f-1 x—2
 ( 127 )

(ii) Then, as 3(from the R.H.S) is to be merged, we

subtract that 3 from the 1 in the first term, obtain
4-2 as the remainder, multiply it by the numerator
(i.e. 3), get ~ 6 as the product and put that down
as the new numerator for our first term.
(iii) And we do the same thing with the second term,
obtain —4 as the product and set it down as our
Numerator for the 2nd term of the new (i.e. the
derived) equation.
(iv) As the work of merging has been completed, we put
zero on the right hand side. So the resultant new
equation (after the merger) now reads:
.z l - j L =0
l
x 4 -l x+2
ya
Then, by simple cross-multiplication, we say
4 x + 4 = —6x—12 .\10x = —16 x = —8/5
ar

or, by the general formula (—mb—na)/(m +n) explained

already (in the chapter on simple equations and first principles),
we say at once :
m

12+4 _
= —8/5
—6—4
ra

The Algebraical Proof hereof is

3 , 4 7 3 , 4
x+1 4+2 x+3 x + 3 x4-3
. 3___ _3_ = 4 __4___
x+1 x+ 3 x+3 x+2
. 3 (x + 3 —x —l ) _ 4 ( x + 2 —x —3)
• " (x + 1 ) (x + 3 ) (x + 3 ) (x + 2 )
. 6 -4
. 6x+12 = 4x—4 1 0 x = —16
x+1 x+2
x = —8/5

The General Algebraical Proof hereof is :

JP + q - P + q
x+a x+b x+c
 ( 128 )

q _
x+a x+b x+c x+c
,_P_____ P _ = _S_____
x+a x+c x+ c x+b
p (x + 6 —x —a ) _ q ( x + b —x —c)
(x + a ) (x + c ) (x + c ) (x + b )
P(c—a ) _ q ( b —c)
x+a x+b
x{p(c—a )+ q (c —b )}= bp(a—c)+ a q (b —c)
_ bp(a—c)+ a q (b —c)
p(c—a )+ q (c —b)
W ell; the Algebraical explanation, may look frightfully long.
But the application of the ‘Pardvartya’ Sutra (as just herein­

l
ya
above explained and illustrated) is simple enough and easy
enough and should be welcomed by the student with delight.
A few more examples of this sort may be noted:
ar
(!) 3 , 5 __ 8
x —2 x —6 x + 3
Here 3 + 5 = 8 The Sutra applies.
m

• (3 )(- 5 ) , (—9)(5')_— 15_|_ 45 __ „ . -9 0 -9 0 ,

x —2 + x —6 x —2 x —6 -1 5 -4 5
ra

(2) 2 3 _ 5
x+2 x+3 x+5
Here 2 + 3 = 5 The formula applies.
. -6 , -6 =0 x = z _ 2i
+ 2 X+ 3
X

Note : — At this stage, when both the numerators are found to be

— 6 and can therefore be removed, the formula “ Sunyam
Somuccaye” may be readily applied : and we may say :
(x + 2 )+ (x + 3 ) = 0 .\.x = —2|
But, if—? —+ — = -11, as 2 + 3 = 5,
x+2 x+3 x+7
the merger Sutra applies ; but after the merger, the
numerators are different (i.e. — 10 and — 12) and there­
fore the ‘Sunyam} Sutra will not apply.
 ( 129 )

DISGUISES
Here too, we have often to deal with disguises, by seeing
through and penetrating them, in the same way as in the
previous chapter (with regard to the ‘Sunyam Samuccaye5
formula).
A few illustrations will make this clear :
(1) 5 , 2 _ 3
x —2 3—-x x —4
Here, mere transposition will do the trick. Thus :
2 , 3 5 Now, 2 + 3 = 5 The Sutra applies.
x —3 x —4 x —2
_ “ 2+ ^ = 0 x= — = —
x —3 x —4 —8 4
(2) 4 , 9 _ 15

l
ya
2 x + l 3 x+ 2 3 x + l
4+9^15 Doubt arises ; but the coefficients of x being
different in the three denominators, we try the L.C.M. method
ar
and g e t :
12 + 18 — 30
6x+ 3 6 x + 4 6 x+ 2
m

And here, on noting (12)+N2 (18) = Ns (30), we say :

“ YES ; the Sutra applies” and proceed to apply i t :
12/(6x+ 3)+ 36/(6x+ 4) = 0 x = -1 3 /2 4
ra

But how should we know before-hand that the Sutra does

apply ? The TEST is very simple and merely consists in the
division of each numerator by the x—coefficient in the denomi­
nator (as in the ‘Sunyam case). Thus = 2 + 3 = 5 ; and ^ :
is also 5.
Say, “ YES” and go ahead, with the merging.
(3) 4 , 9 _ 25
2x—1 3x—1 5x—1
Here ( f + f ) and ^ are the same (i.e. 5) .'.YES.
• 60 1 90 150 NOTE, 60 + 90 = 150
30x—15 30x—10 30x—6
. __ 2____ , 3 _ 5 __
NOTE2 + 3 —5 YES
” 30x—15 30x—10 30x—6
IT
 ( 130 )

Proceed therefore and say:

-1 8 _ 12
30x—15 30x—10
(4) 7___ , 6 _ 15
7x+l 4x+l 6x+5
Here ^ + | = l + l | = 2 j ; and V is also 2| YES

Do the merging therefore and say:

. 84 , 126 210
84x+12 84x+21 84x+70
2 , 3 _ 5
YES
84x + I2 84x+21 84x470
-1 1 6 L -1 4 7 = 0 . -5 0
84X+12 84x4-21 ' ' 263
l
ya
(5) 4 , 7 _ 3
5x-)-l 10x4-1 2 x + l
Here f 4 to = to = 3/2 YES
ar

8 i 7 _ 15 . "ygs
’ * 10x+2 10x4-1 ~ 10x45 ’ *
... _ = * i . + := ® L = 0
m

10x+2 1 0 x + l
520x 80 — 0
ra

x = —2/13
(6) 7 . 6 _ 15
7 x 4 1 4 x-H 6 x4 1
Here ? 4 f = 2| ; and ^ is also 2| YES
84 126 _ 210 . YES
84x412 84x421 84x414
2 , 3 _ 5 \ YE
84x412 84x421 84x414
—4 , 21
: 0
84x412 94x421
1428x4 168 = 0
• y r_ ~ 168 _—2
1428 17
 EXTENSION OF MERGER METHOD

{Multiple Merger)

We now take up and deal with equations wherein N1-(-N2+

N8(of the L.H.S.)=N of the R.H.S. and wherein the same
‘Paravartya’ (Merger) formula can be applied in exactly the
same way as before. Thus:

(!) _ L | 3 I 5 - 9
x+2 x+3 T x+5 x+4
TEST: l + 3 + 5 = 9 YES.
—2 , —3 , 5 _ 0 . YES, again.
x+2 x+3 x+5
i.e. 2 , 3 5__

l
x+2 x+3 x+5
ya
+_=L =o
x+2 x+3
ar
(i) By the Basic Formula ^ x=— na
m +n
__ 18+12 30
—6—6 -1 2
m

or (ii) By 4Sunyam Samuccaye5 formula :

(x + 2 )+ (x + 3 ) = 0 x= —
ra

Note :—These two steps (of successive merging) can be combined

into one by multiplying Nx first by (2—4) and then
by (2—5) i.e. by 6 and similarly N2 first by (3—4)
and then by (3—5) i.e. by 2 and proceeding as before
.-. _JL +_JL _ = 0
x+2 x+3
By either method (Basic or Sunyam), x = —
The Algebraic Proof hereof is this :
m n , p _m +n+p
x+a x+b x+c x+d
. m(a—d)_^n(b—d)_^p(c—d)__^
x+a x+b x+c
m(a—d) (a—c )^ n(b—d) (b—c ) ^ 0
x+a x+b
 ( 132 )
which is the exact shape of the formula required for the single-
step merger, (vide swpra).
Similarly, the merger-formula can be extended to any
number of terms as follows:

m + n 1 p + q | r + ...
x+a x+b x+ c x+d x+e
_ m + n + p + q + r + ...
x+w
• m(a—w) (--------) (a~ e ) (a—d) (a—c)
x+a
, n(b—w) (--------) (b—e) (b—d) (b—c)
T ' x+b
(which is the general formula for the purpose). Thus, in the

l
above example—
ya
- _ (—3)( 2)( 3) + ( — 3 ) ( — 2 )(—2) _ - 1 8 - 1 2 , - 3 0 _
( — 3 ) ( — 2 ) ( + l ) + 3 ( — 1 ) ( — 2) 6 + 6 12

A few more illustrations of this type are given below :

ar
(!) 3 , 4 , 48 _ 48
3x+l 4x+l 8x+l 6x+l
Here § + £ + ^ = 8 ; and ^ = 8 /.Y E S
m

24 , 24 , 144 _ 192
YES
2 4x+ 8 24x+ 6 24x+ 3 24x+ 4
ra

1 , 1 , 6 8 YES
24x+ 8 24x+ 6 24x+3 24x+4
4 1 2 - 6 .-. YES
24x+ 8 24x+ 6 24x+3

_ * _ + _ « _ = <>
24x+ 8 24x+6
. . 624X+168 = 0 x= —
26
(2) 2 . 18 . 75 __ _88
2x + l 3 x + l 5 x + l 4x+l
Here i + V + V = 2 2 ; and 2» is also 22
• 60 , 360 , 900 _ 1320 . YES
60X+30 60X+20 60x+12 60x+15

• _ J __ -i. 6 .1. 15 - 22 YES

60x+30 60x+20 60x+12 60x+15
 ( 138 )
15 30 45
YES
60x-f30 60x-f-20 '60 x+ 1 2
1 2 3
YES
60x-f30 60X-J-20 60X+12
18 16
:0
60X+30 60X+20
-7
.-.2040x+840 = 0 x=
17
Note :—Any change of SEQUENCE (of the terms on the L.H.S.)
will cause no change in the working or the result.
(3) 4 , 27 , 125 _ 144
2x—1 3x—1 5x—1 4x—1
Here 4 + 27+ 125 _ 2_|-9-|_25 = 36 ;
2 3 5

l
ya
and is also 36 .• YES
4
120 , 540 _l_ 1500 2160 YES
60x—30 60x—20 60x—12' 60x—15
ar

2 9 25 36
. YES
60x—30 60x—20 60x—12 60x- -15
— 30 -1. ~ 45- : -75
(By merger) YES
m

60x—30 60x—20 60x— 12

5
___ 2__ - l - _ 3 YES
ra

60x—30 60x—20 60x—12

—36 —24
0
60x—30 60x—20
1 t---- i---= 0
20x—10 30x—10
(By Basic rule or by cross-multiplication or by (‘Sunyam,
Formula), 50x—20 = 0 x=|
OR (by Multiple simultaneous merger)
-18) (—15)4~(—270) ( — 8) ( — 5)
60x= (' : 24
( - 2 ) ( - 1 8 ) (—5 )+ (9 ) ( - 8 ) ( - 5 )
• •x = f
Note :—Again any change of SEQUENCE (of the terms on the
L.H.S.) will cause no change in the working or the result.
 Ch a p t e r X IV

COMPLEX MERGERS

There is still another type—a special and complex type

of equations which are usually dubbed ‘harder’ but which can
be readily tackled with the aid of the Paravartya Sutra. For
instance:
10 , 3 _ 2 . 15
2 x + l 3x—2 2x—3 3 x + 2
Note the TESTS : (1) 3 J > -g = § + » * ; and
(2) 10x3=2x15
i.e. 10 : 15 : : 2 : 3 (or 10 : 2 :: 15 : 3)

l
Transposing, 10
ya 15 _ 2 3
2 x + I ~ 3 x + 2 ~ 2x—3 ~ 3 x —2 ’
and taking the L.C.M.
ar
• 30 _ 30 __ 6 _ 6_
6x-(-3 6x-j-4 6x—9 6x—4
Simple CROSS-MULTIPLICATION leads us to the main
m

TEST:
30 _ 30
' '(6 x + 3 ) (6x+4) (6x—9) (6x—4)
ra

Here comes the third TEST i.e. that the numerator (of the
final derived equation) is the same on both sides—
(6x-j-3) (ta + 4 ) = (6 x -9 ) (6x—4)
, , 6 r = - 3? - 12 = ^ 6 .
3+4+9+4 20 5 1
CLUE—This gives us the necessary clue, namely, that, after
putting up the L.C.M. coefficient for x in all the
denominators. (Dj) (D2)= (D 3) (D4). As the trans­
position, the L.C.M. etc., can be done mentally, this
clue amounts to a solution of the equation at sight.
In these examples, we should transpose the 4 fractions
in such a manner that, after the cross-multiplication etc., are
over, all the four denominators (of the final derived equation)
 ( 138 )

have the same (L.C.M.) coefficient for x and the numerator is

the same on the L.H.S. and the R.H.S (of the same equation).
A few more illustrations will be found helpful:
(1) 2 , 2 _ 9 , 1
0X+1 2 x - l 9 x -5 3 x + l
(i) Transposing etc., we have :
6 6 18 18
18x+3 18x+6 18x—10 18x—9
Here the N on both sides (of the final derived equation) is 18
.\ The Sutra applies.
,\(18x+3) (18x+6) = (1 8 x -1 0 ) (1 8 x -9 )
, . 1 8 x = _ ^ = 1 8 _ = 7_2 , ' X==± = 1
3 + 6 + 1 0 + 9 28 28 7

l
N ote:—In some cases (details of which we need not now enter
ya
into but which will be dealt with later), the original
fractions themselves (after the transposition) fulfil the
conditions of the Test. In such cases, we need not
ar

bother about the L.C.M. etc., but may straightaway

transpose the terms and apply the ‘Paravartya formula.
In fact, the case just now dealt with is of this type,
m

as will be evident from the following :

(ii) 2 _ 1 ^ 9 _ 2
ra

6x+l 3x+l 9x— 5 2x— 1

Here | = | ; | = f ; and the numerator (on both sides of the
final derived equation) is 1.
/.T h e Sutra applies and can be applied immediately
(without bothering about the L.C.M. etc.).
.\ (6 x + l) (3 x + l) = (9x—5) (2x—1)
18x2+ 9 x + l = 1 8 x 2—19x+5 .\ 28x = 4 .*.x = ^
(2) _ 2 , __3 _ 1 . __6
2x+3 3x+2 x + l^ x -f-V
2 1 __ 6 3
” 2 x + 3 x + 1 6 x+ 7 3x + 2
(i) By L.C.M. method, (6x+9) (6 x + 6 )= (6 x + 7 ) (6x+4)
 ( 130 )

(ii) In this case, there is another peculiarity i.e. that

the transposition may be done in the other way too and yet
the conditions are satisfied. So, we have :
(6x+9) (6x+7) = (6x+6) (6x+4)

- « - = % -
(iii) And even, by CROSS-multiplication at the very
outset, we get 12x+13 = 0 (by Samya Samuccaye). x = -^-§
In such cases, SEQUENCE (in transposition) does not matter !
(This will be explained later).
(3) 51 _ 68 = 52 _ 39
3x+5 4 x + ll 4x—15 3x—7
TESTS : ~ and are both 17 ; and ~ and ^ are both 13.

l
This equation can be solved in several ways (all of them
ya
very simple and easy):
(i) By the L.C.M. process:
204 204 156 156
ar
12x+20 12x+33 12x—45 12x—28
In the derived equation (in its final form),
1^ = 204X13 = 12X13X17 ;
m

and N2= 156x17 = 1 2x1 3 x1 7

The Sutra applies.
.-. (12X+20) (1 2 x + 3 3 )= (1 2 x -4 5 ) (1 2 x-2 8)
ra

• ! oT — 28 X 45 ~ 20 X 33 - 600 • x = ~
20+33+45+28 126 ' ’ 63
(ii) or, removing the common factor (12) :
17 17 13 13
12X+20 12x+33 1 2 x — 45 12x— 28
In the (final) derived Equation,
Nx= 17X l3; and N2==1 3 x l7 The Sutra applies--
.■ •DjXDj^DjXDj .-. 1 2 x = ™ > ,.x = ||

(iii) or, at the very outset (i.e. without L.C.M. etc.) :

51 _ 68 _ 52 _ 39
3x+ 5 4x+ll 4 x — 15 3x— 7
.-.L.H.S. N = 5 6 1 — 340 = 221 ; and
R.H.S. N = — 364+585 =221
 ( 137 )

The Sutra applies straightaway.

.-. (3x+5) (4x4-11) = (4x—15) (3x—7)
.-. 12x24-53x4-55 = 12x2—73x4-105
126x = 50 .’. x = g f
N ote:— In the second method, note that
N1= N2= D1- D 3 andN 3= N 4= D a- D 1 TESTS
The General Formula applicable in such cases i s :
m—n^ p —q ^ m—n_^ p —q
x4-p x4-n x + q x -fm

•••(m" n) ( i T p - i T q ) := (p _ q ) U i - V - U
• (in—n) (q—p) = (p—q) (n—m)
(x4-p) (x4-q) (x4-m) (x4-n)

l
ya
As the numerators are the same,
•••The Sutra applies
•••(x4-p) (x4-q)=(x+m ) (x4-n)
ar
• m n-pq
p - f q —m—n
( 4 ) __ 1 . 8 _ 6 , 3
2x—1 4x—1 3x—1 6x—1
m

(i) . __ 8 _ 6 _ 24 _ 24
U ' ' 12x—6 12x—2 12x—4 12x—3
ra

.-.In the final derived equation,

L.H.S. N = 2 4 ; and R.H.S. N is also 24
The Sutra applies.
I2 x = 1 2 ^ ? = 0 x= 0

(ii) ‘ Vilokand (i.e. mere observation) too will suffice in this

case.
(«) 3 2 - 3 2
3x4-1 2x—1 3x—2 2x4-1
(i) Here the resultant N is the same (1) (on both sides)
.-.Y ES
6x24-5x4-1 = 6x2—7x4-2 ••• 12x = l .-. x = T1,
(ii) or, by cross-multiplication at the very outset and
Sunyam Samuccaye, 12x—1 = 0 x = T1s
is
 ( 138 )

(6) 5 . 3 __ 5 , 15
6x+2 3 x + l 5 x + 3 15x+2
15 15 15 15
(i)
15x+6 15x+9 15x+2 15X+5
The resultant Numerator on both sides is 45
The Sutra applies.

8 8 30
(ii) Or, by cross-multiplication at the very outset and
Sunyatfi etc., formula, we get 3 0 x + ll and 150x+55 on the
L.H.S. and the R.H.S. respectively; and the numerical factor
(5) being removed, both give us 3 0 x + ll = 0 .\ x = ~JJ
(7) 2 x + l l . 6 x + l l __4 x + 4 , 3x+19

l
x+5 2x+3 2x+l x+0
ya
(i) .• (By Paravartya division):
1 . 2 _ 2 , 1
x + 5 2x+3 2x+l x+6
ar
2 2 2 2
2x+ 10 2x+ 12 2 x + l 2 x + 3
.*.4 is the N on both sides (of the derived equation)
m

.•. The Sutra applies.

(2x+10) (2x+12) = (2 x + l) (2x+3)
ra

18 18 4
(ii) or by cross-multiplication at the very outset and
Sunyam Sutra, we h ave:
4x+13 = 0 .-. x = ~i|
(8) 2 x + l l . 15x—4 7 _9x—9 , 4x+13
x+5 3x—10 3x—4 x+3
3 , 3 3 , 3
3x+15 3x—10 3x—4 3 x + 9
3 3 3 3
’ 3x+15 3 x+ 9 3x—4 3x—10
In the resultant equation,
—18 is the numerator on both sides
The Sutra applies.
 ( 139 )

(3x+15) (3x+9) = (3 x -4 ) (3 x -1 0 )
3x = ^9.— x= = i
38 2 6
(ii) or by cross-multiplication at the very outset and
Sunyam formula,
18x+15=0 x=

(9) 12x2+ 9 x + 7 , 12x2+ x + 3 = 24x2+ 1 4 x + 3 , 5x2+ 6x+ 2

3x+4 4x—1 12x+l x+1
.•.By (Pardvartya) devisioD twice over.
3 ,___4 ^ 12 , 1
3 x + 4 4x—1 1 2 x + l x + 1
12 , 12 12 , 12
12x+16 12x— 3 12x+l 12x+12

l
ya
By ‘Sunyam’ Sutra, we immediately obtain :
_IQ
24x+13 = 0 x= if
24
ar

Note :—The Cross-multiplication and 4Sunyam5 method is so

simple, easy and straight before us here that there
is no need to try any other process at all. The student
m

may, however, for the sake of practice try the other

methods also and get further verification therefrom
ra

for the correctness of the answer just hereinabove

arrived at.
 C h a p te r XV

SIMULTANEOUS SIMPLE EQUATIONS

Here too, we have the GENERAL FORMULA applicable
to all cases (under the ‘Pardvartya5 Sutra) and also the special
Sutras applicable only to special types of cases.

THE GENERAL FORMULA

The current system may congratulate and felicitate itself
on having a fairly satisfactory method—known as the Cross­
multiplication method—for the solving of simultaneous simple

l
equations, which is somewhat akin to th.6 Vedic ‘Pardvartya
ya
method and comes very near thereto.

But even here, the unfortunate drawback still remains

ar

that, in spite of all the arrow-directions etc., intended to

facilitate its use, the students (and sometimes even the teachers)
of Mathematics often get confused as regards the plus and the
m

minus signs ( + and —) and how exactly they should be used ;

and, consequently, we find most of them preferring—in actual
ra

daily practice—the substitution method or the elimination

method (by which they frame new equations involving only
x or only y). And this, of course, does not permit a one-line
mental-method answer ; and it entails the expenditure of more
time and more toil.

The Vedic method (by the Pardvartya Rule) enables us

to give the answer immediately (by mere mental Arithmetic).
Thus— 2 x + 3 y = 8?
4 x+ 5 y = 14 )

The rule followed is the “ Cyclic” o n e :

(i) For the value of x, we start with the y-coefficients
and the independent terms and cross-multiply forward (i.e.
rightward) (i.e. we start from the upper row and multiply
 ( 141 )

across by the lower one; and conversely; and the connecting

link between the two cross-prodcts is always a minus). And
this gives us our Numerator;
(ii) For finding the Denominator, we go from the upper
row across to the lower one (i.e. the x coefficient) but backward
(i.e. leftward). Thus,
2x+3y= 8 / for the value of x, the numerator is 3 x 1 4 —
4x-f-5y= 14 ) 5 x 8 = 2 ; and the Denominator is 3 x 4 —
2X5=2

In other words x = | = l .
And, as for the value of y, we follow the cyclic system (i.e.
start with the independent term on the upper row towards the

al
x coefficient on the lower row). So, our Numerator is:
8 x 4 - 1 4 X 2 = 3 2 -2 8 = 4
y
And NOTE that the Denominator is invariably the SAME as
ar
before (for x) and thus we avoid the confusion caused in the
current system by another set of multiplications, a change of
sign etc. In other words, V ;=f = 2
m

(2) x — y= 7 -4 2 -1 4 _ -5 6
5 x + 2 y = 42 — 5— 2 — '7
ra

35—4 2 = — 7 _ 1
and y =
- 7 -7

(3) 2x+ y = 5
3 x — 4y = 2

(4) 5 x — 3y = 11
6 x — 5y = 9

(5) llx -f-6 y = 28

7 x — 4y = 10
 ( 142 )

A SPECIAL TYPE
There is a special type of simultaneous simple equations
which may involve big numbers and may therefore seem “ hard”
but which, owing to a certain ratio between the coefficients,
can be readily i.e. mentally solved with the aid of the Sutra
SRr spirt (Sunyam Anyat) (which cryptically says : If one
is in ratio, the other one is Zero).

An example will make the meaning and the application

clear :
6 x + 7y = 81
1 9 x + 1 4 v = 16 J

Here we note that the v-coefficients are in the same

l
ya
ratio to each other as the independent terms are to each other.
And the Sutra says that, in such a case, the other one, namely,
x = 0. This gives us two simple equations in y, which give us
ar
the same value f for y. Thus x = 0 ; y = f

N.B. :—Look for the ratio of the coefficients of one of the un­
known quantities being the same as that of the inde­
m

pendent terms (on the R.H.S.) ; and if the four are in

proportion, put the other unknown quantity down as
ra

zero ; and equate the first unknown quantity to the

absolute term on the right.

The Algebraical Proof is this :

a x + b y = bm ?
cx + d y = dm >
adx-fbdy = bdm \
bcx-J-bdy = bdm J
x(ad—bc) = 0 x= 0 1
and y - m )

A few more illustrations may be taken :

(1) 12x+ 8 y = 7 ? Here, v 8 : 16 :: 7 : 14 (mentally)
16x+16y = 14> x= 0l
and y = | )
 ( H3 )
(2) 12x+ 7 8 y = 12 ? Here v 12 : 16 :: 12 : 16 (mentally)
16x-)~ 96y' = 16
16>) x
and j -
(3) 499x+172y = 212 )
9779x+387y = 477 )
Here 172 = 4 x 4 3 and 387 = 9 x 4 3 ) The ratio is the
and 212 = 4 x 5 3 and 477 = 9 x5 3 i same
x= 0 >
and y ==| i >
N ote:—The big coefficients (of x = 01) need not frighten us!)
N .B. T h i s rule is also capable of infinite extension and
may be extended to any number of unknown
quantities,

l
ya
Thus:
(1) »aAx-+
f-b
u yy-+
t -c
i ;z = aa-v
z = -N . . x
X =
= l-
i 'v

b x -fc y + a z = b > y=o >

ar

cx-f-ay+by = c"^ and z = 0-^

a x+ by+ cz = c m x = 0 -v
a x + a y -ffz = fm > y= 0 >
m

mix+t)v4-az
x+ p y + q z= ^ qam
m -'-'and
and z = m
m-^
(3) 97x+ ay+43z = am ^
■v . . x = 0
u -v
ra

49979x+by+(p+q)z==bm1 > y= m C
49x(a—d)8+ c y + ( m —n)8z = cm ' and z = 0 ^
N.B. :—The coefficients have been deliberately made big
and complex but need not frighten us.

A Second Special Type

There is another special type of simultaneous linear
equations where the x^-coefficients and the y-coefficients
are found interchanged. No elaborate multiplications etc.,
are needed here. The (axiomatic) Vpasutra
(‘Sahkalana-Vyavakalanabhyain) (which means “ By addition
and by subtraction) gives us immediately two equations giving
the values of (x + y ) and (x—y). And a repetition of the same
 ( 144 )

process gives us the values of x and y ! And the whole work

can be done mentally. Thus:
45x— 2 3 y = 1 1 3 }
2 3 x -4 5 y = 91 >
B y addition, 6 8 x — 68y = 6 8 (x — y) — 204 .\ x — y = 3 )
And by subtraction, 2 2 x + 2 2 y = 2 2 ( x + y ) = 22 x+y = l )
x= 2 1
and y = — 1 J

N ote:—However big and complex the coefficients may be,

there is no multiplication involved but only simple
addition and simple subtraction.
The other special types of simultaneously linear equa­
tions will be discussed at a later stage.

l
ya
ar
m
ra
 Chapter XVI

MISCELLANEOUS (SIMPLE) EQUATIONS.

There are other types of miscellaneous linear equations
which can be treated by the Vedic Sutras. A few of them are
shown below.
FIRST TYPE
Fractions of a particular cyclical kind are involved here.
And, by the Paravartya Sutra, we write down the Numerator
of the sum-total of all the fractions in question and equate it
to zero. Thus:
<•)__ !___+ ___ a__+___?__ _ 0
(x —l ) ( x —2) (x —2)(x —3)
Here, each numerator is
y al (x —3)(x —1)
to be multiplied by the factor
absent from its denominator. This is usually and actually
ar
done everywhere but not as a rule of mental practice. This,
however, should be regularly practised; and the resultant
numerator equated to zero.
m

In the present instance,

(x - 3 ) + (2x—2 ) + (3x —6) = 6x— 1 1 = 0 x = tL
ra

The Algebraical jyroof is well-known and is as follows:

p + q + _ _ J L _
(x + a ) (x + b ) (x + b ) (x + c ) (x + c ) (x+ a )
— P(x ~t~c)+ q (x + a )+ r (x + b )
(x + a )(x + b )(x + c )
= * (P + q + r )+ (p c + q a + r b ) _ 0
(x + a )(x + b )(x + c )
.-. y — (p c+ q a + rb )
p+q+r
In other words,

x _ E a c h N multiplied _by_ the

_ absent
_ _ number reversed
. _

As this is simple and easy to remember and to apply,

the work can be done mentally. And we can say, x =
 ( 146 )
A few more examples are noted :
( l > ____ I_____+ 3 + _____« _____ = 0
(x 1) (x—3) (x —3) (x —5) (x —5) ( x - 1 )
5 + 3 + 1 5 _ 23
1+3+5 9
(2) 2 , 3 , 4
= 0
(x —l )(x + 2 ) (x + 2 ) (x—4) (x —4 )(x —1)
Y_8 + 3 —8 _ a _ i
2+3+4 * 3
(3) 1 , 3 _____ 5_____ =
(x —3) (x —4) (x—4) (x —9) (x—9) (x—3)
. x _ 9 + 9 + 2 0 _ 38
1+3+ 5 9
A few disguised samples may also be taken :
( 1 ) ____ >___ + _ ? ____ + ____ ?____ = 0
l
ya
x a+ 3 x + 2 x2+ 5 x + 6 xa+ 4 x + 3
(mentally)
1 , 5 . 3
ar

= 0
(x + 1 ) (x + 2 ) (x + 2 ) (x + 3 ) (x + 3 ) (x + 1 )
x = -3—5—6 — 14
1+5+3 9
m

(2) 1 4- J _____ 4 - _____ L = 0

6xa+ 5 x + l 12x2+ 7 x + l 8x2+ 6 x + l
ra

(mentally)

(2 x + l)( 3 x + l) (3 x + l)(4 x + l) (4 x + l)(2 x + l)

/ . 9 x + 3 = 0 .\ x = ~ J
( 3) 3 , 2 , ____ 1_____ = 0
(x + 3 )2—22 (x + 4 )2—l 2 (x + 2 )2—l 2

(me,,t“ llrt ( x i r i | r ^ + (x f 4 + w + g + s k r a
—9—2 —5 —16 —8
' ' X“ 3+2 + 1 6 3
(4) x+4 , x+8 I x+6 _3
(x + l)(x + 3 ) (x + 3 )(x + 5 ) (x + 5 )(x + l) x
(mentally)
x 2+ 4 x x2+8x- —1 , x 2+ 6 x ____
(x + l)(x + 3 ) (x + 3 )(x + 5 ) (x + 5 )( x + l)
 ( 147 )

■■ ( x + l) ( l+ 3 )+ g + 3 ) ^ ) + ( i + i i l + i ) = 0
x _ 15+15+15 45
- 3 —1 5 - 5 23
(5) x —3 x —5 . x —4 _ 3
(x—l)(x —2) (x—2)(x—3) (x —3)(x—1 )— x

.•.(mentally) ^ — \A-------- —— — 0
(x—l)(x —2) (x—2)(x—3) (x—3)(x—1)
-6 -6 -6 18
-2 -6 -3 11
(6) x —4 , x —9 . x —7 _ 3
(x—l)(x —3) (x—3)(x—6) (x—6)(x—1) x
-3 , -1 8 , -6
(mentally)

l
(x—l)(x —3) (x—3)(x—6) (x—6)(x—1)
ya
- 1 8 - 1 8 - 1 8 ==54 = 2
—3 — 18—6 27
(7) x —6 . x —8 . x —7 _ 3
ar
(x—2)(x—3) (x—3)(x—4) (x—4)(x—2) x+ J
— 12 —20 —15
.\ (mentally)
(x —2)(x—3) (x —3)(x—4) (x—4)(x—2)
m

. - 4 8 - 4 0 —45 _ 133
— 12—20—15 47
(8) 35X+23 63x+47 45x+31 _ 3
ra

(5x—l)(7x—1) (7x—l)(9x—1) (9x—l)(5x—1) x —1

( 35x2—12x—23 _ . I , ( 63x2—16x—47 )
' | (5x—l)(7x—1) i | (7x—l)(9 x —1) \+
< 45x2—14x—31 _ )
i (9x—l)(5 x —1) \~

’ *(5x—l)(7x—1) (7x—l)(9 x —1) (9x—l)(5 x—1)

.*. 85x—1 3 = 0 ••• x = ||

SECOND TYPE

A second type of such special simple equations is one where

we have -rT>+T^ = + an(i the factors (A, B, C and D) of

AB AC AD BC '
the denominators are in Arithmetical Progression. The Sutra
 ( 148 )

(Sopantyadvayamantyam) which means “ the ulti­

mate and twice the penultimate” gives us the answer immedi­
ately, for instance:

1 >+ ■> = •> + 1

< x+ 2 )(x+ 3) (x + 2 )(x + 4 ) (i+ 2 )(x + 5 ) ' (x + 3 )(x + 4 )

Here, according to the Siitra, L + 2 p (the last+twice the

penultimate) = (x + 5 )+ 2 (x + 4 ) = 3 x + 13 = 0 x = —4 j

The proof of this is as follows:

1 , 1 1 , 1
(x + 2 )(x + 3 ) (x + 2 )(x + 4 ) (x + 2 )(x + 5 ) (x + 3 )(x + 4 )
1 1 1 1
(x + 2 )(x + 3 ) (x + 2 )(x + 5 ) (x + 3 )(x + 4 ) (x + 2 )(x + 4 )

l
ya
x + 2 { (x + 3 ) (x + 5 ) } ~ x + 4 | (x + 2 ) (x + 3 ) I
Removing the factors (x + 2 ) and (x + 3 )
ar
J L = : z L i.e. ? = ^ .-. L + 2P = 0
x+5 x+4 L P

The General Algebraical Proof is as follows:

m

^ + 5 £ ~ A j j + g £ (where A,B, C and D are in A.P.)

ra

Let d be the common difference.

• _ ! _ + _ _ ! ____= ____ i____ + ______ I______
A (A + d ) A (A +2d) A (A + 3 d )^ (A + d )(A + 2 d )
1 1 1 1
' ‘ A (A + d ) A (A +3d) (A + d )(A + 2 d ) A (A +2d)

A I (A + d )(A + 3 d ) ] A + 2 d \ A (A + d ) ]
Cancelling the factors A (A + d ) of this denominators and d
of the Numerators :

A+3d A+2d

In other words 2 —1 .. l _j_2P —0

L P
Another Algebraical proof.:

AB AC—Al5 BC
. _1___ _ L _ _ 1 ___JL
"A B AD BC AC
. 1 ( D -B ) _ 1 l A -B *
" 5 1 BD 1 C| AB \
But A, B, C and D are in AP
...D —B = —2 (A -B )
2C+D = 0 ; i.e. 2 P + L = 0

A few more samples may be tried :

(1) 1 | 1 - 1 + 1
x 8+7x-f-12 x 2+ 8 x + 1 5 x 8+9x-j-18n x * + 9 x + 2 0
(mentally) l
ya
* + ____ I____ = _____ I_____ + _____ I_____
(x + 3 )(x + 4 ) (x + 3 )(x + 5 ) (x + 3 )(x + 0 ) (x + 4 )(x + 5 )
.\ 2 P + L = (2 x + 1 0 )+ (x -f6 ) = 0 x = -5 £
ar

(2) 1 ___ | 1 _ 1 ■
(2 x + 1)(3x-f2) ( 2 x + 1)(4x+ 3 ) ( 2 x + 1)(8 x + 4 )T
I
m

(3 x+ 2 )(4 x+ 3 )
.-.2 P + L = (8 x + 6 ) = (5 x + 4 )= :1 3 x + 1 0 = 0
ra

1O
THIRD TYPE
A third type of equations are those where Numerator
and Denominator on the L.H.S. (barring the independent
terms) stand in the same ratio to each other as the entire Numera­
tor and the entire Denominator of the R.H.S. stand to each
other and these can be readily solved with the aid of the Upasutra
(subformula or corollary) apwfft* (Antyayoreva) which means,
“ only the last terms” i.e. the absolute terms. Thus :
x 2+ x + l _ x + l
x 2+ 3 x + 3 ~ x + 3
Here, (x2+ x ) = x (x ;+ l) and (x2+ 3 x )= x (x -f3 )
The Rule applies; and we say :
 ( 150 )

The Algebraical proof is as follows :

AC-J-D A AC D /v tv 'j i\
B C + l = B = BC= i (by Dmde“d)

Another Algebraic Proof is this :

.-. A B C + A E = A B C + B D

AE = BD ^=5.
B E
A few more examples may be taken :
(1) 3x2+ 5 x + 8 _3 x + 5 __8
. 4x=12 x=3
5x2+ 6 x + 1 2 5 x + 6 12
2—2x—3x2_ 3 x + 2 2 . _ . _ 1
2—5x—6x2 6 x + 5 _ 2 ‘ - X

l
ya
(3) 81x2+ 1 0 8 x + 2 _ 3 x + 4 2 . _ — 18
54x2+27 x + 5 2 x + l ~ 5 "X 11
ar
(4) 58x2+ 87x + 7 _2 x + 3 __ 7
\x=
87x 2+145 x + I I 3 x+ 5 ~ lT
(5) 158x2+ 2 3 7 x + 4 _ 2 x+ 3 _ 4
=—1
395x2+474x+ 4 5 x + 6 4 '
m

(6) 1—p x _ 2 + p q x —p2qx2_ 2 . s _ 0

1—qx 2 + p q x —pq2x2 2
ra

(7) (2x + 3 ) 2_ x + 3 . 4x2+ 1 2 x + 9 _ x + 3 _ 9 . ^ _—15

(2x+ 5) “ x + 5 4x2+ 2 0 x + 2 5 _ x + 5 ~ 2 5 ~~ 8
(8) (x + l ) ( x + 6 ) _ x + 7
(x + 3 )(x + 5 ) x + 8
. x 2+ 7 x + 6 _x + 7 _ 6 . x = _ 6i
x 2+ 8 x + 1 5 x+ 8 15 " *

Note :—By cross-multiplication,

(x + l)(x + 6 )(x + 8 ) = (x + 3 )(x + 5 )(x + 7 )
Here, the total of the Binomials is 3x+15 on each side.
But the Sunyam Samuccaye Sutra does not apply
beacnse the number of factors (in the original shape)
is 2 on the L.H.S. and only one on the R.H.S. ‘Antyayo-
reva is the Sutra to be applied.
 ( 181 )
(9) (x + l)(x + 2 )(x + 9 ) = (x + 3 )(x + 4 )(x + 5 )
The total (on each side) is the sam,e (Le. 3x+12). But
the ‘Sunyam Samuccaye’ Sutra does not apply. The
‘Antyayoreva’ formula is the one to be applied.
(x + l)(x + 2 )_ x + 3 _ 2 . r _ -7
(x + 4 )(x + 5 ) x + 9 20 3
(10) (x + 2 )(x + 3 )(x + l 1) = (x + 4 )(x + 5 )(x + 7 ).
The case is exactly like the one above.
. (x + 2 )(x + 3 )_x + 5 __6 _ —7 4 _ —37
(x + 4 )(x + 7 ) x+ 1 1 28 22 11
FOURTH TYPE
Another type of special Fraction-Additions (in connection
with Simple equations) is often met with, wherein the factors

l
ya
of the Denominators are in Arithmetical Progression or related
to one another in a special manner as in SUMMATION OF
SERIES. These we can readily solve with the aid of the
ar
same “Antyayoreva” Sutra (but in a different context, and in a
different sense). We therefore deal with this special type here.
(1) The first sub-section of this type is one in which the
m

factors are in AP. Thus:

_____J ____ + ______ ! ____ + ■
( x + l) (x + 2 ) (x + 2 )(x + 3 ) (x + 3 )(x + 4 )
ra

The Sutra tells us that the sum of this series is a fraction

whose numerator is the sum of the numerators in the series and
whose denominator is the product of the two ends i.e. the first
and the last Binomials!
So, in this case, « ______ 3______ and so on.
8“(x +1)( x +4)
The Algebraical proof of this is as follows :
t _i + _ 1 . 1 _ x~t~3+x+l
^ 2 (x + l) (x + 2 ) (x + 2 )(x + 3 ) (x + l)(x + 2 )(x + 3 )
_ 2(x+ 2) _ 2_____
(x + l)(x + 2 )(x + 3 ) (x + l)(x + 3 )
wherein the Numerator is the sum of the original Numerators
and the Denominator is the product of the first and the last
Binomial factors.
Adding tg to the above, we have 2______ ,______ 1______
(x + l)(x + 3 ) (x + 3 )(x + 4 )
__ 2 x + 8 + x + l _ 3(x+3) _ 3
(x + l)(x + 3 )(x + 4 ) (x + l)(x + 3 )(x + 4 ) (x + l)(x + 4 )

Continuing this process to any number of terms, we

find the Numerator continuously increases by one and the
Denominator invariably drops the middle binomial and retains
only the first and the last, thus proving the correctness of the
Rule in question.
t = _____ 1____ __ 1 _ 1
1 (x + l)(x + 2 ) x + 1 x + 2
t 1 _____ L_
* (x + 2 )(x + 3 ) x + 2 x+3
and so on to any number of terms
l
ya
N ote:—The second term of each step on the R.H.S. and
the first term on the next step (of the L.H.S) cancel
ar
each other and that, consequently, whatever may be
the number of terms which we take, all the terms
(on the R.H.S.) except the very first and the last
m

cancel out and the Numerator (being the difference

between the first and the last binomial i.e. the only
binomials surviving) is the sum of the original Numera­
ra

tors (on the L.H.S.). And this proves the proposition

in question.

A few more illustrations are taken .

( ! ) _____ L _ + _____ I_____+ ...

(x + 3 )(x + 4 ) (x + 4 )(x + 5 )
. B _ _____j_____
•' 4 (x + 3 )(x + 7 )
(2) 1 1 ,
 ( 153 )

(3) 1 + 1 I-
x a+5x-j-4 x 2+ llx -}-2 8
1 , 1
(x + l)(x + 4 ) (x + 4 )(x + 7 )
. g _______ 4_____
' ' 4 x 2+ 1 4 x + 1 3
w _____ ?_____ + _ J _______ + ...
(x+ a )(x+ 2 a) (x+2a)(x+ 3a)
. g _______ 4______
4 (x+ a )(x+ 5 a )
(5) 1 , ______ 1 ___ | 1 +
(x + l ) ( 3 x + l) (3 x + l)(5 x + l) (5 x + l)(7 x + l)
Here, there is a slight difference in the structure of the
Denominator i.e. that the A.P.is not in respect of the indepen­

l
dent term in the binomials (as in the previous examples) but in
ya
the x-coefficient itself. But this makes no difference as regards
the applicability of the Sutra.
. a = 3
ar
8 (x + l) (7 x -fl)
The First Algebraical Proof of this is exactly as before :
m

t‘ + t l = ( x + l) ( k + l) ;t + t *+ t , = (i+ T jfE + I)snd 80 on

The addition of each new term automatically establishes
ra

the proposition.
The second Algebraical proof is slightly different but
follows the same lines and leads to the same result:
t 1 - If 1 - 1 \
1 (x + l)(3 x + l) 2 x\ x+ l 3 x -fl/

an<“ ° 0,1
N ote:—The cancellations take place exactly as before, with
the consequence that the sum-total of the fractions=
J_ 1 (Where 1 stands for Ss)
2 x D xXD, D j X D , '
(which proves the proposition)
(6) 1 |_______ 1_____
(x+ a)(2x+ 3a) (2x+3a)(3x+5a)
20
 ( 154 )

Sere, the progression is with'regard to both the items in

the binomials (i.e. the x-coefficients and the absolute terms).
But this too makes no difference to the applicability of the
formula under discussion.
. g _____ ?_____
* (x+ a )(4x+ 7a )

W 1 + 1
(3x-(-a)(5x+a) (5x+a)(7x-|-a)
•S _ 3
8 (3 x+ a )(9 x+ a )
(8) 1 , + __________ 1 +
(xa+ x + l ) ( x 8+ 2 x + 2 ) (xa+ 2 x 4 -2 )(x * + 3 x + 3 )T ‘
Seemingly, there is a still greater difference in the structure of
the Denominators. But even this makes no difference to the

l
ya
applicability of the aphorism. So we say:
g _ 4
4 (xa+ x + l ) ( x 2+ 5 x + 5 )
ar

Both the Algebraical explanations apply to this case

also. An# we may extend the rule indefinitely to as many
terms and to as many varieties as we may find necessary.
m

We may conclude this sub-section with a few examples

of. its application to Arithmetical numbers:
ra

(*) _ L - + _ i — 1-__!— f-— I— 4- . . .

7 X8 8X 9 9X10 10X11
In a sum like this, the finding of the L.C.M. and the multi­
plications, divisions, additions, cancellations etc., will be tire­
some and disgusting. But our recognition of this series as
coming under its right particular classification enables us to
say at once : s 4 = 4 and s0
* 7X11 77
N ote:—The principle explained above is in constant requisi­
tion in connectioil with the “ Summation of Series”
in Higher Algebra etc., and therefore of the utmost
importance to the mathematician and the statistician,
in general.
 ( 155 )

FIFTH TYPE

There is also a fifth type of fraction-additionfe (dealing

with simple equations) which we often come across, which are
connected with the “Summation of Series” (as in the previous
type) and which we may readily tackle with the aid of the same
(Antyayorew) formula.

The characteristic peculiarity here is that each numerator

is the difference between the two Binomial factors of its Deno­
minator. Thus,
(1) a—b ■ b—c , c—d
(x+a)(x+b) (x+b)(x+c) (x+c)(x+d) ’

l
•9 — a—d
8 (x+a)(x+d)
ya
Both the Algebraical explanations hereof are exactly as
ar
before (and need not be repeated here).
(2) x -y , y -z . z -w ,
(a+x)(a+y) (a+y)(a+z) (a+z)(a+w)
m

•S _ x—w
8 (a+x)(a+w)
ra

(3) 1 , 2 , U
(x + 7 )(x + 8 )^ (x + 8 )(x + 1 0 )^ x + 1 0 )(x + 2 4 )

•S 17
•• 8 (x+7)(x+24)

W 3 | 9 , 27
(x+7)(x+10)^(x+10)(x+19)^(x+19)(x+46)
99
+ (x+46)(x+14i5)+ ” '

'', S 4 = (x+7)(x+145)
(5) a—b ■ b—c _|_____ c—d
(px+a)(px+b) (px+b)(px+c) (px+c)(px+d)
. g _____ a—d_____
8~ (px+a)(px+d)
 ( 156 )

N o t e (i) If, instead of d, there be a in the last term (in this

ease), the Numerator in the answer becomes zero;
and consequently the L.H.S. (i.e. the sum of the
various fractions) is zero.
(ii) The difference between the Binomial factors of
the Denominator in the L.H.S. is the Numerator
of each fraction ; and this characteristic will be
found to characterise the R.H.S. also.
(iii) The note at the end of the previous sub-section
(re : the summation of series) holds good here too.

y al
ar
m
ra
 Chapter X V II

QUADRATIC EQUATIONS
In the Vedic mathematics Sutras, CALCULUS comes
in at a very early stage. As it so happens tha,t DIFFERENTIAL
calculus is made use of in the Vedic Sutras for breaking a qua­
dratic equation down at sight into two simple equations of
the first degree and as we now go on to our study of the Vedic
Sutras bearing on Quadratic equations, we shall begin this
chapter with a breif exposition of the calculus.

Being based on basic and fundamental first principles

(relating to limiting values), they justifiably come into the

l
picture at a very early stage. But these have been expounded
ya
and explained with enormous wealth of details covering not
merely the Sutras themselves but also the sub-sutras, axioms,
corollaries, implications etc. We do not propose to go into
ar

the arguments by which the calculus has been established

but shall content ourselves with an exposition of the rules
enjoined therein and the actual Modus Operandi. The principal
m

rules are briefly given below :

(i) In every quadratic expression (put in its standard form
ra

i.e. with 1 as the coefficient of x 2), the sum of its two Binomial
factors is its first differential.
Thus, as regards the quadratic expression x 2—5 x+ 6 ,
we know its binomial factors are (x —2) and (x—3). And there­
fore, we can at once say ths-t (2x—5) (which is the sum of these
two factors) is its D1 (i.e. first DIFFERENTIAL).
(ii) This first differential (of each term) can also be
obtained by multiplying its (Dhwaja) (Ghata) (i.e. the
power by the arf (Ankai.e. its coefficient) and reducing it by
one.
Thus, as regards x 2—5 x + 6
x 2 gives 2 x ; —5x gives—5 ; and 6 gives zero.
•\ Dx =* 2x—5.
 ( 158 )
(iii) Defining the DISCRIMINANT as the square of the
coefficient of the middle term minus the product of double the
first coefficient and double the independent term, the text then
lays down the very important proposition that the first differential
is equal to the square root of the discriminant.
In the above case x 2—5 x -f0 = 0
/ . 2x—5 = ± ^ / 2 5 —24 = ± 1
Thus the given quadratic equation is broken down at
sight into the above two simple equations i.e. 2x—5 = 1 and
2x—5 = — 1 ,\ x —2 or 3
The current modern method (dealing with its standard
quadratic equation ax2+ b x + c = 0) tells us that :
_ - b ± V b * —4ac This is no doubt all right, so far as it goes ;

l
2a
ya
but it is still a very crude and clumsy way
of stating that the first differential is the square root of the
discriminant.
ar
Another Indian method (of medieval times well-known
as Shree Shreedharacharya’s method) is a bit better than the
current modern Methods ; but that too comes nowhere near
m

the Vedic method which gives us (1) the relationship of the

differential with the original quadratic (as the sum of its factors)
ra

and (2) its relationship with the discriminant as its square ro o t!

and thirdly, breaks the original quadratic equation-at sight-
into two simple equations which immediately give us the two
values of x !
A few more illustrations are shown hereunder :
(1) 4x2—4x-f-l = ( 2 x —l)(2 x —l) = 0 / . 8x—4 = 0
(2) 7x2- 5 x - 2 = ( x - l ) ( 7 x + 2 ) = 0 1 4 X -5 = ± ^ / S l = z ± 9
(3) x 2— l l x + 1 0 = (x — 10)(x— 1) = 0 / 1 2 x - 1 1 = ± i/ 8 1 = ± 9
(4) 6x2+ 5 x —3 = 0 .\ 12x+5 = ± V 9 7
(5) 7x2—9x—1 = 0 1 4 x -9 = ± i/1 0 9
(6) 5x2—7x—5 = 0 lOx—7 ^ ± y '1 4 S T
(7) 9x2—l^ x—2 = 0 / . 18x—13 = ± a/241
(8) llx2+ 7 x + 7 = 0 /. 22x + 7 = ± a /-^259'
(9) ax2+ b x + c = 0 / . 2ax+ b = ± y 'b 2—4ac
 ( 159 )

This portion of the Vedic Sutras deals also with the Bino­
mial theorem, factorisations, factorials, repeated factors,
continued fractions, Differentiations, Integrations, Successive
Differentiations, Integrations by means of continued fractions
etc. But just now we are concerned only with the just here­
inabove explained use of the differential calculus in the solution
of quadratic equations (in general) because of the relationship
Dx = dfc V the discriminant. The other applications just
referred to will be dealt with at later stages in the student’s
progress.
II This calculus-inethod is perfectly GENERAL i.e. it
applies to all cases of quadratic equations. There are, however,
certain special types of quadratic equations which can be still

l
more easily and still more rapidly solved with the help of the
ya
special Sutras applicable to them. Some of these formulas
are old friends but in a new garb and a new set-up, a new context
and so on. And they are so efficient in the facilitating of mathe­
ar
matics work and in reducing the burden of the toil therein.
We therefore go on to some of the most important amongst
these special types.
m

FIRST SPECIAL TYPE

(Reciprocals)
ra

This deals with Reciprocals. The equations have, under

the current system, to be worked upon laboriously, before they
can be solved. For example:

a) * + £ = £

According to the current system, we sa y :

. x 2+ l _ 1 7
••---------- '~7~
x 4
.\4x2+ 4 = 17x
.\4x2—17x+4 = 0
.\ (x —4) (4x—1 )= 0 .\ x = 4 o r 1/4.

ot ( i i ) i = n ± V » = W = lZ ± -16 = 4 or 1/4
8 8
 ( 160 )
Bat, according to the Vilokanam sub-Sutra of Vedic
mathematics, we observe that the L.H.S. is the sum of two
Reciprocals, split the ^ of the R.H.S. into 4 + £ and at once
say:

x + I= = 4+ | x = 4 or 1/4. It is a matter of simple

observation and no more.

x + I = ^ = 5£ x = 5 or £
X o

= 8 2 /9 = 9^ ^ Y = 9 or */9

(*) X_ ± l + E ± 2 = 37= :6 i ... = 6 or £

x+ 2 x+1 6 * x+2 *

l
& 5 ± * + ^ = 12 = H
ya
... 5 ± 4 = 3 or|
x —4 x + 4 3 x —4

(•> *+ i= 1 5
X 6
ar

Here the R.H.S. does not readily seem to be of the same

sort as the previous examples. But a little observation will
m

suffice to show that can be split up into f + f

••• x + ^ = | + f •••x = # or f
ra

(7) x + - . = $ ! = § + ! x = | or |

(8) X + 5 .X + 6 _2 9 __ & I 2 . x + 5 __ S n r $
"x+6 x+5 T!r v * " 5 - - i + e - ^ 011
_g__ i.^ + l — *69 — la i s . x _ia or »
x+11 x 60 5 T i a ’ 'x + 1 5 12
(10) 2 x + l l . 2 x - l l 193 . 2 x + ll= ia i
2x—11 2 x + l l 84 1" n ' ' 2x—l l T 13
" ‘i . - U t
X

Here the connecting symbol is a minus. Accordingly, we

say: x - * = § —§.•. x = § or—§
X
N.B . / — Note the minus (of the second root) very carefully.
For, the value x = § will give us not £ but ~“f on the
R.H.S. and will therefore be wrong !
(12) - f x== ^r— f

Note ;■
—In the above examples, the L.H.S. was of the form
a^_b . and, consequently, we had to split the R.H.S.
y al
ar

In other words, the Denominator on the R.H .S. had to be

factorised into two factors, the sum of whose squares (or their
difference, as the case may be) is the Numerator.
m

As this factorisation and the addition or subtraction of the

squares will not always be easy and readily possible, we shall,
ra

a later stage, expound certain rules which will facilitate this

work of expressing a given number as the sum of two squares
or as the difference of two squares.

SECOND SPECIAL T YPE.

(Under the Sunyam Samuccaye Formula.)

We now take up a second special t}rpe of quadratic equa­
tions which a very old friend (the Sunyam Samuccaye Sutra)
can help us to solve, at sight (a sort of problem which the
mathematicians all regard as “ Hard” ) !
We may first remind the student of that portion of an
earlier chapter wherein, referring to various applications of
the Samuecaye Sutra, we dealt with the easy method by which
the oneness of the sum of the numerator on the one hand and the
21
 ( 162 )

denominator on the other gave us one root and the oneness of

the difference between the Numerator and the Denominator
(on both sides) gave us another root, of the same Quadratic
equation. We need not repeat all of it but only refer back to
that portion of this volume and remind the student of the
kind of illustrative examples with which we illustrated our
theme :
(1) 3 x + 4 = 5 x + 6 ... 8x -f 10 = 0 ; or 3 x+ 3 = 0
6 x + 7 2 x+ 3
(2) 7 x + 5 _ 9x + J . 16x+12 = 0 ; or 2x—10 = 0
9x—5 7x+17
(3) -9x-Z .7. 16x—16 = 0 ; or 5x = 0
2x—9 14x—7
(4) J_6x—3 _ 2x—15 i

l
18 = 0 ; or 9x—10 = 0
ya
7 x+ 7 llx -2 5

THIRD SPECIAL TYPE

ar
There is a third special type of Quadratic Equations which
is also generally considered “ very hard” but whereof one root is
readily yielded by the same ancient friend (the “ Sdmya Samu­
m

ccaye” Sutra and the other is given by another friend-not so

ancient, however but still quite an old friend i.e. the “ Sunyam
ra

Any at" Sutra which was used for a special type of simultaneous
equations.
Let us take a concrete instance of this type. Suppose
we have to solve the equation :

x+2 x+3 x+4 x+1

The nature of the characteristics of this special type
will be recognisable with the help of the usual old test and an
additional new test.

The TESTS are: ! + $ = $ + * ; and § + § = £ + *

In all such cases, i(Sunyam Anyat” formula declares

that one root is zero ; and the (6Sunyam Samuccaye 9 Sutra says :
E^+D g^O 2x+5=0 x = -2 £
 ( 163 )

The Algebraical Proof hereof is as follow s:

7X 9 (by simPle division) = 1 — J L ; and so on.

x-+-z x+12

(Removing 1—1 and 1—1 from both sides) x, (the

common factor of all term )=0 ;

and on its removal, 1 1 , 1

x+2 x+3 x+ 4 x+1
/.( B y the Samuccaye formula) 2 x + 5 = 0 ;

N ote:—In all these cases, Vilolcanam (i.e. mere observation)

gives us both the roots.

l
ya
A few more illustrations of this special type are given :

^ _x X
+ 39 + x- +r 4- == x—+ 2 + ——
x+5 x = 0 or—3i
ar

(2) _ L _ + 1 — 2 . 1
2x+l 3x+l 3x+2 6 x + l
m

N o w -- 1 = 1 ___ Hi- an<1 80 on’

’ ‘ l+ 2 x l+ 2 x
2x , 3x 3x . 6x
ra

‘ * 3x + T 3x + 2 6x+l

. .x = 0
or (by cross-multiplication) 12x+5 or (36x+15) = 0
.\x = —5/12
(3) a , b __ a —c b+c
x+a x+b x + a —c x+b+c
.\.x = 0 or — J(a+b)
(4) a—b b-—c __ a + b __ b + c
x + a —b x + b —c x + a + b x —b —-e
x = 0 or J(c—a)
(5) a+b , b + c __ 2b . a + c
x + a + b x + b + c x+2b x + a + c
. \ x = 0 or — J ( a + 2 b + c )
 ( 164 )
FOURTH SPECIAL TYPE
And again, there is still another special type of Quadratics
which are “ harder” but which our old friends “ Sunyam Anyat
and “ Paravartya” (Merger) can help us to solve easily.
Note :—Apropos of the subject-matter of the immediately
preceding sub-section (the 3rd special type), let
us now consider the equation 2 i 3 _ 5
This may boh, at the outset, x + 2 x+3 x+5
a like, but really is not, a quadratic equation of the type
dealt with in the immediately previous sub-section
(under Sunyam Anyat and Sunyam Samya Samuccaye)
but only a simple MERGER (because, not only is the
number of terms on the R.H.S. one short of the number

l
ya
required but also | + | ^ | It is really a case under
Sunyam Anyat and Paravartya (merger).
Here, the TEST is the usual one for the merger process
ar
i.e. J^+Ng (on the L.H.S.)=N3 (on the R.H.S.) Thus:
2 , 3 __ 5
x+2 x+3 x+5
m

(By merger method) — =o .• 2 x+ 5 = 0

x+2 x+3
2|
ra

A few true illustrations are given below :

(1) 4 ,9 _ 25
x+2 x+3 x+5
Here y | + | = YES
,\ (By Division) „ _ 2x i g _ 3x _ 5x
x+2 x+3 . x+5
x = 0 . (This can be verified by mere observation)
or 2 . 3 _ 5 (by merger), x = —2£
x+2 x+3 x+5
This result can be readily put down, by putting up
each numerator over the absolute term of the Denominator
as the Numerator of each term of the resultant equation and
retaining the Denominator as before. [Or by taking the Square
Root of Each Numerator] (in the present case).
 ( 165 )

Thus | = 2 ; | = 3 ; and ^ = 5 . And these will be our

new Numerators. Thus, we have the newly derived Equation :
_2__ , 3 _ 5
x+2 x+3 x+5
(By merger) x = —
(2) 2 , 9 _ 25
x+1 x+ 3 x+ 5
Here V f+ | = ^ - 8 .% YES

The derived equation i s :

2 . 3 _ 5
x+1 x+3 x+5
(which is the same as in all the three preceding cases).
x= or — 2 $
l
ya
0

N ote:—In the last two cases, the first term alone is different
ar
and yet, since the quotients $ and $ are the same,
therefore it makes no difference to the result; and
we get the same two roots in all the three cases!
m

(3) 6 , 4 _ 4
2 x+ 3 3 x + 2 4 x + l
ra

Here v .!+ * = * A YES .v x = U

or (By Division), + 4 _ + 6 _ +16
2 x+ 3 3 x+ 2 4 x + l

N. B. Note that 2xj6 — 4 3 x 4 _ g an(j 4 x 4 _

3 2 1
and that these are the new Numerators (for the derived
Equation)
/ . (By L.C.M.) 24 , 24 _ 48 YES
12x+18 12x+8 12x+3
or 1 , 1 _ 2 A YES
12x+18 12x+8 12x+3

.-. (By merger) 15 ^ 5 . „ _ _ 7

I2 x 4T8 l2 x + 8 ~ 8
 ( 166 )
N .S . : —The remaining examples in this chapter may be held-
over (if deemed advisable) for a later reading.
(4) __a , b = 2c
x+a x+ b x+c
Here v - + J = ?S .-.Y E S x -0
a b c
.-. J _ + * = 2 YES
x+a x+b x+c
.‘ .(B y merger) a—c _|_b —c _ q
x+a x+b
• x = b c+ cft—2ab
a + b —2c
(5) aa—b* , b a- c a _ a*—c*
x+a+b x+b+c x+a+c

l
a+b b+c
ya
Here v a2^ a+ ^ - c a= a_ !z i 2 .-.Y E S .-.* = 0
a+c

0 R xT+ra=X
+Tb ;+ -T
x +TbrT
+ -c = x++ a++ c YES
ar
(By Merger) (a—b )(b —c) . (b—c)(b —a )_ 0 and so on.
(x + a + b ) x+b+c
(6) 1 + 1 _ 2
m

ax+d bx+ d cx+ d

Here (by division), we have : d + a x ) 1(1
ra

1 + «

—ax
d
2c
ax+d bx+ d c x + dd
abc , abc O^
2abc
YES
abcx+ bcd abcx+acd abcx+abd

D2 Dg
bed —abd , acd —abd __q
abcx+bcd abcx+acd
bd{c—a) ___ ad(b—c)
bc(ax+d) ac(bx+d)
 ( 1ST )

• c~ a b ~~o
a x -fd bx+d
• x = ad + b d —2cd
a c + b c —2ab
(7) a x+ 2 d , b x + 3d _ 2cx+5d
ax+ d bx+ d cx+ d
Herev ^ + ^ = ^ = 0 YES x= 0
d d d
Or (by division)
____1 I 2 ___ ______ 3 ____
abcx+ bcd abcx+acd abcx-f-abd
(By merger), bed—abd^ acd—a b d _ n

. b d (a -c ) , 2ad(b—-c) __ ^
bd(ax+dj ac(bx+d)
l
ya
a - c . 2(b c) —q
a x + d (b x + d )
• x = ad + b d —2cd
ar

a c + b c —2ab
OR (by mere division Paravartya) at the very first step.
• d 2d „ 3d
m

ax+d bx+ d cx+ d

(which is the same as No. 6 supra)
ra

. x __ a d + b c —2cd
a c + b c —2ab

CONCLUDING LINKING NOTE

(On Quadratic Equations)
In addition to the above, there are several other special
types of Quadratic Equations, for which the Vedic Sutras have
made adequate provision and also suggested se veral beautifully
interesting devices and so forth. But these we shall go into
and deal with, at a later stage.
Just at present, we address ourselves to our next appro­
priate subject for this introductory and illustrative Volume
namely, the solution of cubic and Biquadratic Equations etc.
 Chapter X V III

CUBIC EQUATIONS

We solve cubic equations in various w ays:

(i) with the aid of the Pardvartya Sutra, the Lopana-
Sthapana Sutra, the formula (Purana-Apurndbhaydm)
which means “ by the completion or non-completion” of the
square, the cube, the fourth power etc.)
(ii) by the method of Argumentation and Factorisation
(as explained in a previous chapter).

The Purana Method

l
ya
The Puraya method is well-known to the current system.
In fact, the usually-in-vogue general formula —b dt y 'b 2—4ac
for the standard quadratic (ax2+ b x + c = 0 ) X 2a~
ar
has been worked out by this very method. Thus,
axa+bx4-c==0
•••(Dividing by » ) ,x «+ b x + o _ 0
m

a a
X2+ — =
ra

a . a
(completing the square on the L.H.S.)
. x 2 ib x , b a _ _ _ c . b a _ b a—4ac

ai U4a2
a2 a 4aa 4aa
b \2 b 2—4ac
4a2
x 4- — = ± V b2~ 4ac
2a 2a
. __~ b _ —b ± \ /b * -- 4ac
2a 2a
This method of “ completing the square” is thus quite well-
known to the present-day mathematicians, in connection with the
solving of Quadratic Equations. But this is only a fragmentary
and fractional application of the General Formula which (in
 ( 169 )

conjunction with the Pardvartya, the Lopana-Sthdpana etc.,

Sutras) is equally applicable to cubic, biquadratic and other
higher-degree equations as well.
Completing the Cubic
With regard to cubic equations, we combine the Pardvartya
Sutra (as explained in the ‘Division by Pardvartya9chapter) and
the Purana sub-formula. Thus,
(1) x 3— 6 x 2+ l l x — 6 = 0
x 3—6x2= —l l x + 6
But ( x - 2 ) 3= x 3- 6 x 2+ 1 2 x - 8
(Substituting the value of x 8—6x2 from above herein),
we have: (x —2)8= — l l x + 6 + 1 2 x —8 = x —2
Let x —2 = y (and let x = y + 2 )
y 3= y al
y = 0 or gfc l /. x = 3 or 1 or 2
N.B. :—It need hardly be poirted out that, by argumentation
y
(re: the coefficients of x 3, x 2 etc.,) we can arrive at the
ar
same answer (as explained in a previous chapter dealing
with factorisation by Argumentation) and that this
holds good in all the cases dealt with in the present
chapter.
m

(2) x 8+ 6 x * + l l x + 6 = Q
x 8+ 6 x 2= —J lx —6
ra

But (x + ? )8= x 8+ 6 x 2+12x+8== - l l x ~ 6 + 1 2 x + 8 = x + 2

A y a= y (where y stands for x + 2 )
/. y = 0 org&l x = ^-2, —3 or —1
(8) x 8+ 6 x 2—3 7 x + 3 0 = 0
x 8+ 6 x* = 37x—-30
(x+ 2 ) 8= x 8+ 6 x 2+ 1 2 x + 8 = 4 9 x — 22 = 4 9 (x+2) — 120

N .B .:— The object is to bring (x + 2 ) on the R.H.S. and thus

help to formulate an equation in Y, obtain the three
roots and then, by substitution of the value of x (in
terms of y), obtain the three values of x.
.% y 8- 4 9 y + 1 2 0 = 0 (y -3 )(y i+ 3 y -4 0 ) = 0
(y —-3)(y—5)(y+8) = 0 y = 3 or 5 or —8
x = l or 3 or —10.
 ( 170 )
(4) x 8 + 9 x a- f 2 3 x + 1 5 = 0

/. x 3+ 9 x 2= — 23x— 1 5
(x + 3 )s= ( x 8+ 9 x 2+ 2 7 x—27) = 4x+12 = 4(x+3)
y 3 = 4 )7 y = 0 or ± 2 x = —3 or —1 or —5
(5) x 8+ 9 x 2+ 2 4 x + 1 6 = 0
x 8+ 9 x 2= —24x—16
( x + 3 ) s= ( x 8+ 9 x 2+ 2 7 x + 2 7 ) = 3 x + l l = 3 (x + 3 )+ 2
y 3= 3 y + 2 y3—3y—2 = 0
(y + 1 )2 (y —2 )= 0 y = —l or 2 x = —4 or —1
(6) x 3+ 7 x a+ 1 4 x + 8 = 0
x 8+ 7 x 2= —14x—8
(x + 3 )8= (x3+ 9 x 2+ 2 7 x + 2 7 ) = 2x2+ 1 3 x + 1 9 = :
(x + 3 )(2 x + 7 ) - 2 ,
y s= y ( 2 y + l ) - 2 .\ y 8—y ( 2 y + l ) + 2 = 0 = ( y —l) ( y + l )

l
ya (y -2 )
y = l or —1 or 2 x = —2 or —4 or —1
(7) x 3+ 8 x 2+ 1 7 x + 1 0 = 0 ,\ x 3+ 8 x a= - 1 7 x - 1 0
ar
(x + 3 )8 = (x8+ 9 x a+ 2 7 x + 2 7 ) = x a-fl0 x + 1 7 =
(x + 3 )(x + 7 )-4
y 8= y ( y + 4 ) —4 .•.y3_ y 2 _ 4 y _ 4 ==0 v —1 or =£2
x = —2 or —1 or —5
m

(8) .\ x 8+ 1 0 x a-f-27x+18 = 0
Now (x + 4 )8= (x3+ 1 2 x 2+ 4 8x + 64 )
ra

Hence the L.H.S. = (x -fy )3—(2xa+ 2 1 x + 4 6 ) = (x + y )3

{(x + 4 )(2 x + 1 3 )-6 {
••• y 8= y ( 2 y + 5 ) - 6 ( y _ i ) ( y + 2)(y - 3 ) = o
.\ y — 1 or —2 or 3
.•. x = —3 or —6 or —1

N ote:—Expressions of the form x 3—7 x + 6 can be split into

x 8—1—7 x+ 7 etc., and readily factorised. Thisis always
applicable to all such cases (where x 2 is absent) and
should be fully utilised.
The Purana method explained in this chapter for the
solution of cubic equations will be found of great help
in factorisation ;and vice-versa.
“ Harder” cubic equations will be taken up later.
 Chapter X IX

BIQUADRATIC EQUATIONS

The procedures (Purana etc.,) expounded in the previous

chapter for the solution of cubic equations can be equally well
applied in the case of Biquadratics etc., too. Thus,
(1) x4+ 4 x 3- 2 5 x a-1 6 x + 8 4 = 0
.-. x4+ 4 x 3= 25x2+16x—84
.'. (x + 1 )4= x 4+ 4 x 3+ 6 x 2+ 4 x +1
= (25x2+ I 6 x -8 4 )+ (6 x a+ 4 x + l) = 31x2+ 2 0 x -8 3
= (x + l)(3 1 x —11)—72

l
y4=y(31y—42)—72 .*. y4—31ya+ 4 2 y + 7 2 = 0
ya
.-. y = —1, 3, 4 or —6
.\ x = —2, 2, 3 or —7
ar
(2) x4+ 8 x 3+ 14x2—8x—15=--0
.-. x4+ 8 x a= 1 4 x 2+8x-f-15
.-. (x+ 2)4= x 4+ 8 x 8+ 24x2+32x+16=10xa+4x+31
=(x+2)(10x+20)—9 = 10(x+2)2- 9
m

y 4=iO y2—9 .'. y 2= l or 9 .\ y = ± l or ± 3

.'. x = —1 or —3 or 1 or —5
ra

(3) x 4- 1 2 x 8-f49xa—78x+4^=0
x4—12x8= —49x2+78x—40
.-. (x—3)4= x 4—12x8+54xa—108x+81
= 5x2—3 0 x + 4 1 = (x —3)(5x—15)—4 = 5(x—3)2—4
.•. y4—5y2+ 4 = 0 y 2= l or 4 . '. ^ = ± 1 or ± 2
.-. x = 4 or 5 or 2 or 1
(4) x 4+16x3+86x2+176x+105
.•. x 44-10x3= —86xa—176x—105
.-. (x + 4 )4= x 4+16x8+96xa+256x-f256
= 10xa+80x+151 = (x+4)(10x+40)—9
= 10(x+4)2- 9
y 4—10y2+ 9 = 0 .\ y a= l or 9 ■/. y = ± l or ± 3
x = —3 or —5 or—1 or—7
 ( 172 )

/5) x4 _ i6 x 3+ 9 1 x2—210X+18O —0
. x 4 _ i 6 x 3= - 9 1 x 2+ 2 1 6 x -1 8 0
(x_ 4 ) 4 = x 4 _ i 6 x 3+ 9 6 x a- 2 5 6 x + 2 5 6
’' l 5x * _ 4 O x + 7 0 = ( x - 4 ) ( 5 x - 2 O ) - 4 = 5 (x - 4 ) 2- 4
. y*—5y*4-4 = 0 y 2= l or 4= .,. y = - # l or
x —3 or 5 or 6 or 2
(6) x 4—20x3+137x2-3 8 2 x + 3 6 0 = 0
x 4—20x3= —137x2+382x—360
(x—5)4= x 4—20x3+150x2—500x+625
= 13x2— 118x+265 = (x—5)(13x—53)
y 4= y(13v+12) y = 0 or y 3—13y—12 = 0
•••y = 0 or (y + 1 ) (y + 3 )(y —4) = 0
.\y = 0 or—1 or—3 or 4
x = 5, 4, 2 or 9.

l
ya
N o t e The student need hardly be reminded that all these
examples (which have all been solved by the Purami
method hereinabove) can also be solved by the Argu-
ar
mentation-cum-factorisation method.

A SPECIAL TYPE
m

There are several special types of Biquadratic equations

dealt with in the Vedic Sutras. But we shall here deal with only
one such special type and hold the others over to a later stage.
ra

This type is one wherein the L.H.S. consists of the sum

of the fourth powers of two Binomials (and the R.H.S. gives us
the equivalent thereof in the shape of an arithmetical number.)
The formula applicable to such cases is the (Vya?ti
Samasti) Sutra (or the Lopana Sthapana one) which teaches us
how to use the average or the exact middle binomial for break­
ing the Biquadratic down into a simple quadratic (by the
easy device of mutual cancellation of the old powers i.e. the
x8 and the x).
A single concrete illustration will suffice for explaining
this process:
(x + 7 )4+ ( x + 5 ) 4= 706.
Let x + 6 (the average of the two Binomials) = a
 ( 173 )

.\ ( a + l ) 4+ ( a - l ) 4= 706
owing to the cancellation of the odd powers x 3 and x,
2a4+12a2+ 2 = 706 .\ a4+ 6 a 2—352=^0
a2= 16 or—22 a = ± 4 o r ± v/ “ 22
2 or -1 0 o r ± V - 22- 6
N .B . :—In simple examples like this, the integral roots are
small ones and can be spotted out by mere inspection
and the splitting up of 706 into 625 and 81 and for this
purpose, the Vilokanam method will suffice. But,
in cases involving more complex numbers, fractions,
surds, imaginary quantities etc., and literal coefficients
and so on : Vilokanam will not completely solve the
Equation. But here too, the Vyasti-Samasti formula

l
will quite serve the purpose. Thus,
ya
The General Formula will be as follows :
Given (x+m -f-n)4- f (x + m —n)4= p
ar

- Q2__- 6 ± V 3 6 - 4 n 4+ 2 p
m

2
/ - a = ± g -6 ± V 5 6 -4 n ^ ± 2 p
ra

3U

£
Applying this to the above example, we have :

— 6 ± V 16 or V - 2 2 “ 6( ± 4 or ± y ' —22)—
(which tallies with the aobve)
N.B. .‘-^ “ Harder” Biqudratics, Pentics etc., will be taken up
later.
 Chapter X X *

MULTIPLE SIMULTANEOUS EQUATIONS.

We now go on to the solution of Simultaneous Equations
involving three (or more) unknowns. The Lo'pana-Sthd'pana
Sutra, the Anurufya Sutra and the Pardvartya Sutra are the
ones that we make use of for this purpose.

FIRST TYPE

In the first type thereof, we have a significant figure on

the R.H.S. in only one equation (and zeroes in the other two)

al
From the homogeneous zero equations, we derive new equations
defining two of the unknowns in terms of the third ; we then
substitute these values in the third equation ; and thus we
y
obtain the values of all the three unknowns.
ar
A second method is the judicious addition and subtract­
ion of proportionate multiples for bringing about the elimina­
tion of one unknown and the retention of the other two.
m

In both these methods, we can make our own choice of

the unknown to be eliminated, the multiples to be taken etc.,
ra

Thus :
(1) x + y —z ~ 0 (A)
4x—5y+2z —0 (B)
3x-f-2y+z — 10 (C)
(i) A + C gives u s : 4x+ 3 y \ 10x — 10
& 2 A + B gives us : 6x—

(ii) from A, we have x + y ^ z )

and from B, we have 4x—5y = —2z \
By Pardvartya, x ^ J z ; and y = f * z
.*.(by substitution in b z ~ l | z + z = 10 .*. z = 3
x= 1
 ( 175 )

(2) 7y—l l z —2x==0 ... A}

8y— z—6 x = 0 ... B>
3x+4y-f-5z = 35 ... C,
(i) Adding Band 2C, we have 16y+3z=70l
Subtracting B from 3A, 13y—2 6 z = 0 J

’ 455 455
(Substituting these values ill C) x= 8
(ii) 7y—l l z = 2 x ,j ..., y
y =
. ~
= 52^
g = i ji|y
x ;|
8y — 7z = 6x
J and z = -_ 2g X= f x
— 39
J

3x+5|x+3|x = 35 xc == 3
yr = 4
z=2
and z= )

l
ya
(3) 2x—3 y + 4 z = 0 ... ... (A)
7 x + 2 y —6 z = 0 .......... (B)
4 x + 3 y + z = 37 ........... (C)
ar
(i) A + C gives us: 6x-f- 5z = 37")
2A +3B gives us : 25x—10z= 0 )
x = § | £ = 2 ; and z = $ f f = 5 ; and y = 8
m

From (A) and (B) we have

(ii) .-. —3y+4z = —2 x?
ra

2 y -6 z = :-7 x \ v = = 40x= 4 x andz = Z ^ 5 ?

—10 ’ — 10
= 2$x
4 x + 1 2x+ 2 £ x = 37 x = 2 ; y = 8 ; and z = 5

SECOND TYPE
This is one wherein the R.H.S. contains significant, figures
in all the three equations. This can be solved by Paravartya
(CROSS-multiplication) so as to produce two derived equations
whose R. H. S. consists of zero only, or by the first or the second
of the methods utilised in the previous sub-section. Thus,
2x— 4 y + 9z = 2 8 ") .......... A
7 x + 3y— 5x = 3 £ ...........B
9x+ 1 0y—l lz =-4) .......... C
 ( 176 )

(1) (i) 196x -j- 84y—140z = 84. ?

and 6x—12y+ 27z = 84 \ 190x-)-96y+167z = 0
•\ 28x+12y—20z = 12 ?
and 27x+30y—33z =-12 J x —18y-f 13z = 0 ,
Having thus derived two equations of this kind (i.e. of
the first special type), we can now follow the first method under
that type ; and, after a lot of big multiplications, subtractions,
additions and divisions, we can obtain the answer : x = 2, y — 3
and z = 4
(ii) or, (adopting the first method adopted in the last sub­
section), we have:

y
— 17
al
+27x__43x—18
17
ar
128x—52 , 387x—162 OQ
2X--------— '+ 17
34x—128x + 52+387x—162=^476 .\ 293x = 586
x —2 ; y —3 ; and z - - 4
m

This method too involves a lot of clumsy labour.

(iii) or, (adopting the Lopana-Sthdpana method), we say :
ra

C—A —B gives us l l y —15z = —27?

and 9B--7C gives us —43y-f-32z~ — 1 \
y ~ 3 , z — 4 and x = 2
(2) x + 2 y + 3 z = 12 ... A )
2 x + 3 y + 4 z = 18 ... B y
4 x + 3 v + 5 z = 24 ... C J
(i) 24x+36v+48z = 216\ 6x—6z = 0 x-~z = 0
18x+36y+54z = 216 J
Similarly 48x+36y+60z — 2881 .*. 24x—12y—12z = 0
24x4~48y:{-72z = 288 J 2x~~ y — z ~ 0
x = y = z= 2
(ii) 2 y-f-3z~ 12 —x ; and 3y-f4z — 18—2x .\ y = 6—2x;
and z = x x = y = -z = 2.
 ( 177 )

(iii) 2A—B gives us: y+2z = 6).*. y = 2")

z= 2[
2B—C gives us: 3y-|-3z=12) ayd x = 2 )
or (iv) by mere observation.
(3) x + 2 y + 3 z — 14 ... A )
2 x -f3 y + 4 z = 2 0 ... B [
3 x + y + 6 z = 23 ... C )
.-. 28x+42y+56z = 280 j 8 x + 2y— 4z = 0'\
2 0x+ 40 y -f 60z = 280 I [
and42x-j-14y-i-84z —322 I 19x—32y-fl5z = o )
23x+ 46y+69z = 322 -
and so on as before.
(ii) 2 y + 3 z = 1 4 — x \ .-. y = 6 O - 6 x - 5 0 + 4 x = 4 —2x
3y4-4z=20—2 x / z = 42—3x—40-j~4x = x -f2

l
.-. 3 x + 4 -2 x + 6 x + 1 2 = 23 .-. x = l , y = 2 andz = 3
ya
(iii) 2A—B gives us: y-(-2z = 8 ) .\ y = 2")
and 3A—C gives us ; 5y-(-3z — 19 j z= 3£
x = l)
ar

(4) x+2y-f-3z = l l ... A)

2x-f3y-j-4z = 10 ... B £
3 x + 5 y + 6 z = 25 ... C)
m

(i) (16x-f-32y+48z)—(22x-f-33y-f 44z) = —6x—y + 4 z = 0)

and (33x+S5y+66z)—(2 5 x + 5 0 y + 7 5 z)= 8 x + 5 y — 9z = 0j
and so on.
ra

(ii) 2 y -f3 z = l l — x ? and so on, as before.

3y-(-4z = 16—2x )
(iii) x + y + zss5 1 y4-z = 4;and x + z = 3
andx+2y-}-2z=:9 j x = l, y = 2 and z = 2

In all these processes, there is an element, more or less,

of clumsiness and cumbrousness which renders them unfit
to come under and fit satisfactorily into the Vedic category.
Methods expounded in the Vedic Sutras and free from the said
draw-back and also capable of universal application will be
explained at a later stage.

23
 Chapter X X I

SIMULTANEOUS QUADRATIC EQUATIONS '

The Sutras needed for the solution of simultaneous
Quadratic equations have practically all been explained already.
Only the actual applicational procedure, devices and modus-
operanli thereof have to be explained. Thus:
(1) x + y =5 ? x a+ 2 x y + y 8= 2 5 / .-. (x —y )2= \
& xy —6 { 4xy = 2 4 J .-. x —y = ± 1
x=2 I X—3 )
6=3 1 W y = 2 }
This is readily obtainable by Vilokanam (mere observation)

l
and also because symmetrical values can always be reversed.
ya
(2) x —y = l \ x=3\ —2> Note the minus
andxy=6j y=2J —3 )
(3) 5x— y = 1 7 1 25xa—10xy-fy*=289 1 (5x+y)*i=:529
ar
and x y = 1 2 j and 20xy =240 J 5 x -| -y = ± 23
.•. 10x=40 or —6 ••. x = 4 ) —
y=3 ] or -2 0 J
m

N.B. :— 1. When the value of x or y has been found, xy at

once gives us the value of the other. Thus, if,
here, x = 4 , y = 3 , no other substitution etc., is
ra

necessary.
2 One set of values can be found out by Vilokanam
alone.
3. The internal relationship between the two sets of
Values will be explained later.
(4) 4x—3 y ~ 71 x —4 and y = 3 by (mere Vilokanam-
and x y —12 J observation)
(ii) (4x—3y)2=49 4 x + 3 y = -± 2 5 8x=32 or —18
x=4\ -2 i\
y=3 S ° r — J
(5) x3 - y 3^ 1 9 l x 2+ xy-)-y2=19 ? .\ 3 xy^ l8 .\ x y = 6
x —y = i f and x 2—2 x y + y 2== 1 \
x=3 ? —21
y ^ J *—3 J
 ( 179 )

(6) xs+ y 3=61).\ x2— x y + y a=61} .-. 3xy 3=— 60 .• x y = —20

x + y = 1J x8+ 2 x y + y a= 1J. . * = 5 1 -4 1
y = -4 / 5}
N .B .:— There is plus sign all through. Therefore it can all be
simply reversed (i.e. one by Vilokanam and the other by
reversal).
(7) x + y = 4 ? (i) By Vilokanam, x = 3 and y = l
and xa+ x y + 4 x = 2 4 J
Secondly x (x + y )+ 4 x = 8 x = 2 4 x=3 ?
y=i J
(8) x + 2 y = 5 ?
and x a+ 3 x y + 2 y a+ 4 x —1= 10 J
(x + y ) (x + 2 y )+ 4 x —l = 5 x + 5 y + 4 x —y = 1 0
9x+4y=10l

l
ya
But x + 2 y = 5J
(By Pardvartya or by Sunyam Anyat) x = 0 & y= 2|
ar
(9) x + 2 y = 5
and x 2+ 3 x y —2y2+ 4 x + 3 y = 0
(x + 2 y ) ( x + y ) - 4 y a+ 4 x + 3 y = 0
5 x + 5 y —4ya+ 4 x + 3 y = 9 x + 8 y —4ya= 0
m

4y2+ 1 0 y —45—0 8y-|-10=i'y/820

. y /8 2 0 - 1 0 _ —5Ty'205~
ra

' •7 ± 8 4
15+y/205
•x 2
(10) x + y = 5 •) 3x2+ y 2= ( x + y ) (3 x -3 y )+ 4 y
( = 1 5 x —15y+4y2= 1 9
3x2+ y a= l 9 ) .-. 75—15y—15y+ 4y2= 19
4y2—3 0y+ 5 6 = 0
8y—3 0 = ± \ /4 — ± 2 .-. 8y —32 or 28 .\ y 4 or
and x - 1 or 1|

(11) x2+ 3 x —2 y = 4 {) .-. 7x2—x

7x2- x -—8 8 ==00 )\. - . x = - l \ 8/7
2x2—5 x + 3 y = —2 ( x + l ) ( 7 x - 8 ) = 0 ( V = —3J 18 49

(12) x + y = 5 \ 5x— 5y—y 2= 0 25—lOy—y * = l

' 2v2= l J •••V2+ 1 0 v —24= 0 .-. y = 2 ? or —12
x —3 \ or - 1 7
 ( 180 )

(13) 2 x + y = 3 ? l| x + 2 jy —§y2= 3 ? y 2- 2 y + l = 0
x 2+ 2 x y = 3 j 6 x + 9y—3y2—12 J y = 1 and x = l
or (ii) 4xa-f2 x y = 6 x
x 2-f-2xy=3 J 3x2—6 x + 3 = 0 .'. x = l )
an*l y = l J
(14) x + y = 2 ? 4 x -fy + 2 y 2= 7 .'. 8—3 y + 2 y 2= 7
x 2+ y 2+ 2 x + 3 y = 7 \ 2y2- 3 y + l = 0 y=l ? i)
x = l 1 °r 11 j
(15) 2x2-f-xy+ y 2= 8 1 x 2+ y 2= 5
3x2—x y + 4 y 2=17 J
And (by CROSS—multiplication)
34x2+ 1 7 x y + 1 7 y a= 2 4 x 2—8 xy+32y2
10x2+ 2 5 x y —15y2= 0 .\ 2x2-f-5xy—3y2= 0
(x + 3 y ) (2x—y )= 0 ,\ x = - 3 y or |y
al
Substituting in x2+ y 2= 5 , we have
9y2+ y 2= 5 or |y2= 5 / . y 2= | or 4
y
y = ± -r i. or ^ 2
■\/2
ar
and x = ± 3 v " £ or or 6 or ^ 1.
N.B. :— Test for the correct sign (plus or minus).
(16) 2x2+ x y + y 2= 7 7 i 184x2+ 92xy+92y2=154x2+j231xy
m

2x2+ 3 x y =921 30x=— 139xy+92y2= 0

(5x—4y) (6x—23y)=0 .-. x = | y or .My
(By substitution),
ra

y = ± 5 ! or ,j ± V 6 / 7
x=±4j~ V8"-± V 7
(17) 3x2—4xy-f2y2= l 1 .-.(By subtraction), 4x2—4xy4-2y2=16
y 2—x2 = -1 5 j.-.2 x -y = ± 4
(By substitution), 4x2;F16x-f 16—x2= —15
.\3x2:F16x-)-31=0 & so on.
(18) 2x2—7xy-4-3y2= 0 ) x = 3 y or iy
x 2+ x y + y 2=13 [ y=±ll ±VV\
and x = ± 3 / or^ 7 | j J -
(19) 3x2—4xy+ 2 y2= l ? x=±y.
y2—x2 =0 J 3x*—4xa+ 2 x 2= l x=±l \
■y = ± i \
or 3x2+ 4 y 2-f-2y2= l .-. y = j--\ /l/3 )
and x = ± ^ / f / 3 J
 ( 181 )
(20) x 2— x y = 1 2 y2 ? .\ x = 4 y or —3y
x 2+ y 2 =68 J
By substitution, 17y2==68 or 10y2=68
y==±\/2or ± V 34/5
and or ± 3 ^ 3 4/5
(21) x2—2 x y + y 2= 2 x —2 y+ 3 }
x2+ x y + 2 y 2= 2 x — y + 3 J
(i) By Sunyam Anyat y=0
Let x —y = a a2—2a—3 = 0 a—3 or —1
x —y = 3 or ± 1 .
Now, substitute and solve,
or (ii) By subtraction, 3 x y + y 2= y
y ~ 0 or 3 x + y = l

l
Substitute and solve
ya
N.B. :— The Sunyam Anyat method is the best.
(22) 3x2+ 2 x y —y2= 0 1 .*. x = —y or |y
x 2+ y 2= 2 x (y + 2 x ) j
ar
Substitute and solve
or (ii) By transposition,
—3x2—2 x y + y 2= 0
m

This means that the two equations are not independent;

and therefore, any value may be given to y and a corresponding
ra

set of values will emerge for x !

(“ Harder” simultaneous Quadratics will be taken up at a
later stage).
 Ch a p t e r X X II

FACTORISATION AND DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS

In this Chapter the relevant Sutras (Gunaka-Samuccaya
etc.,) dealing with successive differentiations, covering Leibnity’s
theorem, Maclaurin’s theorem, Taylor’s theorem etc., and
given a lot of other material -which is yet to be studied and
decided on by the great mathematicians of the present-day
western world, is also given.
Without going into the more abstruse details connected
herewith, we shall, for the time-being, content ourselves with
a very brief sketch of the general and basic principles involved

l
ya
and a few pertinent sample-specimens by way of illustration.
The basic principle is, of course, elucidated by the very
nomenclature (i.e. the Gunaka-Samuccaya) which postulates
ar
that, if and when a quadratic expression is the product of the
Binomials (x + a ) and (x + b ), its first differential is the sum of
the said two factors and so on (as already explained in the
m

chapter on quadratic equations).

It need hardly be pointed out that the well-known rule of
ra

differentiation of a product (i.e. that if y = u v , when u and v be

the function of x, = v ^H+ u ~^) and the Gunaka-Samuccaya

Sutras denote, connote and imply the same mathematical truth.

Let us start with very simple instances:
a b
(1) x2+ 3 x + 2 —
(x + 1 ) (x + 2 )
D2 (the first
Dj firs differential=^2x+3~(x+2)+(x + l)== Za
a b e
(2) x3+ 6 x 2+ l l x + 6 =
(x + 1 ) (x + 2 ) (x + 3 )
D1= 3 x 2+ 1 2 x + l 1= ( x 2+ 3 x + 2 ) + (x2+ 5 x + 6)
+ ( x 2+ 4 x + 3 )—a b + b c + a c = 2 a b .
Da= 6 x + 1 2 = 2 (3 x + 6 )= 2 (x + l) + (x + 2 )+ (x + 3 ) =
—2 (a + b + c )= 2 2a = |2 2a
 ( 183 )

(3) x«+ 10x8+ 3 5 xa+ 5 0 x + 2 4 = (x + l) (x + 2 ) (x + 3 ) (x + 4 )

D1= 4 x 8+ 3 0 x8+ 7 0 x + 5 0 = Labe
Da—12xa+0O x+7O =2, Sab=|2. Sab.
D8=24x+0O =6(4x+lO )=|3 La
(4) x 5+ 1 5 x 4+ 7 1 x 8+ 1 7 8 x 2+ 2 1 4 x +120
= ( x + l ) (x + 2 ) (x + 3 ) (x + 4 ) (x + 5 )
D1= 5 x 4+0Ox8+213x24-350x+214= Labcd
D8= 2 0 x 8+180xz+426x+356=|2 Labe
D8=60x2+360x+426=i3 Lab
D4=12Ox+30O=24 ( 5 x + 1 5 ) = | 4 La
(5) x 4+ 1 9x3+234xa+ 2 8 4 x + 2 4 0 = (x + 2 ) (x + 3 ) (x + 4 ) (x+10)
D1= 4 x 8+ 5 7 x a+ 408x+ 284= L abc
Da= 1 2 x a+ I14x+ 468= I2 Lab

l
ya
D8= 2 4 x + U 4 = 0 (4 x+ 1 9 )= | 3 La

These examples will suffice to show the internal relationship

subsisting between the factors of a Polynomial and the success­
ar
ive differentials of that Polynomial; and to show how easily,
on knowing the former, we can derive the latter and vice versa.

There is another relationship too in another direction

m

wherein factorisation and differentiation are closely connected

with each other and wherein this relationship is of immense
ra

practical help to us in our mathematical work. And this is with

regard to the use of successive differentials for the detection
of repeated factors.

The procedure hereof is so simple that it needs no ela­

borate exposition at all. The following examples will serve to
show the modus operandi in question :
( 1) Factorise x 8—4 x 2+ 5 x — 2

•••^ ==3x8—8x+ 5 = (x - 1) ( 3 x - 5)
Judging from the first and the last coefficients of E(the given
expression), we can rule out (3x—5) and keep our eyes on (x —1).
Dt —6x—8 = 2 (3 x—4) .'. we have (x —l)8
(According lothe- Adyarn A d yem Sutra) E = (x —l ) 2(x —2)
 ( 184 )
(2) Factorise 4x3—12x2—15x—4.
• D1= 1 2 x 2—24x— 15=3(4x2—8x—5 )= 3 (2 x—5) (2 x + l)
D2= 2 4 x —24=24(x—1) .\ As before, we have, ( 2 x + l ) z
E = ( 2 x + l ) 2 (x —4) f
(3) Factorise x4—6x8+ 1 3 x 2—24x+36
D1= 4 x 3— 1 8 x 2 + 2 6 x — 2 4 = 2 ( 2 x 3 — 9 x 2 + 1 3 x — 12)
= 2 (x —3) (2x2—3x+ 4)
Da= 1 2 x 2—36x+26 (which has no rational factors)
E = ( x —3)a (xa+ 4 )
(4) Factorise : 2x4—23x3+ 8 4 x 2—80x—64
D1= 8 x s—69x2+ 1 68 x—80
D a= 2 4 x 2—138x+168=6(4x2—2 3 x + 2 8 )= 6 (x -4 ) (4x—7)
Da= 4 8 x —138=6(8x—23)

l
Ds= 6 (x —4) (4x—7)
ya
D1= ( x —4)2 (8x—5)
E =?(x—4)3 (2 x + l)
ar
(5) Resolve 5x3—9x*+81x—108 into factors,
D1= 4 x 3—-15x2—18x+81
D j= 1 2 x a—3 0 x -’ 18=6(2x2—5 x ~ 3 )= 6 (x —3) (2 x + l)
m

D3=»24x—30=6(4x—5)
.\ D8= .(x -3 ) (12x+6)
ra

/ . Dx= ( x -3 ) * (4x+9)
E = ( x - 3 ) 8 (x+4)
(6) Resolve 16x4—24x*+10x—3 into factors.
Dx= 6 4 x 8—48x+16=16(4x3—3 x + l)
Da=192xa-4 8 = 4 8 (4 x 2- l ) = 4 8 ( 2 x - l ) (2 x + l)
.\ Da—384x
Da= (2 x — 1) ( 9 6 X + 4 8 )
.-. Dx= (2 x —l ) 2 (x + 1 )
E = (2 x —l)3 (2x+3)
(7) Resolve x5—5 x 4 + 1 0 x 3 — 1 0 x 2+ 5 x — 1 into factors.
Dx= 5x4—20x3+ 30x2—20x+ 5
= 5 (x 4-—4x3+ 6 x 2—4 x + l)
.-. D 2= 2 0 x 3—G 0 x 2+ 6 0 x — 20=20(x3—3 x 2 + 3 x — 1)
D3—3 x 2 — 6 x + 3 = 3 ( x 2 — 2 x + l)
 ( M# )

D4==0x—6 = 6 (x —1)
D8= 3 (x —l)a
D2= 4 ( x - 1 ) 3
D ^ x -l)4
.-. E = ( x —l)8
(8) Factorise x8- 1 5 x 8+ 1 0 x 2+ 6 0 x -7 2
D x= 5x 4— 4 5 x 2+ 2 0 x + 6 0 = 5 ( x 4 — 9 x 2+ 4 x + 1 2 )
D 2= 2 0 x 3 — 9 0 x + 2 0 = 1 0 ( 2 x 3— 9 x + 2 )
D3=60x2—90=30 (2x2—3)
D4=120 x ;
D2= 20( x - 2)2 (x + 1 )
D1 = 5 ( x - 2 ) 2 (x + 1 ) (x + 3 )
••• E = ( x —2)3 (x + 3 )2 y al
Many other such applications are obtainable from the
Vedic Sutras relating to (Calana-Kalana—Differential
Calculus). They are, however, to be dealt with, later on.
ar
m
ra

2*
 Chaptek X X III

PARTIAL FRACTIONS
Another subject of very great importance in various mathe­
matical operations in general and in Integral Calculus in
particular is “ Partial Fractions” for which the current systems
have a very cumbrous procedure but which the ‘Pardvartya’
Sutra tackles very quickly with its well-known MENTAL ONE-
LINE answer process.
We shall first explain the current method ; and, along-side
of it, we shall demonstrate the “ Paravartya” Sutra application
thereto. Suppose we have to express 3x2+ 1 2 x + l l
in the shape of Partial Fractions.

l
(x + 1 ) (x + 2 ) (x + 3 )
ya
The current method is as follows:
Let— 3 x * + 1 2 x + ll _ A ■_ B C
(x + 1 ) (x + 2 ) (x + 3 ) x + 1 x + 2 x+3
ar

(, +^ ; + 1
^ + ‘ 1+ 3 ) “ A ,* .+ 5 l + e)+ B(*‘ + 4x+ 3)
+ C (x + 3 x + 2 )
m

(x + 1 ) (x + 2 ) (x+ 3 )
x * (A + B + C )+ x (5 A + 4 B + 3 C )+ (6 A + 3 B + 2 C )= '
(3x2+ 1 2 x + ll )
ra

Equating the coefficients of like powers on both sides,

A + B + C = 3")
5A +4B+3C=12 ?
6 A + 3 B + 2 C -1 1 J
.•.Solving these three simultaneous equations involving
three unknowns, we have, A = 1 ; B = 1 ; and C—1
. • . E ^ - 1- - + _ ! _ + _ L _
x+1 x+ 2 x+ 3
In the Vedic system, however, for getting the value of A,
(i) we equate its denominator to zero and thus get the
Pardvartya value of A(i.e. — 1);
(ii) and we MENTALLY substitute this value —1 in the
E, (but without the factor which is A’s denominator
on the R.H.S.) &
 ( 187 )

(iii) we put this result down as the value of A. Similarly

for B and C.
Thus, , 3 x 2+ 1 2 x + l l _ 3 —12+11 .
(x+2) (x+3) 1X2
t>_3xa+ 1 2 x + l l _ 1 2 —2 4 + l l _ —1 , .
(x+3) (x+1) (1) (—1) -I ’
and c _ 3 x * + 1 2 x + l l _ 2 7 —36+11 _ 2 _ .
(x+1) (x+2) (—2) (—1) 2

•• B “ i T i + 4 i + i T 3
N ote:—All this work can be done mentally; and all the
laborious work of deriving and solving three simul­
taneous equations is totally avoided by this method.
A few more illustrations are shown below :
2x+3
l (also available by mere
(i)
ya
1 1
( x + 1) ( x + 2) x + l Hx+2 Vilokanam)
(2) 7 7 7
( x + 1) ( x + 2) x+1 x+2
ar

(3) 2x —5 _ 1 4 1
( x - 2) (x —3) x - 2H x—3
(4) 3x+13 10 7
m

( x + 1) ( x + 2) x+1 ’ x+2
(5) 2x + l 7
- -5 4
ra

x 2—5 x + 6 x- 2 x—3
(6) 7x—1 —5 . 4
l - 5x + 0x 2 1—2x 1—3x
(7) 9 3 3
x 2+ x —2 x —1 x + 2
(8) x —13 2 1
x 2—2x—15 x + 3 x —5
(9) X—5 2 1
x 2—x —2 x+1 x - 2
( 10) x+ 3 7 4 3
x a+ 4 x —21 (x -3 ) x+7
(H ) 5 + 2 x —3x2 _(1 + x ) (5—3x)
( x * - l ) ( x + 1) ( x + 1)1! ( x - 1)
_5—3x 1 4
x 2— 1 x —1 x + 1
 f

( 188 )

(12) 5 x — 18 _ 3 , 2
x 2— 7 x + 1 2 x — 3 x — 4

(13) 3 x 2— 1 0 x - 4 _ » . 8 x — 28 = 3 , _6_ 2
( x 2— 6 x + 8 ) ( x — 2) ( x — 4) x — 2 x — 4

(14) x 2+ x + 9 _ 9 _ 11 I 15
x 3 + 6 x 2+ l l x + 6 2(x+l) x + 2 3(x+3)

(15) 2 x+l _ 3 5 , 7
X s — 6 x 2+ l l x — 6 2 ( x — 1) x — 2 2 ( x — 3)

(16) 2 x 3 — l l x 2 + 1 2 x + l _ o I x 2— 1 0 x + 1 3
x a— 6 x 2+ l l x — 6 ( x — 1) ( x — 2) ( x — 3)

= 2+ -* _ + -£ _ -_ L _
x — 1 x — 2 x — 3

Therefore, the GENERAL FORMULA is :

6x2+ m x + n
Jx—a) (x—b) (x —c)
y
a _ la2+ma-f-n . -R _ lb2+m b-f-n .
al j lc2+ m c + n
•‘ A ” (^ T b )7 a - c )’ ( b - c ) (b --a )’
ar
If and when, however, we find one or more factors of the
Denominator in repetition (i.e. a square, a cube etc,,) a slight
variation of procedure is obviously indicated. For example,
m

let E be 3 x + 5
(1—2x)2
ra

According to the current system, we say :

1—2 x = p (so that x — —~ P )

jL

. - . E = 3 ~ 3P + 5
2 __ 1 3 — 3 p
p2 2p2
__ 1 3 ___3 ___ 13 _ 3
2p2 2p 2(1—2x)2 2(1—2x)
This is no doubt a straight and simple procedure. But
even this is rather cumbrous, certainly not easy and certainly
not mental arithmetic ! And, with bigger numbers and higher
numbers (as will be the case in the next example), it will he
still worse !
 ( 189 )

The Vedic system, however, gives us two very easy

Paravartya methods whereby the whole work can be done
mentally, easily and speedily. They are as follows:
(i) 3 x+ 5 __ A . B
(1—2x)2 (1—2x)2~t" l - 2 x
3 x + 5 = A + B (1—2x).................. M
—2B x=3 ; and A + B = 5
.-. B = —1| and A =6|
(ii) 3 x + 5 = A + B (1—2x).................. M
By Paravartya (making 1—2 x= 0 , i.e. x = $ ),
we have A=6| ; and (as this is an absolute identity)
(i.e. true for all values of x), let us put x = 0
.-. A + B = 5 .'. B = —1|

l
ya
Two more examples are taken by way of Illustration :
(1) x8+ 3 x + l
ar
(I-* )4
According to the current system, we sa y :
let 1—x = p (so that x —1—p)
m

• E = (i ~P) 3+ 3 (i - p ) + 1
P4
ra

_ l - 3 p + 3 p 2—p3+ 3 - 3 p + l
P4
_5 _1_
P4 P3 P* P
5 6 , 3 1_
(1—x)4 (1—x)s (1—x)2 (1—x)

But according to the Vedic procedure, we say :

(1) A + B (1—x )+ C (l—x )2+ D ( l —x )3= x 3+ 3 x + l
.-. ( A + B + C + D ) + x ( —B —2 C -3 D )+ x 2(C -3 D )—Dx®
= x 2+ 3 x + 5
.-. —D =1 D = —1
.-. C—3 D = C - 3 = 0 0= 3
... _ B —2C—3 D = —B —6 + 3 = 3 B = —6
.-. A + B + C + D = A - 6 + 3 - l = l .-. A = 5
 ( 190 )

Or, secondly, (by Paravartya),

Put x = l A= 5 |
Put x = 0 A+B+C+D = 1 I B = —6 I
Put x = 2 A —B + C —D =15 J C= 3
D = -l '
(all of which can be done by mental Arithmetic).
(2) 5+ 2 x - 2 x 2 _ A . B . C 1
(x 2—1) (x + 1 ) (x + 1 )2 x + 1 x + 1
.•. A (x—1 )+ B (x2—1)+C (x—l ) 2 V - .A + B C - = - 5 ’)
= ( —A —B + C )+ x (A + 2 C )+ x * (B + C )f A +2C = 2f
= 5 + 2 x —2x2 ) B+C = -2 )
A = —J ; B = —3 j ; and C=1
or, secondly (by Paravartya),
Put x —1 4c= 5 .-. C = I f )

l
x = l .-.-2 A = 1 A==-
x=0
ya B = -3 | )
N.B. :— 1. It need be hardly pointed out that the current
method will involve an unquestionably cumbrous
ar
and clumsy process of working, with all the atten­
dant waste of time, energy etc.
2. Other details of applications of Paravartya and
m

other Sutras to partial fractions, will be -dealt

with later.
ra

3. Just now we take up an important part of Integral

Calculus wherein, with the help of partial fractions,
we can easily perform difficult integrational work.
 Chapter X X IV

INTEGRATION

By
PARTIAL FRACTIONS

In this chapter we shall deal, briefly, with the question

of INTEGRATION by means of Partial Fractions. But, before
we take it up, it will not be out of place for us to give a skeleton-
sort of summary of the first principles and process of integration
(as dealt with by the Ekadhika Sutra).

l
The original process of differentiation is, as is wellknown,
ya
a process in which we say :
Let y—x8. Then D, ( U dy)==8x,
ar
dx
D2=6x ; and D3= 6
Now, in the converse process, we have :
m

4 ^ = 3 x 2 .-. d y = 3 x 2dx
dx J
Integrating, Jdy=J3x2dx .-. y = x 3
ra

Thus, in order to find the integral of a power of x, we

add unity to the (Purva i.e. the original index) and divide
the coefficient by the new index (i.e. the original one plus
unity),
A few specimen examples may be taken:
(1) Integrate 28x3. /28x8d x = ^ x 4= 7 x 4
(2) J(x4+ 3 x 3+ 6 x 2+ 7 x -9 )d x
= j x 5- f f x 4+ 2 x 3+3£x2—9 x + K ( where K is an in­
dependent term)
3J(xa-fx a-1+ x ft-2 etc.)

(3) = £ ^ + £ + £ 1 .......Etc.
a -fl &
 ( 192 )
(4) J(axm+1+ b x m-f-cx“ - 1)dxl
axm+a . bxm+1 . cxm
.Etc.
m +2 m +1 m
This is simple enough, so far as it goes. But what about
complex expressions involving numerators and denominators ?
The following sample specimens will qaake the procedure (by
means of Partial Fractions) clear :
(1) Integrate 7x—1
6xa—5 x + l
V (By Paravartya), 7x—1 _ 7x—1
6x2- 5 x + T (2x—1) (3x—1)
_ 5 4
2x—1 3x—1

l
• f (7x—l)dx _ 5 r dx _ ± r dx
J 6x2—5x-fl
ya
J 2x—-1 J 3x—1
(*d(2x) _ 4 f d(3x)
*J 2x— 1 3J 3x—1
ar
S log (2x—1) —| log (3x—1)
_Jog (2x—1)6/2
(3x—l)4/3
m

(2) Integrate x2—7 x + l

x5—6xr+ l l x ”—6
V (By Paravartya),x 2— 7 x + l _ x2—7 x + l
ra

x3- 6 x 2+ 1l x —6 (x—l)(x —2)(x—3)

_ —5 __ 9___ 11
2(x—1) x —2 2(x—3)
• f J ^ ! r i f e + 1)dx — c\ — 5 j. 9 __ 11 |fiy
•Jx3—6X2+ f i x - 6 J l 2 (X -l) x -2 2(x—3)1
= -§ f_ d £ _ + 9
J x -l J x -2 2 J x —3
log (x —1)+9 log(x—2 ) - y log(x—3)
(3) Integrate 1
Xs—x a—x + 1
^ e t ______ J______— ^ -L ^ J- ^ M
x3—x 2—x + 1 x —1 (x —l ) 2 x + 1 ........
1= A (x 1) (x + l) + B ( x + l)+ C (x —l)2
= A (x 2—1 )+ B (x + 1 )+ C (x —I)2.................. N
 ( 193 )

Now, let x = l 1=2B B=J

Differentiating (N),
0 = 2 A x + B + 2 C x —2c.................. P
N o w p u tx = l 2A= —\ A = —J
Differentiating (P), 2A +2C —0 2C=$ C=£
•n 1 _ 1 I 1____
~ 4 (x —1) 2(x—1) 4 (x + l )
• ( dx _ 1 c dx _ —1 f dx c dx
• • J x »-x * -x + l tJ ^ T ) 4j ( 1 = 1 ? ■J (r + 1 )
= - i log (x—1 )= 1 log ( x - l ) + £ log (x + 1 )

l
ya
ar
m
ra
 Chapter X X V

THE VEDIC NUMERICAL CODE

It is a matter of historical interest to note that, in their
mathematical writings, the ancient Sanskrit writers do not
use figures (when big numbers are concerned) in their numerical
notations but prefer to use the letters of the Sanskrit (Deva-
nagari) alphabet to represent the various numbers! And this
they do, not in order to conceal knowledge but in order to
facilitate the recording of their arguments, and the derivation
conclusions etc. The more so, because, in order, to help
the pupil to memorise the material studied and assimilated
they made it a general rule of practice to write even the most

l
technical and abstruse text-books in Sutras or in Verse (which
ya
is so much easier— even for the children— to memorise) than
in prose (which is so much harder to get by heart and remember).
And this is why we find not only theological, philosophical,
ar
medical, astronomical and other such treatises but even huge
big dictionaries in Sanskrit Verse ! So, from this stand-point,
they used verse, Sutras and codes for lightening the burden and
m

facilitating the work (by versifying scientific and even mathe­

matical material in a readily assimilable form) !
ra

The very fact that the alphabetical code (as used by them
for this purpose) is in the natural order and can be immediately
interpreted, is clear proof that the code language was resorted
not for concealment but for greater ease in verification etc.,
and the key has also been given in its simplest form :
“sfrrfir srrfc Trfe and sr which
m eans:
(1) ka and the following eight letters ;
(2) ta and the following eight letters ;
(3) pa and the following four letters ;
(4) ya and the following seven letters; and
(5) ksa (or Ksudra) for Zero.
Elaborated, this means :
(1) ka, ta, pa and ya all denote 1 ;
(2) kha, tha, pha and ra all represent 2 ;
 (3) ga, da, ba and la all stand for 3 ;
(4) gha, dha, and va all denote 4 ;
(5) gna, na> and sa all represent 5 ;
(6 ) ca, to, and ia all stand for 6 ;
(7) cha, tha9 and sa all denote 7 ;
(8) ja , da and ha all represent 8 ;
(9) jha and dha stand for 9 ; and
(10) Ksa (or Ksudra) means Zero !
The vowels (not being included in the list) make no differ­
ence ; and in conjunct consonants, the last consonant is alone
to be counted.
Thus pa pa is 11, ma ma is 55, ta ta is 11, ma ry is 52 and so
on !

l
ya
And it was left to the author to select the particular
consonant or vowel which he would prefer at each step. And,
ar
generally, the poet availed himself of this latitude to so frame
his selections as to bring about another additional meaning
(or meanings) of his own choice. Thus, for instance, kapa,
tapa9 papa and yapa all mean 11 ; and the writer can (by a
m

proper selection of consonants and vowels) import another

meaning also into the same verse. Thus “ I want mama and
ra

papa” will mean “ I want 55 and 11” !

Concrete, interesting and edifying illustrations will be
given later on (especially in connection with recurring decimals,
Trigonometry etc. wherein, over and above the mathematical
matter on hand, we find historical allusions, political reflections,
devotional hymns in praise of the Lord Shri Krishna, the Lord
Shri Shankara and so on ! )*
This device is thus not merely a potent aid to versification
(for facilitating memorisation) but has also a humorous side to
it (which adds to the fun of i t ) !

*The hymn (in praise of the Lord) gives us the value

of to 32 decimal places (in Trigonometry).
 %

Ch a p t e r XXVI

RECURRING DECIMALS

It has become a sort of fashionable sign of cultural advance-

ment> not to say up-to-datism, for people now-a-days to
talk not only grandly but also grandiosely and grandiloquently
about Decimal coinage, Decimal weights, Decimal measurements
etc. ; but there can be no denying or disguising of the
fact that the western world as such—not excluding its mathe­

l
maticians, physicists and other expert scientists-seems to have
ya
a tendency to theorise on the one hand on the superiority of
the decimal notation and to fight shy, on the other, in actual
'practice— of decimals and positively prefer the “ vulgar fractions”
ar
to them !

In fact, this deplorable state of affairs has reached such

a pass that the mathematics syllabus—curricula in the schools,
m

colleges and universities have been persistently “ progressing”

and “ advancing” in this wrong direction to the extent of
ra

declaring that Recurring decimals are not integral parts of the

matriculation course in mathematics and actually instructing the
pupils to convert all recurring decimals AT SIGHT into their
equivalent vulgar fraction shape, complete the whole work
with them and finally re-convert the fraction result back
into its decimal shape!
Having invented the zero mark and the decimal notation
and given them to the world (as described already from the
pages of Prof. Halstead and other Historians of Mathematics),
the Indian Vedic system has, however, been advocating the
decimal system, not on any apriori grounds or because of
partiality but solely on its intrinsic merits. Its unique achieve­
ments in this direction have been of a most thrillingly wonderful
character : and we have already—at the very commencement of
 ( 1W )
this illustrative volume—given a few startling sample-speci-
mens thereof. The student will doubtless remember that, at
the end of that chapter, we promised to go into fuller details of
this subject at a later stage. In fulfilment of that promise, we
now pass on to a further exposition of the marvels x)f Vedic
mathematics in this direction.

Preliminary Note
We may begin this part of this work with a brief reference
to the well-known distinction between non-recurring decimals,
recurring ones and partly-recurring ones.
( 1 ) A denominator containing only 2 or 5 as factors

l
gives us an ordinary (i.e. non-recurring or non-circulating)
ya
decimal fraction (each 2, 5 or 10 contributing one significant
digit to the decimal). For instance,

■5 ; \4 =
ar
$ = - i - = •25 ; | = - - - - - - = 1 2 5 ;
2X2 8 2X2X2

TV = „ * = 0625 ; g1» = U = 03125 ;

XB 2 X 2 X 2 X 2 s * 28
m

* = -2 ; T\,= •1 ; * = 05 ; i Y = p = 04 ;
ra

* = i0 S 2 * = ' 025 ; * = 10^5 = ' 02 5

^ i d h 8^ ' 0125 ’ t ^d==i^ 2= o i ; and 80 on-

(ii) Denominators containing only 3 , 7 , 1 1 or higher prime
numbers as factors (and not even a single 2 or 5 ) give us recurring
(or circulating) decimals which we shall deal with in detail in
this chapter and in some other later chapters too.
£ = • 3 ; * = *142857; 1 = 1 ; * = 0 9 ;
TiF==, •076923 ; XV = *05882352/94117647 ;

X1V= 052631578/947368421 ; and so on.

(iii) A denominator with factors partly of the former type
(i.e. 2 and 5) and partly of the latter type (i.e. 3, 7, 9 etc.,)
gives us a mixed (i.e. partly recurring and partly non-recurring)
 (198 )

decimal, (each 2, 5 or 10 contributing one non-recurring digit

to the decimal). *

^ = ^ 9 = 05' ’ ’ - 2 ^ r - ° 45;

*— = 0416; and so on.

” 2s X 3
N . B . (i) Each 3 or 9 contributes only one recurring digit; 1 1
gives 2 of them ; 7 gives 6 ; and other numbers make
their own individual contribution (details of which
will be explained later).
(ii) In every non-recurring decimal with the standard

l
ya
numerator (i.e. 1 ), it will be observed that the last
digit of the denominator and the last digit of the
equivalent decimal, multiplied together, will always
ar
yield a product ending in zero; and
(iii) In every recurring decimal x with the standard
numerator (i.e. 1 ), it will be similarly observed that
m

9 will invariably be the last digit of the product of

the last digit of the denominator and the last digit

ra

of its Recurring Decimal Equivalent (nay, the

product is actually a continuous series of N IN ES)!
Thus, i = * 5 ; * = * 2 ; * = - 1 ;| = * 2 5 ; J = *1 2 5 ;
*0025 ) jy — *04 j *008 j etc.

And i= 3; *142857 ; £ = * i ; xxx= 09 ;

^ 5 =*676923 ; etc., etc.
And this enables us to determine beforehand, the last digit of
the recurring decimal equivalent of a given vulgar fraction.
Thus in its decimal shape must necessarily end in 7 ; x? in 1 ;
j x in 9 ; in 3 ; and so on. The immense practical utility of
this rule in the conversion of vulgar fractions into their decimal
shape has already been indicated in the first chapter and will
be expatiated on, further ahead in this chapter and in subse­
quent chapters.
 ( 1W )
Let us first take the case of | and its conversion 7)1 *0 (. 142857
from the vulgar fraction to the decimal shape. ^
We note here : 30
(i) that the successive remainders are
3, 2 , 6 , 4 , 5 and 1 and that, inasmuch as 1 is the 2 0

original figure with which we started, the same 14

remainders are bound to repeat themselves in go
the same sequence (endlessly). And this is 56
where we stop the division-process and put the
usual recurring marks (the dots on the first 3 5

and the last digits) in order to show that the ~

decimal has begun its characteristic (recurring) 4 9

character.

l -y
ya
At this point, we may note that inasmuch as the first
dividend 10 (when divided by 7) gives us the first remainder 3,
ar
and, with a zero affixed to it, this 3 will (as 30) become our
second dividend and inasmuch as this process will be continuing
indefinitely (until a remainder repeats itself and warns us that
m

the recurring decimal’s recurring character has begun to manifest

itself, it stands to reason that there should be a uniform ratio
in actual action. In other words, because the first Dividend
ra

10 gives us the first remainder 3 and the second dividend 30,

therefore (Aanurupyena i.e. according to the ratio in question
or by simple rule of three), this second dividend 3 should
give us the second remainder 9 ! In fact, it is a “ Geometrical
Progression” that we are dealing with !

And when we begin testing the successive remainders from

this standpoint, we note that the said inference (about the
Geometrical Progression with the common ratio 1 : 3) is correct
For, although, when we look for 3 X 3 = 9 as the second remainder,
we actually find 2 there instead, yet as 9 is greater than 7 (the
divisor), it is but proper that, by further division of 9 by 7,
we get 2 as the remainder. And then we observe that this
second remainder (2 ) yields us the third remainder 6 , and
thereby keeps up the Geometrical Progression (with the same
 ( 200 )
ratio I : 3). In the same way, this 6 gives us 18 which (being
greater than the divisor and being divided by it) gives us 4 as
the fourth remainder. And 4 gives us 12 which (after division
by 7) gives us 5 as the fifth remainder ! And, by the same
ratio, this 5 gives us 15 which (when divided by 7) gives us 1
as the sixth Remainder. And as this was the dividend which
we began with, we stop the division-process here !
The fun of the Geometrical Progression is no doubt
there ; but it is not for the mere fun 7 )1 .0(G.P. 1, 3, 2, 6, 4, 5
of it, but also for the practical utility 7
of it, that we have called the
student’s attention to it. For, in the

l
actual result, it means that, once we know the ratio between
ya
the first dividend and the first remainder (I : 3 in the present
case), we can— without actual further division— automatically
put down all the remainders (by maintaining the 1 : 3 Geo­
ar
metrical Progression). For example, in the present case,
since the ratio is uniformly 1 : 3 , therefore the second remainder
is 9 (which after deducting the divisor), we set down as 2 ;
m

and so on (until we reach 1). Thus our chart reads as follows :

1, 3, 2, 6, 4, 5.
ra

Yes; but what do we gain by knowing the remainders

beforehand (without actual division) ? The answer is that,
as soon as we get the first remainder, our whole work is practi­
cally over. For, since each remainder (with a zero affixed)
automatically becomes the next dividend, we can mentally do
this affixing at sight, mentally work out the division at each
step and put down the quotient automatically (without worrying
about the remainder) ! For, the remainder is already there in
front of u s!
Thus the remainders 1, 3, 2, 6, 4 and 5 give us (Dividend digits)
the successive dividends 10, 30, 20, 60, 40 and 1, 3, 2, 6, 4, 5
50 ; and, dividing these mentally, by 7, we can "T 4 2 8 5 7
go forward or backward and obtain all the (Quotient-digits)
quotient-digits 1, 4, 2, 8, 5, and 7. And, as it
is a pure circulating decimal, out* answer is 142857 !
 ( 201 )

There is, however, a still more wonderful Vedic method by

whieh, without doing even this little division-work, we can put
down the quotient—digits automatically (forward or backward,
from any point whatsoever) ! The relevant Sutra hereon
says : (Semnyankena Caramena and means: The
Remainders by the last digit):
As explained in another context (in the very first chapter
of this volume), the word by indicates that the operation is not
one of addition or of subtraction but of division and of
multiplication !

The division-process (whereby we affix a zero to 1, 3,2 etc.,

divide the product by 7 and set down the quotient) has been
shown just above.
l
We now show the reverse process of multi­
ya
plication, which is easier still.

In so doing, we put down not the dividend—nucleus

ar

digits but the remainders themselves in order : 3, 2, 6, 4, 5,1.

And, as we know from a previous paragraph that 7 is the

m

last digit, we multiply the above-given remainders by 7 and put

the last (i.e. the right-hand-most digit) down under each of the
ra

remainders (totally ignoring the other digit or digits, if any,

of the product) ! And lo ! the answer is there in front of us
again, (really looking more like magic than like mathematics)!
Thus, (Remainders)
3, 2, 6, 4, 5, 1
1 4 2 8 5 7
(Quotient-digits)
3 multiplied by 7 gives us 21 ;
and we put down only 1 ;
2 X 7 gives us 14 ; and we put down only 4;
6 X 7 gives us 42 ; and we put down only 2;
4 X 7 gives us 28 ; and we put down only 8;
5 X 7 gives us 35 ; and we put down only 5 ; and
1 X 7 gives us 7 ; and we put down 7.
And the answer is *142857
21
 At this point, we may remind the student of ft very
important point which we have already ex- 7)1 ' 0 (• 142
plained in chapter I (regarding the conversion J M 857
o f T\ , * and to their recurring decimal 3 0

shape). This is in connection with the facts 28

that the two halves of these decimals together 2 0

total a series o f NINES ; that, once half the 1 4

answer is known, the other half can be had ~~

by putting down the complements (from ^
nine) o f the digits already obtained; and —
that, as the ending of the first half of the result
synchronises with our reaching of the ___
difference between the numerator and the 50

l
denominator as the remainder, we know when ^
ya
exactly we should stop the division (or multi- i
plication, as the case may be) and begin the
mechanical subtraction from 9 of the digits already found!
ar
The student can easily realise how, inasmuch as this
rule is applicable to every case (wherein D “ N comes
up as a Remainder), it therefore means an automatic reduction
m

of even the little labour involved, by exactly one-half!

Going back to the original topic (re: the conversion of
ra

vulgar fractions into their equivalent decimal shape and how

the Geometrical Progressional ratio can give us beforehand—
without actual division—all the remainders that will come up
in actual division), we now take up fa as another illustrative
example and observe how the process works out therein:
(1) W t s Here the successive Dividends-— 13)1 ’ 0 0 (*070
hucleus—digits are 1 , 1 0 , 9 , 1 2 , 3 and 923
4. Affixing a zero to each of them 9 0

and dividing the dividends by 13, —

we get 0, 7, 6 , 9, 2 and 3 as the first j^
digits of the quotient in the answer. §q
26
 ( 203 )
(ii) Or, secondly, re-arranging 13)1 •Q0(Q-I). 1,10,9,12,3,4
the remainders so as to 0 7 6 9 2 3
start from the first actual remainder, we have :
10, 9, 12, 3, 4 and 1. And multiplying these by
3<the last digit o f the ,2 4 ,
answer m the present case), — — 6~9_ 2~- 3
we put down merely the
right—hand—most digit of each product; and these
are the successive quotient—digits! Here too, as
usual, we go forward or backward (or in any sequence
which we may choose). And the answer is '076923
(iii) And here too we observe, in operation, the rule about
complements from NINE ! And it commences 076

l
from the point at which we obtain 12 (the differ- 923
ya
ence between the Numerator and the deno- 999
minator) as the Remainder.
ar
(iv) In the above charts, we may avoid big numbers by
using a minus where a big number is threatened. Thus,
instead of taking 3 (as in the n t> , 8 q -a t
c -v , ! n w.r. 1 , f * etc.
case 0 1 7), we may take —3 as
m

the common geometrical ratio and will find the

Geometrical Progression intact; and naturally the
ra

product of each 3 Q ar -s e -• - 1 a
. , ,. ~“ T T 2 > b > 1
remamder-digit by the 0 7 6 9 2 3
last digit remains in­
tact too and gives us the same answer: *076923!
We pass now on to still another and easier method which
comes under the EkddJdka Sutra which we have expounded
and explained at sufficient length already (in the first chapter)
and which therefore we need only summarise and supplement
here but need not elaborate again.
The Ekddhika Sutra (which means ‘by the preceding one
increased by one’ ) has already been shown at work in a number
of ways and in a number of directions and on a number of
occasions and will similarly come into operation still further,
in many more ways and in many more contexts.
 ( 204 )

Numbers ending ■in Nine

(i) If and when the last digit of the denominator is 9, we
know beforehand that the equivalent recurring decimal ends in 1.
(ii) In the case of i V the last but one digit is I; we increase
it by 1 and make it 2. In we work with 2 + 1 = 3 . In and
in we operate with 4 and 5 respectively and so on.
(iii) In the multiplication-process (by Ekadhika Purva),
in all these cases, we put 1 down as the last digit (i.e. in the
right-hand-most place); and we go on multiplying that last
digit (1) from the right towards the left by 2, 3, 4 and 5 respec­
tively ; and when thete is more than one digit in th&t product,
we set the last of those digits down there and carry the rest of it

al
over to the next immediately preceding digit towards the left.
(iv) When we get D <*N as the product, we know we have
y
done half the w ork; we stop the multiplication there; and we
mechanically put down the remaining half of the answer (by
ar
merely taking down the complements from NINE).
(v) The division-process (by Ekadhika Sutra) follows the
same rules (vide Supra). ' ~
m

(1) We may first consider the fraction as our first illus­

tration of the method described :
ra

(i) Putting 1 as* the last digit and continually multiplying

by 2 towards the left, we get the last four digits (towards the
left) without the least difficulty.
............................................... . 8 4 2 1
9 4 7 3 6
(ii) 8 x 2 = 1 6 . Therefore put 6 down immediately to the
left of 8 (with 1 to carry over). 6 x 2 + th e 1 carried over—13.
Put the 3 to the left of the 6 (with 1 to carry over). 3 X 2+1 = 7
Set it down before the 3 (with nothing to carry over). 7 X 2 =
14. Therefore put the 4 before the 7 (with 1 to carry over)
4 x 2 + th e 1 carried over=9.
(iii) We have thus got 9 digits by continual multiplication
from the right towards the left. And now 9 x 2 = 1 8 (which is
D * N). This means that half the work is over and that the
earlier 9 digits are obtainable by putting down the complements
 ( 206 )

(from NINE) of the digits already determined. So, we have

TV = 0 0 5 2 6 3 1 5 7 8/9 4 7 3 6 8 4 2 i
(2) Let us now examine the case of *V-
Begin with 1 (as usual) at the extreme right end and go
on multiplying by 3 each time, “ carrying over” the surplus
digit or digits (if any) to the left (i.e. to be added to the next
product to be determined. Thus, when we have obtained 14
digits i.e.
.......................... 9 6 5 5 1 7 2 4 1 3 7 9 3 1,
we find that we have reached 28 ; we know we have done half
the w ork; and we get the first 14 digits by simply subtracting
each of the above digits from NINE.
•0 3 4 4 8 2 7 5 8 6 2 0 6 8/

(3) Next let us take ^

y al
*l* = 0 -6 3 4 4 8 2 7 5 8 6 2 0 6 8/96 5 5 1 7 2 4 1 3 7 9 3 i

Take 1 again at the extreme right end and continually

ar
multiply by 4 from the right to the left. Thus, we have :
*y=-02564i.
Note in this case that V 39 is a multiple of 3 and 13 and
m

not a prime number (like 19 and 29) and v 3 and 13 give only
1 and 6 recurring decimals, there is a difference in its behaviour
i.e. that the two halves are not complementary with regard to
ra

9 but only in relation to 6 ! In fact, D ^ N (i.e. 38) does not come

up at all as an interim product (as 18 and 28 did). And so,
the question of complements from 9 does not arise at a ll; and
the decimal equivalent has only 6 figures (and not 38) !
The reason for this is very simple. As as fa has
only 6 recurring decimals in its decimal equivalent and because,
for reasons to be explained a little later, this decimal equivalent
of T* 3 is exactly divisible by 9, much more therefore is it divisible
by 3. And, consequently, when we divide it by 3 and exhaust
the six digits, we find that there is no remainder left. In other
words, fa has only 6 digits in its recurring decimal shape.
These have been obtained by the self-same Ekadhika pro­
cess as served our purpose in the case of fa and fa
 ( 206 )
We next take up and examine the case of •which, besides
following the rules hereinabove explained, has the additional
merit of giving us the clue to a still easier process for the con­
version of vulgar fractions into their recurring decimal shape:

( !) _ * _ _ 1 _ * *142867
* * 7X 7 7

(i) If we go on dividing 1 by 49 or *142857 by 7

(until the decimal begins to recur), we shall doubtless
get our answer. But this will mean 42 steps of labo­
rious working and is therefore undesirable.
(ii) We therefore adopt either of the Ekddhika methods
and go on multiplying from right to left by 5 or

l
ya
dividing from left to right by 5.
(iii) On completing 21 digits, we find 48 (i.e. D N) coming
up and standing up before u s ; and we mechanically
ar
put down the other 21 digits as usual (by the subtrac­
tion, from 9, of the digits already obtained). And
the answer i s :
m
ra

(iv) And this gives us the clue just above referred to about
a still easier method (than even the Ekddhika ones) for the con­
version of vulgar fractions into recurring decimals. And it is
as follows:
By actual division (of 1 by 49), we 49)1 *00 ( *20408
observe that the successive remainders 98
are in Geometrical Progression (with the 200
common ratio 1 : 2) that the dividends are 196
similarly related and that each set of two 400
digits in the quotient is also so related to
its predecessor. In other words, this connotes and implies that,
after putting down 02, we can automatically put down 04,
08* 16 and 32 and so on.
 ( 907 )
But when we reach 64, we find that 2 X 6 4 »1 2 8 i.e. has
3 digits. All that we have to do then is to add the 1 of the
128 over to the 64 already there, turn it into 65 and then put
down not 28 but the remaining part of double the corrected
figure 65 (i.e. 30) and carry the process carefully on to the very
end (i.e. until the decimal starts to recur). We therefore have :
0* 0 2 0 4 0 8 1 6 3 2 6 5 3 0 6JL 2 2 4 4 8 l
9 1 9 5 9 1 8 3 6 7 3^4 6 9 3 8J7 7j5 5 i 1
This new method does not apply to ^11 cases but only to
some special cases where the Denominator of the given vulgar
fraction (or an integral multiple thereof) is very near a power
of ten and thus lends itself to this kind of treatment. In such
cases, however, it is the best procedure of all.

l
N ote:— The rule of complements (from 9) is actually at work
ya
in this case too ; but, inasmuch as (for reasons to be
explained hereafter), the actual total number of digits
is 42, the first half of it ends with the 21st digit and as
ar

we have been taking up a group of two digits at each

step, we naturally by-pass the 21st digit (which is
concealed, so to speak, in the middle of the 11th
m

group). But, even then, the double-digit process is

so very simple that continuation thereof can present
ra

no difficulty.
Other Endings
So far, we have considered only vulgar fractions whose
denominators end in 9. Let us now go on to and study the
cases of fa, fa , fa and other such fractions (whose denomina­
tors end not in 9 but in 1, 3 or 7).
(i) Here too, we first make up our minds, at sight, as
regards the last digit of the decimal equivalent.
Thus, Denominators ending in 7, 3 and 1 must neces­
sarily yield decimals ending in 7, 3 and 9 (so that the
product of the last digit of the denominator and the
last digit o f the decimal equivalent may end in 9.)
Let us start with the case of
 ( 208 )

(ii) Put down \ in the shape

(iii) Take 5 (one more than 4) as the Ekadhika Purva

for the required multiplication ox division (as the
case may be).

(iv) Thus start with 7 at the right end 85 7

23

(v) Multiply it by 5 and set down 35 as shown in the

marginal chart.

(vi) Multiply 5 by 5, add the 3 to the product and

set 28 down in the same way.
Now, 5 X 8 + 2 = 4 2 . But that is D N 142 57
Therefore put 142 down as the first

l
half (according to the complements
ya
rule) ^=-142/857
Or 1 = '
ar
The Ekddhika being 5, divide 7 by 5 1 4 2 /8 5 7
and continue the division as usual 2 1 4 /
(with the same rule of procedure).
After getting the three quotient-digits 1, 4 and 2
m

you find 42 as the remainder before you. So tackle

the last 3 digits (according to the complements rule)
ra

and s a y :

(2) Let us now take the case of Tfr —

(i) The last digit is 3.*.the last digit *0 7 6 / 9 2 3
(in the answer) will be 3. •07 6 / 9 2 3
2 3
(ii) The Ekddhika (multiplier or divisor) is .*.4.

(iii) ts = sV After 3 digits (whether by multipliction or

by division), 36 (Dio N) comes up. So, the other
half is mechanically set down. And we say :

T\ = ‘076/923
 ( *# )

(3) Next, let us take

(i) The last digit is 1. The last digit 0/ 9
(of the answer) will be 9. 9j
(ii) The Ekadhika (in both ways) is 10.
(iii) Immediately after the very first digit, we get 90
(which is 9 0 M9) before us. So, the complements*
rule operates.
(iv) And, in either case, we get Tix= ,0i/9
(4) * * = (giving 7 as Ekadhika) and 3 as the last digi£ of the
answer.
(By both methods, Multiplication and Division).
1 = 0 *0 4 3 4 7 8 2 0 0 8 0 )

l
” 9565 2 173913 >
ya
(5) T1T= Tj v (giving 12 as Ekadhika and 7 as the last digit)
By both the methods (multiplication and division),
ar
we have:
^T= Tf * —'0 5 8 8 2 3 5 2 / 9 4 1 1 7 0 4 7
The Code Language at Work.
m

Not only do the Vedic Sutras tell us how to do all this

by easy and rapid processes of mental arithmetic; but they
ra

have also tabulated the results in the shape of special sub-Sutras

(containing merely illustrative specimens with a master-key
for “ unlocking other portals” too). The abstruser details
(and the master-key) are not given here ; but a few sample-spe-
cimens are given of the way in which the code and the Eka-
nyuna SHtra (explained in Chapter 2) can be utilised for the
purpose of postulating mental one-line answers to the questions
in question. The three samples read as follows:
(1) ^TT^; (Kevalaih Saptakarp, Gunydt)
(2) : (Kalau Ksudrasasaih): and
(3) *1% (Kamse Ksamaddha-Jchalairnialaih)
In the first of these, Saptaka means ‘seven’ ; and Kevalaili
represents 143 ; and we are fold that, in the case of seven, our
multiplicand should be 143 !
27
 ( 210 )
In the second, Kalau means 13 and Ksudmsasaih repre­
sents 077 ; and we are told that the multiplicand should be
077 ! and,
In the third, Kamse means 17 ; and Ksdma-ddha-khalair-
malaih means 05882353 ; and we are told that the multiplicand
should be this number of 8 digits !
Now, if we advert to the “ Ekanyuna,” corollary of the
Nikhilam chapter (on multiplication), we shall be able to
remind oursleves of the operation in question and the result
to be achieved thereby. Let us do the multiplications accord­
ingly (as directed) and see what happens.
(1) In the case of 7 (as denominator), 143X999=142/857 ;
and lo ! these are the six recurring decimal digits in the answer !

l
(2) In the case of 13, 077 X 999=076/923 ; and these are the
ya
six digits in the recurring decimal equivalent of TS • and
(3) In the case of 17, 05882353 X 99999999=05882352/
94117647 ; and these are the 16'recurring digits in the recur­
ar
ring decimal equivalent of !
In all the 3 cases we observe the Rule of Complements
(from 9) at work. And the sub-Sutra merely gives us the
m

necessary clue to the first half of the decimal and also a simple
device (Ekanyunena) for arriving at the whole answer ! And
ra

all this is achieved with the help of the easy alphabet-code !

These results may therefore be formulated as follows:
i _143x999__142857_ . \4.9^ j .
T 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

t q72 x 9 9 9 = 076923==.Q769 2 3 ; and

TS 999999 999999
! _ 0 5 8 8 2 3 5 3 X 99999999
lT 9999999999999999

= -6 5 8 8 2 3 5 2 /9 4 1 1 7 6 4 7 * !
And, by CROSS-multiplication, we get from the above,
the following results:
(1 ) 7 X 1 4 2 8 5 7 =999999;
(2 ) 1 3 X 0 7 6 9 2 3 = 9 9 9 9 9 9 ; an d
(3 ) 1 7 X 0 5 8 8 2 3 5 2 /9 4 1 1 7 6 4 7
= 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 (1 6 d ig its in a l l ) !
 ( 211 )

And, just in passing, we may note that this is the reason

why, in the case of all these vulgar fractions, the last digit of
the denominator (9, 3, 7 or 1, as the case may be) gives, 1,3,7
or 9 before-hand as the last digit of the equivalent recurring
decimal fraction !

The Remainder-Quotient Complements-Cyeles.

We have already - again and again - noted the fact that,
in the various typical cases observed and analysed by us, the
two halves of the quotients (added together) give us a series
of NINES. We shall now proceed a little bit further and try to
see if there be any such (or similar) rule governing the remainders.
For the purpose of the necessary experimentation and investi­
gation, let us take up a more detailed consideration of the
l
ya
remainders obtained in each case by successive divisions of
the numerator by the denominator; and let us start with
We know the successive Remainders are 3, 2 , 6 , 4, 5 and
ar

1 . We know already that, on reaching 6 (i.e. D ^ N ) as the

remainder, half the work has been completed and that the
complementary half is about to begin. Putting the
m

above 6 figures, therefore, into two rows of three ^ $ j

figures each, we have :
ra

and we observe that each vertical column (of one digit from the
upper row and of one from the lower one) gives 4 5 1

us the same total (i.e. 7 )! ^— j

N.B. :—As our divisor is 7, it is but natural that no remainder

higher than 6 is permissible i.e. that the only possible
remainders are 1 , 2 , 3, 4, 5 and 6 . (And these are the
ones we actually find).

Let us now take up the case of and note what happens.

The successive remainders are 1 0 , 9, 1 2 , 3, 4 and 1 (the highest
of which is 1 2 ). And when they are placed 109 1 2 / 3 4 1
in two rows, we find here too, that the last
10 9 12
three remainders are complements— from 3 4 ^
13—‘of the first three remainders. 13 13 \ 13
 ( 212 )

In the case of fa the successive remainders are i

10 15 14 4 6 9 5 16/7 2 3 13 11 8 12 1
7 2 3 13 11 8 12 1
17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17

The last 8 remainders are thus complements—from 17—of

the first eight ones !

\n the case of 19, the Remainders a re:

10 15 12 6 3 11 15 17 18
9 4 7 13 16 8 4 2 1
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19

Here again the first nine remainders, when added

successively to the next nine, give 19 each time.

l
ya
Thus, it is clear that, whereas the quotient-halves are
uniformly complements from nine, the remainder-halves are
complements from the individual divisor in each case. And
ar
this further reduces our labour in making out a list of the Re­
mainders.

Multiples of the Basic Fractions.

m

Thus far, we have dealt with vulgar fractions whose

numerator is unity. But what about fractions which have some
ra

other Numerator ? And the answer is : “ There are several

simple and easy methods by which, with a tabulated list before
us of the results obtained by one or more of the processes above
expounded, or even independently, we can readily put down
the Recurring Decimal equivalents of the vulgar fractions of the
type just under discussion.

Let us, as usual, start with \ and frame a chart as follows *

1
T —
— 142857
2 ___ 285714
r
3_. 42857i
T—
* = 571428
5 __
T— 714285*; and
T = 857142
 ( 21$ )
In this chart, we observe that, in all the *‘proper” fractions
having 7 as their Denominator,
(i) The same six digits are found as in the case of ^ ;
(ii) they come up in the same sequence and in the same
direction as in the case of \ ;
(iii) they, however, start from a different starting-point
but travel in “ Cyclic” order (in what is well-known
as the “ Clock-wise” order).
(iv) and with the aid of these rules, one can very easily
obtain the recurring decimal equivalent of a vulgar
fraction whose numerator is higher than 1.
In fact, a person who is actually looking at a statement

l
(on a board, a piece of paper, a slate etc.,) to the effect that
ya
^=.142857, has several easy alternative processes to choose
from, for determining the decimal equivalents of all the other
five possible fractions having the same denominator (i.e. 7).
ar
They are as follows:

The First Method.

m

1. The verious digits can be numbered and marked

in ascending order of magnitude, thus :
ra

(i) Unity being the least of (1) (3) (2) (6) (4) (5)
them, the cycle for \ starts 1 4 2 8 5 7
with one as its starting
point, travels in clock-wise cyclic order and reads:
i 42857 ;
(ii) 2 being the second, f starts with 2 and gives us the
answer *285714;
(iii) There being no 3 at all, the third digit in ascending
order is 4. So f begins from 4 and reads :
*42857i ;
(iv) The next digit (i.e. the 4th) in ascending order
actually being 5, 4/7 begins with 5 and gives :
•571428;
 ( m )
(v) The fifth digit actually being 7, 5/7 commences with 7
and reads :
*571428; and
(vi) The 6th and last digit being 8, the sixth and last
fraction (i.e. f) starts with 8 and says:
*857142
ThiS* is the first method.
Yes, but what about those cases in which the number of
decimal places is more than 10 and thus, in the tabulated answer
before us, some digits are found more than once ?
Yes, it is perfectly true that, just as some digits are found
absent [as in the case of \ (just seen)], there are other cases

l
where the same digits are found more than once. In fact, in
ya
every case wherein the number of decimal places is more than
10, this is bound to happen ; and provision too there must be
against it. In fact, the remedy is very simple i.e. that, even
ar
where digits occur more than once, there still are gradations;
and, if these are taken into account, the cyclic order and the
ascending order of magnitude will still operate and serve their
m

purpose.
For example, in the case of ^T, we have .05882.......at the
ra

very commencement; and there are two eights before us. Yes,
but 88 is greater than 82; and therefore we should take 82 first
and 88 afterwards and do our numbering accordingly :
T*T= *6 5 8 8 2 3 5 2 9 4 1 1 7 6 4 7
(1) (10) (15) (14) (4) (6) (9) (5) (16) (7) (2) (3) (13) (11) (8) (12)
Thus, Xx7 starts with zero; X2T with 11; TST ; with 17 ; with 23 ;
t57 with 29; X6T with 3 ; TT7 with 41; X8T with 47; T®7 with 52;
with 58 ; ^ with 6; with 70; with 76; with 82 ; with
8 8 ; and TT with 9 . The arranging in ascendmg order of magni­
tude has, of course, to be done carefully and correctly. But it
must be admitted that, although the procedure of counting and
numbering is quite reasonable and scientifically correct, yet
it is rather cumbrous, clumsy and tiring. Hence the need for
other methods.
 ( 2U> )
Yes ; but what again about the cases wherein the number
of digits in the decimal equivalent is much less than the deno­
minator of the vulgar fraction in question and has thus no
scope for meeting all the possible demands ?
Yes, fa is such a case. The number of possible multiples
is 12; and the number of digits in the decimal equivalent is
only 6. (for -076/923). What is the remedy?
The remedial provision is that a multiple or two will do the
trick quite satisfactorily and neatly.
Now, *076923*
/. (By simple multiplication by 2),
ys = *i 53846

And now, there are twelve digits in all; and these can

l
ya
meet the needs of all the possible multiples.
Thus— TV = *076923 ; and *153846
- t s = ’ 230769 ; and x4* = *307692
ar

•384615 ; and x6* = *461538

•538461 ; and x8* = * 615384
•692307 ; and ^ = *7 6 9 2 3 0
m

= •846153 ; and *923076

ra

The procedure is there and is quite correct. But, after all,

on# must confess that, even with this device, this counting
and numbering procedure is still a cumbrous, clumsy and
tiring process. Hence, let us repeat, the need for other methods.

The Second Method

The second method is one wherein we avoid even this num­
bering and marking etc., and (in accordance with the Adyam
Adyena rule), multiply the opening digit or digits of the basic
decimal fraction (*142857) and determine, therefrom the starting
point for the multiple in question. Thus, *142857
\ starts with *14.......... \ f should start with *28 etc., and
(in clockwise cyclic order) give *285714 ;

f ought to start with *42 etc., and give *428571 ;

 ( sie )

£ must start with *56; but there is no *56 but only *57
before u s ; and so (making allowance for a possible nay, the
actual— carrying over of a surplus digit from the right leftward),
we start with 57 and say: $=*571428;
Similarly f should start with *70 ; but (for the same reason
as in the immediately preceding case), it actually starts with
•71 and gi^es us : *714285; and $ should start with *84,
actually starts with *85 and yields the answer : 857142!
This is the Second method.

The Third Method

The third process is very similar; but it bases itself not
on Adyam Adyena but on Antyam Antyena. In other words,
y
•V \ ends with 7,
al
it deals not with the opening digit but with the closing one.
Thus,
*i 42857
ar
.% $ must end with 4 It is *285714
/ . $ should end with 1 It is -428571
$ ought to end with 8 It is *571428
£ should end with 5 It is *714285
m

and $ must end with 2 ,\ It is *857142

This is the third method and the easiest and therefore
ra

the best of the lot.

Independent method
The above described methods are all for the utilisation
of our knowledge of the decimal shape of a fraction whose nume­
rator is unity, for deriving the corresponding decimal form
of any multiple of that fraction. This is all right, so far as
it goes. But what about a person who ha$ not got such a ready-
to-hand table to refer to ? In such a case, should one newly
prepare the basic chart and then manipulate it—cyclically—
(in one of the ways just explained), for getting the required
result ?
That would, of course, be absurd. For use by such
persons, we have too, a totally independent method, by which,
 < 217 )

■without resorting to any such previously prepared (or newly

prepared) table, one can readily deal with the particular fraction
on hand! And the whole modus operandi is exactly the same
as has been already explained in respect of the basic fraction
and without the slightest difference or deviation in any particular
whatsoever therefrom.
For example, suppose you have to decimalise f. Your last
digit will be 1. and as f= f& , your Ekadhika Purva will be
5. Now, go on dividing by 5, in the usual manner; and you get
the chart, as explained in the margin: f = H = * 4 2 8/571
1 4 2/
After you get the lirst three digits 4, 2 and 8, you find that
your dividend is 2 8 ; but this is D « N (i.e. 49—21). So you

l
may stop here and put the last three quotient-digits down as
ya
5, 7 and 1 (the complements, from nine, of the digits already
found).
ar
Or you may continue the division till you get 21 as the
dividend; and as this was your starting-point, you may put
the 6 digits down as a “Recurring11’ decimal.
m

Thus | = *428571
Try this with r%, tt> t v an(i so on> with any number o f
ra

cases. And you will always find the same thing happening right
through all o f them. Thus, for those who do not have a tabu­
lated schedule before them, this absolutely independent method
is also there: and you can make full use of it.
N ote: —1, In this independent method, it should also be noted
that if we have to decimalise f , f , f , f , etc., we
have merely to divide 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 etc., by 7
and put down that remainder as the first remainder
in each particular case and that the work can be
done automatically thereafter.
2. or, we may pre-decide the last digit in each case by
taking the last digits of 7, (1) 4, (2) 1, (2) 8, 3(5),
(4) 2 as the last digits of the decimal equivalent of
b b f and f !
28
 ( 218 )

Recapitulation (and Supplementation)

Over and above the ones expounded and explained herein­
above, there are several other very instructive and interesting
principles, features and characteristics characterising this
question of the conversion of vulgar fractions into decimal
ones (in respect of the remainders, the quotients etc.). For
the benefit of the# students, we propose now to recapitulate,
summarise, supplement and conclude this portion of the subject:

(1) As regards the remainders, we have noted that, as

soon as D ^ N comes up before us as a remainder, the remaining
remainders are all complements—from the divisor (i.e. the
denominator)—of the remainders already obtained ;

l
(2) This automatically means that the quotient—digits
ya
already obtained and the quotient—digits still to be found,
are complements from Nine !
ar

(3) If we take any remainder and multiply it by the

Garamanka (the last digit), the last digit of the product is
actually the quotient at that step. (The formula here is wftr
m

(Sesani Ankena Caramena) which is therefore of

the utmost significance and practical utility in mathematical
ra

computations. For instance,

(1) \ The remainders are 3, 2, 6, 4, 5 and 1. Multiplied by
7 (the Garamanka) these remainders give successively
21, 14, 42, 28, 35 and 7. Ignoring the left-hand side
digits, we simply put down the last dight (Charamanka)
of each product; and lo ! We get ^=*142857 !
(2) fa The remainders are 10, 9,12, 3, 4 and 1. Multiplied
successively by 3 (the last digit), these remainders
give 30, 27, 36, 9, 12 and 3. Ignoring the previous
digits, we write down merely the Caramdnkas the
last digit) of each product; and lo! f a = *079623!
(3) fa The remainders are 10, 15, 14, 4, 6, 9, 5, 16/7, 2,
3, 13, 11, 8, 12 and 1. Multiplied by 7, they give us
successively:
 ( 210 )

70, 105, 98, 28, 42, 63, 35, 112, 49, 14, 21, 91, 77
56,84 and 7. Dropping the surplus (i.e. left-side)
digits and putting down only the Carmankas
(the right-hand most digits), we have
T»T= -05882352/94117647
In fact, the position is so simple and clear that we need
not multiply the whole digit, write down the product and then
drop the surplus digit (or digits). We need only put down the
Charamanka (the right-hand-most digit) at the very outset
(as each step) and be done with i t !
(4) The Geometrical-Progression =■ character of the
Remainders gives us a clue to the internal relationship between
each remainder (and its successor) (or its predecessor)! Thus,

l
ya
as we know one remainder, we practically know all the rest of
them Thus,
In the case of ^ : As we know the first remainder is 3,
ar
we can multiply any remainder by 3, cast out the sevens (if any)
and immediately spot out and announce the next Remainder.
3 X 3 = 9 ; 9—7 = 2 ; ,\ 2 is the second remainder
2 x 3 = 6 . This is the third rdmainder.
m

As 6 is- D w N, we may stop here and (by the rule of com­

plements from the denominator), we may put down 4, 5 and 1 as
ra

the remaining three remainders.

Or, if we overlook the D » N rule or prefer to go on with our
multiplication by 3 (the Geometrical ratio), we g e t :
6 x 3 = 1 8 ; 18—14=4 ; and this is the 4th remainder.
4 X 3 = 1 2 ; 12—7 = 5 ; and this is the 5th remainder.
5 X 3 = 1 5 ; 15—1 4 = 1 ; and this is the 6th (and last)
Remainder.
We have thus obtained from the first remainder, all the
remainders:
3, 2, 6, 4, 5 and 1.
And from these, by multiplication by the Carama'hka (7),
we get all the 6 quotient-digits (as explained above):
•1, 4, 2, 8, 5 and 7
 ( 220 )

This is not all. Instead of using the first remainder

(3) as our Geometrical Ratio, we may take the second one (2),
multiply each preceding group of 2 remainders by 2 and get
32, 64 and 51 (for, by casting out the sevens, 6 x 2 —7 = 5 ; and
4 X 2 —7=1). And multiplying these 6 digits by 7, we again get
the Caramankas 1 4 2 8 5 7 (as before).

Or we may take help from the third remainder (i.e. 6),

multiply the preceding group of 3 remainders and get 3 2 6, 4 5 1
(for, by casting out the sevens, 3 x 6 —14=4 ; 2 x 6 —7 = 5 ; and
6 X 6 —35=1. And, multiplying these (same) 6 digits by 7,
we again obtain the Caramankas 142857 as before.
This procedure is, of course, equally applicable to the
fourth and fifth remainders (i.e. 4 and 5) and can get us the

l
ya
same result as before This is doubtless purely academical and
o f no practical utility. But we are discussing a principle, nay
a universally operating mathematical law and must therefore
ar
demonstrate its actual universality of application.
So, if we take the 4th remainder (i.e. 4) and multiply the
preceding group of four remainders by 4, we again get 3264/51
m

(For, 4 x 3 - 7 = 5 ; 4 x 2 - 7 = l ; 4 x 6 - 2 1 = 3 ; 4 x 4 - 1 4 = 2 ) ;
and the only difference is that the first two digits are found to
ra

have already started repeating themselves!

If we now take the 5th remainder (i.e. 5) and multiply the
preceding group of 5 remainders by 5, we again get 32645/1...
(for 3 X 5 —1 4 = 1 ; 2 X 5 —7 = 3 ; 5 x 6 —2 8 = 2 ; 5 x 4 - 1 4 = 6 ;
5 X 5 -2 1 = 4 ;

And, if we follow the same procedure with the 6th

remainder (i.e. 1) and multiply the group of preceding remainders
by 1, we will, of course, get th^ same preceding remainders over
again!
(5) In the case of 17, the first four remainders are :
10, 15, 14 and 4. As 4 is a manageable multiplier, we may make
use of it as a convenient and suitable remainder for this purpose.
Let us therefore multiply the group of four Remainders (already
 ( 221 )

found) by 4 and cast out the seventeens (wherever necessary).

And then we find:
4 X 1 0 -3 4 = 6 10, 15, 14,4
4 x 1 5 —51=9 10, 15, 14, 4, 6
4 x 1 4 —51=5 10, 15, 14, 4/6, 9, 5, 16/

4 X 4 = 1 6 . But as D </»N =16, we can stop here and set

down all the other remainders by subtracting each of the above
digits from 17 : 7, 2, 3, 13/11, 8, 12 and 1. And, multiplying
each of these 16 remainders (or rather their Caramdnkas i.e.
units digits) by 7, we get:
xv : •05 8 8 2 3 5 2 /9 4 1 1 7 6 4 7

Still another method

l
ya
Besides (1) the corollary-Sutra (2) each remainder X the
last digit method, (3) the Ekadhika process from right to left
and (4) the Ekadhika method from left to right, there is still
ar
another method whereby we can utilise the Geometrical-Progre­
ssion relationship and deduce the same result by a simple and
easy process. And it is this, namely, that as soon as we come
m

across a clear ratio between one remainder (or dividend) and

another, we can take that ratio for granted (as being of universal
ra

application) and work it out all through. For example,

In the case of 19, we have 10 and 5 as the first two
remainders and we note that 5 is just one-half of ten. Keeping
this ratio in view, we can deduce that the next remainder should
be one-half of 5. But, as 5 is not exactly divisible by 2, we add
19 to it, make it 24 and put down its half (i.e. 12) as the next
remainder. The 12 10, 5, 12, 6, 3, 11, 15, 17, 18
gives 6, 6 gives 3, 9, 14, 7, 13, 16, 8, 4, 2, 1
3(+19) gives 11, --------------------------------- -— ------- -------
11(—(-19) gives 15, 1 5 (+ 1 9 ) gives 17 & (1 7 + 1 9 ) gives 18. And
we stop there and put down the remaining half of the remainders
by subtractions from 19. Having thus got the remainders, we
multiply the Caramdnkas by 1 (the last digit of the answer)
and we get the quotient-digits automatically.
 1

( m )

N .B . The ratio in question may be noticed at any stage of the

work and made use of at any point thereof.

In the case of Xx7, we have the remainders 10 and 15 at

the very start. We can make use of this ratio immediately
and throughout, with the proviso that, if and when a fractional
product is threatened, we can take the denominator (or as many
multiples thereof as may be necessary) for making the digit on
hand exactly divisible by the divisor on hand.
I
Thus, in the case of ^7, we have the remainders 10 and
15 to start with (the ratio being 1 to 1J). So, whenever one odd
number crops up, its successor will be fractional. And we
get over this difficulty in the way just explained.

l
ya
And when we get a remainder which is numerically greater
than the divisor, we cast off the divisor and put down the remain­
der. Thus,
ar
10 gives us 15; 15 (+ 17) gives 10,15,14, 4, 6 ,9 , 5,16
us 48 i.e. 14; 14 gives us 21 i.e. 4; 7, 2, 3, 13, 11, 8, 12, 1
4 gives us 6 ; 6 gives us 9 ; ------------------------------------- —
m

9(+17) gives us 39 i.e. 5; (5+17) gives us 33 i.e. 16. And

there we can stop.
ra

Number of Decimal Places

Students generally feel puzzled and non-plussed as to

how to know beforehand the number of decimal places which, on
division, the decimal equivalent of a given vulgar fraction
will actually consist of. In answer hereto, we must point out
that, having—in the immediately preceding sub-section on this
subject—made a detailed, analytical study of the successive
remainders, we have, in every case before us, practically a
tabulated statement from which (without actual division to the
very end) we can postulate beforehand all the forthcoming
remainders. And the tabulated statement has the further
merit that it can be prepared, at any time, at a moment’s
notice I
 ( 223 )

All this means, in effect, that,

(i) As soon as 1 (or other starting point) is reached (in
our mental analysis), we will have completed the whole
work of'decimalisation and therefore know the actual
number of decimal places coming ahead. The cases
b tV> etc-> have a11 Proved this-
(ii) As soon as we reach the difference between the
numerator and denominator, we know we have done
half the work and that the other half is yet to come.
The cases of \ etc., (which we have dealt with in
extenso) have proved this too.
(iii) As soon as we reach a fairly small and manageable
remainder (in our mental calculation), we know how
many more steps we should expect.

l
Let us again take the case of \ by way of illustration.
ya
The first remainder is 3 ; and used as a successive multiplier
(with the provision for the casting out of the sevens), that
ar
first remainder—multiplier brings us on to 1.
When we have done two steps and got 1 and 4 as the
first two quotient-digits, we find 2 is the remainder. Multi­
plying the first group of two digits (14) by 2, we get 28 as the
m

second-group (with the remainder also doubled i.e. 2 x 2 = 4 ).

14/28/.
ra

Multiplying 28 by 2, we get 28 x 2 = 5 6 as the third group

and 4 x 2 = 8 as the remainder. And then, by casting out
the sevens, we obtain 57 as the quotient-group and 1 as the
remainder ! And as this was our starting-point, we stop further
computations and decide that when decimalised, has 6
decimal places in the answer.
Going back to the case of j’y, the student will remember
that, after 4 steps, we got.0588 as the quotient-digits and 4 as
the remainder. Multiplying the former by the latter, we
obtained 2352 as the second quotient-group and 4 x 4 = 1 6 ;
as the remainder ; and there we stopped, (because we had the
first 8 digits on hand and knew the other 8 digits). Thus ^T
gave us 16 digits.
 ( 224 )

(As a Geometrical series is of the standard form 1, r, r1 and

so on, we are able to utilise 2 and 2a (in the case of \)f 4 and 4*
(in the case of fa) and so on for helping us to pre-determinethe
number of decimal places in the answer. This is the Algebraical
principle utilised herein.
N o t e 1. We need hardly point out that the Ekddhika method
has the supreme and superlative merit of lightening
our division (and multiplication) work. For ins­
tance, in the case of fa , fa etc., we have to do our
* division-work, at stage after stage, by successive
division, not by 19 or 29 etc., (the original deno­
minator) but by 2 or 3 etc. (the Ekadkika-purva).
And this is the case with regard to every case i.e.
that we perform all our operation^ —in this system—
al
with much smaller divisors, multipliers etc., and
this rule is invariable. What a tremendous saving
y
in effort, labour, time and co s t!
ar
2. We have purposely treated this subject at great
length and in elaborate detail, because it is very
essential that the whole matter should be clearly
understood, thoroughly assimilated and closely
m

followed so that, even without the help of a teacher,

the student may be enabled to work out these
ra

methods independently in other similar cases and

to know—with absolute certainty—that ANY and
EVERY vulgar fraction can be* readily tackled
and converted into the corresponding tecurring
decimal {whatever may be the complexity thereof
and the number of decimal places therein). In
fact, in as much as these simple and easy processes
are available—and suitable-for ALL possible
denominators and for all possible numerators,
the decimal (arid especially the recurring decimal)
should no longer be a bugbear to the student.
On the contrary, they should be the most welcome
of all welcome friends !
 ( 225 )

Some Characteristic features (General and Special)

(1) In the cases of fractions with prime numbers (like 19,
29, 59 etc.,) as denominators, the maximum number of decimal
places is one less than the denominator ! This is self-evident
and requires no elaboration.
(2) Usually, it, or a sub-multiple thereof, is the actual
number.
(3) Generally, the rule of complements (from nine) is found
in operation amongst them.
(4) For fractions like fa fa , fa etc., (where the denominator
are products of prime numbers), the number of digits depends
on the various respective factors in each case (as will be presently
elucidated).

l
(5) If and when the decimal-fraction obtained from one of
ya
the factors of the denominator is exactly divisible by the other
factor (or factors), the division by the second factor leaves no
remainder. And therefore the number of decimals obtained
ar
by the first factor is not added to ! Thus,
(iv I *142857
U 7 X 3 ““ 3
m

Here, the numerator on the R. H. S. being exactly

divisible by 3, it divides out and leaves no remainder. There­
fore, the number of digits continues the same.
ra

This means that, in every case wherein the complementary

halves (from nine) are found, the numerator on the R. H. S.
must necessarily be divisible by 3, 9 etc. And by multiplying
the denominator in such a case by such factors, we cause no
difference to the number of decimal places in the answer. And
consequently, we have :

fa= z—1 - oi 5873 ; and so on.

7X9 9
Going back to the Ekanyuna Sutra (as explained in con­
nection with the Sanskrit Alphabetical code), we know that
142857=143X999=11 X 13 X33X 37. This means that since
the numerator is divisible by 11,13, 3, 9, 27, 37, 33, 39, 99, 117,
297, 351 and 999, the multiplication of the Denominator (7)
29
 ( 226 )

by anyone of these factors will make no difference to the

number of decimal places in the answer.
(ii) 07_ggg3
V' 13X3 3
Here too, all the above considerations apply. And, since
76923=77 X 999= 33X 7X 11 X37, therefore these factors (and
combinations of factors) will, by multiplying the denominator,
make no difference to the number of decimal places. (Note.
999999=999 X 1001 =999 X 7 X 11 X 13).
# 1
- - and comes under the same category (with
Zo X w
22 digits in the answer (just like -fe).

l
(7) is a special case and stands by itself. Naturally it
ya
should have been expected to provide for 48 places. But,
as a matter of fact, it gives only 42; and for a perfectly valid
and cogent reason i.e. that, out of the 48 possible multiples,
ar
six (i.e. J J, !£•, f §• and f §) go into a different family, as
it were^&nd take shape as $, f , § and f ; have their places
there as *142857, *285714 and so forth and need no place in the
m

5 ^ etc., group ! And thus, since 6 go out of the 48, the .remaining

42 account for the 42 places actually found in the decimal

equivalent of ^ ! This is not a poet’s mere poetic phantasy but
ra

a veritable mathematical verity!

(8) is, in a way, an exception, as it contains only 13
digits. And, as this is an odd number, the question of the two
complementary halves does not arise! 13, however, is a sub­
multiple of 78 ; and there is no deviation from the normal in
this respect. An at-sight-one-line mental method will soon be
given for fa (in this very chapter).
(9) Similarly has 44 digits and thus conforms to the sub­
multiple rule. And this implies that, like TV it will need another
complete turn of the wheel (in one of its multiples) in order to
meet the needs of all the multiples ! (An incredibly easy method
will be shown in this very chapter for reeling off the answer in
this case).
 ( 227 )
(10) fa has only two recurririg places (*01); but the whole
gamut can be and has been provided for, therewith.
(11) In the case of basic fractions ending in 3, the denomina­
tor is first multiplied by 3 and gives us the Ekadhika, and the
last digit in the answer is also 3.
(12) fa (like fa) has only two decimal places (*03).
(13) fa has only 21 digits. 21 is a sub-multiple of 42 but is
odd and gives no scope for the complementary halves.
(14) fa has only 13 digits (a sub-multiple but odd)
(15) fa has only 41 digits (similarly).
(16) fa is special. Since 7 3 X 1 3 7 = 1 0 0 0 1 and since

10001X9999=99999999
l ™ L=
ya
7 10001 99999999
==*0136/9863 (by Ekanyuna Sutra)

(17) And, conversely, x __ 73 ___7 3 x 9 9 9 9

ar
*00729927
T* T~ 10001 99999999

(18) f a will be discussed a little later.

m

(19) In the case of fractions whose . denominators end in

7, the last digit is also 7 ; and the Ekadhika is obtained from the
ra

denominator multiplied by 7.

(20) y and f a have been dealt with in detail already.

(21) ^ and- are special (because 2 7 x 3 7 = 9 9 9 ). And

their decimal forms are. *037 and *027.

(22) f a has 46 digits.

(9o\ i _ 1 and has °nly 18 digits.

1 ] 19 X 3
(24) f a has 33 digits (odd)

(25) f a has been discussed already (number ^)

/o a\ i 1 an(i has 28 digits.

(26) * * “ 29^3
(27) fa has its full quota of 96 digits.
 ( 228 )

(28) In the case of fractions with denominators ending in

1, the Ekddhika comes from the denominator multiplied by 9 :
and the last digit is 9.
( 2 » ) tV = -0 9
( 3 0) 1 and has been discussed under 7.
7x3
(31) / j wiU come up a little later.
(32) & is special V 41x271=11111
. i _ 271 _271 x 9
* *T H il l 99999 ~ '02439 (odd)
(33) And, conversely, 1 41 _4 lx9 __0 0 3 6 9 ___ .
271 lllll 99999 ~99999= 00369
/jj\ x _

(35)
’ ”
1 and has 10 digits.
17X3
y
has 60 digits.
al
ar
(36) has 35 digits (odd)

(37) * = _ L _ = 9 ? l = - 6 l 2 3 « 6 ? 9 <S Very * * * * * *

v 1 27X3 3 number).
m

/oo\ i _ 1 has already been discussed under 7 and

” ~ i8 x 7 under 13. And besides,
i - 11 „ H X 9 9 9 . .
ra

VT 1001 999999 — *010/989

But

But here a big BUT butts in and exclaims; “ Y es; all

this is all right in its own way and so far as it goes. But, as
our denominators go on increasing, we note that, although the
last digit of the decimal fraction is 1,3,7, or at the most 9 and
no more, yet, the Ekddhika Purva goes on increasing steadily
all the time and we have to multiply or divide successively by
bigger and bigger Ekddhikas, until, at last, with only two-digit
denominators like 61, 71 and 81 and so on, we have now to deal
with 55, 64, 73 etc., as our multipliers and divisors, and
surely this is not such an easy process.
 ( 229 )

The objection is unobjectionable; nay, it is perfectly

correct. But we meet it with quite a variety of sound and
valid answers which will be found very cogent and reasonable.
They are as follows:

(i) Even the biggest of our Ekddhikas are nowhere—in res­

pect of bigness—near the original divisor. In every case,
they are smaller. But this is only a theoretical and dialectical
answer from the comparative standpoint and does not really
meet the intrinsic objection (about the Vedic methods being not
only relatively better but also being free from all such flaws
altogether)! We therefore go on and give a satisfactory
answer from the positive and constructive stand-point.

l
(ii) Even though the Ekadhika is found to be increasingly
ya
unmanageably big, yet the remainders give us a simple and
easy device for getting over this difficulty. This we shall
ar
demonstrate presently.
(iii) The Ekadhika (so far explained and applied) is not
the whole armoury. There are other Auxiliaries too, wherein
m

no such difficulty can crop up. These we shall expound and

explain in a subsequent, but sufficiently near chapter of this
ra

very volume ; and they will be found capable of solving the

problem in toto; and
(iv) Above all, there is the CROWNING GEM of all
coming up in a near chapter and unfolding before our eyes a
formula whereby, however big the denominator may be, we
can—by mere mental one-line Vedic arithmetic—read off
the quotient and the remainder, digit by digit! This process
of “ Straight Division” , we have already referred to and shall
explain and demonstrate, in a later chapter, under this very
caption “ Straight (or Instantaneous) Division” .

In the meantime, just now, we take up and explain the way

in which the remainders come to our rescue and solve this
particular problem for us.
 ( 230 )

Let us take first, the cae of *V We know immediately

that the last digit of the decimal is 3 and that the Ekadhika
is 7. And then we work as follows:
(i) Multiplying digit after digit (as usual) by 7, we have :
04347826086 /9 5 6 5 2 1 7 3 9 1 3
6 /3 4 3 1 1 5 2 6 2
or (ii) dividing digit by digit (as usual) by 7, we have :
0 4 3 4 7 8 2 6 0 8 6/9 5 6 5 2 1 7 3 9 1 3
2 3 5 5 14 6 4 6
These are the usual Ekadhika Purva methods. But
% (iii) we observe in the first chart, after two digits (1 & 3
have been obtained), the next leftward group (39)
is exactly three times (the extreme-right-end one)

l
ya
and we can immediately profit by it. Thus 39 gives
us 117, out of which we put down 17 and keep 1 to
carry over; 17 gives us 51 + 1=52. 52 gives us 156,
ar
out of which we set down 56 and keep 1 to carry over.
56 gives us 168+1 = 169. of these, we put 69 down
and keep 1 to be carried over ; and so on. In fact,
m

the whole procedure is exactly like the one which

we followed from left to right in respect of
(=*020408 16 32......). Thus we have:
ra

^ =^= •0434782608, 69, 56, 52, 17, 39, 13

or(iv) if we wish to start from the left end, go on to the
right, that too is easy enough.

We note that, the first digits being completed, we get

8 as the Remainder. We can immediately work out this
process by multiplying each two-digit group by 8 (as we did in
the case of by 2) and frame the following chart :
•04 : 32 : 72 : 24 : 08 : 64 : and so on
: 2 : 6 : 2 : : 5 :
: 34 : 78 : 26 : : 69 :
These multiplications by 3 to the left and by 8 to the right
are easy enough. Aren’t they ?
 ( 231 )

Let us now take up and try (as promised at an earlier

stage). Obviously, the last digit is 7 and the Ekadhika is 33.
This is rather unwieldy as a multiplier or as divisor. We should
therefore try and see what we can get from the Remainders.
We find them to be 10, 6 etc. We can immediately pounce up
on this 6 for our purpose and work in this w a y :
*02 being the first two digits of the quotient and 6 being
our ratio, the next two digits are obviously 12. These X 6 should
give us 72 ; but as 4 will be coming over from the right, we add
the 4 and put down 76. This should give us 456, of which the
first digit has already been taken over to the left. So 56 remains.
But this will be increased by 3 (coming from the right) and will
become 59—This gives us 57, 44 and 68 for the next three 2-

l
digit groups and 08 for the one thereafter. The 08 group of
ya
two digits gives us 48 which, with the carried digit becomes 51.
This gives us 06 and 36 (which becomes 38). And then we have
28 (turning into 29, then 74 which becomes 78) and so forth.
ar
Thus we have : #T=*02 12 76 59 44 68 08 51 382/
97 8

Here we notice that, exactly after 23 digits, the comple­

m

ments (from nine) have begun. So, we can complete the second
half and say : 12 76 59 57 44 68 08 51 06 382
ra

97 87 23 40 42 55 31 91 48 93 617
We have thus avoided the complicated divisions by the
original divisor 47 and also the divisions and multiplications
by the unmanageable Ekadhika 33 ; and, with the easy remainder
6 as our multiplier, we have been able to obtain all the 46 digits
of the answer !
This merely shows that these are not cut-and-dried
mechanical processes but only rules capable of being applied
to the special kind of cases which they are particularly designed
to meet and fit into.
And, as for a cut-and-dried formula capable of universal
application, that too is forthcoming (as already indicated) and
will be dealt with, very soon.
 ( 232 )

Let us now take up fa which, a little earlier, we promised

to deal with soon afterwards. In this case, the last digit is 9 ;
and the Ekddhika is 28 (which is nearly as big as the original
denominator itself)! We should therefore sift the remainders
and find a suitable auxiliary therefrom.
In this case, we find 7 is the first significant remainder.
So, leaving the Ekddhika process oat of account for the moment,
we may use the Geometrical Progression principle and achieve
our purpose thereby (as we did-with 6-in the case of fa). But let
us proceed further and see whether a still more easily manageable
remainder is available further up.
W e ll; we observe :
•032258 (with remainder 2). The actual remainders

l
(in order) are: 10, 7, 8, 18, 25 and 2 !
ya
This suits us most admirably, and we proceed further
with the help of 2. Thus:
ar
•032258/064516/129,032/258064.......
But this means that, after only 15 digits (an odd number),
the decimal has already begun to recur I So, we simply say :
m

^ = 032258064516 129 !
What a simple and easy device!
ra

Let us now take up The last digit is 7 ; but the

Ekddhika will be 68! So, we seek help from the Remainders.
They are : 10, 3 etc., and the quotient-digits are ‘0103...
So, multiplying each quotient-group (of 2 digits each)
by 3 (as we did, by 2, in the case of £v), we g e t:
i =-010309 27 81
JL
83 etc. etc !
Let us take one more example (i.e. ? ! ? ) and conclude. The
last digit is 7 ; but the Ekddhika will be 698 ! It will surely
not be an enviable task for even the most practised and expe­
rienced statistician to multiply or divide, at each step, by
such a big figure ! We therefore again seek help from the
remainders and the Geometrical Progression Rule.
 ( 233 )

The Quotient “digits are ’ 001 etc., and the successive

remainders are 10. 100, 3 etc. ! This means that we should
multiply each group of three quotient-digits by 3 and get our
answer (to any number of decimal-places). We thus have:
^ = • 0 0 1 : 003 : 009 : 027 : 081 : 243 : 729
: : : : : : 3
732 etc. etc.
The Converse operation.
Having dealt, in extenso, with the conversion of vulgar
fractions into their equivalent recurring decimals, we now
take up the CONVERSE process i.e. the conversion of decimals
into the equivalent vulgar fractions. We do not, however,
propose to go into such a detailed and exhaustive analytical

l
study thereof (as we have done in the other case) but only to
ya
point out and explain one particular principle, which will be
found very useful in this particular operation and in many
subsequent ones.
ar
The principle is based on the simple proposition that
•9 = 1 = 1 ; • 99= | | = 1 ; -9 9 9 = 1 1 1 = 1 ; and so forth ad
infinitum. It therefore follows that all recurring decimals whose
m

digits are all nines are ipso facto equal to unity ; and if a given
decimal can be multiplied by a multiplier in such a manner as
to produce a product consisting of only nines as its digits, the
ra

operation desired becomes automatically complete.

For instance, let us first start with the now familiar deci­
mal *076923. In order to get 9 as the *0 7 6 9 2 3
last digit, we should multiply this by 3. _______1 ^
Setting this product down (*230769), *2 3 0 7 6 9
we find that, in order to get 9 as the 0*7 6 9 2 3
penultimate digit, we should add 3 to ^ 9 9 9 9 —1
the 6 already there. And, in order ------------- ---- -
to get that 3, we should multiply the given multiplicand by 1.
On doing this, we find that the totals (of the two rows) are all
nines! So we stop there and argue that, because the given
decimal X 13=999999 (i.e. 1), therefore the fraction should
be XV In fact, it is like saying 1 3 x = i .\ x ~
so
 ( 234 )

(2 ) Secondly, let us take the case of -037 and see how this
works. Here as the last digit is 7, so, in order to get 9 as
the last digit of the product, we should multiply * 0 3 7

it by 7. And, putting 259 down, we should add 4 2 7

to obtain 9 as' the penultimate digit. And, in order 2 5 9

to get that 4 there, we should multiply the multi- 0 7 4

plicand by 2 . And, on doing so, we find that the

product is -999 (— 1 ). Therefore, the fraction 0 '9 9 9 = 1
X 2 7 = l .v x = 21T
(3) When we try the case of 142857 ; we find that multi­
plication by 7 gives us the all-nine product. -999999 ( = 1 ) ; and
therefore we say •142857=^
(4) 047619. We first multiply by 1 , see 1 -047 6 1 9

l
in the penultimate place, have to add 8 thereto, ________ 2
ya 1

multiply by 2 (for getting that 8 ) and thus find 0 . 9 5 2 3 g 9

that the required answer is fa. — =---------------
M -9 9 9 9 9 9 = 1
ar
(5 ) Similarly, we may take up various other decimals
(including the long big ones like the equivalents of
1 1 T, t V tV *V> etc-> an(f invariably we find our
m

purpose achieved.
(6 ) But, wha't about decimals ending in even numbers or
ra

5 ? Well; no integral multiplier can possibly get us 9 as the last

digit in the product. And what we do in such a case is to divide
off by the powers of 2 and 5 involved and use this new method
with the final quotient thus obtained. Thus, if We have to
deal with 285714 we divide it off by 2, get -142857 -2)-285714
as the quotient and find that multiplication thereof •142857
by 7 gives us the product -999999=1. And therefore we say :

X7=l x=*

(7) Let us now try the interesting - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9

decimal. 012345679. On applying this new 8 \

method, we find that multiplication by 81 "0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9

gives us 1 as the product x= '9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
•9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 = 1
 ( 235 )

N.B. 1. The student should also make use of the Ekanyuna

formula. This is readily applicable in every case
of “Complementary halves” (including tV tV tV
etc.

Thus. "i4 9 .gff7 —143x999__l l X l3 11x13

999 999 1001 11X13X7 T
77x999
Similarly. 076923 X 999 ; and S0 0n

2. Similarly, with regard to other factors too, it goes

without saying that the removal, in general, of
common factors (from the decimal and the denomi­
nator) facilitates and expedites the work.
3.

l
The subsequent chapters on “ AUXILIARY FRAC­
ya
TIONS” and “ DIVISIBILITY” etc., will expound
and explain certain very simple and easy processes
by which this work (of arithmetical factorisation)
ar
can be rendered splendidly simple and easy ; and
4. Above all, the forthcoming “ Straight Division”
method will not merely render the whole thing simple
m

and easy but also turn it into a pleasure and a

delight (even to the children).
ra

Some Salient Points and Additional Traits.

Thus, the Ekddhika process (forwards and backwards)
and the Geometrical Progression relationship between the
remainders have given us the following three main principles :
(i) The quotient-complements (from 9 );
(ii) The remainder-complements (from the Denominator) ;
& (iii) The multiplication of the Garamanka (last digit) of
the remainders by the Caramdnka (the last digit) of
the decimal, for obtaining each digit of the quotient.
Now, apropos of and in connection with this fact,
the following few important and additional traits
should also be observed and will be found interesting
and helpful:
 ( 238 )

(1) In the case of the remainders are (I), 10, 5, 12, 6

3, 11, 15, 17, 18/9, 14, 7, 13, 16, 8, 4, 2, 1 and the quotient
digits are: 0 5 2 6 3 1 5 7 8/9 4 7 3 6 8 4 2 1 .
(i) Each remainder by itself, if even; and with the
addition of the denominator, if odd, is double the next
remainder. This follows from the Ekadhika being 2.
(ii) Each quotient-digit is the last digit of its corres­
ponding remainder. This is because 1 is the last
digit of the decimal.

(2) In the case o f2V the remainders are : (1) 10,13, 14,
24, 8, 22, 17, 25, 18, 6, 2, 0, 26, 28/19, 16, 15', 5, 21, 7, 12, 4,
11, 23, 27, 9, 3, and 1.

l
(i) The quotient-digits are the last digits thereof (for
ya
the same reason as above)
(ii) Each remainder (by itself or in conjunction with the
denominator or double of it)= thrice its successor; and
ar
(iii) Each remainder plus its successor’s successor=the
next remainder thereafter. Thus 10+14=24 ; 13+
24—29= 8 ; 1 4 + 8 = 2 2 ; 24+22 - 2 9 = 1 7 ;8 + 1 7 = 2 5 ;
m

22+25—2 9 = 1 8 ; 1 7 + 1 8 - 2 9 = 6 ;
25 + 6 —2 9 = 2 ; 1 8 + 2 = 2 0 ; 6 + 2 0 = 2 6 ; and so on 1
ra

N.B. Note the casting off of the denominator all through.

(3) In the case of the quotient-digits a re:

0112 3595 5056 1797 752 808 i
9887 6404 4943 8202 247 191 )
and the remainders are (1), 10, 11, 21, 32, 53, 85, 49, 45, 5,
50, 55, 16, 71, 87, 69, 67, 47, 25, 72, 8, 80, 88, 79, 78, 68, 57,
36, 4, 40, 44, 84, 39, 34, 73, 18, 2, 20, 22, 42, 64, 17, 81, 9 and
1. (Note the Ratio 9 : 1 . )
The remarkaole thing here is that the numerator+the
first remainder=the second remainder and that all through,
the sum of any two consecutive remainders is the next remainder
thereafter! Thus 1 + 1 0 = 1 1 ; 1 0 + 1 1 = 2 1 ; 1 1 + 2 1 = 3 2 ; and
so on to the very end.
 { 23T )

The general form herefor is a, d, a + d , a+ 2d , 2a+3d,

3a-f 5d, 5a+8d etc. The student who knows this secret relation-
ship (between each remainder and its successor) can reel the
44 digits of the answer off, at sight, by simple addition !
(4) In the case of the remainders are :
(1) 10, 21, 52, 46, 65, 18, 22, 62, 67, 38, 64, 8 and 1.
The general form herefor is a, d, a+ 2d , 2a+5d etc. Know­
ledge of this relationship will be of splendid practical utility in
this case. (Note the Ratio 8 : 1.)
(5) In the case of the remainders are :
(1) 10, 31, 34, 64, 19, 52, 37, 25, 43, 16, 22, 13, 61, 58,
28, 4, 40, 55, 67, 49, 7 and 1. (Note the Ratio 7 : 1.)
The general form herefor is obviously a, d, a-J-3d, 3a+10 d,

l
ya
10a*4”33d etc.

(6) In the case of 59, the remainders a re:

ar
(1) 10, 41, 56, 29, 54, 9, 31, 15, 32, 25, 14, 22, 43, 17, 52,
48, 8, 21, 33, 35, 55, 19, 13, 12, 2, 20, 23, 53, 58/49, 18, 3, 30,
5, 50, 28, 44, 27, 34, 45, 37, 10, 42, 7, 11, 51, 38, 26, 24, 4, 40,
m

46, 47, 57, 39, 36, 6 and 1 (Note the Ratio 6 : 1).
Here the general form is a, d, a+4d> 4a+17d etc.
ra

Inductive conclusion
Having thus examined the cases of ^ and we
note the following :
(i) In every case, we start with 1 (the basic numerator)
as a sort of pre-natal remainder (which is perfectly
justified because we are dealing with a recurring
decimal); and we call it a ;
(ii) In every case, the first actual remainder is 10; and
we call it d ;
(iii) And then the successive remainders are a, d, a + d ,
a + 2d, a + 3d , a-f4d respectively (wherein the co­
efficient of x is obviously the deficit of the penultimate
digit from 9 !
 ( 238 )
Thus for fa , we have a-f-ld ;
for f a , we have a + 2d ;
for fa, w~e have a + 3d ;
f°r we have a+ 4d ; and so on.
(iv) And this relationship is maintained systematically
all through. In other words, each remainder+the
next one or double that or thrice that etc.=the further
subsequent remainder. Arguing thus, let us try fa
As 3 is 6 less than 9, the general form should
be a+6d. This means 1, 10, 61 (i.e. 9), 64 (i.e. 12).
3, 30 (i.e. 4) and 27 (i.e. I). And we find this to be
actually correct.
(v) And, in case the penultimate digit is more than 9,

l
we should react by subtracting d (and not add to it)
ya
at the rate of 1 for each surplus. Thus, our chart will
nowread-a, d, a-—d, d- (a—d) i.e. 2d—a, and so on.
For instance, for the remainders will be (1)10,
ar

—9, 19,—28, 47 and so on.

(vi) And, over and above all these details which are
different for different numbers (as explained above),
m

there is one multiplier (namely 10) which is applicable

to all cases ! And thus, whatever fraction we may
ra

be dealing with, 2, 4, 5, 8 or any remainder what­

soever can be safely put in into the next place with
a zero added ! The student will observe that, in
all the examples dealt with hereinabove (not only
in this particular subsection), every such remainder
of two digits (ending in zero) has been invariably
preceded by the same number (without the zero) !
With the help of this rule applicable in all cases and the
special rules (about d, 2d, 3d, 4d etc.,) enjoined for the different
individual cases, the student should easily now be in a position
to make a list of the successive remainders in each case and
therefrom, by Caramdnha multiplication, put down the succe­
ssive quotient-digits without further special labour !
 ( 239 )

These and many more interesting features there are in

the Vedic decimal system, which can turn mathematics for the
children, from its present excruciatingly painful character to
the exhilaratingly pleasant and even funny and delightful
character it really bears !
We have, however, already gone into very great details;
and this chapter has already become very long. We therefore
conclude this chapter here and hold the other things over for
a later stage in the student’s progress.

y al
ar
m
ra
 Chapter X X V I I

STRAIGHT DIVISION

We now go on, at last, to the long-promised Vedic process

of STRAIGHT (AT-SIGHT) DIVISION which is a simple and
easy application of the tJRD H VA-TIRYAK Sutra which is
capable of immediate application to all cases and which we have
repeatedly been describing as the “ CROWNING GEM of all”
for the very simple reason that over and above the universality
of its application, it is the most supreme and superlative mani­
festation of the Vedic ideal of the at-sight mental-one-line

l
method of mathematical computation.
ya
Connecting Link
ar
In order to obtain a correct idea o f the background, let
us go back, very briefly, for a very short while, to the methods
which we employed in the earlier chapters on division ; and let
m

us start with the case of

According to the first method According to the second

(under the Nikhilam etc., Sutra)? method (by Pardvartya for-
ra

our chart will read as follows : mula),, we say :

73 3 8 9 : 8 2: 73 : 3 8 9 8 2
27 6 21: 27 : 9—9
28: 98 : Q = 534i I 33: 51 — 51
• 116406: 1 153-“ 153

; : and R = 0 j[ : 3 17 51 23 949
3 14 58: (26) 28 : 5 3 4 0 0
534 :(36) 10

We have felt, and still feel, that even these comparatively

short, intellectual and interesting methods are cumbrous and
clumsy (from the Idealistic Vedic standpoint). And hence the
clamant need for a method which is free from all such flaws and
 ( 241 )

which fulfils the highest Idealistic ideal e f the Vedic Sutras.

And that is as follows: 3.: 38 9 8 : 2 :
Out of the divisor 7 3 , we put down ? : 3 3 : 1 :
only the first digit (i.e. 7) in theJDivisor- : 5 3 4 : 0:
column and put the other digit (i.e. 3) “ on '
top of the flag” (by the Dhvajanka Sutra), as shown in the
chart alongside.
The entire division is to be by 7 ; and the procedure is
as explained below :
As one digit has been put on top, we allot one place (at
the right end of the dividend) to the remainder portion of the
answer and mark it off from the digits by a vertical line.
(i) We divide 38 by 7 and get 5, as the quotient and 3 as

l
the remainder. We put 5 down as the first quotient­
ya
digit and just prefix the remainder (3) up before the
9 of the dividend. In other words, our Actual second-
step Gross Dividend is 39. From this, we, however,
ar

deduct the product of the indexed 3 and the first

quotient-dight 5 (i.e. 3 X 5 = 1 5 ). The remainder
(24) is our actual Nett-Dividend. It is then divided
m

by 7 and gives us 3 as the second quotient-digit and

3 as the remainder, to be placed in their respective

places (as was done in the first step). From 38 (the

ra

gross dividend thus formed), we subtract 3 xth e

second quotient-digit 3 i.e. 9, get the remainder 29 as
our next actual dividend and divide that by 7. We
get 4 as the quotient and 1 as the remainder. This
means our next Gross Dividend is 1 2 from which,
as before, we deduct 3Xthe third quotient-digit 4
(i.e. 1 2 ) and obtain 0 as the remainder. Thus we
say : Q is 534 and R is zero. And this finishes
the whole procedure; and all of it is one-line mental
Arithmetic (in which all the actual Division is done
by the simple-digit Divisor 7 )!
The Algebraical Proof hereof is very simple and is based
on the very elementary fact that all arithmetical numbers are
31
 ( 242 )

merely Algebraical expressions wherein x stands for ten. For

instance, 3x2+ 5 x + l is merely the algebraical general expression
of which (with x standing for 10) the arithmetical value is 351.
Remembering this, let us try to understand the steps by
^neans of which 3 8 9 8 2 is sought to be divided by 73. Alge­
braically put (with x standing for 10), this dividend is 38xs+
9x2+ 8 x + 2 ; and this divisor is 7x+3. Now, let us proceed
with the division in the usual manner.
When we try to 7x+ 3 ) 38x3+ 9x2+ 8 x + 2 (5 x 2+ 3 x + 4
divide 38x3 by 7x, our 35x3+ 1 5 x 2
first quotient-digit is 3x3— 6x2
5x2 ; and, in the first
= 2 4 x 2+ 8 x
step of the multipli­ 21x2+ 9 x
cation of the divisor
by 5x2, we get the
y
product 35x3+ 1 5 x 2 ;
al 3x2—x
=29x+ 2
28X+12
and this gives us the
ar
remainder 3x 3+ 9x2— x— 10
15x2, which really = 10—10=0
means 30x2+ 9 x 2—15x2
m

~ 2 4 x 2. This plus 8x being our second-step dividend, we

multiply the divisor by the second quotient-digit 3x and subtract
the product 21x2-f 9x therefrom and thus get 3x2—x as the
ra

remainder. But this 3x2 is really equal to 30x which (with

—x + 2 ) gives us 2 9x-f’2 as the last-step dividend. Again
multiplying the divisor by 4, we get the product 2 8 x + 1 2 ;
and subtract this 2 8 x + 12, thereby getting x— 10 as the Remain­
der. But x being 10, this remainder vanishes! And there
you have the whole thing in a nut-shell.
It will be noted that the arithmetical example just here-
above dealt with (i.e. —793~ ) is merely the arithmetical form of
38x3+ 9 x 2+ 8 x + 2 and the Arithmetical chart has merely
7x-f-3 shown the above given algebraical opera­
tion in its arithmetical shape (wherein 3 : 38 9 8 : 2
x = 1 0 ) and that, whenever the algebraical ? 3 3 :1
working has taken a remainder-digit *5 3 4 :0
 ( 243 )

over to the right with a zero added, the arithmetical chart

shows that particular remainder prefixed to the dight already
there.

Thus, where 3xs has been counted as 30x2 and added to the
9x2 already there and produced 39x2 as the result, this algebraical
operation has been graphically pictured as the prefixing of
3 to 9 and making it 39 ! And similarly, in the next step
o f the division, the remainder 3 is prefixed to the 8 already
there; and we have to deal with 38 ; and similarly, at least,
the 1 prefixed to the 2 gives us 12 (which the 3X 4 subtracted
therefrom cancels o u t)!

l
In other words, the given expression 38x3+ 9 x 2- f 8 x + 2
ya
(with 10 substituted for x) is actually the same as 35x3+ 3 6 x 2-f
37x+12. And we sa y :
38x3+ 9 x 2+ 8 x + 2 _ 35x3+ 36x2+ 3 7 x + 1 2 _ .s y2 , ^ , 4 And
ar

7x+3 7 x+ 3
graphically, this algebraical operation 3 : 38 9 8 : 2
is demonstrated arithmetically in the ^ 1 3 3 :1
m

manner shown in the margin. ‘________ _ L _

: 5 3 4 : 0
ra

The procedure is very simple and needs no further ex­

position and explanation. A few more illustrative instances
(with running comments, as usual) will however, be found useful
and helpful and are therefore given below :

(1) Divide 529 by 23. 3 :5 2 : 9

The procedure is exactly the same ^ ®
and is simple and easy. : 2 3 : 0

(2) Divide 4096 by 64. (3) Divide 16384 by 128

4 : 40 9 : 6 : 8 : 16 3 8 : 4
6 : 4 : 1 ; 12 : 4 11 : 6
 ( 244 )

(4) Divide 7632 by 94

(ii) New Nikhilam method or (ii) Newest Vedic method
9 4: 7 6 : 3 2 : 4 : 7 6 3 : 2 :
06 : 0 : 42 : 9 : 4 : 2 : / . Q=81
: : 0 36: *------ R =18
:_________________ : 8 1 : 18:
76 : 4 88
81 : 18

(5) Divide 601325 by 76.

Here, in the first division by 7, we can 6 : 60 1 3 2 : 5
7 : 11 6 2 : 2
put 8 down as the first quotient-digit;
but the remainder then left will be : 7 9 1 2 : 13

l
too small for the subtraction expected
ya
at the next step. So, we take 7 as the quotient-digit and prefix
the remainder 11 to the next dividend-digit. [N.B. For
purposes of reference and verification, it will be a good plan to
ar
underline such a quotient-digit (because the chart offers itself
for verification at every step and any reconsideration necessary
at any stage need not involve our going back to the beginning
m

and starting the whole thing over again)]

(6) Divide 3100 by 25. 5: 3 1 0 : 0 :
ra

2 : 1 2 :: 2 :
: 1 2 4
o

Note— In algebraic terminology, 3100=3x8-|-x2=

2x3-)-9x2+ 8 x + 2 0 and the above example is the arithmetical
way of stating that 2x3+ 9 x ay 8xy2+ 2 0 y 3= (2 x -f5 y ) (x2- f 2xy
+ 4 y 2) (i.e. 25X124=3100)
(7) Similar is the case with regard to the division of
38x3-t-9x2+ 8 x + 2 by (x —1), wherein Q =38xa-(-47x+55 and
R =57.
(8) Divide 695432 by 57. (9) Divide 3279421 by 53.
7 : 6 9 5 4 3 : 2 : 3 : 32 7 9 4 2 : 1 :
5 : 1 2 1 0 : 3 : 5 : 2 4 6 5 : 6 :

1 2 2 0 0: 32 6 1 8 7 5 : 46
 ( 245 )

(10) Divide 7777777 by 38 (11) Divide 500001 by 89.

8 : 7 7 7 7 7 7 : 7 : 9 : 50 0 0 0 : 1
3 : 1 1 5 7 8 : 7 : 8 : 10 V 8 : 15
: 2 0 4 6 7 8 : 13 : : 5 6 1 7 : 88

(12) Divide 37941 by 47. (13) Divide 745623 by 79

7 : 37 9 4 : 1 : 9 : 74 5 6 2 : 3 :
4 : 5 3 : 6 : 7 : 11 6 9 : 9 :
: 8 0 7 : 12 : : 9 4 3 8 : 21 :

(14) Divide 7453 by 79 (te 3 (15) Divide 710-014 by 39 (to 3

places of decimals) places of decimals)
9 : 74 5 3 0 0 : 9 : 7 1 0 . 0 1 4 :
7 : 11 6 6 5 0: 3 : 4 8 2 2 6 4:

l
ya
: 9 4 -3 4 2 0: : 1 8. 2 0 5 5 :

(16) Divide 220 by 52 (to 3 (17) Divide 7 3 by 53 (to 5

ar
places of decimals) places of decimals)
2 :2 2 0 -0 0 0 3 : 7 3 0 0 0 0 :
5 : 2 2 1 4 5 : 2 5 6 4 4:
m

:0 1 3 7 7 3 6 :

(18) Divide 71 by 83 (to 5 places of decimals)

ra

3 : 7 1 0 0 00 :
8 : 7 6 53 :
: 0 .85 5 42 . . . :

(19) Divide 1337 by 79

(i) By the New Nikhilam (ii) By the newest Yedic
method method
79 : 13 3 7 : 9 : 13 3 : 7 :
21 : 2 1 7 : 6 : 12
10 5 :
1 6 : 73
15 1 : 52 :
: 21 :
16 : 73 :
 ( 246 )
(20) Divide 1681 by 41.
1 : 16 8 1 : N .B .:—The Algebraical form is :
4 : 0 0 0 :
---------------------- 16x2+ 8 x + l , ,
: 4 1 0 : a-v_i_i
4x+l = 4 x + l
(21) Divide 115491 by 137.
7 : 115 4 9 1
13 : 11 6 2
8 4 0 :
or in Algebraical form :
13x+7 : 115x3-f- 4x2+ 9 x + l ( 8 x 2+ 4 x -
: 104x8—56x2
l l x 3—52xs+ 9 x = 5 8 x 2+ 9x
E =104x8+ 108x2+ 67x+ 21 52x2+28x

l
ya 6x2—I9x+1
#\ Q = 8 x 2+ 4 x + 3 I = 4 1 x+ 1
•(i.e. 843) & R = 0 J 39x+21
2x—2 0=0
ar
(22) Divide 7458 by 127 (to (23) Divide 3517 by 127 (to 3
3 places of decimal) places of decimals)
7:74 5 800 0 0 7: 35 1 7 0 0 0
m

12 : 14 14 8 7 8 4 12 : 11 13 16 10 13
5 8 *7 2 4 4 2 7-6 9 2
ra

(24) Divide 7031985 by 823

Here, the Divisor is of
2 3: 70 3 1 9: 8 5
3 digits. All the difference 8 : 6 7 5 : 4 4 3 and
which this makes to us is
that, instead of putting one 8 5 4 4 3 3 R =273
extra digit on top, we put
both the extra digits (23) there ; and j we adopt a slightly
different modus operandi (on the U R D H V A -TIR YA K lines)
in respect of the subtraction- portion of the work.
In this instance, for instance, we divide 70 by 8 and set
8 and 6 down in their proper places as usual. Thus, our second
Gross Dividend is now 63. From that, we subtract 16 (the
product of the first of the flag-digits i.e. 2 and the first quotient
 ( 247 )
digit i.e. 8) and get the remainder (63—16=47) as the actual
dividend. And, dividing it by 8, we have 5 and 7 as Q and R
respectively and put them down at their proper places. So
now, our Gross Dividend is 71 ; and we deduct, by the Urdhva-
TiryaJc rule, the cross-products of the two flag-digits (23) and
the two quotient-digits (85) i.e. 1 0 -f2 4 = 3 4 ; and our remainder
is 71—34=37. We then continue to divide again by 8 and
subtract etc., in the same manner (by cross-multiplication)
as (just now explained) by the Vrdhva-Tiryah method (until
the last digit of the dividend) is reached. And that finishes the
task.
And, in other divisions too, irrespective of the number
of digits in the divisor, we follow the same method. And, in

l
every case, our actual divisor is of one digit only (or at the most,
ya
a small two-digit one (like 12, 16 and so on) which one can
easily divide b y ) ! And all the rest of the digits (of the divisor)
are hoisted on the flag-top. And this is the whole secret of the
ar

“ Straight Division” formula.

Note :—If instead of the decimal places in the Quotient, you
m

want the remainder, you can have it in the usual way.

In this case, 23 and 44 (by cross-multiplication) give
us 20, which (when taken to the right) means 200; and
ra

3 x 4 (the last flag-digit X the last obtained quotient­

digit) = .1 2 . Subtracting the total of these two
(i.e. 212) from 485, we have R =273. (i.e. R = 4 8 5 —-
200—12=273).
Some more instances (of division by three-digit divisions
etc.) are cited below :
(1) Divide 1064321 by 743 (to (2) Divide 222220 by 735 (to
4 places of decimals) 3 places of decimals)
43: 10 6 4 3 2 1 0 0 : 3 5 : 22 2 2 2 0 0 :
7 : 3 4 4 5 7 7 6 5 : 7 : 1 33 5 3 3 :
: 14 3 2 .4 6 4 3 : 3 0 2-340

R = 5 2 1 - 1 7 0 —6=345 R = 3 2 0 - 60—10=250
 ( 248 )

(3) Divide 8 8 8 by 672 (to 3 places of decimals)

72 : 8 8 8 0 0 : or 732 : 8 : 8 . 8 :
6 : 2 3 3 4 2: : : 1 :
: 1 .3 2 1 5 : : 1 : R =216:
or by mere Vilokanam (Inspection)
(4) 28 : 6 3 8 1 8 : 2 7 : or 32 : 6 3 8 1 8 : 2 7 :
5 : 1 1 6 5 : : 5 : 1 0 4 5 : 4 12 •
: 1 2 0 8 6 : R =419 : : 1 2 0 8 6 : R =419 :
(5) Divide 13579 by 975 (6 ) Divide 513579 by 9 3 9
75 : 13 5 ‘ 7 9: 39 : 51 3 5 :7 9:
9 : 4 : 11 : 9 : 6 12 : 14 :
: 1 3 : : : 5 4 6 : :

l
R = 1179—2 6 0 —15=904 R =1479—540—54=594
(7) Divide 7143 by 1171
ya
(i) By the new Paravartya (ii) By the new Pardvartya
method (Vinculum) method:
ar
1171 : 7 : 1 4 3: 1171 :7 : 1 4 3:
— 1 —7 —i : 7—49—7 : _ i _7 — 1 : : —]4 —21—7 :
: 7 : 6 45 4 : _2 -j-3 — l : ? • 13 + 2 5 —4 :
m

: 7 : —1054 :
: 7 :—1054 :
: 6 ; 117 :
: 6 : 117 :
ra

(iii) By the newest Vedic method

71 : 71 : 4 3 : Q= 6
11 : : 5 1 : and R = 5 4 3 —543—426=117
: 6 : 1 0

( 8 ) Divide 4213 by 1234 (to 4 (9) Divide 46781 by 1483 (to

places of Decimals) 3 places of decimals)
34 : 42 : 1 3 0 0 9 83 : 46 : 7 8 1 0
12 : : 6 4 7 3 2 14 : : 4 9 11 12 3
: 3 : 4 1 4 . 1 0 ! 3: 1 .5 4 5
( 1 0 ) Divide 3124 by 1532 (to 3 ( 1 1 ) Divide .333333 by 1782
places of decimals) (to 3 places of decimals)
32 : 31 : 2 4 6 82 : 33 : 3 3 3 3
15 : : 1 6 0 17 : : 16 19 8

: 2 .: 0 4 0 : 1 : 8 7
 ( 249 )

( 1 2 ) Divide 46315 by 1054 (to (13) Divide 75313579 by 1213

3 places ot decimals). 13 : 75 : 3 1 3 5 79
54 : 46 : 3 1 5 0 12 : 3 3 11 11 11
10 : : 6 13 10 8 : 6 : 2 0 8 8

: 4: 3 9 4 2 R = 1 179—344=835
R =1315—310—12
(14) Divide 135791 by 1245 (15) Divide 13579 by 1616
45 : 13 : 5 7 91 16 : 135 : 79
12 : : 1 11 4 16 : : 7
* 1 : 0 9 : 8 :
R=491 —405 or 130—44=86 R = 7 7 9 —128 or 690 -3 9 = 65 1
(16) Divide 135791 by 1632
32 : 135 7 : 91
l
ya
16 : 7 :5 R = 5 9 1 -2 5 0 - 6 = 3 3 5
: 8 3 :
ar

(17) Divide 97531 by 1627

27 : 97 5 : 31 or 27 : 97 5 : 31
16 : 17 : 21 16 : 1 :3
m

: 5 9 : : 6 0 :
R = 2 1 3 1 -5 9 3 and R = 3 3 1 —4 2 0 = —89
ra

=1538 i.e. Q=59 and R=1538

(18) Divide 97531 by 1818
18 : 97 5 : 31
18 . 7 : 16
: 5 3: .. R = 1 6 3 1 -4 5 4 (or 1200^23)=1177

(19) Divide 13579 by 2145

45 : 135 : 79
21 : : 9
: 6 : And R = 9 7 9 -2 7 0 or 930—221=709

(2 0 ) Divide 135791 by 2525

25 : 135 7 : 91
25 : 10 : 22 And R =2291—325 or 1980—14
: 5 3 : = 1966
32
 ( 250 )

(21) Divide 50 X 11 by 439 (to three places of decimals).

39 : 50 1 1 0 : 41 : 50 : * 1 1 0 : R = 1 9 8 = l8 2
4 : 1 33 6 : or 4 : 1 : "222 : or 3 1 1 _129
,, . . ,- ~ And=182
: 11 415 : : 11 : 415 :

(2 2 ) Divide 15X61 by 349 (to three plaees of Decimals).

49 : 15X 6 1 0 51~: 15 . 6 1 0 :
3 : 3 8 85 10 or 3 : 3 4 4 :
475 277 : 4 47277

A n d R = 3 6 1 —196 And R = 3 6 1 —196=165

or 200—35=165

(23) Divide 47 by 798 (to five places of decimals).

98 : '4 7 0 0 0 0 02 : 4 7 0 0 0 0

l
7 :
058
ya
4 = 121915
9 0
or 8 : 4 7 6
:0 5 8 9 0
ar
(24) Divide 1 1 1 1 by 839
39 : 11 : 1 1 : or
8 : : 3 4 :
1 :3 : By mere Vilokanam (Inspection)
m

And R = 3 1 1 -3 9 = 2 7 2
ra

We now extend the jurisdiction of the Sutra and apply

it to Divisors consisting of a large number of digits. The
principle involved being the same, the procedure ;s also
identically the same as in the foregoing examples. And the
division by a single digit (or a small two-digit divisor) continues
exactly the same. A few illustrative instances are given
hereunder:
( 1 ) Divide 7031 -95 by 8231 (2 ) Divide 995 311 by 16123
(to 5 decimal places). 123 : 99 5 : 3 1 1
231 : 70 3 1 9 5 0 0 16 •' 3 ; 13
8 : 6 7.5 4 6 9
. Q K A QO ___
R=13311 —1503 (or JJ200+190
+2)=11808
T

( 251 )

(3) Divide 975 311 by 16231

231 : 97 5 : 3 1 1
16 : 1 :3

: 6 0: R = 1 5 0 0 + 5 0 + l or 3311 —1860=1451

(4) Divide 975 311 by 16 333

333 : 97 5 : 3 1 1

16 : 17 : 16
R = 16311—4647 = 11664
: 5 9 : or 12100+410+26=11664

(5) Divide 975 311 by 18123

123 : 97 5 : 311
18 : 7 : 16
11=15000+200+8

l
ya
: 5 3 : (or 16311—1519)=14792

(6 ) Divide 995311 by 20321

ar
321 : 99 5 : 311
2 0 10 • 23
‘ ‘ T?.=2ftlOO —190—7 f=23311'—
: 4 8 : 3408)=19903
m

(7) Divide 997531 by 30321

321 : 99 7 531
ra

30 : 9 28
R=27300 —40—1
: 3 2 (or 28531 —1272)=27259

(8 ) Divide 137 294 by 5749 (to 6 places of decimals).

749 : 13 7 2 9 4 0 0 0
5 : 3 8 13 13 14 14 8

: 2 3- 8 8 1 370

or
351 : 13 7 - 2 9 4 0 0 0
6 : 1 5 3 2 5 3 0

23 ’ 88 1370
 1

( 252 )

(9) Divide 53 247 by 4999 (to five places of decimals).

999 • 53. 2 4 7 0 0
4 : 1 4 9 1 1 14 12

• 10. 6 5 1 5 3
or
0 0 r: 5
3. 2 4 7 0 0 0
5 : 0 3 2 0 2 1 0 ___
— — ------------------------ ------- N.B. Better to
• 1 0.6 5 1 5 3 ... divide by 50

( 1 0 ) Divide 13 8462 by 39898 (to 3 places of Decimals).

9898 : 13 8 4 6 2 0 0
3 : 4 9 13 14 0
: 3, 4 7 0 0 3

l
0 1 0 2 : 13. 8 4 6 2 :
ya or

4 : 1 2 3 4 :
ar
3 .4 7 03 9 : N.B. Better to divide by 40

(11) Divide 131 by 19799 (to 5 places of decimals).

9799 : 1 3 1 0 0 0
m

1 : 1 7 11 13 19

'• 0 0 6 6 1 6 .........
ra

or
0201 “ : 1 3 10 0 0
2 : 1 1

: 0 0 6 6 16 N.B. Batter to divide by 2 0

( 1 2 ) Divide 76432 by 67998 (to 5 places of decimals).

7998 : 7 6 4 3 2 0
6 : 1 3 6 7 9 10
: 1 I 2 4 0 3
or
: 7 6 4 3 2 0 0
: 0 1 2 6 7 18
: 1 . 1 2 4 0 3 ......
 ( 263 )
(13) Divide -2537 bv 48329
8329 : 2 5 3 7 0 or 2331 ; .2 6 3 7 0 0
4 : 5 5 10 16 5 : 2 0 3 11
: .0 5 2 4 9 : .0 5 2 4 9 ...

(14) Divide 371628 * 1 1 2 by 12734 (to 5 decimal places).

2734 : 371628- 112
1 : 14 8 7 11 8 12 8 11 11 11
N.B. Better
291839 25868 divide by 12
or
334 : 3 7 1 6 2 8 - 112 00
13 : 11 0 14 3 14 5 8 6

: 2 9 1 8 3 9 2 5 8 6 8

l
ya
N.B. Here we have divided by 13
(15) Divide 4-1326 by 31046 (to 5 decimal places).
1046 4 - 1 3 2 6 0 0 1054:4- 1 3 2 6 0 0
ar
1 1 1 2 4 or 3 : 111111
1 * 3 3 1 1 2 ... :1 - 3 3 11 2 ...
m

(16) Divide "20014 by 137608 (to 5 decimal places).

37608 : 2 0 0 1 4 0 or 42412: 2 0 0 1 4 0

1 : 13689 1 : 1 2 1 0
ra

1 4 6 44 ... : • 1 4 5 44
N-B. Better divide by 13
(17) Divide .0034147 by 814256321 (to 6 decimal places).
14256321 : 0 0 3 4 1 4 7
8 : 3 2 9 5
: 0 0 0 0 419
N.B. The Vinculum method is always available but will not
make much difference. In fact, it may prove stiffer.
(18) Divide -200103761 by 9371836211 (to 3 places).
371836211 •2 0 0 1 0 3 7 6 1
9 2 5 7 7
0 2 1 3 5 ...
 ( 254 )

(19) Divide 74. 5129 by 9314

314 : 74 - 5 1 2 9 0 0 0 0

9 : 2 1 3 0 9 9 9 9
8 - 0 0 0 0 0 966

(2 0 ) Divide 71324 by 23145

3145 : 7 : 1 3 2 4 or 145 : 71 : 3 2 4
2 : : 1 2 4 4 23 : : 2 20 6 18
: 3 : 0 8 1 ... : 3 : 0 8 1

(2 1 ) Divide 137426 by 743-2x1 '242 X 80'04 (to 4 places of

decimals).
432 13 7 : 4 2 6 0 0 0
7 6 : 7 11 7 5 4 8

l
184 : 9 1 1 1 9
42
ya 6 12 15 15 7 11
1 2 14 8 8 8 17
ar
004 6 4 0 4 9
8 1• 8 6 0 0 9
—1 - 8 6 0 1 (approximately)
m
ra
 Ch a p t e r XXVIII
AUXILIARY FRACTIONS
In our exposition of vulgar fractions and decimal fractions,
we have so far been making use of processes which help to
give us the exact results in each case. And. in so doing, we
have hitherto (generally) followed the current system whereby
multiplications and divisions by powers of ten are mechanically
effected by the simple device of putting the decimal point
backwards or forwards (as the case may be).
Conventional Method
For instance, we manipulate the decimal point thus :
(2)39=3^. ( 3 ) i l = LI-
800 70 7 130 13
8 5

l
ya
(4) 3741 _*3741 . and (5) 97654 __ *0097654
110000 11 ’ 90000000 9
But after this has been done, the other operations—of
ar

actual division etc.,—have had to be carried out in the usual

manner.
Auxiliary Fractions
m

There are certain Vedic processes, however, by which,

with the aid of what we call SAHAYAKS (AUXILIARY
ra

fractions), the burden of the subsequent operations is also consi­

derably lightened and the work is splendidly facilitated.
First Type
The first (and commonest) type thereof is a very simple
and easy application of our self-same old friend the Ekadhika
Purva. And the whole modus operandi is to replace the Deno­
minator by its Ekadhika (i.e. to drop the last digit and increase
the penultimate one by 1 ) and make a consequential alteration
in the division-procedure (as in the case of other Ekadhika
operations).
N.B. ;— The student will remember that, in these operations,
the remainder at each step (of a division) ‘s not prefixed
to a series of zeroes from the right-hand side, but to
each quotient-digit.
 { 256 )

Auxiliary Fractions'(A.F.) (First type)

(1) for the Auxiliary fraction is J
^=-052631578/947368421
(2) for jg-, the A.F. is J
»V = l m ^ “03448275862068/96551724137931
(3) for f£ AF is 3-7/6
(4) for AF is
(5 ) for I f , A F is V -,
( 6 ) for AF i® T3
(7) for xiff) 'A.® tV
( 8 ) for x i* , A F = * ^
(9) for XYA> A F = i xT^

l
( 1 0 ) for TV»V» AF is
( 1 1 ) for * JJfr, AF ^
*
ya
( 1 2 ) for xs5 v/W> AF is ~0TV -
ar
(13) tor s^VW’ AF is •p-°T5- '-
(14) for xsWs-???* A F = ? 5 JW i
(15) for AF ===i&SiytJZS.
m

(16) for H |||, A F =

in the above* cases, the first eight denominators end in
ra

a single nine ; the remaining eight terminate in 2, 3, 4, 3, 4, ,6 , 7

and 4 nines respectively. The question now is : Does it stand
to reason that the Ekadhika should be the same in * and in
(irrespective of the difference in the number of nines) ?
That would be tantamount to declaring that the same (signi­
ficant) numerator (ordividend) with two different denominators
(or divisors) will yield the same quotient! And that would be
palpably absurd !
Yes ; the objection is perfectly valid ; and the relevant
Sutra has surmounted this difficulty beforehand, by providing
for groups of quotient-digits (to which the remainder at each
stage of the mental division should be prefixed)! And that
Solves the whole problem.
 Modus Operandi

For instance, let us take the sixteenth example supra

(namely, whose A.F. is and whose denominator
ends in four nines) :
Here, F is |||||; and AF is and we have to make
5 (in lieu of 4 9 9 9 9 ) our working divisor. As we have dropped
4 nines from the original denominator and have 5 as our Ekd­
dhika in the Denominator of the Auxiliary fraction, we have
to divide the numerator of the latter in bundles, so to say, of
4 digits each by 5 ; and, whatever remainder there is, has to be
prefixed not to any particular quotient-digit but to the bundle
just already reached.
Thus, we take up 2*1863 to start with and divide it by 5.
l
ya
W e get r5) 2 - 1863
*4372 as the first
[,Q = *4372 — R = 3
quotient-group and 3 as the remainder. We prefix this remain­
ar

der to that group and say :

•4372 and we divide this dividend (namely, 34372)
3 by the same divisor 5 ; and we g e t :
m

.4372 : 6874 5374

3 : 2 4
i.e. 6874 is the second quotient-group ; and 2 is the second
ra

remainder, which therefore we prefix to the second quotient

group. And we continue this process with as many groups as
we need.
Thus we have : *4372, 6874, 5374, 9074 and so on
3 2 4 4
(to any number, or tens, or hundreds or thousands etc., of Deci­
mal places) !
The PROOF hereof is very simple :
OOOl : 2 1863 000
 ( 288 )

N.B. :—The prefixed remainders are not parts of the quotient

but only prefixes to the quotient-group in question
and are therefore to be dropped out of the answer!
This is a simple method by which we avoid divisions by
long big divisors and have small and easy denominators to
deal with.
The student will note that division by big denominators
(with a continuous series of zeroes on the right-hand side) and
division by the Ekadhika (with the prefixing of the remainder
at each step) yield the same result! And this is why the Auxi­
liary Fraction scheme has been incorporated for lightening the
burden of long big divisions.

l
A few more examples are given below :
ya
( 1 ) Express J5 in its decimal shape.
29
Here, . a F _*^
ar
29 •* 3
A F = *20689655172413 l
79310344827586 J
m

(2 ) F = — * A F = — / . E==-79775280898 etc., etc.

v' 89 9
(3 ) F — 1 7 • AF — * *1 2 3 0 215827.........
ra

1 7 2
V' 139 ” 14 3 3 403
(±\ F = — • AF — 9 8 5474860335, 1955.......
K9 179 * * 18
3 . F = 023255813953488...
[ ' 43 129 ” 13
(6) F —17/43—51/129 ,\ •*. F = 395 348^837

m F = — = — ‘ AF= — / - F = - 246 57534......

1 73 219 ' ‘ 22
iq\ p_53^ • AF—' 53 F = 06 63 32 91 61 45 18...
W 799 ' ‘ 8 5 2 7 4 3 1
^ 5 . ;—The upper row (*06633291614518..... .) is the answer
and the lower one (5 2 7 4 3 1...... ) is a mere scaffol­
ding and goes out.
 ( 259 )

(9) F = ~ •A 1 F== 01 66 85 20 57
' 899 * a 6 7 1 5 7

(10) F = T | S A F -^ ••• * = 00 11 11 72 8 7 ...

1799 18 2 2 13 15 6

1111 F = l ^ = . — • AF=S 42 91 84 54 93 56 22
V ; 233 699 " f 6 5 3 6 3 1 2
3 1 ............
5

17— 444 • A F = l 4l i - ' - F = 031 716 551 182...

13999 ” * 14 10 1 2 3

(1 3 ) f f — 97017 ' A F = 0097017

29999999 ’' 3
F = 0032339/ 0010779/ 6670259 etc., etc.
0 2 2

l
The student will have noted that the denominators in all
ya
the above cases ended in 9 (or 3 which could be so multiplied
as to yield an easy multiple ending in 9). But what about
those ending in 1 which would have to be multiplied by 9 for
ar

this purpose and would, therefore, aw already pointed out (in

the chapter on Recurring Decimals) yield a rather unmanageable
Ekddhika ? is there any provision for this kind of tractions ?
m

Yes ; there is. And this takes us on to the second type of

Auxiliary fractions.
ra

Auxiliary Fractions (Second Type)

If and when F has a denominator ending in 1 , drop the 1
and DECREASE the numerator by unity. This is the required
second type of Auxiliary Fractions. Thus,
(1 ) for 3/61, A F = 2 /60 — ' f
(2) for 36/61, AF=35/'60=3 '5/6
(3) for 28/71, A F = 2 7/7 0 = 2-7/7
(4) for 73/91, A F = 7 2/9 0 = 7 ;2/9
(5) for 2 /1 2 1 , A F = l/1 2 0 = ‘ l / 1 2
(6 ) for 14/131, AF=13/130=1 3/13
(7) for 1/301, AF=0/300 = -0 0 /3
(8 ) for 1/901, A F = 0 /9 0 0 = ‘ 00/9
(9) for 172/1301, AF=171/1300=1 71/13
 ( 260 )

(10) for 27 43/7001, AF=2742/7000=2 •742/7

( 1 1 ) for 6163/8001, AF=6162/8000=6*162/8
( 1 2 ) for 1768/9001, A F = 1767/9000=1 *767/9
(13) for 56/16001, AF=55/16000= 055/16
(14) for 50/700001, A F = 49/700000= *00049/7
(15) for 2175/80000001, A F=2174/80000000= *0002174/8
(16) for 1/900000001, AF=0/900000000= *00000000/9

Modus operandi
The principles, the prefixing (to the individual quotient-
digits or to groups of quotient-digits) etc., and other details are
the same as in the Ekadhika Auxiliary fraction. BUT the
procedure is different, in a very important (nay, vital) particular.

l
ya
And this is that after the first division (or group-division is over)
we prefix the remainder not to each quotient-digit but to its
COMPLEMENT from NINE and carry on the division in this
ar
way all through.
An illustrative instance will clarify this :
Let F be — AF= - = — 2
m

31 30 3
(i) We divide 1.2 by 3 and set 4 down as the first quotient­
digit and 0 as the first remainder. *4
ra

(ii) We then divide not 04 but 05 (the complement of 4

from 9) by 3 and put 1 and 2 as the second quotient­
digit and the second remainder respectively. There­
fore we have *4 1
0 2
(iii) We take now, not 2 1 but 28 as our dividend, divide it
by 3 and g e t: •4 1 9
0 2 1
(iv) Thus, dividing 1 0 by 3 , we have : 4 19 3
9 0 - 2 1 1 and
so on, until finally our chart reads :
F (i.e. J f ) = * 4 1 9 3 5 4 8 3 7 0 9 6 etc., etc. !
0 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 02 2 2
 ( 261 )

Always, therefore, remember to take the complement (from

9) of each quotient-digit (and not the quotient-digit itself) for
the purpose of further division, subtraction etc. This is the
whole secret of the second type of Auxiliary Fraction.

Some more illustrative examples are given hereunder :

(1)1=1. .-.A F = ±

F— 0 2 4 3 9/0 lSo, this is a definite recurring

0 1 1 3 0/0 J decimal.

(2 ) F = ~ AF=—
71 7

l
F = -9 8 5 9 1 5 4 9 2 9 5 7 7 4 6 4 7 8 8 7 3 2 3...
ya
64613362645534356652126

✓ qvtf_91 . r t J ’O F = '5 3 2 1 6 3 7 4 2 6
W 17l 5 3 2 10 6 12 7 4 11 15
ar

j,_ 1 0 _ 3 0 . ^ p _ 2 ' 9 3 7 0/3 Evidently a re-

—27 81 * " 8 ~ 5 0 2/5 curring decimal.
m

^ _ 131 . Ap— 1 ‘ 3 0 (with groups of 2 digits)

ra

F = 1 8 6 8 75 89 15 83.......
4 5 6 1 5 3
/«\ T7_14°° . *Tji_13 *99 (with two-digit groups)
( ' 1401 ' ‘ 14
F = 99 92 8 6 2 2 41
13 12 3 5 3
(7\ -p _ 243 . ^ j,_ 2 -4 2 (with groups of two digits)
1 6 0 1 ‘ ‘ _ 16
F = 15 17 80 13 74 14 1 1 61 79.......
2 12 2 11 2 1 9 12 4
„ _5 __ 15 . »ji __ 14 (with groups of two digits)
(8)
67 201 " 2
F = -07 46 26 86 56
0 0 1 1 1
 ( 262 )

/g\ p _2743 . »p__2-742 (with 3-digit groups)

1 ' 7001 ’ ’ 7
*391 801 171 261 248 393 086
5 1 1 1 2 0 4
P roof: 001 : 2 - 742 999
7 5

5391

9*2 .\ F = 4 0 2/5 9 7

23 0
OR F — — (with three-digit groups)
77 1001 ’ * 1

l
F=* 402/597 (evidently a recurring decimal)
ya
(n ) 29 . AF— (with three-digit groups)
' 9 15001 ‘ * 15
ar
/. F = 001 933 204 453 036 etc., etc.
13 3 6 0
(T9 \ p__ 137 # iip_*000136 (with 6 -digit groups)
' 13000001 ‘ * 13
m

F= 0 0 0 0 1 0 : 538460: 727810 : 713245 etc., etc.

6 :9 :0 :4
ra

Other Astounding Applications

Yes ; but what about still other numbers which are neither
immediately below nor immediately above a ten-power base
or a multiple of ten etc., (as in the above cases) but a bit remoter
therefrom ? Well; these too have been grandly catered for, in
the shape of a simple application of the Anurupya Sutra, whereby,
after the pre-fixing of each’ Remainder to the quotient-digit
in question, we have to add to (or subtract from) the dividend
at every step, as many times the quotient-digit as the divisor
(i.e. the denominator) is below (or above) the NORMAL which,
in the case of all these Auxiliary fractions, is counted as
ending, not in zero or a number of zeroes but in 9 or a series
of nines!
 ( 263 )

For example, let F be and suppose we have to express

this vulgar fraction in its decimal shape (to, say, 1 0 places of
decimals).

Lest the student should have, in the course or these

peregrinations into such very simple and easy methods of work,
forgotten the tremendous difference between the current method
and the Vedic method and thereby deprived himself of the
requisite material for the purpose of comparison and contrast,
let us, for a brief while, picture the two methods to ourselves
side by side and see what the exact position is.

According to the Vedic method, the process wholly mental

is as follows :

l
F = | f , *■* A.F.=^V6'"* But 6 8 being one less than 69 (the
ya
normal ending in 9) we shall have to add to each dividend, the
quotient-digit in question. Thus
ar
(i) when we divide 1 *5 by 7, we get 2 and 1 1*5
as our first quotient-digit 7
and our first remainder. *2
m

(ii) our second dividend will not be 1 2 but

1 2 + 2 = 1 4 ; and by division of that by *2 2
ra

7 , our second Q and R are 2 and 0 . 1 0

(iii) our next dividend is 0 2 + 2 = 0 4 ; and *2 2 0

this gives us 0 and 4 as Q and R. 1 ®*

(iv) our fourth dividend is 40+0, giving us *2 2 0 5
5 and 5 as our fourth Q and R. 1 0 4 5
(v) So, our next dividend is 5 5+ 5 (= 60 ) ; *2 2 0 5 8
and our Q and R are 8 and 4. 1 0 4 5 4

We can proceed on these lines to as many places of decimals

as we may need. And, in the present case (wherein 16 decimal-
places have been asked for), we toss off digit after digit (mentally)
and say :
F = * 2 2 0 5 8 8 2 3 5 2 9 4 1 1 7 6 etc., etc.
1 0 4 5 4 0 2 3 1 6 1 0 1 5 3 2
 ( 204 )

Over against this, let us remind ourselves of the current

method for answering this question:
68)15-0 (-2205882352941176 etc., etc
136
140
136
400
340
600
544
560
544
160
136

l
ya
240
204
ar
360
340
—200
136
m

~640
612
ra

280
272

80
68
120
68
520
476
440
408
Alongside of this cumbrous 16-step process, let us Once again
put down the whole working by the Vedic method and say :
If ( I f ) — - 2 2 0 5 8 8 2 3 5 2 9 4 1 1 7 6 4 etc., etc.
1 0 4 5 4 0 2 3 1 6 1 0 1 5 3 2 4
 ( 265 )

A few more illustrative examples are given hereunder:

( 1 ) Express 101/138 in its decimal shape ( 2 0 places),
(i) Routine Method—
138)101• 0(* 73188405797101449275
966
440
414
260
138
1220
1104
1160
1104
560

l
552
ya 800
690
1100
ar
966
1340
1232
980
m

966
140
138
ra

200
138
620
552
680
552
1280
1242
380
276
1040
966
740
690
50

34
 ( 266 )

(ii) Vedic Method.

(with one below the normal 139)
F = -7 3 1 8 8 4 0 5 7 9 7 1 0 1 4 4 9 2 7 4 etc.
3 2 12 10 4 0 8 10 128 0 0 2 6 6 122 10 6 5
N ote:—More-than-one-digit quotient if any, should
be carried over (as usual) to the left.
(2 ) Conventional method:
97)73- 0(* 75257731958762886597 etc., etc.
679
510
485
250 740
194 679
560
485
750
y al 610
582
280
679 194
ar
710 860
679 776
m

310 840
291 776
190 640
ra

97 582
H io 580
873 485
570 950
485 873
850 770
776 679
91
(ii) Vedic (at-sigM) method
Data: F — AF = V S (but with 2 below the normal 99).
.% Add twice the Q-digit at each step.
Actual Working:
\ F = 3. 7 5 2 5 7 7 3 1 9 5 8 7 6 2 8 8 6 5 9 7 etc., etc.
1 5 6 5 1 1 9 3 7 5 4 1 8 6 4 4 8 5 7
 ( 267 )

(3) Express as a decimal (2 0 places).

Current method—
127)17 0 (-13385826771653543306 etc., etc,
127
430
381
490
381
7 o9o
1016
740
635
1050
l
ya
1016
340
254
ar

860 450
762 381
m

980 690
889 635
ra

910 550
889 508
210 420
127 381
830 390
762 381
680 900
635 882
18

(ii) Vedic at-sight method—

y A F =Y ^ (but with 2 below the normal 129)
Double the Q-digit to be added at every step.
.\ F = 1 3 3 8 5 8 2 6 7 7 1 6 5 3 5 4 3 3 0 6 etc.
4 4 10 5 9 1 8 8 7 0 8 5 3 6 4 3 3 0 9 12
 ( 268 )

(4) Express |||f in decimal form (21 decimal places)

(i) Usual method—
8997)5236-0(•581 /971 /76S/367/233/522/285 etc., etc.
44985
73750
71976
What a TREMEND-
17740
8997 DOUS mass and
mess of multi­
87430 21010 plications, sub-
80973 17994
64570 30160
62979 26991

l
15910
ya
8997
31690
26991
69130 46990
62979 44985
ar
61510 20050
53982 17994
m

75280 20560
71976 17994
33040 25660
ra

26991 17994
60490 76660
53982 71976
65080 46840
62979 44985
1855
(ii) Vedic at-sight method :
5236 5-236 (but with 2 below the
F= AF=
8997 9 normal 8999 and also
with groups of 3 digits
at a time).
Add twice the Q-digit at every step.
F = -581 : 971 : 768 : 367 : 233 : 522 : 285 etc., etc.
7 :4 : 1 :1 ;4 :1 :1
 ( 269 )

(5) Express § £ f f | as a decimal (16 places)

Conventional method
49997)21863'0(* 4372/8623/7174/2302/etc., etc.
199988
186420
149991
364290
349979
143110
99994
431160
399976
311840 al
299982
118580 What a horrible
y
99994 mess ?
ar

185860
149991
358690
m

349979
87110
ra

49997
371130
349979
211510
199998
115120
99994
151260
149991

126900
99994

26906
 (ii) Vedic At-sigkt method—•
.. -p_21863 . i i r _ 2 1 8 6 3
49997 ** 5
(with 2 below the normal 49999 and with
groups of four digits each).
Add double the Q-digit at every step)
62 71 4 2 30
F = 4372 : 8 5(12) 3 : 6(11) 73 : (12) 2 (10) 2
3 : 1 :4 :4
N .B .: very carefully that the extra (or surplus i.e. left-hand
side) parts of Q-digits have been “carried over” to the
left.
This excess is due to the additional multiplication and
can be got over in the manner just indicated. A method for

l
ya
avoiding this difficulty altogether is also available but will
be dealt with at a later stage.
(6) Express as a decimal (eight places)
ar

Current method—
76)17-0 (-22368421 etc., etc.
152
m

180
152 N.B.—Note 84 : 21 :: 4 : 1 .
ra

280
228
520
456
640 Even this is bad enough.
608
 { 271 )

(ii) Vedic At-sight method:

V .*• A F = ^ 1- (but with 3 less than the
normal 79)
Thrice the Q-digit is to he added at every step.
F = * 2 2 3 6 8 4 2 1 etc., etc.
1 2 4 4 0 0 0 0

(7) Express as a decimal (1 2 places)

(i) Usual method—
59998)17125•0( •2854/2618/0872
119996

512540
479984

l
ya
325560
299990
255700
ar
239992

157080
119996
m

370840
359988
ra

108520
59998

485220
479984

523600
479984

436160
419986

161740
119996

41744
 ( 272 )

(ii) Vedic At-sight method :•

.. y _17125 . AF„1 -7 12 5 (with 1 less the
59998 ** 6 normal and with
4-digit groups)
only one Q-digit is to be added.
F = *2854 : 2618 : 0872 etc., etc.
1 :0 :4
These examples should suffice to bring vividly home to
the student the extent and magnitude of the difference between
the current cumbrous methods and the Vedic at-sight one-line
process in question.
Yes ; but what about other numbers, in general, which are
nowhere near any power or multiple of ten or a “ normal” deno-
minator-divisor ending in 9 or a series of nines ? Have they

l
ya
been provided for, too ?
Yes ; they have. There are methods whereby, as explained
in an earlier chapter (the one dealing with recurring decimals)
ar

we can easily transform any miscellaneous or non-descript

denominator in question—by simple multiplication etc.,—to
the requisite standard form which will bring them within the
m

jurisdiction of the Auxiliary Fractions hereinabove explained.

In fact, the very discovery of these Auxiliaries and of
ra

their wonderful utility in the transmogrification of frightful

-looking denominators of vulgar fractions into such simple and
easy denominator-divisors must suffice to prepare the scienti­
fically-minded seeker after Knowledge, for the marvellous
devices still further on in the offing.
We shall advert to this subject again and expound it
still further, in the next two subsequent chapters (dealing with
DIVISIBILITY and the application of the Ekadhika Purva etc.,
as positive and negative OSCULATORS in that context).
 Chaptek X X IX

DIVISIBILITY AND SIMPLE OSCULATORS

We now take up the interesting (and intriguing) question
as to how one can determine before-hand whether a certain
given number (however long it may be) is divisible by a certain
given divisor and especially as to the Vedic processes which
can help us herein.
The current system deals wth this subject but only in an
ultra-superficial way and only in relation to what may be teimed
the most elementary elements thereof. Into details of these
(including divisibility by 2, 5, 10, 3, 0, 9, 18* 11, 22 and so on),

al
we need not now enter (as they are well-known even to the
mathematics-pupils at a very early stage of their mathematical
study.) We shall take these for granted and start with the
y
intermediate parts and then go on to the advanced portions of
ar
the subject.
The Osculators
As we have to utilise the “^ t s ” (Ve$anas =Osculators)
m

throughout this subject (of divisibility), we shall begin with a

simple definition thereof and the method of their application.
ra

Owing to the fact that our familiar old friend the Ekddhika
is the first of these osculators (i.e. the positive osculator), the
task becomes all the simpler and easier. Over and above the
huge number of purposes which the Ekddhika has already been
shown to fulfil, it has the further merit of helping us to readily
determine the divisibility (or otherwise) of a certain given
dividend by a certain given divisor.
Let us, for instance, start with our similar familiar old
friend or experimental-subject (or shall we say, “ Guinea-pigs”
the number 7. The student need hardly be reminded that the
Ekddhika for 7 is derived from 7 x 7 = 4 9 and is therefore 5.
The Ekddhika is a clinching test for divisibility ; and the process
by which it serves this purpose is technically called Vestana
or “ Osculation” .
35
 ( 274 )

Suppose we do not know and have to determine whether

2 1 is divisible by 7. We multiply the last digit (i.e. 1 ) by the
Ekadhika (or Positive Osculator i.e. 5) and add the product
(i.e. 5 ) to the previous digit (i.e. 2 ) and thus get 7. This process
is technically called “ Osculation” . And, if the result of the
osculation is the divisor itself (or a repetition of a previous
result), we say that the given original dividend (2 1 ) is divisible
by 7.
A trial chart (for 7) will read as follows :
14; x 5 + 1 = 2 1 ; and l x 5 + 2 = 7 .-.YES.
4

21 (already dealt w ith);

28 ; 8 X 5 + 2 = 4 2 ; 2 X 5 + 4 = 1 4 (already dealt with)
35 ; 5 X 5 + 3 = 2 8 (already dealt w ith);

al
42 (already dea^t w ith);
49; 9 x 5 + 4 = 4 9 . (Repetition mmns divisibility).
y
56 ; 6 x 5 + 5 = 3 5 (already dealt w ith);
63 ; 3 x 5 + 6 = 2 1 (already dealt w ith);
ar
70 ; O x 5 + 7 = 7 .\ YES
77 ; 7 X 5 + 7 = 4 2 (already done);
84 ; 4 x 5 + 8 = 2 8 (already ov er);
m

91 ; 1 x 5 + 9 = 1 4 (already dealt with) ;

98 ; 8 x 5 + 9 = 4 9 (already done);
ra

Now let us try and test, say, 1 1 2 .

112; 2 x 5 + 1 = 1 1 ; 1 1 X 5 + 1 = 5 6 .\ YES.
OR 2X 5+ 11= 21 YES.
We next try and test for 13 ; and we find the repetitions
more prominent there. The Ekadhika is 4. Therefore we go
on multiplying leftward by 4. Thus,
13 ; 3 X 4 + 1 = 1 3
26; 6 X 4 + 2 = 2 6
39; 9x4+ 3= 39 The repetition etc., is uniformly
5 2; 2 x 4 + 5 = 1 3 there and in correct sequence
65 ; 5 X 4 + 6 = 2 6 too (i.e. 13, 26, 3 9 )! YES.
78; 8 X 4 + 7 = 3 9
91 ; 1 X 4 + 9 = 1 3
104; 4 X 4 + 1 0 = 2 6
 ( 278 )

Examples of the Osculation Procedure (Vestana)

A few examples will elucidate the process:
(1) 7 continually osculated by 5 gives 35, 28, 42, 14, 21
and 7.
(2) 5 so osculated by 7 gives 35, 38, 59, 6 8 , 62,- 20, 2 and
so on.
(3) 9 (by 7) gives 63, 27, 51, 12, 15 etc.
(4) (by 16) gives 128, 140, 14 etc.
8

(5)15 (by 14) gives 71, 21, 16 etc.

(6 )
18 (by 12) gives 97, 93, 45, 84, 54, 53, 41, 16 etc.
(7)36 (by 9) gives 57, 6 8 , 78, 79, 8 8 , 80, 8 etc.
46 (by 3) gives 22, 8 etc., etc.
(8 )
(9)49 (by 16) gives 148, 142, 46, 100, 10, 1 etc., etc.
(10)
l
237 (by 8 ) gives 79, 79 etc., and is divisible by 79.
ya
(11) 719 (by 9) gives 152, 33, 30, 3 etc., etc.
(12) 4321 (by 7) gives 439, 106, 52, 19, 64, 34, 31, 10, 1 etc.
(13) 7524 (by 8 ) gives 784, 110, 11, 9 etc., etc.
ar

(14) 10161 (by 5) gives 1021, 107, 45, 29, 47, 39, 48, 44,
24, 22, 12, 11, 6 etc.
(15) 35712 (by 4) gives 3579, 393, 51, 9 etc.
m

(16) 50720 (by 12) gives 5072, 531, 65, 6 6 , 78, 103, 46,
etc., etc.
ra

N.B. :— We need not carry this process indefinitely on. We

can stop as soon as we reach a comparatively small
number which gives us the necessary clue as to
whether the given number is divisible (or not) by the
divisor whose Ekadhika we have used as our osculator !
Hence the importance of the Ekadhika.

Rule for Ekadhikas

( 1 ) For 9, 19, 29, 39 etc., (all ending in 9), the Ekadhikas
are 1, 2, 3, 4 etc.
( 2 ) For 3,13,23,33 etc., (all ending in 3) multiply them by
3 ; and you get 1 , 4, 7, 1 0 etc., as the Ekadhikas.
(3) For 7,17,27, 37 etc., (all ending in 7) multiply them by
7 ; and you obtain 5,12,19. 26, etc., as the Ekadhikas.
 ( 276 )

(4) For 1, 11, 21, 31, etc., (all ending in 1), multiply them
by 9 ; and you get 1, 10,19, 28 etc., as the Ekadhikas.
Osculation by own Ekadhika
Note that the osculation of any number by its own Eka­
dhika will (as in the case of 7 and 13) go on giving that very
number or a multiple thereof. Thus,
(1) 23 osculated by 7 (its Ekadhika) gives 7 x 3 + 2 = 2 3 ;
46 (osculated by 7) gives 7 x 6 + 4 = 4 6 ;
69 (similarly) gives 7 x 9 + 6 = 6 9 ;
92 (likewise) gives 2 x 7 + 9 ^ 2 3 ;
115 (similarly) gives 7 x 5 + 1 1 = 4 6 And so on.

Now, 276 (osculated by 7) (by way of testing for divisi­

l
bility by 23) gives 7 x 6 + 2 7 = 6 9 which again gives 69!
ya
YES. Thus, all the multiples of 23 fulfil this test i.e. of
osculation by its Ekadhika (7). And this is the whole secret
of the Vestana sub-Sutra.
ar

Modus Operandi of Osculation

Whenever a question of divisibility comes up, we can
adopt the following procedure. Suppose, for instance, we wish
m

to know—without actual division—whether 2774 is divisible

by 19 (or not). We put down the digits in order as shown
ra

below. And we know that the Ekadhika (osculator) is 2.

(i) We multiply the last digit (4) by 2, add the product
(8) to the previous digit 7 and put
the total (15) down under the second
right-hand digit.
(ii) We multiply that ,15 by 2, add that 30 to the 7 on
the upper row, cast out the nineteens 2 7 7 4
(from that 37) and put down the 3715
remainder 18 underneath that 7. (18)
N.B. — This casting out of the nineteens may be
more easily and speedily achieved by first osculating the
15 itself, getting 11, adding it to the 7 ^ ^ ±
(to the left-hand) on the top-row and ig J5
putting the 18 down thereunder.
 ( 277 )

(iii) We then osculate that 18 with the 2 to the left on

the upper row and get 38 ; or we may osculate the
18 itself, obtain 17, add the 2 and get
19 as the final' osculated result. ^ ^ ^ ^
And, as 19 is divisible by 19, we say
the given number (2774) is also divisible thereby.

This is the whole process ; and our chart says :

By 19 ? f 2 7 7 4 1 ,\ YES.
•\ The osculator is 2 \ 18 15 J

OR Secondly, we may arrive at the same result-as effectively

but less spectacularly by means of a continuous series of oscula­
tions of the given number (2774) by the osculator (2) as here­

l
inbefore explained. And we can say :
ya
Y 2774 (osculated by the osculator 2) gives us 285. 38
and 19
ar
2774 is divisible by 19.
N.B. :—The latter method is the shorter but more mechanical
and cumbrous of the two ; and the former procedure
m

looks neater and more pictorially graphic, nay,

spectacular. And one can follow one’s own choice
ra

as to which pocedure should be preferred.

N ote:—Whenever, at any stage, a bigger number than the
divisor comes up, the same osculation-operation can
always be performed.

Some more specimen examples are given below :

(1) By 29 ? The osculator is 3. j 3 2 8 9 6 ? .*. No.
I 27 8 31 27 \
OR E (osculated by 3) gives 3307 351, 38, 27, etc. No.
(2) By 29 ? The osculator is 3. f 9 3 1 4 81 YES
t 29 26 27 28 J

OR The osculation-results are 9338, 957, 116 and 29

.\ YES
 ( 278 )

(3) By 29 ? The osculator is 3. I 2 4 3 4 5 2 1 ) YES

| 29 9 21 6 20 5- \
OR The osculation-results are 243455, 24360, 2436 261
and 29 YES
(4) By 39? The osculator is 4. I 4 9 1 4 \ YES
j 39 38 17 J
OR The osculation-results are 507, 78 and 39 YES
(5) By 49? / . The osculator is 5. ( 5 3 3 2

] 51^ 19 13 f .. No.
C (10) )
OR The osculation-results are 543, 69, 51 and 1 0 No
( 6 ) By 59? / . The osculator is 6 . f 1 9 1 5 7 3 1 .*. YES
I 59 49 46 37 25 J
OR The osculation-results are 19175, 1947, 236 and 59

l
ya
YES
(7) By 59 ? The osculator is
.f 1 62 5 6 7 \.\ YES
I 59 49 57 48 J
ar
OR The osculation-results are 1298, 177 and 59 YES.
(8 ) By 59 ? .\ The osculator is 6 . f 4 0 1 7 9 1 \ No.
t 47 17 52 38 15 J
m

OR Theosculation-results are 40185, 4048, 452 and 57 /.N o.

(9 ) By 7 9 ? The osculator i s 8 . f 6 3 0 9 4 8 2 ll .\ No.
ra

113 70 38 64 76 9 10 J
OR The osculation-results are 6309490, 630949, 63166,
6364, 6 6 8 , 130 and 13 No.

( 1 0 ) By 43 ? .•. The osculator is 13. f 1 4 0 6 ll YES

1129 119 118 19 J
OR The osculation-results are 1419, 258 and 129 .-. YES
( 1 1 ) By 53? .'.The osculator is 16. f 2 , 1 9 5 3 ) / . No.
t 149 39 62 53 J
OR The osculation-results ar 2243, 272 and 59 No.

( 1 2 ) By 179? The osculator is 18.(7 1 45 5 0 1 ).\ YES

1179109 6 2015018 j
OR The osculation-results are 714568, 71600, 7160, 716
and 179 YES
 ( 279 )

(13) Determine whether 5293240096 is divisible by 139 (or not)

(A) By the current method (just by way of contrast):
139)5293240096(380864
417
1123
1112
1124
1112
1200
1112
889
834
556

l
556
ya ~ 0 YES.
(B) By the Vedic method:
ar
By 139 ? The Ekadhika (osculator) is 14.
J5 2 9 3 2 4 0 0 9 6 ? YES
1 139 89 36 131 29 131 19 51 93 \
OB The osculation-results are 529324093, 52932451
m

5293259 529451, 52959, 5421, 556 and 139 YES

Note :—In all the above cases, the divisor either actually ended
ra

in 9 or could— by suitable multiplication— be made to

yield a product ending in 9 (for the determination of
the required Ekadhika or Osculator in each case).
But what about the numbers ending in 3, 7 and 1 (whose
Ekadhika may generally be expected, to be a bigger
number) ? Is there a suitable provision for such
numbers being dealt with (without involving bigger
Ekadhi]tfi-m\i\xi]A'i<iTs) ?
Y e s ; there is ; and this we proceed to deal with.

The Negative Osculator

This is an application of the Pardvartya Sutra and is ca lled
the Negative OscuJator because it is a process not of addition
 ( 280 )

(as in the case o f o f the Ekddhika) but of Subtraction (leftward).

And this actually means a consequent alternation, of plus and
minus.
Examples of the Negative Osculation Process
( 1 ) 36 thus osculated by 9, gives 3—5 4 = —51.
(2) 7(osculated by 5) gives 0—3 5 = — 35
(3) 35712 (osculated by 4) will yield 8—3571 = —3563.

How toDetermine the Negative Osculator

Just as the Ekddhika (the positive Vestand) has been duly
defined and can be correctly ascertained, similarly the Negative
Osculator will also require to be determined by means of a
proper definition and has been so defined with a view to proper
recognition.

l
ya
It consists of two clauses :
(i) In the case of all divisors ending in 1 , simply drop the
on e; and
ar

(ii) in the other cases, multiply so as to get 1 as the last

digit of the product (i.e. 3 by 7, 7 by 3 and 9 by 9 );
and then apply the previous sub-clause (i.e. drop the 1 ).
m

N ote:—For facility of symbolisation, the positive and the

negative osculators will be represented by P and Q
ra

respectively.
Examples of Negative Osculators
( 1 ) For 1 1 , 2 1 , 31, 41, 51 and other numbers ending
in 1 , Q is 1 , 2 , 3, 4, 5 and so on. [Note that, by
this second type of oscultors, we avoid the big
Ekadhikas (produced by multiplying these numbers
by 9)].
(2 ) For 7, 17, 27, 37, 47, 57 etc., we have to multiply
them by 3 (in order to get products ending in 1 ).
And they will be 2 , 5, 8 , 1 1 , 14, 17 and so on.
(In these cases too, this process is generally cal­
culated to yield smaller multipliers than the
multiplication by 7 is likely to do).
 t 281 )
( 3 ) For 3 , 13, 23, 33, 43, 53 etc., we have to multiply
them by 7 ; and the resultant Negative Osculators
will be 2, 9, 16, 23, 30, 37 etc., (which will generally
be found to be bigger numbers than the Ekddhikas).
(4) For 9, 19, 29, 39, 49, 59 etc., we have to multiply
these by 9 ; and the resultant Negative Osculators
will be 8 , 17, 26, 35, 44, 53 etc., (all of which will
be much bigger than the corresponding Ekddhikas).
Important and Interesting Feature
Note :—A very beautiful, interesting and important feature
about the relationship between F and Q, is that,
whatever the Divisor (D) may be, P +Q =-D . i.e. the
two osculators together invariably add up to the

l
Divisor. And this means that, if one of them is known,
ya
the other is automatically known (being the comple­
ment thereof from the divisor i.e. the Denominator).
Specimen Schedule of Osculators P and Q
ar

Number Multiple for P Multiple for Q P Q Total

1 9 (1 ) 1 0 1
m

3 9 21 I 2 3
7 49 21 5 2 7
9 W 81 1 8 9
ra

11 99 (1 1 ) 10 1 11

13 39 91 4 9 13
17 119 51 12 5 17
19 (19) 171 2 17 19
21 189 (2 1 ) 19 2 21

23 69 161 7 16 23
27 189 81 19 8 27
29 (29) 261 3 26 29
31 279 (31) 28 3 31
33 99 231 10 23 33
37 259 111 26 11 37
39 (39) 351 4 35 39
41 369 (41) 37 4 41
43 129 301 13 30 43
47 329 141 33 14 47
49 (49) 441 5 44 49
51 459 (51) 46 5 51
 ( 282 )

Number Multiple for P Multiple for Q P Q Total

53 159 371 16 37 53
57 399 171 40 17 57
59 (59) 531 6 53 59
61 549 (61) 55 6 61
63 189 441 19 44 63
67 469 201 47 20 67
69 (69) 621 7 62 69
71 639 (71) 64 7 71
73 219 511 22 51 73
77 539 231 54 23 77
79 (79) 711 8 71 79
81 729 (81) 73 8 81

N.B. It will be noted :—

(i) that P +Q always equals D ;

l
(ii) multiples of 2 and 5 are inadmissible for the purposes
of this schedule;
ya
viii) and these will have to be dealt with by dividing
off all the powers of 2 and 5 (which are factors of the
ar
Divisor concerned).
A few sample examples
(1 ) for 59, P is 6 Q = 53
m

(2 ) for 47, Q is 14 P = 33
(3 ) for 53, P is 16 Q = 37
ra

(4) for 71, Q s 7 P = 64

(5 ) for 89, P is 9 Q = 80
(6 ) for 83, P is 25 Q = 58
(7 ) for 91, P is 82 Q= 9
(8 ) for 93, Q is 65 P = 28 P + Q --D throughout
(9 ) for 97, P is 6 8 Q = 29
(1 0 ) for 99, Q is 89 P= 10
(1 1 ) for 1 0 1 , P i s 91 Q= 10
(1 2 ) for 103, Q is 72 P = 31
(13) for 107, P is 75 .\ Q = 32
(14) for 131, Q is 13 P =118
(15) for 151, P is 136 Q = 15
(16) for 2 0 1 , Q is 2 0 P = 181
 ( 288 )

N ote:—( 1 ) If the last digit of a divisor be 3, its P < its Q ;

(2 ) If the last digit be 7, its Q < its P ; and
(3) in the actual working out of the subtractions of the
osculated multiples (for the negative osculators),
the actual result will be an alternationof plus and
minus.
Explanation ( 1 ) In the removal of brackets, a series of subtrac­
tions actually materialises in an alternation of
+ and—-For example,
a _ (b -{c -[d -e = f))]
= a —b + c —d + e.
Exactly similar is the case here.
(2 ) When we divide aw-fb * by (a + b ), the quo­
l
tient consists of a series of terms which are
ya
alternately plus and minus. Exactly the same
is the case here.
ar

Note :— The student will have to carefully remember this alter­

nation of positives and negatives. But the better
thing will be, not to rely on one’s memory at each
m

step but to mark the digits beforehand, alternately, say,

by means of a Vinculum (from right to left), on all the
even-place digits, so that there may be an automatic
ra

safeguard against the possible playing of any pranks by

one’s memory.
Armed with this safeguard, let us now tackle a few illus­
trative instances and see how the plan works out in actual
practice.
( 1 ) By 41 ? The (Negative) Osculator is 4
( 1 6 5 7 6 3 )
i —41 — 1 0 4 31 6 /.Y E S
Or
The osculation-results are 16564, 1640,164 and 0 .*. YES
(2 ) By 31 ? \ Q—-3 6 “o 3 \
J 0 33 9 J .- .Y E S
Or
The osculation-results are 651, 62 and 0 .\ YES.
 ( 284 )
(3) By 41? Q =4 J 1 T 2 3_ 4 \
; 0 10 13 13 ( .-.YES
Or
The osculation-results are 1107, 82 and 0 YES
(4) By 47 ? .'. Q =14 i 1 4 2 1 6 5)
\ 11 102 7 51 64 j .'. NO
Or
The osculation-results are 74146, 7330, 733 and 31 .'. NO
(5) By 51 ? Q =5 f 4" 3 T 3 2* 1 (
I - 5 10 32 18 3 J .'. NO
Or
The osculation-results are 43727, 4337, 398 & 1 .\ NO
(6) By 61? Q =6 f l <T 5 8 1\
Or \ 0 —5l —7 —2 J .'. YES

(7) By 67?

Or
Q =20 J f
y 0 al
The osculation-results are 1952, 183 and 0 .-.YES
f7 f 2 0" 31
J 0 - 1 0 100 5 - 8 1 - 4 60 J .- .Y E S
ar
The osculation-results are 1017060, 101706, 10050, 1005
and 0 YES.
(8) By 91? Q=9 ( 9 8 0 4 5 9 ' 0 F 3 ?
Or I 84 69 49 56 37 44 16 22 \ .-.NO
m

The osculation-results are 98045878, 9804515, 980406

97986, 97441 938 and 21 ,\ NO
ra

(9) By 61 ? .-. Q = 6 H 2 j j 1 3~ 0 5 ' 4 7

Or ( 0 - 1 0 - 2 0 10 53 19 \ ..Y E S
The osculation-results are 1221281, 122122, 12200, 1220,
122 and 0 .\ YES
(10) By 71 ? Q=7 (“8 0 9 0 4 5 ?
Or 1 0 62 19 4 31 \ YES
The osculation-results are 80869, 8023, 781 and 71 .\ YES
(11) By 131 ? .*. Q =13 J 1 3 3 J 9 (T 3 ?
0r 1 0 10 1 20 123 39 J YES
The osculation-results are 133751, 13362, 1310 & 131.'.YES
(12) By 141? .'. Q =14 f 4 8 9 ? 8 ~5 7 ?
\94 87 37 2 41 93 J .'. NO
N.B. But this dividend (yielding the same results) is divisible
by 47 (whose Q is also 14). (9 4 = 4 7 x2 )
 Chapter X X X

DIVISIBILITY
ANB

COMPLEX MULTIPLEX OSCULATORS

The cases so far dealt with are of a simple type, involving
only small divisors and consequently small osculators. What
then about those wherein bigger numbers being the divisors,
the osculators are bound to be correspondingly larger ?
The student-inquirer’s requirements in this direction
form the subject-matter of this chapter. It meets the reeds
in question by formulating a scheme of groups of digits which

l
can be osculated, not as individual digits but in a lump, so to say.
ya
Examples of Multiplex Vestana i.e. (Osculation)
( 1 ) 371 oscillated by 4 for 2 digits at a time, gives 3 +
ar

71 X 4 (=287) and 3—284 ( = —281) for plus oscillation

and minus oscillation respectively.
(2) 1572 osculated by 8 for 2 digits gives 15+576 (=591)
m

and 15—576 ( = —561) respectively.

(3) 8132 osculated by 8 (P and Q) for 2 digits gives 81
ra

+256 (=337) and 81—256 ( = —175) respectively.

(4) 75621 osculated by 5 (P and Q) for 3 digits gives
75+3105 (=3180) and 75—3105 ( = —3030) respec­
tively.
(5) 61845 osculated by 7 (P and Q) for 3-digit groups
gives 61+5915 (=5976) and 61—5915 ( = —5854)
respectively.
(6) 615740 osculated by 8 (P and Q) for 3-digit packets
gives 615+592C (=6535) and 615—5920 ( = —5305)
respectively.
(7) 518 osculated by 8 (P and Q) for 4-digit bundles gives
0+4144 (=4144) and 0—4144 ( = —4144) respectively.
(8) 73 osculated by 8 (P and Q) for five-digit groups yields
0+584 (=584) and 0—584 ( = —584) respectively.
 ( 286 )

(9) 210074 osculated by 8 (Pand Q) for five-digit bundles

give 2+80592 (=80594) and 2—80592 ( = —80590)
respectively.
( 1 0 ) 7531 osculated by 2 (P) for 3 digits gives 7+1062=1069
( 1 1 ) 90145 osculated by 5 (Q) for 3 gives —7 2 5 + 9 0 = —635
(12) 5014112 osculated by 7 (Q) for 4 gives 501—28784
= —28283
(13) 7008942 osculated by 3 (P) for 2 gives 126+70089
=70215
(14) 7348515 osculated by 8 (P) for 3 gives 7348+4120
=11468
(15) 59076242 osculated by 7 (Q) for 2 gives —590762+294
= —590468

l
ya
Categories of Divisors and their Osculators.
In this context, it should be noted that, as there are
ar
various types of divisors* there are consequent differences
as to the nature and type of osculators (positive and/or negative)
which will suit them. They are generally of two categories:
(i) those which end in nine (or a series of nines)
m

[in whch case they come within the jurisdiction

of the • Ekadhika (i.e. the Positive) Osculator]
ra

or, which terminate in or contain series of zeroes

ending in 1 , (in which case they come within the
scope of operations performable with the aid of
the Viparita (i.e. the negative) osculator; and
(ii) those which, by suitable multiplication, yield a
multiple of either of the two sorts described in sub­
section (i) supra and can thus be tackled on that
basis.
The First Type.
We shall deal, first, with the first type of divisors, namely,
those ending in 9 (or a series of nines) or 1 (or a series of zeroes
ending in unity) and explain a technical terminology and
symbology which will facilitate our operations in this context.
 ( 287 )

( 1 ) Let the divisor be 499. It is obvious that its osculator

P is 5 and covers 2 digits. This fact can be easily
expressed in symbolical language by saying : P 2= 5
(2 ) In the case of 1399, it is obvious that our osculator
(positive) is 14 and covers 2 digits P 2=14.
(3 ) As for 1501, Q obviously comes into play, is 15 and
covers 2 digits. In other words, Q2=15.
(4 ) For 2999, P is 3 and covers 3 digits .*. P 3 = 3

(5) For 5001, Q8= 5

(6 ) For 7001, Q8= 7
(7 ) For 79999, P 4 = 8
(8 ) For 119999, P 4 = 1 2
(9) For 800001, Q6 = 8
(1 0 ) For 900001, Q6= 9
l
ya
(1 1 ) For 799999, P 6 = 8
(1 2 ) For 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 , Q7 = 1 2
ar
Correctness of the Symbology
The osculation-process invariably gives us the original
number itself (or a multiple thereof) or zero : For example,
m

(i) 4 9 9 (with P a= 5 ) gives us 4 + 5 (99)=4+495=499

(ii) 1399 (with P 2= 14) gives 13+14 (99)=13+1386=1399
ra

(iii) 1501 (with Q2=15) gives 1 5 x 1 —15=0

(iv) 2999 with P 8 = 3 ) gives 2 + 3 (999)=2+2997=2999
(v) 5001 (with Qs= 5 ) gives 5 X 1 —5 = 0
(vi) 7001 (with Q8 = 7 ) gives 7 x 1 —7 = 0
(vii) 79999 (with P 4 = 8 ) gives 7 + 8 (9999)=79999
(viii) 119999 (with P 4 = 1 2 ) gives 1 1 + 1 2 (9999)=119999
(ix) 800001 (with Q 5 = 8 ) gives 8 x 1 —8 = 0
(x) 900001 (with Q5 = 9 ) gives 9 x 1 —9 = 0
(xi) 799999 (with P 6 = 8 ) gives 7 + 8 (99999)=799999
(xii) 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (with Q7 = 1 2 ) gives 1 2 x 1 — 1 2 = 0
N .B. :—The osculation-rule is strictly adhered to ; and the P’s
and the Q’s invariably yield the original dividend itself
and zero respectively!
 ( 288 )

Utility and Significance of the Symbology

The symbology has its deep significance and high practical
utility in our determining of the divisibility (or otherwise) of a
certain given number (however big) by a certain given divisor
(however large), inasmuch as it throws light on ( 1 ) the number
of digits to be taken in each group and (2 ) the actual osculator
itself in each individual case before us.

A few simple examples of each sort will clarify th is:

( 1 ) Suppose the question is, Is 106656874269 divisible by 4 9 9 %
Here, at sight, P 2 = 5 . This means that we have to
split the given expression into 2 -digit groups and osculate

l
by 5. Thus, ya
f 10 6 6 56 87 42 69 7
\ 499 497 186 525 387 \ /.Y E S
(69 X 5=345 ; 345+42=387 ; 435 + 3 + 8 7= 5 2 5 ; 5 x 2 5 + 5
ar
+ 5 6 = 1 8 6 ; 5 x 8 6 + 6 6 = 4 9 7 ; 5 x 9 7 + 4 + 1 0 = 4 9 9 !)
Or
The osculation-results are 1066569087, 10666125,
m

106786, 1497 and 499 .*. YES

(2 ) Is 126143622932 divisible by 401 ?

ra

Here Q2= 4
\ 12 61 43 62 29 32 1
I — 16 400 185 458 99 J NO
Or
The osculation-results are 1261436101, 12614357,
125915, 1199 and —385. NO
( 3 ) Is 69492392 divisible by 199 ?
Here P 2 = 2

.*. ( 69 49 23 92 \
I 199 463 207 \ YES
Or
The osculation-results give 695107, 6965 and 199
YES
 ( 289 )

(4) Is 1928264569 divisible by 5999 ?

Here Pa= 6
1 928 264 569
5999 4999 3678
Or
The osculation-results are 1931678 and 599 YES
(5) Is 2188 6068 313597 divisible by 7001 ?
Here Q a = 7

< 21 8 8 6 068 313“ 597 )

| 0 -3 6127 3866 \ YES
Or
The osculation-results give 21 8 8 6 064 134, 21885126,
21003 and 0 . YES.

l
ya
( 6 ) Is 30102 1300602 divisible by 99 ?
Here Pa= l
As P2= l and continuous multiplications by 1 can
ar

make no difference to the multiplicand, the sum of the

groups will suffice for our purpose :
v 30+10+21+30+06+2=99 .-. YES.
m

The second method amounts to the same thing and

need not be put down.
ra

(7 ) Is 2130 1 1 0 2 1143 4112 divisible by 999 ?

Here P8= l
and v 2+13 0 + 1 10 + 2 11 + 4 3 4+ 1 1 2= 9 9 9
(by both methods) YES.
(8 ) Is 7631 3787 858 divisible by 9999 ?
Here P4= l
and v =763+1378+7858=9999
.\ (By both methods), YES.

(9 ) Is 2037760003210041 divisible by 9999 ?

Here P4= l
and v 2037+7600+0321+0041=9999
(By both methods) YES.
37
 ( 290 )

( 1 0 ) Is 5246 7664 0016 201452 divisible by 1 0 0 1 ?

Here Qs= l ; and
v S==524+676+648+016—201+452=221=13 X 17
Divisible by 13
But 1001=7X11X13 .*. Divisible by 13 but not by 7 or
by 1 1 . /. NO
The Second Category
The second type is one wherein the given number is of
neither of the standard types (which P and Q readily and instan­
taneously apply to) but requires a multiplication for the
transformation of the given number to either (or both) of the
standard forms and for the ascertaining of the P and Q (or both)
suitable for our purpose in the particular case before us.

l
ya
The Process of Transformation
In an earlier chapter (the one on “ Recurring Decimals” )
we have shown how to convert a given decimal fraction into its
ar
vulgar-fraction shape, by so multiplying it as to bring a series of
nines in the product. For example, in the case of *142857,
we had multiplied it by 7 and got *999999 (= 1 ) as the product
m

and thereupon argued that, because 7 x the given decimal = 1 ,

that decimal should be the vulgar fraction \
(1 ) *142857X7
ra

= *999999=1
A
Similarly, with regard to *076923, we had multiplied it
by 3 (in order to get 9 as the last digit of the product); argued
that, in order to get 9 as the penultimate digit, ^ ) •076923
we should add 3 to the already existing 6 13

there and that this 3 could be had only by :

multiplying the original given decimal by I 1; 0*76923^
then found that the product was now a series
of nines; and then we had argued that, 999999=1
V 1 3 x = l, x must be equal to fa. And x==rs
we had also given several more illustrations of the same kind
(for demonstrating the same principle and process).
 ( 291 )

As P (in the present context) requires, for osculation,

numbers ending in 9 (or a series of nines), we have to adopt
a similar procedure for the same purpose; and, in the case of
Q too, we have to apply a similar method for producing a number
which will terminate in 1 or a series of zeroes ending in 1.

The Modus Operandi

A few examples of both the kinds will elucidate the process
and help the student to pick up his P and Q. And once this
is done, the rest will automatically follow (as explained above).
( 1 ) Suppose the divisor is 857. v 857x7=5999, we can
therefore at once say : P3= 6.
The test and proof of the correctness hereof is that any

l
multiple of the divisor in question must necessarily fulfil this
ya
condition i.e. on osculation by P3, must yield 857 (or a
multiple thereof).
For instance, let us take 857x13 = 11141. As P 3 = 6
ar

1 1 + 6 (141)=857 ! And this proves that our osculator is

the correct one.
(2 ) Let us now take 43.
m

v 43x7= 301, Q2 = 3 .
Taking 4 3 x 3 (=129) for the test, we see 129 yields
2 9 x 3 —1 = 8 6 ; and 8 6 is a multiple of 43 (being exactly
ra

double of it). So, our Q is correct.

The significance of this fact consists in the natural
consequence thereof, namely, that any number (which is really
divisible by the divisor in question must obey this rule of divi­
sibility by the P process or the Q process.
N.B. :—Remember what has already been explained as regards P
or Q being greater.
In this very case (of 43), instead of multiplying it by 7,
getting 301 as the product and ascertaining that Q2= 3 is
the osculator, we could also have multiplied the 43 by 3, got
129 as the product, found Px=13 to be the positive osculator
and verified it. Thus, in the case of 4 3 x 2 = 8 6 , 8+6(13)=86
P1=13 is the correct positive osculator.
 ( 292 )

Multiplication by 13 at every step being necessarily

more cumbrous than by 3, we should naturally prefer Qa= 3
(to P -^13).
In fact, it rests with the student to choose between P and Q
and (in view of the bigness or otherwise of multiplier-osculator
etc.) decide which to prefer.
(3) Ascertain the P and the Q for 137.
137 P s= 3 7 137 Qs= 14
27 103
959 411
274 1370
3699 14111

l
ya
Obviously Qs= 1 4 is preferable (to P#=37).
(Test: 137X8=1296 V Q, gives 1296-0=1296 !)
ar
(4) Determine the P and the Q for 157.
v 157X7=1099 /. P a= l l
And 157x93=14601 Qa=146.
m

P 2=t=ll is to be preferred
(Test:— 157x7=1099 / . P a gives 10+1089=1099)
ra

(5 ) Find out the P and Q for 229

V 229X131=29999 P4= 3
This Osculator being so simple, the Q need not be
tried at all. But on principle, V 229 x 69=15801
at all. But on principle, 229x69=15801
Q j=159 (obviously a big multiplier)
(Test for P4= 3
229x100=2/2900 P= 3 gives 8702=229x38)
( 6 ) Find P and Q for 283
Y 283X53=14999 P „=15
and Y 283X47=13301 Qs=133
P8= 1 5 is preferable

(Test 2 8 3X 4 = 1 1 3 2 ; 1+ 1 5 (132)=1981 = 2 8 3 X 7 )
 ( 293 )

(7) Find P and Q for 359

V 359X61=21899 Pa=219
and V 359X339=14001 Q8= 14
Obviously Qs= 1 4 is to be preferred.
(Test: (i) 359x3=1077 Q j= 1 4 gives 14x77—1
=1077
and (ii) 359X115=41285 Q ,= 14 give 1 4 x 2 8 5 -4 1
=3949=359X11)
(8 ) Ascertain P and Q for 421
V 421X19=7999 Ps = 8
and ••• 421X81=34101 Q2=341
obviously P 8 = 8 is the better one
(Test: 421X5=2105 P8 = 8 gives 2+840=842

l = 421X 2)
ya
(9 ) Determine P and Q for 409
v 409 X 511=208999 .\ Ps=209
and v 409x489=200001 Q5 = 2
ar

Obviously the Q osculator is preferable.

(T est: 409 X 1000=4/09000
Q s=2 gives 18000—4=17996=409 x 44)
m

Having thus studied the multiplex osculator technique

ra

and modus operandi, we now go on to and take up actual examples

of divisibility (which can be easily tackled by the multiplex
osculatory procedure).
Model Applications to Concrete Examples
( 1 ) Is 79158435267 divisible by 229 ?
Y 229x131—29999 P4= 3
/ . t 791 5843 5267 ?
I 5725 21644 \
But 5725=229X25 .% YES
(2 ) Is 6056200566 divisible by 283 ?
Y 283X53=14999 P3=15
6 056 200 566
6226 10414 8690
But 6226=283X22 .-. YES
 ( 294 )

(3) Is 7392 60251 divisible by 347 ?

347X317=109999 .\ P4= l l
( 7 3926 6251 ?
(73654 0627 J
But 73654=347X212 .\ YES
(4) Is 867 311 7259 divisible by 359 ?
V 359X39=14001 Q„=14
J8 673 Tl7 259 ?
11111 764 3509 J NO
(5) Is 885648437 divisible by 367 ?
v 367X3=1101 Q2= l l
j 8 ~85 64 84 37 ?
I 734 6 6 314 323 J
But 734=367X2 .-.Y E S
l
ya
( 6 ) Is 490 2 2 2 8096 divisible by 433 ?
v 433X3=1299 .% Pa= 13
ar
.-. ( 49 02 22 80 96 ?
{ 1257 1292 399 1328 J NO.
( 7 ) Is 51 8 8 8 8 8 8 37 divisible by 467 ?
m

v 467X3=1401 / . Qa= 14
( 51 8 8 8 8 8 8 37 ? YES
I —467 —37 504 430 J
ra

N .B. :— The alternative method of successive mechanical oscula­

tions is also, of course, available (but will prove generally
less neat and tidy and will also be more tedious).
(8 ) Is 789405 35994 divisible by 647 %
v 647X17=10999 .\ P3= l l
( 78 940 535 994 )
j 1294 6110 11469 \
But 1294=647x2 YES
(9) Is 2093 1726 7051 0192 divisible by 991 ?
V 991X111 = 110001 .-. Q4 = l l ,
.-. ( 2093 1726 7051 0192 ?
\ —30721 —526 —4939 J
But 30721=991X331 YES
 ( 295 )

( 1 0 ) Is 479466 54391 divisible by 421 ?

v 421X19=7999 Ps = 8
J 47 946 654 391 )
I 1694 7205 3782 J NO
( 1 1 ) What change should be made in the first digit of the
above number in order to render it divisible by 421 ?
Answer:—As 1684 is exactly 4x421, the only change needed
in order to reduce the actually present 1694 into
1684 is the alternation of the first digit from 4 to 3.

l
ya
ar
m
ra
 Ch a p t e r XXXI

SUM AND DIFFERENCE OF SQUARES

Not only with regard to questions arising in connection
with and arising out of Pythagoras’ Theorem (which we shall
shortly be taking up) but also in respect of matters relating to
the three fundamental Trigonometrical-Ratio-relationships (as
indicated by the three formulae Sin2 0 -fcos 2 0=1, 1 + ta n 2
0 = S ec2 0 and 1 -j-cot 2 0 = cosec2 0 ) etc., etc. we have often
to deal with the difference of two square numbers, the addition
of two square numbers etc., etc. And it is desirable to have

l
the assistance of rules governing this subject and benefit by them.
ya
Difference of two Square numbers
ar
Of the two, this is much easier. For, any number can
be expressed as the difference of two square numbers. The
Algebraical principle involved is to be found in the elementary
m

formula a2 -—b 2 = (a + b ) (a—b). This means that, if the given

number can be expressed in the shape of the product of two
numbers, our task is automatically finished. And this “ if”
ra

imposes a condition which is very easy to fulfil. For, even if

the given number is a prime number, even then it can be correctly
described as the product of itself and of unity. Thus 7 = 7 x 1 ,
1 7 = 1 7 x 1 , 197=197x1 and so on.

In the next place, we have the derived formula :

(a + b ) 2 —(a—b) 2 = 4 a b ; and therefore ab can
always come into the picture as / a-f-b \ 2 / a—b \2^ - e
(half the sum)2—(half the diffe- I 2 / I 2 /
rence)2 ; and as any number can be expressed as ab,
the problem is readily solved. And the larger the number
of factorisations possible, the better. In fact, if we accept
fractions too as permissible, the number of possible
solutions will be literally infinite.
 ( 297 )

For example, suppose we have to express 9 as the difference

of two squares. We know that—
9 = 9 X 1 .\ 9 = ~ ‘ ' 2 = 5 2 —4 2 Similarly

(1) 1 3 x 1 = ( ¥ ) M ¥ ) 2 = 7 2 - 62
(2) 1 2 = 6 X 2 = 4 2— 22
or 4 x 3 = 3 | 2— |2
or 12 X l = 6 j 2— 5^2
(3) 4 8 = 8 X 6 = 7 2— l2
or 1 2 x 4 = 8 2— 42
or 16 X 3 = 9 f 2— 6|2
or 48 X 1 = 2 4 ^ 2— 23J2
or 24 X 2 = 1 3 2— ll2

l
ya
The question, therefore, of expressing any number as the
difference of two squares presents no difficulty at all !

The Sum of Two Square Numbers

ar

Inasmuch, however, as a 2 -f-b 2 has no such corresponding

advantage or facilities etc., to offer, the problem of expressing
any number as the sum of two square numbers is a tough one
m

and needs very careful attention. This, therefore, we now proceed

to deal with.
ra

A Simple Rule in Operation

We first turn our attention to a certain simple rule at
work in the world of numbers, in this respect.
We need not go into the relevant original Sutras and
explain them (especially to our non-Sanskrit-knowing readers).
Suffice it for us, for our present purpose, to explain their purport
and their application.
Let us take a particular series of “ mixed” fractions,
namely,— 1 J, 2 f, 3$, 4^ , 5T\ etc.
which fulfil three conditions :
(i) that the integer-portion consists of the natural
numbers in order ;
(ii) that the numerators are exactly the same * and
38
 ( 298 )

(iii) that the denominators are the odd numbers, in order,

commencing from 3 and going right on.
It will be observed that, when all these fractions are
put into shape as “ improper” fractions,
i.e.'as JJ M -44 ftS etc., etc.
the sum of D 2 and N 2 is invariably equal to (N-f-1 )8 ! And the
General Algebraical form being,

.-. D „=2n+1 ; and N=2n (n-fl)

D2+ N 2= (N + 1 )*
or. (2n + l)2+ 4 n 2(n + l)2=(2n2+ 2 | i+ l)a
The shape of it is perhaps frightening; but the thing in

l
itself is very simple : and the best formula is D2+ N 2= (N + 1 )2.
ya
This means that when a 2 (given)-(-x 2 is a perfect square, we
can readily find out x 2. Thus, for instance,
(i) If a (the given number) be 9, 2n+I = 9 n=4
ar
.•. 4J is the fraction we want. And 92+ 4 0 2= 4 1 2
(ii) If a be 35, 2 n + l —35 n = 1 7 .\ The fraction
wanted is 17$ | = 6,y 352+612*=6132.
m

(iii) If a = 5 7 , 2 n + l= 5 7 .•. n = 2 8 The required

fraction is 28|f=i#^-* 572+16242=1625a
ra

(iv) I f a=141, 2 n + 1=141 .-. n = 7 0 .-. The fraction

wanted is 70xV> x=W t 141a+99402=99412
N ote:—Multiples and sub-multiples too behave in exactly
the same manner (according to Anurupya i.e. pro­
portionately). For instance,
Let a=35 .'. 2 n + l= 3 5 .\ n=17 .\ The fraction
wanted is 17|| = 'r r 352+612*=6132
.-. 702+12242=12262
A Simpler Method (for the same)
This same result can also be achieved by a simpler and
easier method which does not necessitate the “ mixed” fractions,
the transforming of them into the “ improper” — fraction—shape
etc., but gives us the answer immediately.
 ( 299 )

It will be observed that, in all the examples dealt with

above,
Since D2+ N 2= (N + 1 )2
D2= (N + 1 ) 2 —N 2 = 2 N + 1 = N + (H + 1 )
In other words, the square of the given number is the
sum of two consecutive integers at the exact middle. For instance,
if 7 be the given number, its square= 4 9 which can be split up
into the two consecutive integers 24 and 25
.\ 72+ 2 4 2= 2 5 2. Similarly,
( 1 ) If a = 9 , its square (81)=40+41 .\ 92+ 4 0 2= 4 1 2
(2 ) If a=35, its square (1225)=612+613 .-. 352+612*
=6132
(3 ) If a==57, its square (3249)=1624+1625 .\ 572+
16242=16252

l
ya
(4) If a=141, its square (19881)=9940+9941
.*. 1412+99402=^§9412
and so on. And all the answers are exactly as we obtained
ar
before (by the first method).

The Case of Even Numbers

Yes; the square of an odd number is necessarily odd and
m

can be split up into two consecutive integers. But what about

even numbers whose squares will always be even and cannot be
ra

split up into two consecutive numbers ? And the answer is that

such cases should be divided off by 2 (and other powers of 2)
until an odd number is reached and then the final result should
be multiplied proportionately.
For example, if a=52, we divide it by 4 and get the
odd number 13. Its square (169)=84+85 .\ 132+ 8 4 2= 8 5 2
.\ (multiplying all the terms by 4), we say : 522+3362= 3402.
There are many other simple and easy methods by which
we can tackle the problem (of a2+ b 2= c 2) by means of clues and
conclusions deducible from 3 2 + 4 2 = 5 2, 52+ I 2 2= 1 3 2, 8a+ 1 5 2
= 1 7 a etc. But into details of these and other allied matters
we do not now enter.
 Ch a p t e r X X X II

ELEMENTARY SQUARING, CUBING ETC.

In some of the earliest chapters of this treatise, we have
dealt, at length, with multiplication-devices of various sorts,
and squaring, cubing etc., are only a particular application
thereof. This is why this subject too found an integral place
of its own in those earlier chapters (on multiplication).
And yet it so happens that the squaring, cubing etc., of
numbers have a particular entity and individuality of their
own ; and besides, they derive additional importance because of
their intimate connection with the question of the square-root,

al
the cube-root etc., (which we shall shortly be taking up). And,
consequently, we shall now deal with this subject (of squaring,
y
cubing etc.), mainly by way of Preliminary Revision and Recapi­
tulation on the one hand and also by way of presentation of
ar
some important new material too on the other.

The Yavadunam Sutra (for Squaring)

m

In the revision part of it, we may just formally remind

the student of the YAVADUNAM formula and merely cite some
examples thereof as a sort of practical memory-refresher :
ra

1 . 972= 9 4 /0 9 ;
2 . 872= 7 4 ,/169=7569
3. 1 9 * = lls 8 8 l = 2 8 a 1=361
4. 912=82/81
5. 9652=9301/225=931 /225
6 . 113*=1261/69=12769
7. 9962=992/016
8 . 9982=996/004
9. 9997 2=9994/0009
1 0 . 1007 2= 1014/049
1 1 . 9996a=9992/0016
1 2 . 99r992=9998/0001
13. 10172=1034/289
 ( 301 )
14. 1039a=10781/521=1079/521
15. 99991a==99982/00081
16. 999982=99996/00004
17. 999942=99988/00036
18. 100042=10008/0016
19. 999978a==999956/000484
20. 999998a=999996/000004
21. 1000232— 100046/00529
22. 99998732=9999746/0016129
23. 9999999a=9999998/00000001
24. 10000122= 1000024/000144
The Anurupya Sutra (for Cubing)
This is new material.
l
A simple example will, however,
ya
suffice to explain i t :
Take the hypothetical case of one who knows only the
ar
cubes of the “ first ten natural numbers” (i.e. 1 to 1 0 ) and wishes
to go therebeyond, with the help of an intelligent principle and
procedure. And suppose he desires to begin with l l 3.
. The first thing one has to do herefor is to put down the
m

cube o f the first digit in a row (of 4 figures in a Geometrical

Ratio in the exact proportion subsisting between them). Thus—
ra

11 8= 1 1 1 1
2 2

13 3 1

(ii) The second step is to put down, tinder the second and
third numbers, just two tunes the said numbers themselves and
add up. And that is all !
A few more instances will clarify the procedure :
(1) 12s = 1 2 4 8 (2) 13® = 1 3 9 27
4 8 6 18

16 2 8 19 8 7
1 2 2
17 2 8 2 19 7
 ( S0 2 )

(3) 14s 1 4 16 64 (4) 15s = 1 5 25 125

8 32 1 0 50
2 7 4 4 3 3 7 5
(5) 16* 1 6 36 216 (6 ) 17* = 1 7 49 343
1 2 72 14 98
4 0 9 6 4 9 1 3
1 8 64 512 W 19s = 1 9 81 729
16 128 18 162
5 8 3 2 6 8 5 9

(9) 2 1 s= 8 4 2 1 (1 0 ) 2 2 *= 8 8 8 8
8 4 16 16

l
9 2 6 1 10 6 4 8
ya eo
( 1 1 ) 23* = 8 12 18 27 (1 2 ) II 8 16 32 64
24 36 32 64
ar
12 1 6 7 13 8 2 4

(13) 25* = 8 20 50 125 (14) 32* = 27 18 12 8

40 100 36 24
m

15 6 2 5 32 7 6 8

(15) 9s = ( 1 0 — 1 )*
ra

= 1000— 100+ 10—1 ?

—200+20 \ =1000—300+30—1==729

(16) 97s 729 567 441 343

1134 882
912 6 7 3

or, better still, 97®=(100—3)*

=1000000—30000+900 —27
—60000+1800
1000000—90000+2700—27
=912 6 7 3

N .B. :—If you start with the cube of the first digit and take
the next three numbers (in the top row) in a Geometrical
 ( 303 )

Proportion (in the ratio of the original digits them­

selves) you find that the 4th figure (on the right end)
is just the cube of the second digit!
The Algebraical explanation hereof is very simple:
If a and b are the two digits, then our chart reads:
a *+ a 2 b + ab 2 + b 8
2 a 8 b + 2 aba

a 3 + 3 a 2 b + 3a b 2 + b 8

and this is exactly (a + b ) 8 !

Almost every mathematical worker knows th is; but
very few people apply i t ! This is the whole tragedy and the
pathos of the situation!

l
ya
The Yavadunam Sutra (for Cubing)
The same YAVADUNAM Sutra can, in view of the above,
be applied for cubing too. The only difference is that we take
ar

here not the deficit or the surplus but exactly twice the deficit
or the surplus as the case may be and make a few corresponding
alternations in the other portions also, as follows:
m

Suppose we wish to ascertain the cube of 104. Our base

being 1 0 0 , the excess is 4. So we add not 4 (as we did in
ra

the squaring operation) but double that (i.e. 8 ) and thus have
104+8 ( = 112) as the left-hand-most portion of the cube.
Thus we obtain 1 1 2 .

Then we put down thrice the new excess multi

plied by the original excess (i.e. 1 2 x 4 = 48) and 112/48
put that down as the middle portion of the product.

And then we affix the cube of the original

excess (i.e. 64) as the last portion thereof. And the 112/48/64
answer is complete.
Some more illustrative instances are given below for
familiarising the student with the new process (which is not
really new but only a very useful practical application of the
(a + b ) 3 formula just above described:
 ( 304 )
(1) 1033=109/27/27 (because 9 x 3 = 2 7 ; and 33=27)
(2) 113s= 139/07/97 (because 39x13=507 and 13s=2197)
5 21 =1442897
(3) 10043=1012/048/064 (because 1 2 x 4 = 4 8 and 43= 6 4
(4) 100053=10015/0075/0125 (because 15 X 5=75 and 53=125
(5) 9963=988/048/064=988/047/936 (•.• 12 X 4= 48 and 43= 6 4
(6) 933=79/47 /iF(because 21 X —7=147 and —73= —343
1 —3 =804357
(7) 9991a=9973/0243/0729 (because —27X —9=243
and —93= —729=9973/0242/9271
(8) 100073=10021/0147/0343
(9) 99999s=99997/00003/0000f=99997/00002/99999
(10) 100012s=100036/00432/01728

l
(11) 999983=99994/00012/00008=99994/00011/99992
ya
(12) 1000007s=1000021/000147/000343
(13) 9999923=999976/000192/000512 (because 2 4 x 8 =192
& 83=512
ar

Fourth Power
We know that (a + b )4= a 4+ 4 a 3b + 6 a 2b 2+4ab3+ b 4.
This gives us the requisite clue for raising any given number
m

to its fourth power. Thus,

11111
ra

353
14 64 1

1 2 4 8 16
6 20 24
20 73 6
The Binomial Theorem
The “ Binomial Theorem” is thus capable of practical
application and—in its more comprehensive Vedic form—has
thus been utilised, to splendid purpose, in the Vedic Sutras.
And a huge lot of Calculus work (both Differential and Integral)
has been (and can be) facilitated thereby. But these details,
we shall hold over for a later stage.
 Chapter X X X III

STRAIGHT SQUARING
Reverting to the subject of the squaring of numbers, the
student need hardly be reminded that the methods expounded
and explained in an early chapter and even in the previous
chapter are applicable only to special cases and that a General
formula capable of universal application is still due.
And, as this is intimately connected with a procedure
known as the Dwandwa Yoga (or the Duplex Combination
Process) and as this is of still greater importance and utility at

l
the next step on the ladder, namely, the easy and facile extrac­
ya
tion of square roots, we now go on to a brief study of this pro­
cedure.
The Dwandwa-Yoga (or the Du/plex Combination Process)
ar
The term “ Dwandwa Yoga” (or Duplex) is used in two
different senses. The first one is by squaring ; and the second
one is by Cross-multiplication. And, in the present context,
m

it is used in both the senses (a2 and 2ab).

In the case of a single (central) digit, the square (a2 etc.,)
ra

is meant; and in the case of a number of even digits (say, a

and b equidistant from the two ends), double the cross-product
(2ab) is meant.
A few examples will elucidate the procedure.
Denoting the Duplex with the symbol D, we have:
( 1 ) For 2 , D = 2 2= 4
(2 ) For 7, D =49
(3 ) For 34, D = 2 (12)=24
(4) For 74, D = 2 (28)=56
(5 ) For 409, D = 3 (3 6)+ 0= 72
(6 ) For 071, D = 0 + 4 9 = 4 9
(7) For 713, D = 2 (21)+12=43
( 8 ) For 734, D = 2 (2 8 )+ 3 2=65
39
 ( 306 )
(9) D for 7346 = 2 X 42+ 2X 12= 108
(1 0 ) D for 26734=16+36+49=101
(1 1 ) D for 6 0 1 7 2 = 2 4 + 0 + l2=25
(12) D for 7 32 1 5 = 7 0 + 6 + 4 = 8 0
(13) D for 80607=112+0+36=148
(14) D for 7 7 = 2 X 4 9 = 9 8
(15) D for 521398=80+36+6=122
(16) D for 746213=42+ 8+12=62
(17) D for 12345679=18+28+36+20=102
(18) D for 370415291=6+126+0+40+1=173
(19) D for 432655897=56+54+32+60+25=227

This is merely a recapitulation of the Urdhva Tiryak

l
process of multiplication as applied to squaring and needs no
exposition.
ya
N ote:—If a number consists of n digits, its square must have
ar
2n or 2n-l digits. So, in the following process, take
extra dots to the left (one less than the number of
digits in the given numbers).
m

Examples-
( 1 ) 2072=40809 I =42849 . . 207
2 4 \ ------------
ra

} 4 0 809
2 4
4 2 849
(2) 2132= 4 4 1369=45369
(3) 2212=48841
(4) 3342= 9 8 3 4 6=11556
13 2 1
(5) 4252= . .425
16/16/44/20/25=1806*25
( 6 ) 5432=25 0 6 49=294849
4 4 2
(7) 8972 . . . 8 9 7
64/144/193/126/49=80409
Or 1 TO 32= 1 —2 + 1 —6 + 6 + 0 + 9 = 8 0 4 0 9
Or (by Yavadunam ^?m)=s784/1032^=80409
 ( 307 )

8 8 9
(8 ) 8892=64/128/208/144/81 =790321
2
Or 1 1 1 1 = 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

1 -2 -9 + 0 + 3 + 2 + 1 ^ 7 9 0 3 2 1
Or (by Ydvadunam Sutra)
889a= 7 7 8 /l l l a= 7 89 / 321=790/321.
/12
(9) 1113*= . . - 1 1 1 3
1 2 3 8 7 6 9
(10) 2134^=4/4/13/22/17/24/16=4553956
(11) 32142=9/12/10/28/17/8/16=10329796
(12) 32472=9/12/28/58/46/56/49=10543009
l
ya
(13) 67032= 36/84/49/36/42/0/9=44930209
(14) 31 -422=9/6/25/20/20/16/4=987-2164
ar
(15) 07312= -0049/42/23/6/1= ‘ 00534361
(16) 89788= 64/144/193/254/193/112/64=80604484
_2
m

Or 1 1 0 2 2 = 1 /-2/l-5/0/4/4/4=80604484
Or (by Ydvadunam Sutra) 7956/10222=80604484
ra

(17) 8887a=64/128/192/240/176/l 12/49=78978769

2
Or 11113=1-2-10-3+8769=78978769
Or (by Ydvadunam) 7774/1113a=7774/ 8769=78978769
/123
(18) 141.32a=l/8/18/14/29/22/l3/12/4=19971.3424
(19) 21345a=4/4/13/22/37/34/46/40/25=455609025
(20) 430312= 16/24/9/24/26/9/6/1 =185 X 66961
(2 1 ') 46325a= l 6/48/60/52/73/72/34/20/25=2146005625
(22) 73•214a=49/42/37/26/^0/28/l7/8/16=5360329796
 Chapter X X X IV

VARGAMtfLA (SQUARE ROOT)

Armed with the recapitulation (in the last chapter) of
the “ Straight Squaring method” and the practical application
of the Dwandwayoga (Duplex Process) thereto, we now proceed
to deal with the Vargamula (i.e. the Square Root) on the same
kind of simple, easy and straight procedure as in the case of
“ Straight Division” .
Well-known First Principles
The basic or fundamental rules governing the extraction

l
of the square root, are as follows:
ya
(1) The given number is first arranged in two-digit groups
(from right to left); and a single digit (if any) left
ar
over (at the left-hand-end) is counted as a simple
group by itself.
(2) The number of digits in the square root will be the
m

same as the number of digit-groups in the given

number itself (including a single digit (if any such
there be). Thus 16 will count as one group, 144 as
ra

two groups and 1024 as two.

(3) So, if the square root contains n digits, the square must
consist of 2n or 2n-l digits.
(4) And, conversely, if the given number has n digits,
the square root will contain n or n+1 digits.
2 2
(5) But, in cases of pure decimals, the number of digits
in the square is always double that in the square root.
(6) The squares of the first nine natural numbers are
1 , 4 , 9 , 16, 25, 36, 49, 64 and 81. This means :
(i) that an exact square cannot end in 2, 3, 7 or 8 ;
(ii) (a) that a complete square ending in I must have
either 1 or 9 (mutual complements from 10) as
the last digit of its square r o o t;
 ( 309 )

(6 ) that a square can end in 4, only if the square

root ends in 2 or 8 (complements);
(c) that the ending of a square in 5 or 0 means that
its square root too ends in 5 or 0 (respectively);
(d) that a square ending in 6 must have 4 or 6
(complements) as the last digit in its square
r o o t; and
(e) that the termination of an exact square in 9 is
possible, only if the square root ends in 3 or 7
(complements).
In other words, this may be more briefly
formulated thus:
(a) that 1, 5, 6 and 0 at the end of a number reproduce

l
themselves as the last digits in its square;
ya
(b) that squares of complements (from ten) have the
same last digit. Thus, l 2 and 9 2 ; 2 2 and 8 * ; 3 2 and
ar
7 2 ; 4 2 & 6 2 ; 5 2 and 5 2 ; and 02 and 102 have the same
ending (namely 1,4,9,6 ,5 and 0 respectively); and
(c) that 2,3,7 and 8 are out of court altogether, as the
final digit of a perfect square.
m

Readily Available First Data.

ra

Thus, before we begin the straight extracting of a square

root by “ straight division” method, we start with previous
knowledge of ( 1 ) the number of digits in the square root and
(2 ) the first digit thereof. Thus—
( 1 ) 74562814 N = 8 N in square ro o t= N / 2 = 4 ; and
the first digit thereof is 8 .
%*
(2 ) 963106713. N = 9 .\ N in the square r o o t= N -f 1 = 5 ;
& the first digit thereof is 3. 2~
But (3) (' 7104)2 must contain 8 decimal digits.
(4)
(5) ^ 0064=-08
( 6 ) V 000049 =007
 ( 310 )

(7) V ‘ 0 0 0 0 7 ( 0 ) = , 0 ° 8 etc.
( 8 ) V '00000007= *0002 etc.
(9) V 7^ ' 3

But ( 1 0 ) y/^9= V^0= = '9 etc.

Modus operandi (of Straight Squaring)
The procedure of Straight Squaring as inculcated in the
Vedic Sutras is precisely the same as in Straight Division but
with this difference, namely, that in the former the Divisor should
be excatly double the first digit of the Square root.
N .B. As a single digit can never be more than 9, it follows
therefore that, in our method of straight squaring, no
divisor above 18 is necessary. We may, of course,
voluntarily choose to deal with larger numbers ; but there

l
is no need to do so.
ya
Initial Chart
We ^thus start our operation with an initial chart, like the
ar
samples given hereunder:
(1 ) 5 29 : 7 31 :
4 1 : 3 :
m

: 2 • 4 : 2 *

(3) 32 49 : (4) 40 96 :
ra

* 7 : : 4 :
10 : 5 • 12 : 6 :

(5) 1 63 84 : (®) 8 31 76
2 1 4 • 4
: 1 • 2

0 0 44 44 44 : (8 ) 61 13 6

12 8 : 14' • 12

: 6 : 7

(9) 73 60 : 84 : (1 0 ) 6 0 0 0 0

16 • 9 : 4 2

8 2
 ( 311 )

(11) 10 : 73 69 42 (12) 90 : 61 71 74
18 : : 9
9

Further Procedure

Let us now take a concrete case (the extraction of the

square root of, say, 119716) and deal with i t :
(i) In the above given general chart, we have not only
put down the single first digit of the square root
wanted but also prefixed to the next dividend-digit,
the remainder after our subtraction of the square of
that first digit from the left-hand-most digit or
digit-group of the given number. ^ 16*

l 9 7
ya
And we have also set down g . ! g •
as our divisor, the exact d o u b l e ------------------------
3 ■ *
of the first digit of the quotient. * __________ ’
ar

(ii) Our next Gross Dividend-unit is thus 29. Without

subtracting anything from it, we simply divide the
29 by the divisor 6 and put down %\ • 9 7 1 6 :
m

the second quotient-digit 4 and 6 : : 2 5 :

the second remainder 5 in their "— .
ra

proper places as usual. ______________ ’

(iii) Thus our third Gross Dividend is 5 7 . From this we
subtract 16 (the square of the second quotient-digit),
get 41 as the Actual Dividend, ^ . 9 7 1 6 *
divide it by 6 and set down the 6 : : 2 5 5 :
Q (6 ) and the R (5) in their 7 # .
proper places as usual. J------ !----------------
(iv) Our third gross dividend-unit is 51. From this we
subtract the Dwandwa Yoga (Duplex) (=48), obtain
3 as the remainder, divide it ^
by 6 and put down the Q 6 : : 2553
(0 ) and the R (3) in their 7 - . 0Q r-
proper places. ----------------- -------
 ( 312 )

(v) This gives us 30 as our last gross dividend-onit.

From this we subtract 36 (the Dwandwa Yoga of
the third quotient digit 6 ) ; get 0 as Q and as R.
This means that the work has been completed,
that the given expression is • 9 7 l 6
11

a perfect square and that 346 6 : : 2 5 5 3

is its square root. And that “ . . „ —
. „ H : 3 : 4 6.0 0
is all. — — ----------------
COMPLETE

Proof of Completeness & Correctness

( 1 ) A manifest proof Of the Complete-squareness of the
given expression (and of the correctness of the square root
ascertained) is by squaring the latter and finding the square to

l
be exactly the same as the given complete square. Thus,
ya
3462—9/24/52/48/36=119716 YES.

(2 ) But this is too mechanical. We obtain a neat and

ar

valid proof from the very fact that, if and when the process is
continued into the decimal part, all the quotient-digits (in the
decimal part) are found to be zeroes and the remainders too
m

are all zeroes !

Proof to the Contrary

ra

A number can not be an exact square in the following

circumstances :
(1) if it ends in 2, 3, 7 or 8 ;
(2 ) if it terminates in an odd number of zeroes;
(3 ) if its last digit is 6 but its penultimate digit is even ;
(4 ) if its last digit is not 6 but its penultimate digit is
o d d ; and
( 5 ) if, even though the number be even, its last two digits
(taken together) are not divisible by 4 ;
AND a square root cannot be correct if it falls to fulfil
any of the requirements hereinabove indicated :
 ( 313 )

Examples
Some instructive illustrative examples are given below :
(1 ) 5 :2 9 : (2) 32: 4 9 :
4: : 1 0 : 10 : : 7 4 :
: 2 : 3 (complete) : 5 : 7 (complete:

(3) 40: 9 6 : (4) 1 : 6 3 84

12 : 4 1 : 2 : : 0 2 3 6
6 : 4 (complete): 1 : 2 8 (complete):

(5) 55 : 2 0 4 9 («) : 69: 9 0 6 3 1

14: 6 6 2 16: : 5 11 5 41
7 : 4 3*00 (complete) : 8 :3 6 1 . 0 0 0

(7) 14: 53: 1 6 3 2 1 4

4 13 6 13 5 7
y al A complete square

7 : 2 9 1 *3 1...(incomplete)
ar
(8 ) 6 : 14 : 0 4 7 5 0 4
5 8 11 13
3: 7 4 ...(incomplete)
m

(9) 12: 41 : 2 5 4 9 2 9
5 4 5 2 1 0
ra

6 : 4 2 3 0 0 0 A A complete square

(1 0 ) 4: 7: 3 8 9 1 5 4 8 9
3 5 5 13 6 7 4 0
2 : 7 2 8 3 0 0 0 0 An exact square

(1 1 ) 1 0 : 25 : 7 4 5 4 7 6
0 7 4 5 5 1
5: 0 7 4*000 . A perfect square

(1 2 ) 1 2 : 45: 3 1 9 8 2 4
9 9 6 3 1
6 : 7 3 2 0 0 0 . A complete square
40
 ( 314 )
(13) 16 74 5 7 5 3 1 4 49
10 9 13 19 12 7 7 4
8 6 3 5 7*0 0 0 / . A n exact square

(14) 14 52 4 4 3 9 0 7 (to 2 places of decimals)

3 6 4 13 7
7 2 4 1 • 80 ...

(15) 16 73 2 1 0 8 (to 3 decimal-places)

9 12 16 14 15
8 5 5* 6 3 3

(16) 8 18 134 5 1 2 6 (to 3 decimal-places)

2 5 9 10 16 17
4 2 *5 8 4 6 4
l
ya
(17) 6 13 8 7 0 0 0 (to 4 decimal-places)
4 6 6 8 8 12
ar

3 7 '24 24

(18) 16 75 0 1 7 1 0 0 0 0 (to 4 places)

11 14 9 11 10
m

8 6 6 1 24
ra

(19) 6 0 0 09: 2 4 0 1 6 0 (to 5 places)

: 0 2 6 6

0 3 :0 3 9 7

(2 0 ) 8 16* 790 0 0 0 0 0 0 (to 5 places)

0 7 7 14 19
4* 0 9 7 5 6

(2 1 ) 10 27* 130 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 (to 5 places)

2 1 9 10 8 16 7
5 * 2 0 8 64

(2 2 ) 16 •74 1 0 7 0 0 000 (to 5 places)

10 5 14 19 14
*8 6 0 8 50
 ( 315 )

(23) 8 19- 7 0 6 4 1 2 8 14 (to 6 places)

: 3 5 10 10 15 17 13
4- : 4 3 9 1 9 0 • •

(24) 10 27- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (to 6 places)

2 10 9 12 17 10
5- 1 9 6 1 5 2 4 ...

(25) 6 09 0 0 4 5 13 (to 5 decimal-places)

0 0 0 4 3 1
•3 0 0 07 5

(26) 6 0009 : 1 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 (to 6 places)

: 0 1 1 2

03 : 0 2 2 2

l
(27) 12
ya
•0039 : 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (to eight places)
: 3 9 14
06 : 2 6 8 9 7 1
ar
(28) 18 00000083 : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (to 8 places)
: 2 3 11 18 7 2 0
m

•00 0 9 : 11 5 9

(29) 18 000092 : 4 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 (to ten

ra

: 11 6 6 13 15 14 24 32
0 09 : 6 1 2 5 4 38

(30) 2 2 : 0 7 3 6
12 3 1
1 : 4 4. 0 0 .•. A complete scfuare.

Or, taking the first two digits together at the first step,
we have :
: 207 : 3 6
11 1

: 14: 4. 0
0 An exact square
 Chapter X X X V

CUBE ROOTS
of
EXACT CUBES

(Mainly by Inspection and Argumentation)

(Well-known) FIRST-PRINCIPLES
( 1 ) The lowest cubes (i.e. the cubes of the first nine natural
numbers) are 1, 8 , 27, 64, 125, 216, 343, 512 and 729.
(2) Thus, they all have their own distinct endings; and

l
the is no possibility of over-lapping (or doubt as in the case
ya
of squares).

(3) Therefore, the last digit of the cube root of an exact

cube is obvious:
ar
(i) Cube ends in 1 ; cube root ends in 1 ;
(ii) C ends in 2 ; C R ends in 8
(iii) C ends in 3; C R ends in 7
m

(iv) 0 ends in 4; C R ends in 4

(v) C ends in 5; C R ende in 5
ra

(vi) C ends in 6 ; C R ends in 6

(vii) C ends in 7; C R ends in 3

(viii) C ends in 8 ; C R ends in 2 ; and
(ix) C ends in 9; C R ends in 9

(4) In other words,

(i) 1, 4, 5, 6 , 9 and 0 repeat themselves in the cube-
endings; and
(ii) 2, 3, 7 and 8 have an inter-play of complements
(from 1 0 ).
(5) The number of digits in a cube root is the same as the
number of 3 -digit groups (in the original cube) including a
single digit or a double-digit group (if any such there be).
 ( 317 )
( 6 ) The first digit of the cube-root will always be obvious
(from the first group in the cube).
(7) Thus, the number of digits, the first digit and the
last digit of the cube root of an exact cube are the data with
which we start, when we enter on the work of extracting
the cube root of an exact cube.

Examples
(Let a, 1 and n be the symbols for the first digit, the last
digit and n the number of digits in the cube root of an exact
cube).
( 1 ) For 271, 601, f = 6 , 1 = 1 and n = 2
(2 ) For 4, 269, 813, F = l , L = 7 and n = 3
(3) For 5, 678, f==l, L = 2 and n = 2
l
ya
(4 ) For 33, 076, 161, F = 3 , L = 1 and n = 3
(5 ) For 83, 453, 453, F = 4 , L = 7 and n = 3
(6 ) For 105, 823, 817, f= 4 , L = 3 and n = 3
ar

(7) For 248, 858, 189, f = 6 , L = 9 and n = 3

(8 ) For 1 , 548, 816, 893, f = l , L = 7 and n = 4
(9) For 73, 451, 930, 798, f= 4 , L = 2 and n = 4
m

( 1 0 ) For 76, 928, 302, 277, f= 4 , L = 3 and n = 4

( 1 1 ) For 6 , 700, 108, 456, 013, f = l , L = 7 and n = 5
ra

( 1 2 ) For 62, 741, 116, 007, 421, f= 3 , L = 1 and n = 5

(13) For 91, 0 1 0 , 0 0 0 , 0 0 0 , 468, f= 4 , L = 2 and n = 5 and
so on.

The Chart-Preliminary and Procedure

The procedure is similar to the one adopted by us in

“ Straight Division” and particularly in the extraction of square
roots. The only difference is that our divisor (in this context)
will not be double the first digit of the root but thrice the square
thereof. As we know the first digit at the very outset, our
chart begins functioning as usual (as follows) :
(1) 3 : 1 : 7 2 8 (2) 12: 13 : 8 2 4
: : 0 1 : : 5

1 2:
 (3) 48 : 73 : 089149 (4) 27 : 27 : 8 4 1

: : 901 : : 0

: 4: : 3:

(5) 12 : 21 ? 400 713 (6 ) 192 : 600 : 132 419

: : 13 : : 88
: 2:

(7) 48 : 79 : 314 502

: : 15
: 4:

Algebraical Principle Utilised

l
Any arithmetical number can be put into its proper
ya
algebraical shape as :
a + 1 0 b + 1 0 0 c+ 1 0 0 0 d etc.
ar

Suppose we have to find the cube of a three-digit arith­

metical number. Algebraically, we have to expand ( a + 1 0 b +
1 0 0 c)3. Expanding it accordingly, we have :
m

(a+10b+100c)8==a8-r 100b8+1000000c8+ 3 0a 2b+300ab2

+300a2c+30000ac2+300000b2c+300000bc2+6000abc.
ra

Removing the powers of ten and putting the result in

algebraical form, we note the following:
( 1 ) The units’ place is determined by a8.
(2 ) The tens’ place is determined by 3 a2b
(3) The hundreds’ place is contributed to by 3 ab 2 + 3 p,2c
(4) The thousands’ place is formed by b 8 + 6 abc
(5) The ten thousands’ place is given by 3ac2 + 3 b 2c
( 6 ) The lakhs’ place is constituted of 3bc2 ; and
(7) The millions’ place is formed by c3.

N.B. :— The number of zeroes in the various coefficients (in the

Algebraical expansion) will prove the correctness of this
analysis.
 ( 319 )
Note :— If one wishes to proceed in the reverse direction, one
may do §q ; and, for facility’s sake, the letters substi­
tuted (for a, b, c, d etc.) may be conveniently put down
as L, K , J, H etc.

The Implications of the Principle

This Analytical sorting of the various parts of the
algebraical expansion into their respective places, gives us the
necessary clue for eliminating letter after letter and determining
the previous digit. And the whole procedure is really of an
argumentational character. Thus,
(i) From the units’ place, wTe subtract a3 (or L3) ; and that
eliminates the last digit.

al
(ii) From the ten’s place, we subtract 3a2b (or 3L 2 K) and
thus eliminate the penultimate digit.
y
(iii) From the hundreds’ place, we subtract 3a2 c+ 3 a b 2
(or 2 3L2J-|-31k2) and there-by eliminate the pre­
ar
penultimate digit.
(iv) From the thousands’ place, we deduct b3+6abc ;
and so on
m

N.B. :—In the case of perfect cubes we have the additional

advantage of knowing the last digit too, beforehand.
ra

Some instructive examples are given below :

( 1 ) Extract the cube root of the exact cube 33, 076, 161.
Here a—3 ; L = 1 ; and n = 3 .
(L) L = 1 .\ L 8= l . 1 1 1

.\ Subtracting 1, we have I 33 076 161

(K) 3L 2 K = 3 k (ending in 6 ) K= 2 6
Deducting 3K ; we have 33 0761
(J) 3L 2 J + 3 L K 2 = 3 J + 1 2 (ending in 1 ) ) CR=321
3J ends in 9 .*. J = 3 i
N.B. :— The last step is really unnecessary (as the first digit is
known to us from the outset).
 ( 320 )
(2 ) Extract the cube root of the exact cube 1728.
Here, a = l ; L —2 and n = 2 C R =12
(3) Extract the cube root of the exact cube 13,824
Here a = 2 ; L = 4 ; and n = = 2 / . CR=24
(4) Determine the cube root of the exact cube 83, 453, 4 5 3 .
Here F = 4 ; L = 7 ; and N = 3
(L) L = 7 L 3 =343. ) 83 453 453
Subtracting this, we have r 343
J 83 453 1 1
(K) 3L2K==147K (ending in 1 ) K==3 l 441
subtracting 441 J 83 448 7
(J) 3L2J + 3 L K 2==147J-f-189 (ending in 7)1
147J ends in 8 J= -4 J -*• CR=437

l
N.B. :—Exactly as in the previous example.
ya
(5) Find out the cube root of the exact cube 84, 604, 519
Here a = 4 ; L = 9 ; and n = 3 84 604 519
(L) L = 9 L 3=729 Subtracting this ____ 222.
ar

(K) 3L*K=243K (ending in 9) .• .1 = 3 ) 846°729

Subtracting 729t 845965------
(J) 3L2J + 3 L K 2=243J+243 (ending in 5) i
m

/ . 243J ends in 2 J=4 1 CR=439

N.B. :—As before.
ra

(6 ) Extract the cube root of the exact cube 2488 58189

Here a = 6 ; L = 9 ; and n = 3 . 2488 58189
729
(L) L = 9 L3=729 Subtracting this, 24885 746
(K) 3L2K=243K (ending in 6) i 486
K=2 Deducting 486) J 248852 6
(J) 3L2J+3L K 2=243J+108 (endingin 6) l
243J ends in 6 J=6) J CR=629.
N.B. Same as before.
(7 ) Determine the cube root of the exact cube 105823817
Here a = 4 ; L = 3 ; and n = 3 105823817
(L) L = 3 L3=27. Subtracting this 27
10582379
(K) 3L2K = 2 7K (ending in 9) K =7 1 189
Subtracting 189, we have J 1058219
 ( 381 )
(J) 3LaJ + 3 L K 2= 2 7 J +441 (ending in 8 )\
J=4 J ••• C R = 473
N.B. As before,

(8 ) Extract the cube root of the exact cube 143 055 667
Here a = 5 ; L = 3 ; and n = 3 143 055 667
(L) L = 3 L8=27. deducting this ___________ 27
143 055 64
(K) 3L2K = 2 7 K (ending in 4) .\JL= 2 1 ________ 54

Subtracting 54, we have 1143 055 1

(J) 3L2J + 3 L K 2= 2 7 J + 3 6 (ending in 1 ) \
J= 5 J CR=523
N.B. Exactly as before.

(9) Find the cube root of the cube 76, 928, 302, 277.
Here a = 4 , L = 3 ;
and n = 4 .
y al
J
1 The last 4 digis are 2277

27
225
(L) L = 3 .-. L®=27. Subtracting this,
ar
(K) 3L2K = 2 7 K (ending in 5) l 135
K =5 Subtracting 135x } 09
(J) 3L2J + 3 L K 2= 2 7 J +225 (ending \
m

in 9 ) .-. J = 2 J ••• CR=4253

N .B .:— But, if, on principle, we wish to determine the first
ra

digit by the same method of successive elimination of

the digits, we shall have to make use of another alge­
braical expansion (namely, of ( L + K + J + H ) 3. And,
on analysing its parts as before into the units, the tens,
the hundreds etc., we shall find that the 4th step will
reveal 3L2H + 6 L K J + K S as the portion tc be deducted.
So,
(H) 3 L 2 H + 6 L K J + K 8= 2 7H + 1 80 i 30 : 09
+1 25 = 2 7 H + 3 05 (ending in 3) 2 : 7»
.-. H = 4 : and CR=4253 1 27 : 3

( 1 0 ) Determine the cube root of the cube 11,345, 123, 223

Here a = 2 ; L = 7 ; and n = 4 11 345 123 223
(L) L = 7 / . L 3 =343. Subtracting i t , ___________ 343
11 345 12 288
41
 ( 322 )

(K) 3L2K +147K (ending in 8 ) -i 588

K = 4 . Deducting 588 J ll 345 1 1 70
(J) 3LJ2+ 3 L K a=147J+336 •)________ 330
(ending in 0 ) .\ J —2 Cl 134508 4
Subtracting 330, we have )
(H) 3L2 H + 6 L K J + K 3=147H +336 -j
+ 6 4 = 1 4 7 H -f400 (ending in 4). [ CE=2247
H= 2 )
N.B. The last part (for ascertaining the first digit) is really
superfluous.

( 1 1 ) Extract the cube root of the cube 1 2 , 278, 428, 4 4 3

Here a = 2 ; L = 7 ; and n = 4 . 1 2 278 428 4 4 3

(L) L = 7 .’. Ls=343 Deducting it 343

12 278 428 10

l
ya
(K) 3L2K =147K (ending in 0 ) i 0

K=0. J1 2 278 428 1

(J) 3L2J + 3 L K 2= 1 4 7 J -f0 (endingin l)i 441
ar
J=3 J 1 2 278 384
Subtracting 441, we have
(H) 3L2H + 6 L K J + K * = 1 4 7 H + 0 + 0 1
and ends in 4 H= 2 J CR=2307
m

N.B. As in the last example.

ra

( 1 2 ) Find the cube root of the cube 355 045 312 441
Here a = 7 ; L = 1 ; n = 4 355045 312 441
(L) L = 1 L 3 = l . Deducting it, _______ 1
(K) 3L 2 K = 3 K (ending in 4 ) 355045312 44
K= 8 Deducting 24. 24

(J) 3L 2 J + 3 L K 2= 3 J + 1 9 2 (ending 192

in 2 ) J= 0 355045293
(H) 3L2H + 6 L K J + K 3= 3 h + 0 + 5 1 2
and ends in 3 h= 7 CR=7081
N.B. Exactly as above.
Note:— The above method is adapted mainly for odd cubes.
If the cube be even, ambiguous values may arise at
each step and tend to confuse the student’s mind.
 ( 323 )

(13) Determine the cube root of the cube 792 994219216

Here a = 9 ; L = 6 ; and n = 4 792. 994 219 216
(L) L = 6 A L 3=216* Deducting this, ____________ 216
792 994 219 00
(K) 3L2K =108K (ending in zero) ________5^0
A K = 0 or 5. Which isdt to be ? 772 994 2136
Let us take 5 (a pure gam ble)!
(J) 3L2J + 3 L K 2= 108J+450 (ending 1 6 6 6

in 6 ) / . J — 2 or 7 ! 7729961 47
Which should we prefer ? Let us
accept 2 (another perfect gamble) I .
(H) 3L2H + 6 L K J + K 3-1 0 8 H -f 360
+125=108H +485(ending in 7)
.% H = 4 or 9 ! Which should we

l
choose ? Let us gamble again
ya
and pitch for 9 ! A CR==9256
Here, however, our previous knowledge of the first digit
ar
may come to our rescue and assure us of its being 9 . But the
other two were pure gambles and would mean 2 x 2 i.e. four
different possibilities!
m

A Better Method
At every step, however, the ambiguity can be removed
ra

by proper and cogent argumentation ; and this may also prove

interesting. And anything intellectual may be welcomed ; but
it should not become too stiff and abstract; and An ambiguity
(in such a matter) is wholly undesirable (to put it mildly). A
better method is therefore necessary, is available and is given
below.
All that has to be done is to go on dividing by 8 (until an
odd cube emanates), work the sum out and multiply by the
proper multiplier thereafter. Thus,
8 ) 792 994 249 216
8 ) 99124 281152
8 ) 12390535144.
1 548 816 893
1 1 1
 ( 824 )

Here a = l ; L==7 ; and n = 4

(L) L = 7 a L 8 =343. 1548816893
Subtracting this, f 3 4 3

) 154881655
(K) 3L3K =147K (ending in 5) ^ 7 3 5

£ 15488092
•\ K = 5 . Deducting 735. ) 672
(J) 3L2J + 3 L K 2=147J+525 (ending in \
2 ) /. J = 1 Deducting 672, we have : J1548 742
(H) 3L2H + 6 L K J + K 8=147K-)-210 *\ The cube*
+125=147H +335 (ending in 2 ) (root is 1157
/. H= 1 JAnd
and CR (of the original cu b e= 8 X 1157=9256
N.B.

l
Here too, the last step is .unnecessary (as the first digit
ya
is already known to us).

(14) Determine the cube rot of the cube 2 , 840, 362, 499, 528
ar
Here a = l ; L = 2 ; and n = 5
(L) L = 2 L8 = 8 ^2840 362 499 528
8
Deducting this, we have J2840 362 499 52
m

(K) 3L 2 K = 1 2 K and ends in 2 72

K = 1 or 6 ! Let us take ! (2840 362 4988
ra

Deducting 1 2 K. ) __________ 228

(J) 3L2J3LK2=12J+216 (ending }2840 362 476
in 8 ) J = 1 or 6 !
Let us take 1 !
(H) 3L2 H + L K J + K 3 = 1 2 H + 1 2 ^
+ 216=2H +238 (ending in 6 ) (
/ . H = 4 or 9 : Let us take 4 ! )
(G) We need not bother ourselves
about G and the expansion of
( a - f b + c + d + e ) 3 and so on.
Obviously G = 1 CR=14162

But the middle three digits have been the subject of un­
certainty (with 2 x 2 x 2 = 8 different possibilities). We
 ( $25 )

must therefore work this case too out by the other—the

unambiguous—method.
or 8 : 2 8 4 0 3 6 2 4 9 9 5 2 8

3 5 5, 0 4 5, 3 1 2 , 4 4 1

Here a = 7 ; L =1 ; and n = 4
(L) L = 1 ,\L3= 1 } 355 045 312 441
Subtracting this, we haver 1
) 355 045 312 44
(K) 3L 2 K = 3 K (ending in 4) ^ 24
K= 8 Subtracting 24, J 355 045 312 2
(J) 3L2J + 3 L K 2= 3 J + 1 9 2 -n
and ends in 2 /. J = 0 C 19 2
Subtracting 192,

l ) 355 045 13
ya
(H) 3L2H + 6 L K J + K 3= 3 H + 0 + 5 1 2
and ends in 3 /. H = 7 .\ Cube Root=7081
CR of the original expression—14162
ar

(15) Find out the 1 2 -digit exact cube whose last four digits are
6741.
Here a = ? ; L = ; and n = 4
m

1 . . . 6 7 4 1
(L) L = 1 .\ L 3= l Subtracting it, 1

. . . 6 7 4
ra

(K) 3L 2 K = 3 K and ends in 4 i 2 4

K = 8 / . Deducting 24. J . . . 6 5
(J) 3L2J + 3 L K 2= 3 J + 1 9 2 and ends \ . . 1 9 5
in 5 J=1 J 7

/. Subtracting 195, we have

(H) 3L 2 H + 6 L K J + K 3= 3 H + 4 8 + ^
512=3H +560 and ends in 7. , .\ The original
H =9 J) Cube Root is 9181
N.B. As we did not know the first digit beforehand, all the
steps Were really necessary.

(16) A 13-digit perfect cube begins with 5 and ends with 0541.
Find it and its cube root.
 ( 326 )

Here a = l ; L = 1 ; and n = 5 . . . .0 5 4 1
(L) L = 1 .'. L 3 = l . Deducting it. 1

0 5 4
(K) 3L2 K = 3 K K= 8 i 2 4
Subtracting 24, we have J. . . 0 3
(J) 3L2J + 3 L K 2= 3 J + 1 9 2 2 13
and ends in 3 3=1 {
. . . 9
Deducting 213, we have
(H) 3L2H + 6 L K J + K 8= 3 H + 3 3 6 )
+ 5 1 2 = 3 H + 8 4 8 and ends in 9
H =7 )
(J) And Gr=l .-. CR= 17781
And the cube=
17781s

l
ya
ar
m
ra
 Chapter X X X V I

CUBE ROOTS (GENERAL)

Having explained an interesting method by which the
cube roots of exact cubes can be extracted, we now proceed
to deal with cubes in general (i.e. whether exact cubes or not).
As all numbers cannot be perfect cubes, it stands to reason that
there should be a general provision made for all cases. This,
of course, there i s ; and this we now take up.

First Principles
It goes without saying that all the basic principles ex­

l
ya
plained and utilised in the previous chapter should hold good
here too. We need not, therefore, re-iterate all that portion
of the last chapter but may just, by way of recapitulation,
ar

remind ourselves of the conclusions arrived at there and the

modus operandi in question.
The Sequence of the Various Digits
m

(1 ) The first place by a3

(2 ) The second place by 3a 2b
ra

(3) The third place by 3ab2 + 3 a 8c

(4) The fourth place by 6 a b c-fb 3
(5) The fifth place by 3ac2 + 3 b 2c
(6 ) The sixth place by 3bc2
(7) The seventh place by c 3 ; and so on.

The Dividends, Qotients, and Remainders

(1 ) The first D, Q and R are available at sight.
(2 ) From the second dividend, no deduction is to be made.
(3) From the third, subtract 3ab2
(4) From the fourth, deduct 6 a b c + b 8
(5) from the fifth, subtract 3ac2 + 3 b 2c
(6 ) from the sixth, deduct 3bc2
(7 ) from the seventh, subtract c 8. ; and so on.
 ( 328 )

Modus Operandi

Let us take a concrete example, namely, 258 474 853 and

see the modus operandi actually 258 : 4 74853
at work (step by step) 108 : : 42 100
: 6 : 3

(а) Put down 6 and 42 as first Q and first E by mere

VUokanam (inspection).

(б ) The second Gross Divident : 258 : 4 74853

is thus 424. Don’t sub- • •^ 2 1 0 0

tract any thing thereform. ; 6 : 3 7

Merely divide it by 108

l
and put down 3 and
ya 1 0 0 as Qa and Ra
(c) So, the third Gorss : 258 : 4 7 4853
Dividend is 1007. Sub- 1 ^ 8 : : 42 1 0 0 89
ar
tract therefrom 3ab* (i.e. : 6 : 37
3 X 6 X 3 2 i.e. 162). The ---------- -----------------------
third Actual Working Dividend therefore is 1007—
m

162=845. Divide this by 108 and set dovra 7 and 89

as Qs and R8
ra

(d) Thus, the fourth Gross 258 : 4 7 4 853

Dividend is 894. Sub- *08 : : 42 1 0 0 89 111

tract therefrom 6 abc+ : 6 : 37 0

c3= (7 5 6 + 2 7 =783). ------------ -------------------------
So, the fourth actual working dividend is 894—783=
111. Divide this again by 108 and put down 0 and
111 as Q4and R4.
(e) Our next gross dividend is 258: 4 7 4 8 5 3
now 1118. Subtract there- 108 : : 42 100 89 111 47
from 3ac2+ 3 b 2c=882+189 . 6- 3 7 0 0 0
=1071. Therefore our fifth ----- '________________ ~
actual working dividend is 4 7 . Divide it by 108 and
put down 0 and 47 as Qg and R 5
 ( 329 )

(/) Our sixth gross divi- 258: 4 7 4 8 5 3

dend is 4 7 5 . Subtract *^ 8 : :42/l 00/89/111/47/34-

therefrom 3bc2(=441) : 6 : 3 7 0 0 0
So, our Qfi and R ft i , “T T
6 6 (complete cube)
now are 0 and 34.
(g) Our last gross dividend is thus 3 4 3 . Subtract C8
(=343) therefrom and set down 0 and 0 as our Q 7
and 6 7

This means that the given number is a perfect cube,

that the work (of extracting its cube root) is over and that
the cube root is 637.
N.B. Proof of the correctness of our answer is, of course,
readily available in the shape of the fact that 6378 is the

l
given number. But this will be too crudely and cruelly
ya
laborious. Sufficient proof, however, is afforded by the
very fact that, on going into the decimal part of the
ar
answers, we find that all the quotients and all the remain­
der sare zeroes.
An Incomplete cube is now dealt with as a sample :
m

Extract the cube root of 417 to 3 places of decimals

Here the divisor is 147.
417* : 0 0 0
ra

147 : 3 43 : 74 152 155 163

(a) Here Qx and R j= 7 and 74

(b) .\ The second gross dividend is 740. No subtraction
is required. Dividing 740 by 147, we get 4 and
152 as Q 2 and R 2.
(c) The third gross dividend is 1520. Subtracting
3ab2 (=336) therefrom, we have 1184 as our third
actual working dividend. We divide it by 147 and put
down 7 and 155 as our Qa and R 3.
(d) Our fourth gross dividend is 1550. We subtract 6 a b c+
b 3 (=1176+64=1240) therefrom, obtain 310 as our
42
 ( 330 )

fourth actual working dividend, divide it by 147 and

set down 1 and 163 as our Q4 and R 4.
(e) Our next gross dividend is 1630. We subtract 3ac2+
3b2c (=1029+336=1365) therefrom, get 265 as our
fifth actual working dividend, divide it by 147 ; and
so on.
N ote:— The divisor should not be too small. Its ultra-smallness
will give rise to big quotients (sometimes of several
digits), the insufficiency of the remainders for the
subtractions to be made and other such complications
which will confuse the student’s mind.

In case the divisor actually happens to be too small,

two simple devices are available for surmounting this difficulty.

l
ya
(i) Take the first four (or 5 or 6 ) digits as one group and
extract the cube root. For example, suppose we
have to find out the cube root of 1346, 085. Our
ar
chart will then have to be framed thus:
363 : 1 , 346 : 085
: 1 331 : 15
m

: 11 :
ra

Let us now take an actual concrete example and apply

this method for extracting the cube root of 6334625 :
: 6334 : 6 2 5
972 : 5 832 : 502 166 312 1944
: 18 : 5 0 2 ........

(а) Q1=18 ; R ,=502 ; and Divisor (D)=972.

(б ) No subtraction being needed at this point, divide 5026
by 972 and put down 5 and 166 as Q2 and R2.
(c) Our third gross dividend (G.D) is 1662 ; subtract 3ab2
(=1350) from 1662, divide the resultant. Actual
dividend (AD) i.e. 312 by 972 and set down 0 and 312
as Q9 and R8.
 ( 331 )

(d) Our next GD is 3125. Subtract 6abc+b3 (=0+125^=

125) from 3125, divide the AD (3000) by 972 and put
down 2 and 1944 as Q4 and R4 and so on,
Or, Secondly, multiply E (the given expression) by
2 3, 3 3, 4 3 or 5 3 etc., (as found necessary and most
convenient) find the cube root and then divide the CR
by 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 etc. For instance, instead of taking 3
(as the divisor), take 3 X 43 (= 3 X 64=192), find the cube
root and divide it by 4.
Here again, a concrete example may be worked out by
both the methods:
First Method
(а) Qr= l ; R x= l ; and D = 3 2 : 0 0 0 0
3 : : 1 4 10 2

l
ya
: 1 : 26
(б ) Now, G D = A D = 1 0 . Divided by 3, it gives 2 and 4 as
Q2 and R>2*
ar

(c) The third GD is 40. From this subtract 3ab2 ( = 1 2 ).

After this subtraction, the AD is 28. Divide this by
3 and put down 6 and 1 0 as Qa and R s.
m

(d) The fourth GD is 1 0 0 . From this deduct 6abc+b8

(= 7 2 + 8 = 8 0 ). The AD is 2 0 .
ra

Now, as for dividing this 2 0 by 3, the directly apparent

Q4 and R4 are 6 and 2 . Rut the actual quotient and Remainder
are difficult to determine (because of the smallness of the divisor)
and the insufficiency of the Remainders for the next subtrac­
tions and a good number of trial digits may fail before one can
arrive at the correct figures! This is why the other method
is to be preferred in such cases. And then the working will
be as follows:
Multiplying 2 by 53, 250 : 0 0 0

we get 250. 108 : : 34 124 196 332

: 6 : 2 9 9 ...
(a) Qx and R x = 6 and 34
(b) E 2=340. Dividing this by 108, we have Q 2 = 2 and
R 2=124.
 ( 332 )

(c) 3ab2=72. Deducting this from 1240, we get llftg,

Dividing this by 108, Q8= 9 and R 8= l9 6
(d) 6 abc+ bs= 6 4 8 + 8 = 6 5 6 .*. The Working Dividend
= 1960—656=1304. Dividing this by 108, we have
Q4 = 9 and R 4=332 .*. The CR=6*299—
Dividing by 5, the actual cube root=l*259—

( 2 ) Let us take another 1500 : 0 0 0

concrete example i.e. ^63 :______ : 169 238 400 387'

3 . We multiply
1 2 : n • 4 4 7 ~
12 by 5 3 and put
1500 down as the Total Dividend. And we take the
first four digits as one group.
(а) Thus Q1= l l and R x=169

l
ya
(б ) Dividing 1690 by 363, we have Q 2 = 4 and R 2=238
(c) 3ab2=528 .*. Working Dividend=2380—528=1852
Dividing it by 363, we have Q8 = 4 and R =400
ar
(d) 6 a b c+ b 3=1056+64=1120. Deducting this from 4000,
we get 2928. Dividing this by 363, Q4= 7 and
R =387
m

.*. The C R = 1 1*447 etc.

.*. The cube root of the original E =2*289. ..
ra

Some more examples may be taken :

( 1 ) (a) E=1728 ; Qx= l ; 1 : 7 2 8

D = 3 ; and R 2 = 0 3 : : 0 1 0
: 1 : 2 *0 0

(exact cube)
(6 ) 7 divided by 3 gives 2 and 1 as Q 2 and R 2
(c) Third Gorss Dividend= 1 2 ; 3ab2 = 1 2 ; .*. Actual
dividend= 0 .*. Q8= 0 and R3= 0 ^
(d) Fourth gross dividend=8; 6abc+b3= 0 + 8 = 8
.*. Subtracting the latter from the former, Q4= 0
and R4= 0
The CR=12
 ( 333 )
N.B. The obvious second proof speaks for itself.
(2 ) (a) Here E=13824 ; D = 1 2 ; 1 3 : 8 2 4
Qt= 2 ; and R 1 = 5 12 : :5 10 6
: 2 : 4 0 0
(Perfect cube)
(b) 51 gives Qa= 4 ; and R a = 1 0

(c) Gross Dividend=102; 3ab®=96.

Actual dividend= 6 . Divided by 1 2 , this gives
Q3 = 0 and R 8 = 6

(d) G .D = 6 4 ; 6 abc+ b3= 0 + 6 4 A.D = 0 Q4 = 0

and R4==0 The CR is 24.
( 3 ) Here E =33, 076, 161 ; Qx= 3 ; D =27 ; and R ^
(a) Q, = 3 ; and R , = 6 33 : 0 7 6 1 6 1

l
27 : : 6 6 4 2 0 0
ya
: 3 : 2 10 0 0
(complete cube).
ar
(6 ) G D = A D = 6 0 ; Divided by 27, this gives 2 & 6 as
Q2 and Ra »
(c) GD is now 67 ; 3ab2= 3 6 A.D =31. Divided by
m

27, this gives us 1 and 4 as Qa and Rs.

(d) GD is 46; 6 abc+ b3= 3 6 + 8 = 4 4 .‘ . A D = 2 And,
ra

divided by 27, this gives 0 and 2 as Q4 and R4.

(e) GD is 21 ; 3ac2 + 3 b 2 c = 9 + 1 2 = 2 1 A D =0 ; and,
divided by 27, this gives 0 and 0 as Q5 and R 6.
(/) GD is 6 ; 3 bc 2 = 6 AD=0. And, divided by %1,
this gives us 0 and 0 as Q6 and Re.
(g) GD = 1 ; c3= l ; A D = 0 . Divided by 27, this gives us
0 and 0 as Q 7 and R 7 .-. The CR is 321.

N.B.— The second proof is clearly there before us.

(4 ) E = 101 101 : 0 0 0 0
48 : : 37 82 148 112 40
(а) Q j= 4 ; R != 3 7 ; and D =48 : 4. : 6 5 9 5
(б ) G D = A D =370 ; and, divided by 48, this gives us 6

and 82 as Qa and R 2
 ( 334 )

(c) GD=820 ; 3ab8=432 .\ AD=388. and, divided

by 48, this gives us 5 and 148 as Qs and R s
(d) G.D=1480 ; and 6 ab c+ b 8= 720+216=936 ;
AD=544. And this, divided by 48, gives us 9

and 1 1 2 as Q4 and R 4
(e) GD = 1 1 2 0 ; and 3ac2+ 3 b 2c =300+540=840
AD=280. And, divided by 48, this gives us 5

and 40 as Q6 and R 6 ; and so on.

(5) E=29791
(а) Here C^—3 ; and R x= 2 ; and D =27
(б ) G D = A D = 2 7 ; and, divided by 29 : 7 9 1
27, this gives us 1 and 0 as 27 : : 2 0
Qa and R a.

l : 3: 1 .0
ya
(complete cube)
(c) G D = 9 ; and 3ab2= 9 ; A D = 0 , and, divided by 27,
this gives us 0 and 0 as Q , and R a The CR is 31.
ar
N .B. :— The proof is there-before us as usual.

( 6 ) The given expression (E )=83, 453, 453

m

(a) Qx= 4 ; R x= 19 ; and D ==48.

(b) G D = AD=194. 83 : 4 5 3 4 5 3
ra

And, divided 48: : 19 50 61 82 47 34

by 48, this 4 : 3 7. 0 0 0 (exactcube)
gives us 3 and 50 as q 2 and r 8
(c) GD=505 ; and 3ab2=108 AD=397. And, divided
by 48, this gives us 7 and 61 as Q8 and R #
(d) GD=613 ; and 6 abc+ b8=504 + 2 7 = 53 1 A D =82
And, divided by 48, this gives us 0 and 82 as Q4 & R 4
(e) GD=824 ; and 3ac2+ 3 b 2c= 588+ 189= 777 AD
=47 And this, divided by 48, gives us 0 and 47 as
Q6 & R j
(/) GD—3bc2= 4 75 —441 = 34. Q „= o and R e = 3 4

(g) GD=343 ; and c8=343 AD = 0 Q7 = R 7= 0

The CR is 437.
 < 838 )
N .B .:—The proof is there as usual.
(7) E = 8 4 , 604, 519
(а) Q t = 4 ; 84: 6 0 4 5 1 9
j)= 4 8 . 48 : : 20 62 80 129 80 72

and R 1= 2 0 : 4: 3 9 •0 0 0 (perfect cube)

(б ) G D =A D =206. And, divided by 48, this gives us 3

and 62 as Q2 and R 2
(c) GD=620 ; and 3ab2=108 .-. AD=512. And, divided
by 48, this gives us 9 and 80 as Qs and R 3
(d) GD=804 ; and 6abc+b®=648-f27=675 AD=129.
And, divided by 48, this gives us 0 and 129 as Q4 & R 4
(e) G D = 1295; and 3aca+3b*c=972+243=1215
.-. AD =80.

l
Aild, divided by 48, this gives us 0 and
ya
80 as Qg and
(/) GD=801 ; and 3bca=729 A D =72. And, divided
by 48, this gives us 0 and 72 as Q 8 and R #
ar

(g) GD=729; and C8=729 .-. AD = 0 .-. Q 7 = 0 and R 7 = 0

.•. The CR is 439

m

N .B .:— The proof is there as usual.

( 8 ) E=105, 823, 817
ra

(а) Q 1 = 4 ; : 105: 8 2 3 8 1 7
R i = 4 1 . 48 : : 41 82 90 56 19 2
and D = 4 8 : 4 ; 7 3' 0 0 0 (complete cube)

(б ) G D =A D =418. And, divided by 48, this gives us

7 and 82 as Q2 and R a
(c) GD=822 ; and 3ab2=588 .-. AD =234 ; and, divided
by 48, this gives us 3 and 90 as Qs and R s
(d) GD=903 ; and 6 a b c + b 8= 504+343=847 .-. AD =56.
And, divided by 48, this gives us zero and 56 as Q4 & R 4
(e) G D = 568; and 3ac2+ 3 b 2c= 108+ 441= 549 .-.AD
=19. And divided by 48, this gives us zero and 19
as Qg & R j
 ( 336 )

(/) GD=191 ; and 3bc2=189 .*. AD = 2 ; and, divided

by 48, this gives us zero and 2 as Qe and R 6
(g) GD=27 ; and C3=27 AI) = 0 .*. 0 7= 0 and R 7 = 0

The CR=473
N.B. :— The proof is there as usual.
(9 ) E=143, 055, 667 143 : 0 5 5 6 6 7
75 :____ : 18 30 20 17 5 2
: 5 : 2 3 * 0 0 0 (exact cube)
(a) Qx = 5 ; R x—18 ; and D =75
(b) G D = A D =180 ; and, divided by 75, this gives us 2
and 30 as Q2 and R 2
(c) GD=305 ; and 3ab2= 6 0 AD==245 ; and, divided
by 7 5 , this gives us 3 and 2 0 as Q3 and R a

l
ya
(d) GD=205 ; and 6 ab c+ b 3= 1 8 0 + 8 = 1 8 8 .*. AD =17.
And, divided by 75, this gives us 0 arid 17 as Q4 and R 4
(e) GD=176 ; and 3ac2+ 3 b 2c= 1 3 5+ 36 = 1 71 .*. A D =5.
ar

And, divided by 75, this gives 0 and 5 as Q5 and R 5

(/) G D =56 ; and 3bc2= 5 4 .*. A D = 2 ; and, divided by
75, this gives 0 and 2 as Q6 and R 6.
m

(g) GD=27 ; and c3=27 .*. A D = 0 Q? = 0 and R 7 = 0

/. The CR is 523
ra

N.B. :— The proof is there as usual.

( 1 0 ) E = 2 4 8 ,858, 189. : 248 : 8 5 8 1 8 9
108 : : 32 112 81 162 155 72
: 6 : 2 9 . 0 0 0 (perfect cube)
(a) ; ^=32; and D=108
(b) G D =A D =328. And, divided by 108, this gives us 2
and 1 1 2 as Q 2 and R 2
(c) GD=1125 ; and 3ab2= 72 .*. AD=1053 ; and, divided
by 108, this gives us 9 and 81 as Qs and R 3.
(d) GD=818 ; and 6 ab c+ b 3= 6 4 8 + 8 = 6 5 6 .*. AD = 162.
And, divided by 108, this gives 0 and 162 as Q4 & R 4
(6) GD=1621 ; and 3ac2+ 3 b 2c=1458-hl08=1506
A D = 5 5 . And, divided by 108, this gives us 0 and
5 5 as Q5 and R 5.
 ( 337 )

(/) GD=558 ; and 3bc2=486 .\ A D = 7 2 ; and, divided by

108, this gives us 0 and 72 and Q6 and .Re
(g) GD=729 ; and C3=729 .\ AD = 0 ; Q 7 = 0 and R 7 = 0
The CR is 629
N .B. ;—The proof is there as usual.
(11) 11, 345, 123, 223
N ote:—The cube root in this case being of four digits, the
method obtained from the expansion of (a + b - f c ) 3
will naturally not suffice for this purpose ; and we shall
have to expand ( a + b - f c - f d ) 3 and vary the above pro­
cedure in accordance therewith. This is, of course, per­
fectly reasonable.

l
The Schedule of Digits
ya
The Analytical digit-schedule for (a+b-f-c-|-d ) 3 now stands
as follow s:
(а) First digit ( 9 zeros)=a3—
ar
( б ) Second digit ( 8 zeros)=3a 2 b —
(c) Third digit (7 zeros)=3ab 2 + 3 a 2c
(d) Fourth digit (6 zeros)= 6 a b c + b 3+ 3 a 2d
m

(e) Fifth digit (5 zeros)= 6 a b d + 3 a c 2 + 3 b 2c —

(/) Sixth digit (4 ze ro s )= 6 a cd + 3 b c2+ 3 b 2c —
(g) Seventh digit (3 z e r o s )* = 6 b c d + 3 a d 2+ c 3—
ra

(h) Eighth digit ( 2 zeros)= 3 bd2+ 3 c 2d —

(i) Ninth digit (1 zero)=3cd2—
(j) Tenth digit (no zero)= d 3

Consequent Subtractions
( 1 ) Qj and R x by mere inspection.
(2 ) Q 2 and R 2 by simple division (without any subtraction
whatsoever).
( 3 ) From all the other Gross Dividends, subtract:
(3) 3ab2
(4) 6 a b c + b 3
(5) 6abd+3ac 2 + 3 b 2c
( 6 ) 6acd+3bc 2 + 3 b 2d
 ( 338 )

(7) 6bcd+3ad*+c 8
( 8 ) 3bda+3c*d
(9) 3cda
(1 0 ) d8
respectively, in order to obtain the actual working dividend
and thence deduce the required Q and R.
Note :—-It will be noted that, just as the equating of d to zero
in (a -f-b -fc+ d ) 3 will automatically give us ( a + b + c ) 8
exactly so will the substitution of zero for d in the above
schedule give us the necessary schedule for the
three-digit cube root.
As we go higher and higher up (with the number of digits

l
in the cube root), the same process will be found at work. In
ya
other words, there is a general fbrmula for n terms (n being any
positive integer); and all these are only special applications
of that formula (with n equal to 2, 3, 4 and so on). This general
ar
form of the formula, we shall take up and explain at a later stage
in the student’ s progress.
In the meantime, just now, we explain the application of
m

the (a -f-b + c + d ) 3 schedule to the present ease.

Application to the Present Case
ra

1 1 : 3 4 5 1 2 3 2 2 3
12 : : 3 9 2 2 37 59 76 69 62 34
: 2 : 2 4 7' 0 0 0 0 (exact cube)

(а) Qx= 2 ; R1= 3 ; and Divisor is 1 2

(б ) G D = A D = 33. Dividing this by 1 2 , we get Q a = 2 and

R a= 9
(c) G D =94 ; and 3ab2=24. A D =70 Q3= 4 and R s = 2 2

(<*) GD==225 ; and 6 abc+ b3= 9 6 + 8 = 1 0 4 ; AD = 1 2 1

Q4= 7 and R 4=37

(e) GD=371 ; and 6abd+3ac24-3b2c= 1 6 8 + 9 6 + 4 8 = 3 1 2 .
AD =59 .-. Q 5 = 0 and R s=59.
(/) GD—592; and 6acd+3bc2+ 3 b 2d = 3 3 6 + 9 6 + 8 4 = 5 1 6
D =76 Q# = 0 and R #=76.
 ( 339 )

(g) GD=763 ; and 6bcd+3ad2+ c 8==336+294+64=694

A D =69 v Q7 — 0 and R 7=69
(h) G D = 6 9 2 ; and 3bd2-+3c2d = 294+ 336= 630 AD =62.
Q8 = 0 and R 8= 6 2
(i) GD=622 ; and 3cd2=588 A D =34 .V Q0=O and
R *=34
(j) GD=343 ; and d3=343 .\ A D = 0 .*. Q10= 0 and R10= 0
The cube root is 2247
N.B. :—The ocular proof is there, as usual. This is the usual
procedure. There are certain devices, however, which
can help us to over-come all such difficulties ; and,
if and when a simple device is available and can serve

l
our purpose, it is desirable for us to adopt it and minimise
ya
the mere mechanical labour involved and not resort
to the other ultra-laborious method.
ar

The devices are therefore explained hereunder :

The First Device
The first device is one which we have already made use of,
m

namely, the reckoning up of the first 4, 5 or 6 digits as a group

by itself. Thus, in this particular case :
ra

: 11, 345 : 1 2 3 2 2 3
1452 : 10 648 : 697 1163 412 363 62 34

: 22 : 4 7. 0 0 0 (complete cube)

(a) Qx (by the same process) is the double-digit number

2 2 ; R 1=697 ; and D=1452

(b) G D =AD =6971 ; and, divided by 1452, this gives us

4 and 1163 as Qa and R2

(c) G D =11632; and 3ab2==1056 .\ AD=10576 ; and,

divided by 1452, this gives us 7 and 412 as Qs and R 8
(d) GD=4123 ; and 6ab c+ b 3=3696+64=3760 AD=
363 ; and, divided by 1452, this gives us 0 and 363
as Q4 and R 4
 ( 340 )
(e) G D = 3632; and 3ac2+ 3 b 2c=3234+336=3570
.-. A D =62 ; and, divided by the same divisor 1452,
this gives us zero and 62 as Q6 and R 5
(/) G D = 6 2 2 ; and 3bc2=588 .\ AD =34. So Q6 = 0

and R 6—34
(g) GD=343 ; and c3=343 .*. AD = 0 Q7 = 0 and R 7 = 0

The C.R.=2247
N.B. ( 1 ) And the Proof is there before us, as usual,

(2 ) By this device, we avoid the complication caused by

shifting from (a + b -fc ) 3 to ( a + b + c + d ) 3. It,
however, suffers from the draw-back that we have
first to find the double-digit Q, cube it and subtract

l
it from the first five-digit portion of the dividend
ya
and that all the four operations are of big numbers.
Second Device
This is one in which we do not magnify the first group
ar
of digits but substitute (c+ d ) for c all through and thus have
the same ( a + b + c ) 3 procedure available to us. But, after all,
it is only a slight alteration of the first device, whereby, instead
m

of a two-digit quotient-item at the commencement, we will be

having exactly the same thing at the end.
ra

The real desideratum is a formula which is applicable

not only to two-digit, three-digit, or four-digit cube roots but
one which will be automatically and universally applicable. But
this we shall go into at a later stage of the student’s progress.
In the meantime, a few more illustrative instances are
given hereunder (for further elucidation of—or at least, the
student’s practice in, the methods hereinabove explained :
( 1 ) E = 1 2 , 278, 428, 443.
Here too we may follow the full procedure or first ascertain
the first two-digit portion of the cube root of 12, 278, treat the
whole five-digit group as one packet and extract the cube root
of the whole given expression in the usual way. The procedure
will then be as follows :
 ( 341 )

(i) Single-digit method

1 2 : 2 7 8 4 2 8 4 4 3
12 : : 4 6 13 27 22 33 44 3 34
: 2: 307 0 0 00 (perfect cube)

(а) Q j= 2 ; R x= 4 ; and D = 1 2

(б ) G D = A D = 4 2 Qa= 3 and R a = 6

(c) GD=67 ; and 3ab2= 5 4 ; AD =13 Q3 = 0 and

R s=13
(d) GD=138 ; and 6abc+b3= 0 + 27=27 AD = 1 1 1

Q4= 7 and R 4=27

(e) GD=274 ; and 6abd+3ac8+ 3 b 2c= 2 5 2 + 0 + 0 = 2 5 2 ;
AI ) = 2 2 Q5 = 0 and R 5 = 2 2
l
(/) GD = 2 2 2 ; and 6 acd + 3bc2 + 3b2d = 0 + 0 + 189
ya
AD =33 Q 6 = 0 and R 6= 33
(g) G D = 3 3 8 ; and 6bcd+3ad2+ c 8= 0 + 2 9 4 + 0 = 2 9 4
ar

AD= 4 4 Q7 = 0 and R 7= 44
(h) G D = 444; and 3bd2+ 3 c 2d= 4 4 1 + 0 = 4 4 1 AD=3
Q8 = 0 and R 8= 3
m

(i) G D =34 ; and 3cd2= 0 A D =34 Q9 = 0 and

R 9= 34
ra

(j) GD=343 ; and d»=343 A D = A 0 , Q1 0 = 0

and R 1 0 = 0
The CR=2307
N.B- —The proof is before us, as usual.
(ii) Two-Digit method
Preliminary Work : 12 : 278
12 : : 4

: 2: 3...
Q,j (of two digits) is 23 ;
12278 : 4 2 8 4
1587 : 12167 : 111 1114 33 338
23 : 0 7 . 0
 ( 342 )

(а) Qj^ (of two digits)=23 ; R 1= l l l ; and D=1587

(б ) G D =A D =1114 Q2 = 0 ; and R 2=1114
(c) GD =11142; and 3ab2= 0 .'. AD=11142 Q3==7 &
R a=33
(d) GD=338 ; and 6 a b c + b 3 = 0 AD =338 .\ Q4 = 0 &
R =338
(e) GD=3384 ; and 3ac2+ 3 b 2c=3381 +0=3381 AD =3
Q5 = 0 and R 6= 3
(/) G D =34 ; and 3bc2= 0 A D =34 Q6 = 0 & R 6= 34
(g) GD=343 ; and d3=343 A D = 0 , Q7 = 0 and R 7 = 0

The CR is 2307
N.B. :— The proof is before us, as usual.
(2) E = 76, 928, 302, 277.
(i) Single-digit method
y al
: 76 : 9 2 8 3 0 2 2 7 7
ar
48 : : 12 33 44 56 59 44 29 13 2

: 4: 2 5 3. 0 0 0 0 (Exact cube)
m

(а) Qx= 4 ; R x = 1 2 ; and D = 48

(б ) G D =A D =129 .-. Q 2 = 2 and R 2= 33
ra

(c) GD=332 ; and 3ab2= 4 8 AD =284 .-. Q8 = 5 &

R 3= 4 4
(d) GD=448 ; & 6 ab c+ b a= 2 4 0 + 8 = 2 4 8 AD = 2 0 0

Q4= 3 and R 4= 56
(e) GD=563 ; & 6abd+3ac2+ 3 b 2c= 1 4 4 + 3 0 0 + 6 0 = 5 0 4
.-. AD = 5 9 .-. Q6 = 0 and R 5=59
(/) GD=590 ; & 6acd+3bc*+3b2d = 3 6 0 + 1 5 0+ 3 6 = 5 46
.•. A D = 4 4 ; .•. Qe = 0 and R e= 4 4
(g) G D =442 ; and 6bcd+3ad2+ c s= 180+ 108+ 125= 413
.-. A D =29 ; .-. Q7 = 0 and R 7= 29
(h) GD=292 ; and 3bdz+ 3 c 2d = 5 4 + 2 2 5 = 2 7 9 .\ A D = 1 3
Qs= 0 and R 8=13
 ( 843 )

(i) G D = 1 3 7 ; and 3cd2=135 AD = 2 Q „ = 0 and

R j= 2
(j) G D = 2 7 ; and ds= 2 7 .-. A D = 0 . . Q1 0 = 0 and
R10= 0 The CR=4253
N.B. :—Proof as usual.
(ii) Double-digit method
or, secondly, : 76 : 9
.•. Qx (double-digit)= 4 2 48: : 12 33
: 4: 2

: 769 28: 3 0 2 2 7 7
5292 : 740 8 8 : 2840 1943 404 137 13 2
: 42 : 5 3 0. 0 0
l
ya
(а) Qx= 4 2 ; R =2840 ; and D=5292
(б ) GD= AD=28403 Qa= 5 ; and R 2=1943
ar

(c) GD=19430 ; and 3ab2=3150 .’ . AD=16280

Q*=3 and R „=404
(d) G D =4042; and 6abc+bs=3780+125=3905
m

/ . AD=137 Q4 = 0 aiid R 4=137

(c) G D =1372; and 3ac2+ 3 b 2c=1134+225=1359
ra

A D =13 .’. Q6 = 0 and R 6=13

(/) G D = 1 3 7 ; and 3bca=135 AD = 2 Q6 = 0

and R #= 2
(g) G D =27 ; and c8=27 AD = 0 ; Q7= 0 and R 7= 0
*'• The CR is 4253
N.B. Exactly as above.
(3) E =355, 045, 312, 441
(i) Single-Digit method.
355 : 0 4 5 3 1 2 4 4 1
147 : 1 2 120 28 1 3 8 39 55 19 6 0
: 7 : 0 8 1 0

(а) Qx= 7 ; R x= 1 2 ; and D = 147

(б ) G D = A D = 1 2 0 ; Q2 = 0 and R g = 1 2 0
 ( 344 )

(c) G D = 12 0 4 ; and 3aba= 0 AD=1204 Qs = 8

& R s= 28
(d) G D=285 ; and 6 a b c + b 3 = 0 AD =285 ; Q4= l and
R 4=138
(e) GD=1383 and 6abd+3ac2+ 3 b 2c= 0 + 1 3 4 4 + 0 = 1 3 4 4
A D =39 Q 5 = 0 and R 5=39
(/) GD=391 ; and 6acd+3bc2+ 3 b 2d = 3 3 6 + 0 + 0
A D =55 Q6 = 0 and R 6= 55
(g) G D = 55 2 ; and 6bcd+3ad2+ c 8= 0 + 2 1 +512=533
A D =19 Q7 = 0 and R 7= 19
(A) G D = 19 4 ; and 3bd2+ 3 c 2d = 0 + 1 9 2 AD =2
Qg=0 and R 8= 2

l
(i) G D = 2 4 ; and 3cda= 2 4
ya A D = 0 ; Q = 0 and R = 0
(j) GD = 1 ; and d8= l A D = 0 , Q= 0 and R = 0

The CR is 7081
ar
N.B. As above.
(ii) Double-digit method.
: 355045 : 3 1 2 4 4 1
m

14700 : 343000 : 12045 2853 391 40 2 0

: 70 : 8 1 * 0 0 0
ra

(a) Qx (of 2 digits)= 7 0 ; R x= 12045 ; and D=14700

(,b) G D =AD =120453 Q2 = 8 and R 2=2853
(c) GD=28531 ; and 3ab2=13440 .-. AD=15091
Q3= l and R s=391
{d) GD=3912; & 6 a b c+ b 3=3360+512=3872 A D =40
Q4= 0 and R 4= 4 0
(e) GD=404 ; & 3ac2+ 3 b 2c= 2 1 0+ 19 2 = 40 2 AD =2
Q5 —O and R 5= 2
(/) G D =24 ; and 3bc2= 2 4 AD = 0 .-. Q#= 0 and
R #= 0

(g) G D = 1 ; and d3= l AD= 0 Q7= 0 and R 7= 0

The CR is 7081
 ( 345 )
N.B. As above.
(4) E=792, 994, 249, 216
(i) Single-Digit method.
792: 9 9 4 2 4 9 2 1 6
243 : : 63 153 216 158 199 152 72 56 21
9 5 6 .0 0 00

(а) Qx= 9 ; R x=63 ; and D =243

(б ) G D = A D =639 Q2 = 2 ; and R a=153
(c) GD=1539 ; and 3ab2=108 .\ AD=1431 Qs
and R 3=216
(d) GD=2164 ; & 6 ab c+ b s= 5 4 0 + 8 = 5 4 8 AD=1616
Q4 = 6 and R 4=158

l
ya
(e) GD=1582 ; and 6 abd + 3 ac2 + 3b*c = 648 + 675 +
60=1363 AD =199 Q5= 0 and R B=199
(/) GD=1994 ; and 6acd+3bc2+ 3 b*d=1620-f 150-j-
ar

72=1842 AD =152 Q „ = 0 and R 6=152

(g) GD=1529; & 6bcd+3ad2+ c 3=360+972+125=1427
A D = 72 / . Q7= 0 and R 7=72.
m

(h) GD=722 ; & 3bd2+ 3 c 2d = 216+ 450= 666 A D =56

Qg= 0 and R 8= 56
ra

(i) GD=561 ; and cd2=540 AD=21 \ Q9= 0 a n d

R#= 2 1
(j) GD=216 ; and ds=216 AD =0 Q10= 0 and
R io = °
The CR=9256
N.B. As above.
Double-Digit Method
792 : 9 :
Q2 (of two digits is 92 and
243 : : 63 153 :
: 9 : 2 : 923=778688. And D=25392.

792994 9 2 1 6
25392 : 778688
92 0 0 0 0 0
44
 ( 346 )

(а) Q i=92 ; and R 1=14306

(б ) G D = A D = 143062 Qa= 5 ; and R 2=16102
(c) G D =I61024; and 3ab2=6900 AD=I54124
Q8 = 6 ; and R 8=1772
(d) GD=17729 ; and 6abc+b8= 16560+125=16685
AD =1044 Q4 = 0 and R 4=1044
(e) G D = 10442 ; and 3ac2+ 3 b ac=9936+450=10386
A D =56 .\ Q5 = 0 and R 5=56
(/) GD=561 ; and 3bc2=540.\AD=21.\Q6= 0 ; & R e = 2 1

(g) GD=216 ; and D8=216 / . AD = 0 Q7 = 0 and R 7 = 0

The CR is 9256
N.B. As above.
N ote:— It must be admitted that, although the double-digit

l
method uses the ( a + b + c ) 8 schedule and avoids the
ya
( a + b + c + d ) 8 one, yet it necessitates the division,
multiplication and subtraction of big numbers and is
therefore likely to cause more mistakes* It is obvious-
ar
by better and safer to use the ( a + b + c + d ) 3 and deal
with smaller numbers.
In this particular case, however, as the given number
m

terminates in an even number and is manifestly divisible by

8 (and perhaps 64 pr even 512), we can (in this case) utilise
ra

a third method which has already been explained (in the imme­
diately preceding chapter), namely, divide out by 8 (and its
powers) and thus diminish the magnitude of the given number.
We now briefly remind the student of that method.
Third Method
: 7 9 2 99 4 249 216
8 9 9 124 281 152
8 : 1 2 390 535 144

1 , 548, 816, 893

5 4 8 8 1 6 8

2 6 16 36 55 74 1

1 5 7 0 0 0 0
 ( M7 )

(a) Q ,= l and R 2 = 0

(6 ) G D = A D = 0 5 Qa= l and R a = 2

(c) 6 D = 2 4 ; and 3ab®=3 AD = 2 1 Q8= 5 and R 8 = 6

(d) G 0 = 6 8 ; and 6 ab c+ b 8= 3 0 + l = 3 l A D =37

Q4 = 7 ; and R 4= 1 6
(e) GD=168 ; and 6 ab d + 3ac*+ 3b«c= 42+ 75+ 15= 132
A D =36 Q6 = 0 and R 5= 36
(/) GD=361 ;an d 6a cd + 3b c2+ 3 b 2d = 2 1 0 + 7 5 + 2 1 = 3 0 6
A D =55 Q6 = 0 and R 6=55
(g) GD=556 ; and 6bcd+3ad2+ c 8=210+147+125= 482
A D =74 Q7 = 0 and R 7= 74
(h) GD=748; and 3bd2+ 3 c 2d = 147+ 525= 672 .\ A D =76

l
ya
Q8 = 0 and R 8= 7 6
(i) GD=769 ; and 3cda=735 .\ A D =34 Q0=O ; and
R #= 34
ar

(j) GD=343 ; and d8=343 AD = 0 Qi0 = 0 ; and

R io — 0

The C.R. (of the sub-multiple)=1157

m

The C.R. of the given number=9256

Or, Fourthly, the derived submultiple may be dealt
ra

with (by the two-digit method) thus :—

1548 : 8 1 6 8 9 3

363 : 1331 : 217 363 265 221 76 3 4

: 11 : 5 7 0 0 0

.(a) Qx= l l ; R x=217 ; and D =363

(b) G D =A D =2178 Q2= 5 and R a=363
(c) GD=3631 ; and 3aba=825 .\ AD=2806 .\ Q8 = 7 &
R 8=265
(d) GD=2656 ; and 6 abc+ b8= 2 3 1 0 + 125=2435 AD=
2 21 Q4 = 0 and R 4 = 2 2 1
(e) GD=2218 ; and 3aca+3b*c=1617+525=2142
A D =76 Q5 = 0 and R e= 7 6
 ( 348 )
(/) GD=769 ; and 3bc2=735 A D =34 Q6 = 0 ; &
R e=34
(g) G D=343; and c3=343 xAD=0 .\ Q7= 0 and R7= 0
.*. The cube root of the sub-multiple is 1157
.\ The CR o f the original number=9256
N.B. As above.
(5 ) E= : 2 , 840, 362, 499, 528
8 :
: 355, 045, 312, 441,

355 : 0 4
147 : : 12 120
: 7 : 0 8 1

l
ya
This very number having already been dealt with (in
example 3 of this very series, in this very portion of this subject),
we need not work it all out again. Suffice it to say that, because,
ar
7081 is the cube root of this derived sub-multiple,
The C.R. of the original number is 14162
Note :—All these methods, however, fall in one way or another,
m

short of the Vedic ideal of ease and simplicity. And

the general formula which is simultaneously applicable
ra

to all cases and free from all flaws is yet ahead. But
these matters we shall go into, later.
 Ch a p t e r X XX V II

PYTHAGORAS5 THEOREM ETC.

Modern Historical Research has revealed—and all the

modern historians of mathematics have placed on record the
historical fact that the so-called “ Pythogoras’ Theorem” was
known to the ancient Indians long long before the time of
Pythagoras and that, just as although the Arabs introduced the
Indian system of numerals into the Western world and distinct­
ly spoke of them as the “Hindu” numerals, yet, the European

l
ya
importers thereof undiscerningly dubbed them as the Arabic
numerals and they are still described everywhere under that
designation, similarly exactly it has happened that, although
ar
Pythagoras introduced his theorem to the Western mathematical
and scientific world long long afterwards, yet that Theorem
continues to be known as Pythagoras’ Theorem !
m

This theorem is constantly in requisition in a vast lot of

practical mathematical work and is acknowledged by all as
ra

practically the real foundational pre-requisite for Higher Geo­

metry (including Solid Geometry), Trigonometry (both plane
and Spherical), Analytical Conics, Calculus (Differential and
Integral) and various other branches of mathematics (Pure and
Applied). Yet, the proof of such a basically important and
fundamental theorem (as presented, straight from the earliest
sources known to the scientific world, by Euclid etc., and as still
expounded by the most eminent modern geometricians all
the world over) is iiltranotorious for its tedious length, its
clumsy cumbrousness etc., and for the time and toil entailed
on i t !

There are several Vedic proofs, everyone of which is much

simpler than Euclids’ etc. A few of them are shown below :
 ( 300 )

First Proof
Here, the square A E =the square KG
the four congruent right-angled traingles all
around it.
Their areas are c 2, (b—a) 2 and 4 x fab
respectively.
C2 = a 2 - 2 a b + b 2 -f4(| ab )= a 2 - f b 2
Q.E.D.
Second Proof
C o n s t r u c t io n :
C D = A B = m ; and D E = B C = n . .-. ABC
and CDE are Congruent; and ACE is right-

l
angled Isosceles. Now, the trapezium
ya
A B D E =A B C +C D E +A C E £mn+|h2+
lm n = i(m + n ) X (m4-n)==im 2 4-m n -fin 2
.-. 4h2 = $ m 2 -H n 2 .-. A2 = m 2 + n 2 Q.E.D.
ar
(N.B. Here we have utilised the proposition that the area of
a trapezium= | the altitude X the sum of the parallel
m

Third Proof
Here, A E = B F = C G = D H = m and E B =
ra

•FC=G D =H A= n.
Now, the squae AC=the square E G +
the 4 congruent right-angled triangles around
it .•. h 2 + 4 (^ m n )= (m + n ) 2 = m 2 -|-2mn-fii2
.% A2 = m 2 - f » 2 Q.E.D.
Fourth Proof
(The proposition to be used here is that the areas of
similar triangles are proportional to the squares on the homo­
logous sides). Here, BD is _]_ to AC
.-. The triangles ABC, ABD and BCD
are similar.

As between ( 1 ) the first two triangles

and (2 ) the first and third ones,
 ( 351 )

M!=ADB. and^ B C D
AC* ABC ; AC2 ABC

AB2-fBC2=A C 2 Q.E.D.
Fifth Proof
(This proof is from Co-ordinate Geometry. And, as
modern Conics and Co-ordinate Geometry (and even Trigono­
metry) take their genesis from Pythagoras’ Theorem, this
process would be objectionable to the modern mathematician.
But, as the Vedic Sutras establish their Conics and Co-ordinate
Geometry (and even their Calculus), at a very early stage, on
the basis of first principles and not from Pythagoras’ Theorem

l
ya
(sic), no such objection can hold good in this case.
The proposition is the one which
gives us the distance between two
ar

points whose co-ordinates have been

given. Let the points be A and B
and let their co-orditiates be (a, 0)
m

and (0, b) respectively.

Then, BA V (a- ° ) 2+ ( 0 - b ) 2=
ra

V a 2+ b 2 .-. BA2= a 2+ b 2 Q.E.D.

N ote:—The Apollonius’ Theorem, Ptolemy’s Theorem and a
vast lot of other Theorems are similarly easy to solve
with the aid of the Vedic Sutras. We shall not,
however, go into an elaborate description thereof
(except of the Apollonius Theorem) just now but shall
reserve them for a higher stage in the student’s studies.
 C h a p te r X X X V I I I

APOLLONIUS’ THEOREM
Apollonius5 Theorem (sic) is practically a direct and
elementary corollary or offshoot from Pythagoras5 Theorem.
But, unfortunately, its proof too has been beset with the usual
flaw of irksome and needless length and laboriousness.
The usual proof is well-known and need not be reiterated
here. We need only point out the Vedic method and leave
it to the discerning reader to do all the contrasting for himself.
And, after all, that is the best way. Isn’t it. %
Well, in any triangle ABC, if D be

l
the mid-point of BC, then AB2+ A C 2=
ya
2(AD2+ B D 2). This is the proposition
which goes by the name of Apollonius5
Theorem and has now to be proved by
ar
us by a far simpler and easier method than
the one employed by him.
ly. Let AO be the perpendicular from A
on BC ; let XO X ’ and YOY’ be the axes of co-ordinates ;
m

and let BO, OD and OA be m, n and p respectively

D B = D C = m -fn
ra

A B a4-AC2= ( p a+ m 2) + ( m 2+ 4 m n + 4 n 2- f p 2) =
2 p 2 + 2 m 2 -f 4 m n - f 4 n 2
and 2 (AD2+ B D 2)= 2 [ (p2+ n 2)+(m 2-f 2mn-fn2) ] ~
= 2 p 2+2m 2+4m n+4n2
AB2+A C 2= 2 (AD2+ D B 2) Q.E.D.
 ( 363 )

the circum-centre, the in-centre, the ex-centree, the

centroid, the Nine-Points-circle etc., can all be similarly-
proved (very simply and very easily) by means of
Co-ordinate Geometry.
We shall go into details of these theorems and. their
Vedic proofs later on ; but just now we would just merely point
out that, like the “Arabic numerals” and “Pythogoras’ Theorem” ,
the “ Cartesian” co-ordinates are a historical M is n o m e b , no more,
and no less.

l
ya
ar
m
ra
 Chapter X X X IX

ANALYTICAL CONICS
Analytical Conics is a very important branch of mathema­
tical study and has a direct bearing on practical work in various
branches of mathematics. It is in the fitness of things, there­
fore, that Analytical Conics should find an important and pre­
dominating position for itself in the Vedic system of mathe­
matics (as it actually does).
A few instances (relating to certain very necessary and
very important points connected with Analytical Conics) are

l
therefore given here under (merely by way, let it be remem­
bered, of illustration).
ya
I. Equation to the Straight Line,
ar
For finding the Equation of the straight line passing
through two points (whose co-ordinates are given.
Say, (9, 17) and (7,-2).
m

The current method tells us to work as follows:

Take the general equation y==mx+c.
ra

Substituting the above values therein,

We have: 9 m + c= 1 7 ; and 7 m + c = —2 .
Solving this simultaneous equation in m and c, we have ;
9 m + c= 1 7
7m -f c = —2

2m =19 .*. m =9|

Substituting this value of m (in either of the above two equations)

we have, 0 6 | + c = — 2 Substituting these values
of m and c in the Original General Equation (y=m x-f-c), we
get y==9j X —6 8 j. .*. Removing fractions, we have 2 y= 1 9x—
137. And then, by transposition, we say, 19x—2y=137. But
this method is decidedly too long and cumbrous (and especially
for such a petty matter)!
 ( 355 )

And the Second Current Method (which uses the formula

_ _ y 2 —y x / v _ v v is equally cumbrous and confusing.
y~~Yi— i* It ultimately amounts to the right
thing ; but it does not make it clear and requires several more
steps of .working!
But the Vedic at-sight, one-line, mental m ethod (by the
Pardvartya Sutra) enables us to write the answer mechanically
down by a mere casual look at the given co-ordinates. And
it is as follows:
The General Equation to the straight line (in its final
form) is .. x— .. y = . . [where the co-efficients of x and
y (on the left hand side) and the independent (on the Right
hand-side) have to be filled in]. The Sutra tells us to do this

l
ya
very simply by :
(i) putting the difference of the y —co-ordinates as the
x-coefficient and vice versa ; and
ar

(ii) evaluating the independent term on that basis.

For example, in the above example, the co-ordinates are :

m

(9, 17) and (7, —2).

(i) so our x-coefficient is 17—(—2)=19
ra

(ii) and our y —coefficient is 9—7 = 2.

Thus we have 19 X — 2 y as our L.H.S. straightaway.
(iii) As for the abs6 lute term on the R.H.S., as the straight
line in question passes through the two given points,
the substitution of the original co-ordinates of each
of the points must give us the independent term.

So, the substitution of the values 9 and 17 in the L.H.S.

of the equation gives us 1 9 x 9 —2 x 1 7 = 1 7 1 — 34=137 !
Or Substituting the values 7 and — 2 therein, we get 19x7
—2x—2 = 1 3 3 + 4 = 1 3 7 ! And that is additional confirmation
and verification !
But this is not all. There is also a third method by
which we can obtain the independent term (on the R.H.S).
 ( 866 )

And this is with the help of the rule about Adyam Antyam
and Madhyam i.e. be—ad (i.e. the product of the means minus
the product of the extremes)! So, we have 1 7x7—9X —
2= 119+ 18= 137 ! And this is still further additional
confirmation and verification !
So, the equation is :— 19x-—2y=137 which is exactly the
same as the one obtained by the elaborate current method
(with its simultaneous equations transpositions and substitu­
tions etc; galore) ! And all the work involved in the Vedic method
has been purely mental, short, simple and easy !
A few more instances are given below:
( 1 ) Points (9, 7) and (—7, 2 )
A The Equation tothe straight line joining them is :
5x—1 6 y = —67

l
ya
(2 ) ( 1 0 , 5) and (18, 9) .\ x = 2 y (by Vilokan too)
(3) ( 1 0 , 8 ) and (9, 7) x —y = 2 (by Vilokan too)
ar
(4) (4, 7) and (3, 5) 2x—y = l
(5) (9, 7) and (5, 2) A 5 x -4 y = 1 7
(6 ) (9, 7) and (4, —6 ) /. 13x—5y=82
(7) (17, 9) and (13, - 8 ) 17x—4y=253
m

(8 ) (15, 16) and (9, —3) /. 19x—6y=189

(9) (a, b) and (c, d)
ra

x(b—d)—y (a—c)=bc—ad
II. The General Equation and Two Straight Lines.
The question frequently arises:—When does the General
Equation to a straight line represent two straight lines ?
Say, 12x2+ 7 x y —10y2+ 1 3 x + 4 5 y —35=0.
Expounding the current conventional method, Prof. S. L.
Loney (the world-reputed present-day authority on the subject)
devotes about 15 lines (not of argument or of explanation
but of hard solid working) in section 119, example 1 on page
97 of his “ Elements of Co-ordinate Geometry” , to his model
solution of this problem as follows :

Here a = 1 2 , h— I, b = — 1 0 , g = ~ > f= ^ a n d c = — 35
Z Z Z
 ( $57 )

abc+2fgh—af2—bg2—ch2
= 1 2 (x — 10) ( x - 3 5 ) + 2 X ^ x H x | - 1 2 ^ j 2

- ( - ' » ) ( y ) ' - < - 56> ( I ) ’

= 4200+ ^ - 6075+ — + ^ = - 1875+ 1^ 2=0
4 4 4 4
The equation represents two straight lines.
Solving it for x, we have :
x 2 + x 7 y + 13.|_^2 y + 13y _ 10y2- 4 5 y + 35+ ^ 7y + 1 3 ^

_ / 2 3 y —43v2
V 24 /
. t _l 7 y + 1 3 -

l = 2i i z i 3
ya
•• + 24 24
... x = ? £ = ? or 1 ?1 ± ^
3 4
ar
.•.The two straight lines are 3 x = 2 y —7 and 4 x = —5y+ 5
jVote ;—The only comment possible for us to make hereon is
that the very magnitude of the numbers involved in the
m

fractions, their multiplications, subtractions etc., ad

infinitum is appalling and panic-striking and that it
ra

is such asinine burden-bearing labour that is responsible

for, not as a justification for, but, at any rate, an ex­
tenuation for the inveterate hatred which many
youngsters and youngstresses develop for mathematics
as such and for their mathematics-teachers as such !
We make no reflection on Prof. Loney. He is perhaps
one of the best, the finest and the most painstaking of mathe­
maticians and is very highly esteemed by us as such and for his
beautiful publications (which are standard authorities on the
various subjects which they deal with). It is the system that
we are blaming, (or, at any rate, comparing and contrasting with
the Vedic system).
Now, the Vedic method herein is one by which we can
immediately apply the “ tJrdhwa” Sutra the Adyam Adyena
 ( 358 )

Sutra and the Lopana Sthapana Sutra and by merely looking at

the frightful looking (but really harmless) Quadratic before
us, readily by mere mental arithmetic, write down the answer
to this question and sa y :— “ Yes ; and the straight lines are
3 x —2 y + 7 = 0 and 4 x + 5 y —-5=0. How exactly we do this (by
mental arithmetic), we proceed to explain presently.

The Vedic Method

( 1 ) By the “ Urdhva Tiryak” , the 3 x —2 y + 7

“ Lopana Sthapana” and th%“ Adyam Adyena” 4 x + 5 y —5

Sutras (as explained in some of the 12x2 + 7 x y —lOy
v . V x \ „ + 1 3 x + 4 5 y -3 5
earliest chapters), we have (mentally): -------------- ----------
12x2 —7xy+10y 2 = (3 x —2y) (4x+5y) and we find 7 and—5 to

l
be the absolute terms of the two factors.
ya We thus get
(3x—2 y + 7 )= 0 and (4 x + 5 y —5 )= 0 as the two straight lines
represented by the given equation. And that is all there is to it.
ar
The Hyperbolas and the Asymptotes.
Dealing with the same principle and adopting the same
procedure in connection with the Hyperbola, the Conjugate
Hyperbola and the Asymptotes, in articles 324 and 325 on pages
m

293 & 294 of his “ Elements of Co-ordinate Geometry” , Prof.

S. L. Loney devotes 27+14 (= 41) lines in all to the problem and
ra

concludes by saying:
“ As 3x 2 —5 x y --2 y * + 5 x + lly —8 = 0 is the equation of the
Asymptotes,

/ . c = —12
The Equation to the Asymptotes is 3 x 2 —5 xy—2 y2+
5 x + l l y —1 2 = 0
And consequently the Equation to the Conjugate Hyper­
bola is 3x2—5xy—2y2+ 5 x + l l y —16.
W ell; all this is not so terrific-looking, because of the
very simple fact that all the working (according to Art, 116 on
pages 9 5 etc.,) has been taken fpr granted and done “ out of Court”
 ( 369 )

or in private, so to speak. But even then the substitution of the

values of a, b, c, f, g, and K in the Discriminant to the General
Equation and so on is, from the Yedic standpoint, wholly
supererogatory toil and therefore to be avoided.
By the Vedic method, however, we use the same Lopan
Sthdpana the Urdhva Tiryak and the Adyam Adyena Sutras;
we first get-mentally 3 x + y and 3x-f-y — 4
x —2 y and then—4 and 3 as the x —2 y - } - 3
only possibilities in the case; and 3 x 2 _ 5 xy _ 2 y 2 + 5 x + l l y — 1 2
as this givesus- 1 2 in the product, --------------- ---------------------------
we get this product= 0 as the Equation to the Asymptotes;
and, as the Conjugate Hyperbola is at the same distance-in the
opposite direction from the Asymptotes, we put down the same
al
equation (with only—16 instead of—8 ) as the required Equation
to the Conjugate Hyperbola (and have not got to bother about
y
the complexities of the Discriminants, the inevitable substi­
tutions and all the rest of i t ) ! And that is all.
ar

A few more illustrative instances will not be out of place:

(1) 8 x 8 + ! 0 x y —3y 2 —2 x -f4 y —2 = 0 1
m

,\ (2x-)-3y)(4x—y )—2 x + 4 y —2 = 0 J
4x— y + 1
2 x + 3 y —1______________
ra

8xa-f-10xy—3ya—2 x + 4 y —1 = 0
The Equation to the Asymptotes is 8 xa-f-1 0 x y —3ya—2 x
-f-4 y = l ; and the Equation to the Conjugate Hyperbola is
8 x a+ 1 0 x y —3y2 —2 x + 4 y = 0
(2 ) ya—x y —2 xa—5 y + x —6 = 0 y + x —2 " 1
y —2x—3 J _______________
y 2—x y —2 x 2 - f x —5 y + 6 = 0

The Asymptotes are ( y + x —2 ) (y—2x—3 )= 0 \

And the Conjugate Hyperbola is y 2—x y —2x2+ x —5 y + 1 8 = 0 J
(3) 55x2—120xy+20y2+ 6 4 x —48y=0 l l x — 2y+4
5x—10y+4
5 5 x 2—120xy+20y8+ 6 4 x —48y+ 16 = 0
 ( 360 )

/ . This is the Equation to the Asymptotes; and the Equation

to the Conjugate Hyperbola is 55x2—120xy+20y2+ 6 4 x —48y+
3 2= 0 *
(4) 12xs—23xy+10ya—25x+26y—14 4x—5y—3
3x—2y—4

,\ The Asymptotes are : (1 2 x 2—23xy+10y2—25x+26y %

\ + 12=0
And the Conjugate Hyperbola is )1 2 x 2—-23xy+10y2—25x+26y
(. +38=0
(5) 6x2—oxy—6y2+ 1 4 x + 5 y + 4 .\ 2x—3 y + 4 )
3 x -2 y + l {

Independent term =4
Two straight lines.
y al
ar
m
ra

)
 Chapter XL.

MISCELLANEOUS MATTERS
There are also various subjects of a miscellaneous character
which are of great practical interest not only to mathematicians
and statisticians as such but also to ordinary people in the
ordinary course of their various businesses etc., which the modern
system of accounting etc., .does scant justice to and in which
the Vedic Sutras can be very helpful to them. We do not propose
to deal with them now, except to name a few of them:
( 1 ) Subtractions;

l
(2 ) Mixed additions and subtractions ;
ya
(3) Compound additions and subtractions* *
(4) Additions of Vulgar Fractions e t c ;
ar

(5 ) Comparison of Fractions;
( 6 ) Simple and compound practice (without taking
Aliquot parts etc.)
m

(7) Decimal Operations in all Decimal W ork ;

(8 ) Ratios, Proportions, Percentages, Averages etc. ;
ra

(9) Interest; Annuities, Discount e t c ;

( 1 0 ) The Centre of Gravity of Hemispheres etc ;
( 1 1 ) Transformation of Equations; and
( 1 2 ) Dynamics, Statics, Hydrostatics, Pneumatics etc.,
Applied Mechanics etc., etc.
N.B. :—There are some other subjects, however, of an important
character which need detailed attention but which
(owing to their being more appropriate at a later stage)
we do not now propose to deal with but which, at the
same time, in view of their practical importance and
their absorbingly interesting character, do require
a brief description. We deal with them, therefore,
briefly hereunder.
 ( 302 )

Solids, Trigonometry, Astronomy Etc.

In Solid Geometry, Plane Trigonometry, Spherical Tri­
gonometry and Astronomy too, there are similarly huge masses
of Vedic material calculated to lighten the mathematics students’
burden. We shall not, however, go here and now into a detailed
disquisition on such matters but shall merely name a few of the
important and most interesting headings under which these
subjects may be usefully sorted :
( 1 ) The Trigonometrical Functions and their inter­
relationships ; etc.
(2 ) Arcs and chords of circles, angles and sines of angles
etc ;
(3 ) The converse i.e. sines of angles, the angles themselves,

l
chords and arcs of circles etc ;
ya
(4) Determinants and their use in the Theory of Equa­
tions, Trigonometry, Conics, Calculus etc ;
( 5 ) Solids and why there can be only five regular Poly­
ar
hedrons; etc., etc.
( 6 ) The Earth’s daily Rotation on its own axis and her
annual relation around the Sun;
m

(7) Eclipses;
( 8 ) The Theorem (in Spherical Triangles) relating to the
ra

product of the sines of the Alternate Segments i.e.

about :
Sin BD Sin CE Sin AF__ ,
Sin DC ’ Sin EA Sin FB
(9 ) The value of 1 1 (i.e. the ratio of the circumference of a
circle to its Diameter).
N.B. ; —The last item, however, is one which we would like to
explain in slightly greater detail.

Actually, the value of i i is given in the well-known

Anustub metre and is couched in the Alphabetical Code-Language

(described in an earlier chapter):
 ( 363 )

It is so worded that it can bear three different meanings—

all o f them quite appropriate. The first is a hymn to the Lord
Sri Krsna ; the second is similarly a hymn in praise of the

Lord Shri Shankara: and the third is a valuation of — to 32

10
places of Decimals! (with a “ Self-contained master-key” for
extending the evaluation to any number of decimal places !
As the student (and especially the non-Sanskrit knowing
student) is not likely to be interested in and will find great
difficulty in understanding the puns and other literary beauties
of the verse in respect of the first two meanings but will naturally
feel interested in and can easily follow the third meaning, we
give only that third one here :
l
ya
r-*
1 1^ .3 1 4 1 5 9 2 6 5 3 5 8 9 7 9 3 )
10 2 3 8 4 6 2 6 4 3 3 8 3 2 7 92.
on which, on understanding it, Dr. V. P. Dalai (of the Heidelburg
ar

University, Germany) felt impelled—as a mathematician and

physicist and also as a Sanskrit scholar—to put on record his
comment as follows:
m

“ It shows how deeply the ancient Indian mathe­

maticians penetrated, in the subtlety of their
ra

calculations, even when the Greeks had no numerals

above 1 0 0 0 and their multiplications were so very
complex, which they performed with the help of the
counting frame by adding so many times the multiplier !
7 x 5 could be done by adding 7 on the counting frame
5 tim es!” etc., etc. !
 RECAPITULATION AND CONCLUSION
In these pages, we have covered a large number of branches
of mathematics and sought, by comparison and contrast, to make
the exact position clear to all seekers after knowledge. Arith­
metic and Algebra being the basis on which all mathematical
operations have to depend, it was and is both appropriate and
inevitable that, in an introductory and preliminary volume of
this particular character, Arithmetic and Algebra should have
received the greatest attention in this treatise. But this is
only a kind of preliminary “PROLEGOMENA” and SAMPLE
type of publication and has been intended solely for the purpose

l
of giving our readers a foretaste of the delicious delicacies in
ya
store for them in the volumes ahead.1 If this volume achieves
this purpose and stimulates the reader’s interest and prompts
him to go in for a further detailed study of Vedic Mathematics
ar
we shall feel more than amply rewarded and gratified thereby.
m
ra

1 No subsequent volume has been left by the author.—Editor.

 A REPRESENTATIVE PRESS OPINION

Reproducedfrom the Statesman, India, dated 10th January, 1956.

EVERY MAN A MATHEMATICIAN

(M b . D e s m o n d D o ig )

Now in Calcutta and peddling a miraculous commodity is

His Holiness Jagad Guru Sri Shankaracharya of the Govardhan
Peeth, Puri.
Yet Sri Shankaracharya denies any spiritual or miraculous
powers, giving the credit for his revolutionary knowledge to

l
ya
anonymous ancients who in 16 Sutras and 120 words laid down
simple formulae for all the world’s mathematical problems.
The staggering gist of Sri Shankaracharya’s peculiar
ar

knowledge is that he possesses the know-how to make a mathe­

matical vacuum like myself receptive to the high voltage of
higher mathematics. And that within the short period of one
m

year. To a person who struggled helplessly with simple equa­

tions ahd simpler problems, year after school-going year and
ra

without the bolstering comfort of a single credit in the subject,

the claim that I can face M.A. Mathematics fearlessly after
only six months of arithmetical acrobatics, makes me an im­
mediate devotee of His Holiness Jagad Guru Sri Shankaracharya
of the Goverdhan Peeth, Puri.
I was introduced to him in a small room in Hastings, a
frail but young 75 year-old, wrapped in pale coral robes and
wearing light spectacles. Behind him a bronze Buddha caught
the rays of a trespassing sun, splintering them into a form of
aura; and had ‘Bis Holiness’ claimed divine inspiration* I
would have belived him. He is that type of peison, dedicated
as, much as I hate using the word ; a sort of saint in saint’s
clothing, and no inkling of anything so mundane as a mathe­
matical mind.
 ( 366 )

Astounding Wonders.
My host, Mr. Sitaram, with whom His Holiness Sri
Shankaracharya is staying, had briefly* prepared me for the
interview. I could pose any question I wished, I could take
photographs, I could read a short descriptive note he had
prepared on “ The Astounding Wonders of Ancient Indian
Vedic Mathematics” . His Holiness, it appears, had 'Spent years
in contemplation, and while going through the Vedas had
suddenly happened upon the key to what many historians,
devotees and translators had dismissed as meaningless jargon.
There, contained in certain Sutras, were the processes of mathe­
matics, psychology, ethics, and metaphysics.

l
“ During the reign of King Kamsa” read a Sutra, “rebellions,
ya
arson, famines and insanitary conditions prevailed” . Decoded,
this little piece of libellous history gave decimal answer to the
fraction 1/17 ; sixteen processes of simple mathematics reduced
ar
to one.
The discovery of one key led to another, ancj His Holiness
found himself turning more and more to the astotmding know­
m

ledge contained in words whose real meaning had been lost

to humanity for generations. This loss is obviously one of the
ra

greatest mankind has suffered; and, I suspect, resulted from

the secret being entrusted to people like myself, to whom a
square root is one of life’s perpetual mysteries. Had it survived,
every-edumted-“ soul” ; would, be ; a, mathematical-‘ ‘wizard” ;
and, maths-‘masters” would “ starve” . For my note reads
“ Little children merely look at the sums written on the black­
board and immediately shout out the answers......they.......
have merely to go on reeling off the digits, one after another
forwards or backwards, by mere mental arithmetic (without
needing pen, pencil, paper or slate).” This is the sort of thing
one usually refuses to believe. I did. Until I actually met His
Holiness.
On a child’s blackboard, attended with devotion by .my
host’s wife; His Holiness began demonstrating his peculiar
 ( 367 )

skill; multiplication, division, fractions, algebra, and intricate

excursions into higher mathematics for which I cannot find a
name, all were reduced to a disarming simplicity. Yes, I
even shouted out an answer. (‘Algebra for High Schools5,
Page 363, exercise 70, example ten). More, I was soon tossing
off answers to problems, which ; official-Maths-books ; “ described” ,
a s ; “ advanced” , difficult, and very difficult. Cross my heart!
His Holiness’s ambition is to restore this lost art to the
world, certainly to India. That India should today be credited
with having given the world, via Arabia, the present numerals
we use, especially the epochmaking “ zero” , is not enough.
India apparently once had the knowledge which we are today

l
rediscovering. Somewhere along the forgotten road of history,
ya
calamity, or deliberate destruction, lost to man the secrets he
had emassed. It might happen again.
In the meantime, people like His Holiness Jagad Guru
ar

Sri Shankaracharya of the Govardhan Peeth, Puri, are by a

devotion to true knowledge, endeavouring to restore to humanity
an interest in great wisdom by making that wisdom more easily
m

acceptable. Opposition there is, and will be. But eminent

mathematicians both here and abroad are taking more than a
ra

passing interest in this gentle ascetic’s discoveries. I for one,

as a representative of all the mathematically despairing, hope,
sincerely hope, that his gentle persuasion will prevail.